JP2020099486A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a slot machine in which an improvement is made for a game in shifting to an advantageous section.SOLUTION: A main control unit can execute control to achieve an advantageous section advantageous to a player, and updates a point value in the advantageous section. A sub-control unit notifies of the point value updated in the advantageous section, and starts to notify of the point value in a game in which shifting to the advantageous section is determined. In the game in which shifting to the advantageous section is determined, the main control unit sets an initial value as the point value according to the result of determination of an internal lottery, which has become a trigger for determining shifting to the advantageous section.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 33

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified.

As this type of slot machine, a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of notifying an operation mode advantageous to the player has been proposed (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-167627, A

In the configuration including the advantageous section like the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the game when shifting to the advantageous section.

An object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine improved in the game when shifting to the advantageous section.

The slot machine of claim 1,
Equipped with a variable display unit that can variably display multiple types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
In a slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Predetermination means for deciding whether or not to allow a winning,
Advantageous section control means for controlling an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player,
Specific information notifying means for notifying specific information updated in the advantageous section,
Equipped with
The specific information notification means starts notification of the specific information in a game in which it has been decided to shift to the advantageous section,
In the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone, initial information is set as the specific information according to the decision result of the pre-determining means, which is a trigger to decide to shift to the advantageous zone. It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the notification of the specific information updated during the advantageous section is started, so that the notification of the specific information is started, and thus the shift to the advantageous section is started. You can suggest that you have done it.
Further, it is possible to change the specific information when the notification is started according to the determination result of the pre-determination means that has triggered the determination to shift to the advantageous section.

Note that the present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the slot machine of the embodiment to which the present invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram showing a configuration of a slot machine. It is a figure for explaining a medal selector. It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM and RAM of a main control part. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area and a non-game area. It is a figure for explaining a game state. It is a figure which shows the data used as the initialization object with a setting change. It is a figure which shows the condition at the time of shifting to a normal state from a RAM initialization state. It is a figure showing a situation when a special winning combination is won in a RAM initialized state. It is a diagram showing a winning suggestion effect in a normal state. It is a figure showing a modification of a situation when a special winning combination is won in a RAM initialized state. It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 1, 3 betting game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 1, 3 betting game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 2, 3 betting game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 2, 3 betting game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 3, three-wager game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 3, three-wager game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 4, three-piece betting game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 4, three-piece betting game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 5, three-wager game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 5, three-wager game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 6, 3 betting game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting value 6, 3 betting game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting values 1 to 6 and a two-wager betting game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (setting values 1 to 6 and a two-wager betting game). It is a figure for explaining a technical matter related to an internal lottery target combination. It is a figure for explaining a technical matter related to an internal lottery target combination. It is a figure for explaining a technical matter related to an internal lottery target combination. It is a figure for explaining a technical matter related to an internal lottery target combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a game auxiliary display, the navigation notification, and the execution mode of navigation production. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in a normal area and an advantageous area. It is a figure showing a situation when an advantageous section transition combination is won in a normal section. It is a figure which shows the transition of a non-AT state and an AT state. It is the figure which shows the transition of production in AT state. It is the figure which shows the contents of the production which is executed in AT state. It is the figure which shows the execution status of the production which is executed in AT state. It is a figure which shows the setting value suggested in an ED production pattern. It is a figure which shows the lighting condition of an AT related display part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lighting condition of an AT related display part. It is a figure for explaining control concerning continuous production in an AT state. It is a figure for explaining control concerning continuous production in an AT state. It is a figure for explaining control concerning continuous production in an AT state. It is a flow figure showing the contents of control of initialization processing which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process which a main control part performs. It is a flow figure showing the contents of control of group information setting processing (general combination) which a main control part performs. It is a flow diagram showing the control content of the continuous data processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow diagram showing the control content of the continuous data processing performed by the main control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating a continuous data processing table. It is a flow figure showing the contents of control of the game start waiting processing which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error processing which a main control part performs. It is a flow diagram showing the control contents of the medal insertion signal processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow diagram showing the control content of the medal sensor process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow diagram showing the control contents of the medal sensor check process performed by the main control unit. 6 is a timing chart for explaining a state transition of a medal insertion signal for which it is determined that a medal normally passes in the medal insertion signal process and the medal sensor check process. It is a flow diagram showing the control contents of the payout control process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow figure showing the contents of control of operation information signal output processing which a main control part performs. It is a flow figure showing the contents of control of data processing for role ratio monitor which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of each state count process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the accessory ratio update process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the update status of an accumulation|accumulation buffer, the buffer for 6000 times calculation, and the buffer for total|accumulation total calculation. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the continuous accessory ratio update process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the instruction|incorporated accessory ratio update process which a main control part performs. It is a flow diagram showing the control contents of the AT state management processing performed by the main control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating a net increase counter. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process which a main control part performs. It is a flow figure showing the contents of control of the time monitoring update processing which a main control part performs. It is a flow diagram showing the control contents of the sensor monitoring process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow diagram showing the control contents of the sensor monitoring process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow figure showing the contents of control of the test signal output processing which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer update process which a main control part performs. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the control contents of display monitor output data selection processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the control contents of display monitor output data selection processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow diagram showing the control contents of the counter update process performed by the main control unit. It is a diagram for explaining the installation position of the gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a gaming machine information display. It is a figure for explaining a display test pattern of a gaming machine information display. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting|reporting aspect of alerting during the area display LED lighting. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of the notification during lighting of a section display LED.

Modes for carrying out a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on Examples.

[Form 1]
The slot machine of form 1-1,
Equipped with a variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
A bet number setting means (main control section 41) capable of setting any bet number from a plurality of types of bet numbers including the first bet number (3) or the second bet number (2) according to the player's selection.
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for deciding whether or not to allow winning
When the pre-determination means determines that the special prize (BB1, BB2) is allowed to be generated with the transition to the special game state, and the special prize (BB1, BB2) is not generated, the special prize. A carry-over means (main control unit 41) for carrying over the decision to allow the occurrence of (BB1, BB2) to the next game or later;
Equipped with
The first carry-over state (inside of BB2) in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the first special prize (BB2) to be determined is carried over on condition that the first bet number (3) is set. ), the value-added rate for gaming (medal payout rate) is not appropriate, and the second special prize (BB1) to be determined on condition that the second bet number (2) is set. In the second carry-over state (inside of BB1) in which the decision to allow the occurrence of is carried over (inside of BB1), the value-added rate for gaming (medal payout rate) becomes appropriate.
In addition, in the second carry-over state, the rate of imparting the gaming value becomes appropriate. In the second carry-over state, the non-carry-over state or the first carry-over state in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is not carried over. In the second carryover state, the privilege can be given in the second carryover state, whereas in the second carryover state, the privilege is not given in the non-carryover state or the first carryover state. It includes a configuration in which a privilege is given under a condition preferentially given to the non-carry-over state or the first carry-over state.

The slot machine of form 1-2 is the slot machine according to form 1-1,
A specific notification means (main control unit 41) for performing specific notification (state display),
A specific effect executing means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a specific effect,
Equipped with
When it is determined that the second special prize (BB1) is allowed to be generated in the non-carry-over state (non-inside) where the decision to allow the special prize (BB1, BB2) is not carried over. , The specific notification (state display) is performed, the specific effect is executed,
When it is determined that the occurrence of the first special winning (BB2) is allowed in the non-carry-over state (non-internal), the specific notification (state display) is not performed and the specific effect is not executed. It has a feature.
According to this feature, when it is decided to allow the occurrence of the second special prize in the non-carry-over state, the specific notification is given and the specific effect is executed to allow the occurrence of the second special prize. By suggesting that it is decided to do so, it is possible to encourage the transition to the second carryover state in which the rate of granting the gaming value becomes appropriate, while the first special prize in the non-carryover state. When it is determined that the occurrence of the first special prize is permitted, since the specific notification is not performed and the specific effect is not executed, it is determined that the second special winning is permitted. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the occurrence of a special prize is permitted.

The slot machine of form 1-3 is the slot machine according to form 1-2,
The specific effect can be executed even when the determination result of the pre-determining means (internal lottery) is the specific result (miss) in the second carryover state (inside the BB1) (by the white navigation image). It is a feature.
According to this feature, not only does the specific effect indicate that the occurrence of the second special prize has been determined in the non-carry-over state, but the determination result of the pre-determination means is specified in the second carry-over state. Since it is also used as an effect that suggests that the result has been obtained, waste of the effect can be omitted.

A slot machine of form 1-4 is the slot machine according to form 1-2 or 1-3,
Start operation means (start switch 7) operated by the player to start the game;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result,
Equipped with
The specific effect executing unit (sub-control unit 91), when it is determined that the second special winning (BB1) is allowed to occur in the non-carry-over state (non-internal), the start operation unit (start) When the switch 7) is operated, the specific effect is started, and when the second special prize (BB1) is not generated, the derivation operation means for deriving the display result is finally operated (final stop operation). When the second special winning (BB1) is generated while continuing the specific effect, the derivation operation means for deriving the display result is finally operated (final stop operation) at the timing. It is characterized by ending the specific performance.
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not the second carry-over state has been reached, depending on whether or not the specific effect continues even after the derivation operation means for deriving the display result is finally operated.
The timing based on the operation of the derivation operation means for deriving the display result at the end means the timing at which the derivation operation means for deriving the display result at the end is operated, and the timing of the derivation operation means for deriving the display result at the end. The timing includes the timing at which the display result is derived on the corresponding variable display unit that is operated, and the timing at which the derivation operation unit that finally derives the display result is operated and the operation is released.

The slot machine of form 1-5 is the slot machine according to form 1-1,
Directing means (liquid crystal display 51),
Production control means (sub-control unit 91) for controlling the production means (liquid crystal display 51),
Equipped with
The effect control means (sub-control unit 91), the first special game state (BB2) that shifts due to the occurrence of the first special prize (BB2) and the second special that shifts due to the occurrence of the second special prize (BB1). In the gaming state (BB1), the mode of the effect means (the liquid crystal display 51) is in the non-carried-over state (non-inside) in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the special winning (BB1, BB2) is not carried over. It is characterized in that control is performed so as to be in a specific mode (special effect) different from (normal effect).
According to this feature, in the first special game state and the second special game state, the mode of the effect means is a specific mode different from the mode in the non-carry-over state, which is a premise for shifting to the second carry-over state. By suggesting that the state is not the carry-over state, it is possible to promote the shift to the non-carry-over state, and further to the second carry-over state in which the rate of providing the gaming value becomes appropriate.

The slot machine of form 1-6 is the slot machine according to form 1-5,
The effect control unit (sub-control unit 91) controls the mode of the effect unit (the liquid crystal display 51) to be the specific mode (special effect) even in the first carryover state (inside the BB2). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even in the first carryover state, the mode of the effect means is a specific mode different from the mode in the non-carry-over state, and it is suggested that it is not the non-carry-over state that is a premise for shifting to the second carry-over state. By doing so, it is possible to promote the transition to the non-carry-over state, and further the shift to the second carry-over state in which the rate of providing the gaming value becomes appropriate.

The slot machine of form 1-7 is the slot machine according to form 1-5,
The effect control means (sub-control unit 91) generates the first special prize (BB2) when the first special prize (BB2) occurs and shifts to the first special game state (BB2). At the timing based on the operation (final stop operation) of the derivation operation means for finally deriving the display result in the game, the mode of the effect means (the liquid crystal display 51) is controlled to be the specific mode (special effect). It is characterized by
According to this feature, the aspect of the production means becomes the specific aspect at the timing based on the operation of the derivation operation means that triggers the occurrence of the first special prize, so that the first special prize occurs and the first special prize occurs. It is possible to clearly recognize that the game state has been entered.

The slot machine of form 1-8 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-5 to 1-7,
When the second special prize (BB1) is generated and the second special game state (BB1) is entered, the effect control means (sub-control unit 91) generates the second special prize (BB1). At the timing based on the operation (final stop operation) of the derivation operation means for finally deriving the display result in the game, the mode of the effect means (the liquid crystal display 51) is controlled to be the specific mode (special effect). It is characterized by
According to this feature, the aspect of the rendering means becomes the specific aspect at the timing based on the operation of the derivation operation means that triggers the occurrence of the second special prize, so that the second special prize occurs and the second special prize occurs. It is possible to clearly recognize that the game state has been entered.
In the modes 1-7 and 1-8, the timing based on the final operation of the derivation operation means for deriving the display result is the timing of the final operation of the derivation operation means for deriving the display result. The timing includes the timing at which the derivation operation means for deriving the display result is operated and the display result is derived at the corresponding variable display portion, and the timing at which the derivation operation means for finally deriving the display result is operated and the operation is released.

The slot machine of form 1-9 is the slot machine according to form 1-1,
A setting value setting means (main control unit 41) for selecting and setting one of the setting values from a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The first carryover state (inside of BB2), the first special game state (BB2) that shifts due to the occurrence of the first special prize (BB2), and the second special that shifts due to the occurrence of the second special prize (BB1). In the gaming state (BB1), when the setting value is set by the setting value setting means (main control unit 41), the decision to allow the occurrence of the special winning (BB1, BB2) is not carried over. (Non-inside),
When the set value is set by the set value setting means (main control unit 41) in the second carryover state (inside of BB1), the second carryover state (inside of BB1) is maintained. There is.
According to this feature, even if the first carry-over state, the first special game state, or the second special game state, it is possible to shift to the second carry-over state by resetting the setting value. Since it is possible to shift to the non-carry-over state, which is the premise of the above, it becomes easy to shift to the second carry-over state in which the rate of providing the game value is appropriate. Further, in the second carryover state, the second carryover state is maintained even if the set value is set. Therefore, after shifting to the second carryover state, even if the set value is set, the state is again shifted to the second carryover state. You don't have to do the work for

[Form 2]
The slot machine of form 2-1 is
Equipped with a variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means (main control section 41) for controlling an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player,
A specific information notifying unit (sub-control unit 91) for notifying specific information (point value) updated in the advantageous section,
Equipped with
The specific information notification means (sub-control unit 91) is characterized by starting notification of the specific information (point value) in a game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.
According to this feature, in the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the notification of the specific information updated during the advantageous section is started, so that the notification of the specific information is started to shift to the advantageous section. Can be suggested.

A slot machine of form 2-2 is the slot machine according to form 2-1.
Equipped with pre-determination means (internal lottery) for deciding whether or not to allow winning
Initial information (initial value) according to the determination result of the pre-determination means (internal lottery) that triggered the decision to shift to the advantageous zone in the game in which it was decided to shift to the advantageous zone Is set as the specific information (point value).
According to this feature, it is possible to change the specific information when the notification is started according to the determination result of the pre-determination unit that has triggered the determination to shift to the advantageous section.

The slot machine of form 2-3 is the slot machine according to form 2-1 or 2-2,
Start operation means (start switch 7) operated by the player to start the game;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result,
Equipped with
The specific information notifying unit (sub-control unit 91) displays the specific information (point value) at the timing when the start operating unit (start switch 7) is operated in the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section. It is characterized in that the notification of the specific information (point value) is started at a timing based on the operation (final stop operation) of the derivation operation means for finally deriving the display result without starting the notification.
According to this feature, it is possible to expect the transition to the advantageous section until the derivation operation means for deriving the display result is finally operated.
The timing based on the operation of the derivation operation means for deriving the display result at the end means the timing at which the derivation operation means for deriving the display result at the end is operated, and the timing of the derivation operation means for deriving the display result at the end. The timing includes the timing at which the display result is derived on the corresponding variable display unit that is operated, and the timing at which the derivation operation unit that finally derives the display result is operated and the operation is released.

[Form 3]
The slot machine of form 3-1 is
Equipped with a variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means (main control section 41) for controlling an advantageous section that can be controlled to an advantageous state (AT state) advantageous to the player,
After being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state) in the advantageous section, the specific advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to the specific advantageous state (ED state) when the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied. When,
Equipped with
The specific condition (ED transition condition) is
The advantageous post-increase amount (net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state) which is the increase amount of the gaming value (medals) after being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state) is a specific amount (third specified number). ), the first specific condition (first ED transition condition) that is satisfied, and
Predicted increase, which is the expected increase in gaming value (medals) when the post-advantage increase amount (net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state) is equal to or less than the specific amount (third specified number) A second specific condition (second ED transition condition) that can be established based on the amount (predicted net increase in number based on the number of navigation stocks),
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, not only the post-advantage increase amount exceeds the specific amount, but even if the post-advantage increase amount is less than or equal to the specific amount, the condition based on the predicted increase amount is Since it may be controlled to a specific advantageous state when it is materialized, it can be expected to be controlled to a specific advantageous state even if the post-advantage increase amount is a specific amount or less.

The slot machine of form 3-2 is the slot machine according to form 3-1.
A transition effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a transition effect (ED start effect) that suggests a transition to the specific advantageous state (ED state),
The transition effect executing means (sub-control unit 91), even when the first specific condition (first ED transition condition) is satisfied and is controlled to the specific advantageous state (ED state), the second specific condition ( Even when the second ED transition condition) is satisfied and the specific advantageous state (ED state) is controlled, a common transition effect (ED start effect) is executed.
According to this feature, the common transition effect is executed both when the first specific condition is satisfied and the specific advantageous state is controlled, and when the second specific condition is satisfied and the specific advantageous state is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the specific advantageous state is controlled.

The slot machine of form 3-3 is the slot machine according to form 3-1 or 3-2,
A transition effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a transition effect (ED start effect) that suggests a transition to the specific advantageous state (ED state),
The second specific condition (second ED transition condition) is a condition based on the post-advantage increase amount (net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state) and the predicted increase amount (predicted net additional number based on the number of navigation stocks). Is a condition that can be satisfied by satisfying both conditions based on
The transition effect executing means (sub-control unit 91) satisfies the condition based on the advantageous post-increase amount (net extra number of medals after being controlled to the AT state), and then the predicted increase amount (based on the number of navigation stocks). Even when the second specific condition (second ED transition condition) is satisfied and the specific advantageous state (ED state) is controlled by satisfying the condition based on the predicted net increase number), the predicted increase amount (navistock number) The second specific condition (second ED transition condition) by satisfying the condition based on the advantageous post-increase amount (net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state) after satisfying the condition based on the predicted net additional number based on ) Is established and is controlled to the specific advantageous state (ED state), a common transition effect (ED start effect) is executed.
According to this feature, even after the condition based on the predicted increase amount is satisfied after satisfying the condition based on the post-advantage increase amount, the predicted increase amount is controlled even when the second specific condition is satisfied and the specific advantageous state is controlled. Even after the second specific condition is satisfied and the specific advantageous state is controlled by satisfying the condition based on the post-advantageous increase amount after satisfying the condition based on, the common transition effect is executed. It is possible to easily recognize that the state is controlled.

The slot machine of form 3-4 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-3,
The second specific condition (second ED transition condition) is a sum of the post-advantage increase amount (net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state) and the predicted increase amount (predicted net additional number based on the number of navigation stocks). It is characterized in that the condition can be established when the amount exceeds the specific amount (third specified number).
According to this feature, in a situation where the post-advantage increase amount is less than or equal to the specific amount, the sum of the post-advantage increase amount and the predicted increase amount exceeds the specific amount, so that the post-advantage increase is controlled. It is possible to recognize that the post-advantage increase amount exceeds the specific amount by being controlled to the specific advantageous state in a situation where the amount is equal to or less than the specific amount.

The slot machine of form 3-5 is the slot machine according to form 3-4,
The advantageous interval is ended when the post-advantage increase amount (net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state) exceeds a specified amount (second specified number) larger than the specified amount (third specified number). An advantageous zone ending means (main control unit 41) is provided,
The second specific condition (second ED transition condition) is a sum of the post-advantage increase amount (net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state) and the predicted increase amount (predicted net additional number based on the number of navigation stocks). It is characterized in that the condition can be established when the amount exceeds the specified amount (second specified number).
According to this feature, when the post-advantage increase amount is equal to or less than the specific amount, the total amount of the post-advantage increase amount and the predicted increase amount exceeds the specified amount, and the specific advantageous state is controlled. By controlling to a specific advantageous state in a situation where the amount is equal to or less than the specific amount, it is possible to recognize that the post-advantage increase amount exceeds a specified amount that is a condition for ending the advantageous section.

The slot machine of form 3-6 is the slot machine according to form 3-4 or 3-5,
The second specific condition (second ED transition condition) is a sum of the post-advantage increase amount (net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state) and the predicted increase amount (predicted net additional number based on the number of navigation stocks). The amount exceeds the specific amount (third stipulated number) and the post-advantage increase amount (net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state) is smaller than the specific amount (third stipulated number) by a predetermined amount ( It is characterized in that it is a condition that can be satisfied by exceeding the fourth prescribed number).
According to this feature, even if the total amount of the post-advantage increase amount and the predicted increase amount exceeds the specific amount, it is controlled to the specific advantageous state until the post-advantage increase amount exceeds the predetermined amount less than the specific amount. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific advantageous state from being controlled at an early stage after being controlled to the advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 3-7 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-6,
After the first specific condition (first ED transition condition) is satisfied and is controlled to the specific advantageous state (ED state), it is determined whether or not the second specific condition (second ED transition condition) is satisfied. First, it is determined whether or not the first specific condition (first ED shift condition) is satisfied after the second specific condition (second ED shift condition) is satisfied and the specific advantageous state (ED state) is controlled. It is characterized by not performing.
According to this feature, after one of the first specific condition and the second specific condition is satisfied and the specific advantageous state is controlled, it is determined whether the other of the first specific condition and the second specific condition is satisfied. Since it is not performed, the control after being controlled to the specific advantageous state can be simplified.

The slot machine of form 3-8 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-7,
After being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state), it is controlled to a plurality of states (AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state), and any state until it is controlled to the specific advantageous state (ED state). It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied for each game even in the case of being controlled to.
According to this feature, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied for each game, regardless of which state is controlled, after being controlled to the advantageous state and until being controlled to the specific advantageous state. Since it is performed, the control for shifting to the specific advantageous state can be simplified.

The slot machine of form 3-9 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-8,
A display unit (a liquid crystal display 51) capable of displaying an image,
Transition effect execution means (sub control unit 91) for executing a transition effect (ED start effect) that suggests a transition to the specific advantageous state (ED state),
Equipped with
The transition effect executing means (sub-control unit 91) is characterized by executing the transition effect (ED start effect) using the entire display area of the display means (liquid crystal display 51).
According to this feature, since the transition to the specific game state is suggested using the entire display area of the display means, it is possible to clearly recognize that the specific condition is satisfied and the specific game state is controlled.

The slot machine of form 3-10 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-9,
A transition effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a transition effect (ED start effect) that suggests a transition to the specific advantageous state (ED state),
The transition effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) executes the transition effect (ED start effect) when the game after the game following the game in which the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied is started. There is.
According to this feature, since the transition effect is executed at the start of the game, it is possible to focus on the effect at the start of the game, and the effect after the start of the game is not affected, so the number of patterns of the transition effect is suppressed. be able to.

The slot machine of form 3-11 is the slot machine according to form 3-10,
In the game in which the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied, the effect that suggests the establishment of the specific condition (ED transition condition) is not executed, but the effect corresponding to the game (the result of the internal lottery of the game, It is characterized by executing a performance according to the result of the game.
According to this feature, even if the game satisfies the specific condition, not the effect suggesting the satisfaction of the specific condition, but the effect corresponding to the game is executed. Can be increased.

The slot machine of form 3-12 is the slot machine according to form 3-10 or 3-11,
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for deciding whether or not to allow winning
A decision result suggesting effect executing means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a decision result suggesting effect (navi effect, specific combination winning suggesting effect (A)) that suggests the decision result of the pre-determining means (internal lottery),
Equipped with
The transition effect execution means (sub-control unit 91), in the game that executes the transition effect (ED start effect), the transition effect (ED start effect) is the determination result suggestive effect (navi effect, specific winning effect suggestion effect ( The feature is that it is executed prior to A)).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the unexpectedness caused by the transition effect from fading due to the decision result suggestion effect.

[Form 4]
The slot machine of form 4-1 is
Equipped with a variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means (main control section 41) for controlling an advantageous section that can be controlled to an advantageous state (AT state) advantageous to the player,
After being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state) in the advantageous section, the specific advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to the specific advantageous state (ED state) when the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied. When,
Equipped with
After being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state), it is possible to control to a plurality of types of states (states other than the ED state) until the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied,
After being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state), after the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied, only the specific advantageous state (ED state) is controlled.
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of states until the specific condition is satisfied, so that the game property can be changed before the specific condition is satisfied. On the other hand, after the specific condition is satisfied, only the specific advantageous state is controlled, so that stable game play can be achieved after the specific condition is satisfied.

The slot machine of form 4-2 is the slot machine according to form 4-1.
The plurality of types of states (states other than the ED state) are a notification state (first state in which navigation notification is performed) in which an operation mode for generating a prize to be awarded with a game value (medal) is given. And a non-notification state in which an operation mode for generating the award winning is not notified (a second state in which navigation notification is not performed).
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, the notification state in which the operation mode for generating the award winning is notified and the operation mode for generating the award winning are informed until the specific condition is satisfied. By being able to control to a plurality of types of states including a non-notification state that is not performed, it is possible to change the amount of gaming value to be given before the specific condition is established.

The slot machine of form 4-3 is the slot machine according to form 4-1 or 4-2,
In the plurality of types of states (states other than the ED state), a first notification state in which an operation mode for generating a prize to be awarded accompanied by a game value (medal) is notified at a first rate (100%) ( (AT1 state) and a second notification state (AT2 state) in which the operation mode for generating the award winning is notified at a second rate (50%) different from the first rate. There is.
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, until the specific condition is satisfied, the first notification state in which the operation mode for generating the prize-winning is notified at the first ratio, and the prize-winning is generated. The operation mode for the second notification state notified at a second ratio different from the first ratio can be controlled to a plurality of kinds of states including, so that the game to be given before the specific condition is satisfied. The amount of utility value can be varied.

The slot machine of form 4-4 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-3,
After being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state), it is possible to execute extension control (navistock lottery) for extending the period controlled to the advantageous state (AT state),
The plural types of states (states other than the ED state) include an extendable state (first state) in which the extension control (navistock lottery) can be executed and an unextendable state in which the extension control (navistock lottery) cannot be executed. And a state (second state).
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, until the specific condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of states including an extendable state in which extension control can be performed and an inextendable state in which extension control cannot be performed The controllable state allows the period during which the advantageous condition is controlled to change before the specific condition is satisfied.

The slot machine of form 4-5 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-4,
After being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state), it is possible to execute extension control (navistock lottery) for extending the period controlled to the advantageous state (AT state),
The plural types of states (states other than the ED state) include a first extension possible state (AT1 state and AT2 state) in which the extension control (navistock lottery) can be executed at a first rate (low probability), and the extension. A second extendable state (addition state) in which control (navistock lottery) can be executed at a second rate (high probability) different from the first rate (low probability) is included.
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, until the specific condition is satisfied, the first extension possible state in which the extension control can be executed at the first ratio and the second extension control state in which the extension control is different from the first ratio can be performed. By enabling control to a plurality of types of states including the second extendable state that can be executed at a ratio, it is possible to change the period during which the advantageous state is controlled before the specific condition is satisfied.

The slot machine of form 4-6 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-5,
After being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state), the specific advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) is controlled to any state of the plurality of types of states (states other than the ED state) When the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied, the specific advantageous state (ED state) is controlled.
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the specific advantageous state by satisfying the specific condition regardless of which state of the plurality of types is controlled. The process related to the migration can be simplified.

The slot machine of form 4-7 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-6,
The average increase amount of the gaming value (medal) per game in the specific advantageous state (ED state) is the gaming value (medal) per game of the plurality of types (states other than the ED state). It is characterized by being smaller than the average increase amount of the gaming value (medal) per game in the state where the average increase amount is the largest (AT1 state).
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, after the specific condition is satisfied and the specific advantageous state is controlled, the average increase amount of the gaming value per game is largest among the states up to that point. Since it is less than the average increase amount of the game value per game in the state, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased even if the specific condition is satisfied.

The slot machine of form 4-8 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-7,
In the plural types of states (states other than the ED state) and the state (AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state) in which the gaming value (medal) increases, the specific advantageous state (minimum expected increase amount) The feature is that the expected increase is larger in the ED state).
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the interest of being controlled to the specific advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 4-9 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-8,
The average increase amount of the gaming value (medal) per game in the specific advantageous state (ED state) is for the game per game in any one of the plurality of types of states (states other than the ED state). It is characterized by being the same as the average increase in value (medals).
According to this feature, control of the specific advantageous state and control of any state up to that point can be made common.

The slot machine of form 4-10 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-8,
The average increase amount of the gaming value (medal) per game in the specific advantageous state (ED state) is the gaming value per game in any one of the plural types of states (states other than the ED state). It is also different from the average increase of (medals).
According to this feature, the amount of increase in the gaming value in the specific advantageous state can be made appropriate.

The slot machine of form 4-11 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-10,
A transition effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a transition effect (ED start effect) that suggests a transition to the specific advantageous state (ED state),
After being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state), the transition effect executing means (sub-control unit 91) is in a specific condition (ED transition condition) in any of the plurality of types of states (states other than the ED state). When the above condition is established and the specific advantageous state (ED state) is controlled, a common transition effect (ED start effect) is executed.
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, the common transition effect is executed regardless of the state when the specific condition is satisfied. It can be easily recognized.

The slot machine of form 4-12 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-12,
A result notification effect executing means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a result notification effect for notifying the result of the advantageous state (AT state) at the end of the specific advantageous state (ED state),
After being controlled to the advantageous state (AT state), the result notification effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) is in any one of the plurality of types of states (states other than the ED state), and the specific condition (ED transition condition). ) Is established and is controlled to the specific advantageous state (ED state), the common result notification effect is executed.
According to this feature, since the common result notification effect is executed at the end of the specific advantageous state, whichever state is the state when the specific condition is satisfied after being controlled to the advantageous state, It is possible to easily recognize that the state has ended.

The slot machine of form 4-13 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-12,
Predetermination means (internal lottery) for deciding whether or not to allow winning
A decision result suggesting effect executing means for executing a decision result suggesting effect (navi effect, a specific winning combination suggesting effect (A), (B)) that suggests the decision result of the pre-determining means (internal lottery), and the sub control unit 91. ),
In the specific advantageous state (ED state), a specific advantageous effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a specific advantageous effect (ED state effect) specific to the specific advantageous state (ED state),
Equipped with
In the specific advantageous state (ED state), the determination result suggestive effects (navi effect, specific winning combination suggestive effects (A) and (B)) are executed rather than the plurality of types of states (states other than the ED state). It is characterized by a low ratio.
According to this feature, in the specific advantageous state, the determination result suggestive effect is executed at a lower rate than in the plurality of types of states, so that the specific advantageous effect can be focused on.

The slot machine of form 4-14 is the slot machine according to form 4-13,
A display means (liquid crystal display 51) capable of displaying an image is provided,
The specific advantageous effect (ED state effect) is executed using the display means (liquid crystal display 51), and
In the specific advantageous state (ED state), the specific determination result for switching the display of the display means (the liquid crystal display 51) among the determination result suggestive effects (navi effect, specific winning combination suggestive effects (A) and (B)) Execution of suggestive production (specific winning candidate suggestive production (B)) is restricted

The slot machine of form 4-15 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-14,
Setting value setting means (main control section 41) for selecting and setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
In the specific advantageous state (ED state), a setting suggestion effect executing means (sub control unit 91) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (a pattern of the ED effect) that suggests a currently set setting value,
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the interest of being controlled to the specific advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 4-16 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-15,
Equipped with multiple types of light emitting parts (AT related display parts),
In a state other than the specific advantageous state (ED state), all of the plurality of types of light emitting units (AT related display units) are not set to the specific light emitting mode (lighting mode) at the same time, and in the specific advantageous state (ED state) All of the plurality of types of light emitting units (AT related display units) are set to a specific light emitting mode (lighting mode).
According to this feature, in a state other than the specific advantageous state, all of the plurality of types of light emitting units do not become the specific light emitting mode at the same time, and in the specific advantageous state, all of the plurality of types of light emitting units become the specific light emitting mode. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that the specific advantageous state is controlled.

The slot machine of form 4-17 is the slot machine according to form 4-16,
The plurality of types of light emitting units (AT-related display units) is a first light emitting unit (AT1 state display unit) corresponding to a first state (AT1 state) of the plurality of types of states (AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state). 63) and a second light emitting unit (AT2 state display unit 62) corresponding to a second state (AT2 state) of the plurality of types of states (AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state),
In the first state (AT1 state), the first light emitting unit (AT1 state display unit 63) is set to the specific light emission mode (lighting mode), and the second light emitting unit (AT2 state display unit 62) is set to the specific light emission mode ( Lighting mode),
In the second state (AT2 state), the first light emitting unit (AT1 state display unit 63) is not set to the specific light emitting mode (lighting mode), and the second light emitting unit (AT2 state displaying unit 62) is set to the specific light emitting mode. (Lighting mode).
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, the first light emitting unit can be used as the light emitting unit that notifies the first state until the transition to the specific advantageous state, and the second light emitting unit can be used as the second state. Can be used as a light emitting unit for notifying that the specific advantageous state is reached, and the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit can be used as light emitting units for notifying the specific advantageous state after the transition to the specific advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 4-18 is the slot machine according to form 4-17,
When the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied in the first state (AT1 state) and the specific advantageous state (ED state) is entered, the first light emitting unit (AT1 state display unit 63) is set to While maintaining the specific light emission mode (lighting mode), the second light emitting unit (AT2 state display unit 62) is set to the specific light emission mode (lighting mode),
When the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied in the second state (AT2 state) and the specific advantageous state (ED state) is entered, the second light emitting unit (AT2 state display unit 62) is set to the above-mentioned state. The specific light emission mode (lighting mode) is maintained, and the first light emitting unit (AT1 state display unit 63) is set to the specific light emission mode (lighting mode).
According to this feature, when controlling to the specific advantageous state, only the light emitting unit that is not the specific light emission mode needs to be in the specific light emission mode, so that the control becomes easy.

The slot machine of form 4-19 is the slot machine according to form 4-17,
When the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied in the first state (AT1 state) and the specific advantageous state (ED state) is entered, the first light emitting unit (AT1 state display unit 63) is set to After the light emission mode (extinction mode) other than the specific light emission mode (lighting mode), the first light emission unit (AT1 state display unit 63) and the second light emission unit (AT2 state display unit 62) are set to the specific light emission mode ( Lighting mode),
When the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied in the second state (AT2 state) and the specific advantageous state (ED state) is entered, the second light emitting unit (AT2 state display unit 62) is set to the above-mentioned state. After the light emission mode (extinction mode) other than the specific light emission mode (lighting mode), the first light emission unit (AT1 state display unit 63) and the second light emission unit (AT2 state display unit 62) are set to the specific light emission mode ( Lighting mode).
According to this feature, in the case of controlling to the specific advantageous state, the light emitting unit that has been in the specific light emitting mode according to the state is once set to the light emitting mode other than the specific light emitting mode, and then the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. Since it is a specific light emission mode, it is easy to understand that the specific advantageous state has been entered.

The slot machine of form 4-20 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-17 to 4-19,
The plurality of types of light emitting units (AT related display units) have a special light emitting unit (AT display unit) that is in a specific light emitting mode (lighting mode) in both the first state (AT1 state) and the second state (AT2 state). 61) is included.
According to this feature, in the specific advantageous state, the specific light emission mode including the special light emission part that is the specific light emission mode regardless of whether it is the first state or the second state is controlled, so that the specific advantageous state is controlled. It becomes easy to understand what was done.

The slot machine of form 4-21 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-16 to 4-20,
One of the plurality of types of light emitting units (AT related display units), that is, the light emitting unit (AT display unit 61, AT2 state display unit 62, AT1 state display unit 63) is the variable display unit (reel 2L, 2C, 2R). Another light emitting unit (CZ display unit 64, additional state display unit 65) arranged on the left side of the different from the one light emitting unit (AT display unit 61, AT2 state display unit 62, AT1 state display unit 63), It is arranged on the right side of the variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R).
According to this feature, since a plurality of types of light emitting units are arranged on the left and right sides of the variable display unit that are easily noticed during the game, it is easy to understand that the control has been performed in the specific advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 4-22 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-21,
A continuous effect executing means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a continuous effect over a plurality of games (games) is provided,
During execution of the continuous effect, control according to the specific advantageous state (ED state) is limited.
According to this feature, the control related to the specific advantageous state is limited during the execution of the continuous effect over a plurality of games, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous effect from being spoiled by the control related to the specific advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 4-23 is the slot machine according to form 4-22,
When the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied during the execution of the continuous effect, the specific advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) sets the specific advantageous state (ED state) after the end of the continuous effect. It is characterized by starting control.
According to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous effect, the control of the specific advantageous state starts after the end of the continuous effect, so that the interest of the continuous effect is obtained by starting the specific advantageous state. It can be prevented from being damaged.

The slot machine of form 4-24 is the slot machine according to form 4-23,
In a state where execution of the continuous effect is permitted (effect execution state), it is characterized in that it is not determined whether or not the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied.
According to this feature, it is not necessary to make an unnecessary determination during the period when the start of the specific advantageous state is limited.

The slot machine of form 4-25 is the slot machine according to form 4-22,
A transition effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a transition effect (ED start effect) that suggests a transition to the specific advantageous state (ED state),
When the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied during execution of the continuous effect and is controlled to the specific advantageous state (ED state), the previous transition effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) concerned the continuous effect. The above-mentioned transition effect (ED start effect) is executed after the end of.
According to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous effect and the specific advantageous state is controlled, the transition effect is performed after the end of the continuous effect, so that the specific advantageous state is started. It is possible to prevent the continuous production from being interrupted and spoiling the interest of the continuous production.

The slot machine of form 4-26 is the slot machine according to form 4-25,
The continuous effect execution means (sub-control unit 91), when the specific condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied during execution of the continuous effect and is controlled to the specific advantageous state (ED state), the continuous effect. It is characterized by changing the contents of.
According to this feature, the transition to the specific advantageous state can be suggested even by the continuous effect being executed.

The slot machine of form 4-27 is the slot machine according to form 4-22,
The continuous effect execution means (sub-control unit 91), when the continuous effect is executed, when the specific condition (ED transition condition) can be satisfied during execution of the continuous effect (in the case of continuous effect regulation period). Is characterized in that the continuous effect is not executed.
According to this feature, since the continuous production is not executed when the specific condition can be satisfied during the execution of the continuous production, the interest of the continuous production is deteriorated by starting the specific advantageous state. Can be prevented.

An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having a front opening, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. There is. Inside the slot machine 1, there are horizontally arranged reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which a plurality of kinds of distinguishable symbols are arranged in the same order in a predetermined order. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged side by side in a see-through window 3 provided in the approximate center of the front of the slot machine 1. Each is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three tiers so that it can be seen from the player side. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, each reel has a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols (“red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “watermelon”, “cherry a”). , “Cherry b”, “bell”, “replay”, “plum”) are arranged in a predetermined order.

Although the present embodiment exemplifies the configuration using three reels, the configuration using only one reel, the configuration using two reels, and the configuration using four or more reels may be used. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display portion for variably displaying the symbols by the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is configured, but the variable display portion may be other than the reels, for example, a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbols can be variably displayed by moving the belt on which is arranged. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section is configured by the physical reel, but the variable display section may be configured by the image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the front of the slot machine 1, a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and a credit (the number of medals stored as a gaming value owned by a player ), the maximum number of bets among the number of bets defined in accordance with the game state (in the present embodiment, 2 or 3 for RT0, RT1, RT2 described later, 3 for BB1 and BB2 described later) ( In the present embodiment, the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting 3), and the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bet number are settled (the amount used for setting the credit and the bet number). Settlement switch 10 operated when returning the medal), start switch 7 operated when starting the game, and stop switches 8L and 8C operated when stopping the rotation of reels 2L, 2C, 2R respectively. , 8R are provided so as to be operated by the player.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the front of the slot machine 1, a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the content thereof when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 that displays an error code and operation information (navigation display) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, 1BETLED 14 that notifies by lighting that the bet number is set to 1, A 2BET LED 15 that lights up to notify that the number of bets is set to 2, a 3BETLED 16 that notifies that the number of bets is set to 3 by lighting, and a specific number of bets (two in this embodiment) are set. The state display LED 17 and the start switch 7 for notifying by lighting that the special combination (BB1 in this embodiment) that can be won in the game is carried over to the internal state (RT1 in this embodiment) is carried over. A start valid LED 18 for notifying by lighting that the start operation of the game by operation is effective, a section display LED 19 for notifying by lighting that the section condition is controlled to an advantageous section, and a notification by lighting that the replay game is in progress The game display unit 13 provided with the replaying LED 20 is provided.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the bet number by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is provided, the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, left, middle, and right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 3), which notify by lighting that the operation of stopping the reels by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are effective, respectively. It is provided.

In addition, on the front of the slot machine 1, a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying an image and the like, an AT display section 61 for notifying the later-described AT (assist time) state by a lighting mode, and an AT state An AT2 state display unit 62 that informs that the AT2 state will be described later by a lighting mode, an AT1 state display unit 63 that informs that the AT1 state that will be described later by the lighting mode will be described. The CZ (chance zone) state is provided with a CZ display section 64 for notifying by a lighting mode, and the addition state display section 65 for notifying by a lighting mode that the vehicle is in an additional state, which will be described later, of the AT state is provided. The AT display section 61, the AT2 status display section 62, the AT1 status display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the additional status display section 65 are provided with built-in AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e (see FIG. 3). There is. In the following, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the CZ state, the additional state, and the ED state described later may be collectively referred to as an AT-related state.

Inside the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by a predetermined key operation, a setting value being changed or a setting value being confirmed. The set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, the door open detection switch 25 for detecting the open state of the front door 1b, and the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 are set inside the slot machine 1. The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the hopper tank side or the medal payout outlet 9 side described later provided in the above, and the medals that have been flown into the hopper tank side from the medal insertion section 4 are detected. A medal selector 29 having the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is provided.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, a reel unit 34 for rotating and stopping the reels 2L, 2C, 2R described above in accordance with a control signal from the main control unit 41, and control from the main control unit 41. A hopper unit 35 for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9 in response to a signal is provided.

In addition, inside the slot machine 1, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state under normal conditions, will be described later in the setting change state. A reset/setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the internal lottery, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned on/off are provided.

Inside the slot machine 1, in the state where the game control board 40 is attached at a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a 7-segment display is provided in the lower part on the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. The gaming machine information display 50 is arranged (see FIG. 77). The gaming machine information display 50 allows the display contents to be visually recognized from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a, and the game contents are aggregated by the main control section 41. The clerk or the like can recognize the game information displayed on the machine information display 50 based on the history of the game in the slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The game control board 40 controls a game (game), and the effect control board 90 causes a game state. The effect is controlled according to.

On the game control board 40, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the reel sensor of the reel unit 34 (not shown). A payout sensor and a full sensor (not shown) of the hopper unit 35, a setting key switch 37, and a reset/setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals of these connected switches are input. ..

Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3BET LEDs 14-16, status display LED 17, start valid LED 18, section display LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch valid LED 21, left. , Middle, right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel unit 34, and the hopper unit 35 are connected, and these electric components and the game control board 40 are mounted. The gaming machine information display 50 is driven under the control of the main control unit 41 mounted on the gaming control board 40.

The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I/O port 41d, and is equipped with a main control unit 41 for controlling a game.

The main control unit 41 includes a plurality of registers used by the main CPU 41a for performing calculations. The registers include accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, and the like. Further, among these registers, the accumulator register, the flag register, and the general-purpose register include a front register and a back register which are configured to be paired with each other (hereinafter, the front register and the back register may be simply referred to as a register. is there). The main CPU 41a updates the value of a predetermined register by executing various instructions such as a calculation instruction and a read instruction included in the program, and stores the RAM 41c specified by the value (address) of the predetermined register. It is possible to update the value (data) stored in the area.

The flag register among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is configured so that its state changes so as to indicate the operation result by the instruction executed by the main CPU 41a, and the change in the state of the flag register is used. Then, the main CPU 41a can be caused to perform the processing according to the calculation result of the previous instruction.

Further, the flag register is composed of a plurality of bits (8 bits in the present embodiment), and the plurality of bits are operated by an arithmetic instruction executed by the main CPU 41a in order to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 41a. Although the state changes according to the result, the first bit (hereinafter referred to as the first zero flag) configured so that the state does not change with a specific instruction (for example, a read instruction LD (hereinafter, may be referred to as an LD instruction)). Or a second bit (hereinafter referred to as a second zero flag TZ) configured so that the state changes according to the operation result of the operation instruction and the state changes even with a specific instruction. ) Etc. are included. In each process included in the game program described later, when the process proceeds based on the instruction, the determination is performed by referring to the value of the bit other than the second zero flag included in the flag register. The value of the bit of the second zero flag is not referred to for judgment or the like.

In addition, the main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is transmitted only in one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41.

The I/O port 41d includes output ports 0 to 9, and the main control unit 41 can output control signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R from the output port 0 and the output port 1, and the output port 2 The control signals of the left/center/right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R and the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 can be output, and the control signal of the hopper motor 34b and the external output signal can be output from the output port 3. , Output port 4 and output port 5 from credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3BETLED14-16, status display LED17, start valid LED18, section display LED19, replay LED20, BET switch valid LED21 control signals. It is possible to output, a test signal can be output from the output port 6, a test signal and an external output signal can be output from the output port 7, and a command can be output from the output port 8 and the output port 9.

Further, the main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing according to the control state until the detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 change as main processing, and changes in the detection states of the various switches are performed. Accordingly, the process of gradually shifting is executed. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the total time of the main process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) that is repeated once according to the control state. Therefore, between the present time and the next timer interrupt processing (main), the processing which is always repeated depending on the control state is completed at least once.

In the present embodiment, as a command that can be executed by the main control unit 41, a save command that saves the value of the register included in the main control unit 41 by storing it in the stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. , The value of the register saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction is sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of the save operation, and is set in the register corresponding to the order. And a return instruction for returning the state of 1 to the state when the state was saved by the save instruction.

The save instruction stores the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 in the stack area of the RAM 41c, and the operation result of all the registers included in the main control unit 41. Second saving instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the save instruction in the game program, it is possible to save the register value in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and execute the save instruction in the non-game program. Thus, it is possible to save the register value in the non-gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-gaming program.

The return instruction includes a first return instruction (POP ALL) for setting and returning the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all registers included in the main control unit 41, and all registers included in the main control unit 41. Among them, the flag register that stores the calculation result includes a second return instruction (POP AF) that sets and restores the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first return instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second return instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing a return instruction in the game program, it is possible to call the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, set it in the corresponding register, and restore it. It is possible, and by executing a return instruction in the non-gaming program, the value of the register saved from the non-gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-gaming program is called, and the corresponding register is written. It can be set and restored.

The production control board 90 is connected with the above-described liquid crystal display 51, a speaker capable of outputting a sound, production LEDs 57 used for production and visually recognizable from the player side, and production devices such as AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e. The output states of these effect devices can be controlled by a sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90. The sub control unit 91 receives the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 and performs various kinds of control for performing the effect.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value. Specifically, the payout rate of medals can be changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the lottery such as the internal lottery that influences the advantage to the player. The set value is composed of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 37 and then turn on the power switch 39 of the slot machine 1. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the set value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the set value display 24, and the set value can be changed by operating the reset/setting switch 38. Move to the setting change state. When the reset/setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when the setting value 6 is further operated, the setting value is changed to 1). Return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is set as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game is allowed to proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset/setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate the clerk of the installed game shop. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires a further key operation, only a clerk of the amusement store who has a key for operating the setting key switch 37 can operate it. Further, the reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires a key operation using a predetermined key, so that only a store clerk who has a predetermined key can operate it. Further, the reset/setting switch 38 also functions as a reset switch for canceling the error state under normal conditions.

When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal inserting section 4, or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set a bet number using credits. When a predetermined number of bets is set according to the gaming state, a predetermined pay line LN (see FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R are arranged horizontally in the middle row). (Set across symbols) is enabled, and the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. In addition, when the medals are thrown in exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit. Further, in the present embodiment, only one pay line is applied, but a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated, and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are continuously changed. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are being rotated, stop control is performed on the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the rotation of the reels is stopped. The reel is stopped, and the design of the reel is derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 as a display result.

In the stop control, control for stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operation within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms (milliseconds in this embodiment) from the time when the operation of each stop switch is performed. Is done. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times in 1 minute, and the pattern for 80 (rotation)×21 (the number of symbol frames per reel, for example, 21 frames)=1680 frames is changed, so the predetermined maximum By the time the stop delay time (190 ms) elapses, it is possible to pull in symbols for up to 4 frames. In other words, in the stop control, the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of that, a total of five symbols (withdrawal range) Can be selected and led to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

As a result, in the stop control, when the rotation is stopped by operating the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the winning combination that is won in the internal lottery described later is selected. In the case where the constituent symbols are within the drawing range from the symbol when the stop switch is operated to four frames ahead, the symbol is drawn onto the pay line LN, and the rotation of the reel on which the stop switch is operated is rotated. On the other hand, if the symbols that make up the winning combination that has been won in the internal lottery are not within the pull-in range, the symbols that make up the winning combination that have not been won in the internal lottery are the winning line LN. It is possible to control to stop the rotation of the reel operated by the stop switch by drawing a symbol that does not form any winning combination onto the winning line LN so as not to stop upward.

Further, in the stop control, when the winning of the special winning combination (BB1, BB2 in this embodiment) has been carried over, a small winning combination (in this embodiment, the common multi-bell etc.) is won in the internal lottery. When the special combination and the small combination are simultaneously elected, the composition pattern of the small combination that has been elected is controlled so as to be preferentially drawn into the pay line LN within the above-mentioned drawing range, and the winning combination is achieved. When the composition pattern of the small winning combination cannot be drawn to the pay line LN, the composition pattern of the winning special combination is controlled to be drawn to the winning line LN. For this reason, in a game in which a special role and a small role are simultaneously won, it is difficult to win the winning special role.

Further, in the stop control, when the winning of the special combination (BB1, BB2 in this embodiment) has been carried over, the re-gaming combination (in this embodiment, Replay 1A, etc.) is won in the internal lottery, When the special combination and the re-gaming combination are simultaneously elected, the winning composition pattern of the re-combination combination is preferentially drawn into the pay line LN. The symbols constituting the re-gaming combination on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are arranged within a predetermined drawing range, and when the re-gaming combination is elected, the re-combination winning composition is always drawn into the pay line LN. Become. Therefore, in a game in which the special role and the re-playing role are simultaneously won, the winning special role cannot be won.

Further, in the stop control, the winning of the special winning combination (BB1, BB2 in this embodiment) has been carried over, and the specified number corresponding to the winning special winning combination (two in the case of BB1, BB2). In the case of a game in which the bet number of (3 pieces) is set, it is possible to draw the composition pattern of the winning special part to the pay line LN, but the specified number that does not correspond to the winning special part. In the game in which the bet number is set, the composition pattern of the winning special combination is controlled so as not to be drawn into the pay line LN. Therefore, in the game in which the special role is won, the special role is prevented from being won unless the specified number of bets corresponding to the winning special role is set. .. As a result, in RT1 which is a gaming state in which the winning of a specific special role (BB1) has been carried over, the bet number of three (first bet number) is selected and the game is played. Even if the winning combination is not won, the specific special winning combination (BB1) will not be won, and the gaming state can be maintained at RT1.

Then, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and one game ends, and a predetermined winning symbol combination is stopped on the pay line LN as a display result on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In this case, a prize is generated, and the number of medals determined according to the prize is given to the player and added to the credit. When the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout exit 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, on the pay line LN, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2 in this embodiment) is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, The game state is adapted to the combination of symbols.

In the present embodiment, the game is started when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game is ended when all the reels are stopped. Further, the control of one unit for executing the game (game control) starts when all the controls accompanying the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the type of winning combination (hereinafter referred to as winning combination) is determined according to the gaming state, and it is not necessary to set the bet number and the small winning combination with payout of medals. There is a re-gaming role in which a re-gaming that allows the next game to be started is given, and a special role accompanied by a transition to a gaming state (special state) advantageous to the player. Below, the small winning combination and the re-playing combination are collectively called a general winning combination. In order for the winning of each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination. In the internal lottery, before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived by the main control unit 41, whether or not the winning of each of the above-mentioned winning combinations is permitted (specifically, When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the bet number set, the random number is used for the determination.

Of the winning flags of each combination, the winning flags of the small combination and the re-game combination are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flags of the special combination are The flag is valid until the combination of the permitted combinations is prepared, and is invalid in the game in which the combination of the permitted combinations is prepared. That is, once the winning flag of a special winning combination is won, even if the combination of winning combinations allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and carried over to the next game. Has become.

In addition, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, the stop operation order, the operation timing), which is more advantageous than when the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. The winning combination is a winning combination of a winning combination and a re-playing combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a navigation target winning combination). The navigation target combination is, for example, a combination of a stop mode that is more advantageous than a stop mode that is stopped when a stop operation is performed in another predetermined operation mode when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, In addition, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined predetermined operation mode, the advantageous stop mode has a higher ratio of stopping than in the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Further, the advantageous stop mode includes not only a stop mode involving the addition of medals but also a stop mode involving a transition to an advantageous game state, a stop mode in which a transition to an unfavorable game state is avoided.

The main control unit 41 executes navigation notification for notifying navigation information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result, by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT) which is a possible notification period. The main control unit 41 gives the player the right to be controlled by the AT, starts the control of the AT, and controls the AT. When the AT is controlled, the navigation notification is executed by winning the navigation target combination, and the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous to the player (for example, the pressing order, (Operation timing, etc.) by using the game auxiliary display 12, and by transmitting a command capable of specifying an operation mode that is advantageous to the player to the sub-control unit 91, the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The navigation effect to be notified using 51 or the like is executed. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, it is possible to reliably win the navigation target winning combination that is won in the internal lottery.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is provided with the game auxiliary display 12 capable of displaying the number of medals paid out, the error code, and the navigation information, and the game auxiliary display 12 is used in the navigation notification control. Although the navigation information is notified by means of the navigation device, a dedicated display device capable of displaying only the navigation information may be provided, and the navigation information may be notified by using the dedicated display device in the navigation notification control.

[About medal selector]
The structure of the medal selector 29 arranged inside the front door 1b will be described with reference to FIG. In the following description, the state in which the medal selector 29 is viewed from the back side of the front door 1b will be described as the front side of the medal selector 29.

The medal selector 29 is configured in a rectangular parallelepiped shape as shown in FIG. 4, and an inflow port 141 through which medals can flow into the main body is provided on the upper side wall of the main body of the medal selector 29. The left side wall of the main body is provided with an outlet 142 through which medals can flow from the inside of the main body to the outside on the side of the hopper tank 34a, and the lower wall of the main body is provided with a medal payout port from inside the main body. A discharge port 143 capable of discharging medals to the outside on the 9 side is provided. Inside the main body of the medal selector 29, there is formed a medal downflow passage that communicates from the inflow port 141 to the outflow port 142 and has a substantially L shape in a front view. As shown in FIGS. 4(b) and 4(c), the side wall of the medal flow-down passage is inclined from the lower side to the upper side so that the upper end of the flowing medal is inclined to the front side with respect to the lower end. There is. In addition, a medal downflow passage, which is generally S-shaped in a front view and communicates with the inflow port 141 and the exhaust port 143, is formed. Hereinafter, among the medal flow-down channels inside the main body of the medal selector 29, the flow channel on the inflow port 141 side is the medal inflow channel 29a, the flow channel on the outflow port 142 side is the medal receiving flow channel 29b, and the ejection port 143 side. The flow path is called a medal return flow path 29c.

In the medal selector 29, the authenticity (shape, size, thickness, etc.) of the inserted medal is determined, and the authentic medal enters the main body portion of the medal selector 29 after flowing in from the inflow port 141. By flowing down the internal medal inflow passage 29a and the medal receiving passage 29b and passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the outlet 142 is detected after being detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. Spilled from. Then, the medal is guided to the hopper tank 34a via a medal chute 142a (not shown). On the other hand, the false medal, after flowing in from the inflow port 141, is dropped into the medal return flow path 29c while flowing down in the medal inflow flow path 29a, flows down in the medal return flow path 29c, and flows out from the discharge port 143. It Then, the medal is returned to the lower plate from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1) via a medal return passage (not shown) provided below the medal selector 29.

Further, at the confluence of the medal inflow passage 29a, the medal receiving passage 29b, and the medal returning passage 29c, the passage switching solenoid 30 (see FIG. 3) provided on the front side of the main body of the medal selector 29 is excited. Before the medal flowing down the medal inflow passage 29a flows into the medal receiving flow passage 29b, the medal is forcibly dropped downward from the medal inflow passage 29a and the medal is returned. A flow path switching plate 147 for allowing the flow into the flow path 29c is swingably provided.

As shown in FIG. 4C, the flow path switching plate 147 opens the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is not excited, that is, when the reception of medals is not permitted. Then, the medal inflow passage 29a and the medal return passage 29c can be swung so as to communicate with each other. Further, in a state in which the flow path switching solenoid 30 is excited, that is, in a state in which reception of medals is permitted, as shown in FIG. 4B, the upper part of the flow path switching plate 147 is in the left direction (arrow) in the figure. By swinging in the A direction), the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147 becomes a state that constitutes the bottom surface of the medal inflow flow path 29a, and the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a is closed to set the medal inflow flow path 29a. And the medal return flow path 29c are configured to be swingable so as not to communicate with each other. With such a configuration, when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is excited, medals flowing in from the inflow port 141 and flowing down the medal inflow flow path 29a flow down along the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147. It is adapted to flow into the medal receiving channel 29b and flow out from the outlet 142.

Further, an insertion port sensor 26 for detecting passage of medals flowing in from the inflow port 141 is provided on the upstream side of the medal inflow passage 29a, and an outflow port 142 is provided on the downstream side of the medal receiving flow passage 29b. Inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c for detecting passage of ejected medals are provided.

Of the thrown-in medal sensors 31a to 31c, the thrown-in medal sensors 31a and 31c pass the medal when the medal passes between the light projecting section and the light receiving section, and the light receiving section detects blocking of light from the light projecting section. The inserted medal sensor 31b is a physical sensor that detects the passage of a medal by detecting the movement of the movable piece 180 that operates in conjunction with the passage of the medal by the detector 183. Hereinafter, the inserted medal sensor 31a may be referred to as the inserted medal sensor 1, the inserted medal sensor 31b may be referred to as the inserted medal sensor 2, and the inserted medal sensor 31c may be referred to as the inserted medal sensor 3. The range in which the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c detect passage of medals may be referred to as a detection range A.

Next, the configuration of the inserted medal sensor 31b, which is a physical sensor, will be described. A movable piece 180 of the inserted medal sensor 31b is provided on the side wall of a lower portion of the medal selector 29 on the downstream side of the medal receiving passage 29b so as to be retractable in the medal receiving passage 29b. Further, a detector 183 is installed outside the medal receiving channel 29b at a position corresponding to the movable piece 180. The detector 183 is provided with a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit in the detecting unit 183a. The movable piece 180 is provided at the end of the movable piece 180 by retracting the tip end portion 180b of the movable piece 180 from the medal reception passage 29b when the medal passes through the medal receiving passage 29b. The detected portion 180a is made to enter between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the detecting portion 183a, the light emitted from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is blocked, and the detector 183 detects the medal light. The passage is detected. On the other hand, the movable piece 180 is urged so that the tip end portion 180b of the movable piece 180 projects into the medal receiving passage 29b when the medal is not passing through the medal receiving passage 29b. In this state, the detected portion 180a of the movable piece 180 does not enter between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the detecting portion 183a, and the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the detecting portion 183a to the light receiving portion may be blocked. Therefore, the detector 183 does not detect the passage of medals.

[About the memory area and program of the main controller]
The main control unit 41 includes a ROM 41b and a RAM 41c having a memory area for storing a predetermined program and data.

FIG. 5 is an address map of the program/data area in the ROM 41b and the usable area in the RAM 41c. As shown in FIG. 5A, the program/data area in the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, and Includes a usage area 1, a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program unrelated to the progress of a game is stored, a non-gaming data area in which non-gaming data used by the non-gaming program is stored, and an unused area 2. ..

It should be noted that the progress of the game is to proceed a series of processes constituting the game, and in the case of a slot machine, the stage where the bet number can be set and the game can be started, the game is started and the reels are rotated. This is to proceed with the step of allowing, the step of stopping the reel to derive the display result, and the step of giving a value such as a medal according to the display result.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used as a work by the non-gaming program, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which a game program saves data, and a non-gaming RAM area includes a game. It includes an area where the program can be referred to, an area where the game program cannot be referred to, and a non-game stack area where the non-game program saves data. In the present embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas, but a single stack area shared by the game program and the non-game program may be provided.

The unused area 3 is an area in which neither the game program nor the non-gaming program is used, and is an area which is a surplus with respect to the game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

The unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more which is used by neither the game program nor the non-gaming program. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are assigned to the areas which are not continuous with the unused area 4 interposed therebetween, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-related non-progress of the game. The non-gaming RAM area used by the gaming program and the non-gaming RAM area can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Hereinafter, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-gaming program area, the non-gaming data area, and the non-gaming RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-gaming area. .. Further, the unused area 1 and the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

[Regarding the instructions used by the program]
The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program and a subroutine that is called during the execution of another program.

Further, the CALL instruction, the CALLV instruction, the RST instruction, and the like are included as call instructions for causing the main control unit 41 to call and execute the program stored in the program/data area.

The CALL instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at an address designated in a main routine or a subroutine. When the subroutine is called by the CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the caller's address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specified address. Then, after the end of the subroutine, the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the program of the main routine or the subroutine of the caller that executed the CALL instruction is restored.

Further, the CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a special CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. A normal CALL instruction is an instruction for calling a subroutine by specifying an upper address and a lower address by designating both an upper address and a lower address, whereas a CALLV instruction only calls a lower address. The instruction is an instruction to call a subroutine by specifying an address by a preset upper address and a designated lower address in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, and the subroutine can be executed with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL instruction. It is possible to call.

The RST instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored in a specific address corresponding to a specified value by specifying a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses. It is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than an instruction or a CALLV instruction. When the subroutine is called by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the caller's address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specific address corresponding to the specified value. Then, after the end of the subroutine, the process returns to the caller's address stored in the stack area, that is, the caller's main routine or subroutine that executed the RST instruction.

The jump instruction is an instruction to move to the program stored at the address specified in the main routine or subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address designated by the jump instruction, and executes the destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction and the RST instruction, even if the program after the movement ends, it does not return to the program of the movement source.

Of the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, particularly frequently used subroutines are stored in a region of the game program region of the ROM 41b where the start address has a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, a specific value is set as the higher address of the subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. Then, the main control unit 41 specifies only the lower address by using the CALLV instruction when calling a subroutine in which the upper address of the start address has the specific value, so that the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. Then, the lower address specified as the lower address is specified, and the subroutine stored in the upper and lower addresses is called and executed. Therefore, the upper address that constitutes a part of the address used when calling a subroutine that is particularly frequently used in the game program is preset in the vector table as a specific value, and based on the specific value set in the vector table. Since the address is specified, the subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to the normal CALL instruction that calls the program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. When calling these subroutines, It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for designating the address.

In this embodiment, the start address of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the RST instruction, and in the CALLV instruction and the RST instruction. Since it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL instruction, by using the CALLV instruction or the RST instruction in the game program, the data capacity of the game program can be reduced. ing. In the vector table area and the specific address area of the ROM 41b, the start address of the subroutine of the game program is stored, and the start of the non-gaming program is not stored, and the non-game is executed by the CALLV command and the RST command. The program will not be called, and the reduction of the data capacity of the game program will not be hindered.

In addition, a subroutine with a high frequency of use among the non-gaming programs stored in the ROM 41b is stored in an area of the non-gaming program area of the ROM 41b where the start address has a specific value, and the CALLV instruction is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the subroutine to be called with, and when the main control unit 41 calls the subroutine in which the upper address of the start address has the specific value, only the lower address is specified by using the CALLV instruction. Even when configured to call and execute, subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling.

Further, the upper address used when calling with the CALLV instruction may be set not in the vector table area but in a specific register of the main control unit 41.

In addition to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in a specific register, or the like, and the remaining part of the address is designated, whereby the subroutine With a configuration using a special CALL instruction that allows the storage address to be specified, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when the subroutine is called. In addition, by assigning to each of the plurality of areas forming the vector table area an identification value having a smaller amount of data than the address, setting the storage address of the subroutine in each of these areas, and specifying the identification value, Even with a configuration using a special CALL instruction that can specify the storage address of the subroutine stored in the area corresponding to the value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. ..

The main control unit 41 is activated when a system reset by inputting a system reset signal, a WDT reset by a WDT (watchdog timer, not shown), and an illegal access reset occur. The set value, that is, the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main) is a value indicating the area in which the program or the like is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH (unused (The value set in the vector table area of) is determined, and if the value set in the vector table area is neither a value outside the area set by the program nor FFFFH, do not start. Therefore, it is possible to prevent in advance from executing an originally unintended process due to an interrupt or the like.

An LD instruction is included as a read instruction that causes the main control unit 41 to read the data stored in the program/data area. The LD instruction is an instruction to read the data stored at the address designated in the main routine or the subroutine into the designated register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address designated by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register designated by the LD instruction.

Further, the LD instruction includes a normal LD instruction and an LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction. The normal LD instruction is an instruction to read data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or the RAM 41c by the upper address and the lower address designated by designating both the upper address and the lower address, whereas the LDQ instruction is By specifying only the lower address, the address is specified by the upper address preset in the special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the RAM 41c and the designated lower address to specify the address of the ROM 41b or the RAM 41c. It is an instruction to read the data stored in a specific area and store the read data in a specified register, and it is possible to store the predetermined data in a predetermined register with a smaller data amount than a normal LD instruction. It will be possible.

When reading the data stored in the specific area of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c in the main routine or subroutine, by using the LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction, all the addresses (upper part and lower part) indicating the specific area can be read. It is possible to read the data in the specific area by designating only the lower part of the address instead of designating. By using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to read data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address and read the data with a smaller amount of data than the normal LD instruction, and specify the address when reading the data. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for doing.

In addition, the game data that is particularly frequently used among the game data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is stored in an area of the game RAM area where the head address has a specific value, and the specific value is stored in a special register ( When the game data is configured to be read by setting it as the higher address of the game data in the Q register) and designating only the lower address using the LDQ instruction when the main control unit 41 reads the game data. It is possible to read the game data with a smaller amount of data as compared with a normal LD command that reads out the data by specifying both the address and the lower address, and a program for specifying the address when reading these game data. The waste of can be reduced.

Further, the main control unit 41 can change the value set in the special register (Q register) in the main routine or the subroutine, and as will be described later, the internal register of the internal register in the initial setting process performed at the time of start-up. In the setting, a specific value indicating the start address of game data that is frequently used by the game program is set in a special register (Q register). Further, when calling a non-gaming program from the game program, the value set in the special register (Q register) is saved, and when returning to the game program, the value set in the special register (Q register) is saved. It will be set again to the value it had. With these, when the game program is being executed, a specific value indicating the start address of the game data that is frequently used by the game program is set in a special register (Q register), and the game program is It is possible to read frequently used game data using the LDQ command.

It should be noted that the upper address used when the LDQ instruction is read as a special LD instruction may be set in a predetermined storage area other than a special register (for example, Q register), for example, a vector table area. Part of the address is specified using a value stored in a predetermined storage area such as, and a special LD instruction is used that allows the storage address of the data to be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address by the program. With the configuration, it is possible to reduce waste of a program for designating an address when reading data. Further, for example, by assigning an identification value having a smaller data amount than an address to each of the plurality of areas forming the vector table area, setting a storage address of data in each of the plurality of areas, and designating the identification value, To reduce waste of a program for designating an address when reading data, even in a configuration using a special LD instruction that can specify a storage address of data stored in an area corresponding to an identification value You can

Further, in the present embodiment, the Q register is configured to store the same value as the value used in the specific program, but the Q register may be configured to store a value different from the value used in the specific program. For example, when the non-specific program is called, it is a value different from the value used in the specific program as the specific value in the Q register, and the start address of the storage area in which frequently used data in the non-gaming program is stored. By storing the value and using the LDQ instruction when calling the data in the non-specific program, the data capacity of the non-specific program can be reduced.

The game program is a program relating to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless the process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, the non-gaming program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and it is possible to progress the game even when the game program is called and the processing based on the program is not executed and the game program is returned to. It is a program for executing processing.

In the game program, with respect to the above-mentioned CALL instruction and LD instruction, any instruction including special CALL instruction CALLV instruction, RST instruction, special LD instruction LDQ instruction may be used, and special CALL instruction It is also possible to specify an address by using and call a subroutine, or to read out specific game data and non-game data in the ROM 41b and RAM 41c using a special LD command.

In the non-gaming program, while the normal CALL instruction is used for the above-mentioned CALL instruction, the special CALL instruction, that is, the CALLV instruction is not used, and the address is specified by using the normal CALL instruction. While the subroutine may be called, the subroutine is not called using a special CALL instruction, and the game program area in the ROM 41b is not accessed by the non-game program.

Further, in the non-gaming program, with respect to the above-mentioned LD instruction, an ordinary LD instruction or an LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction may be used, and an address is specified by using the ordinary LD instruction to obtain predetermined data. It is possible to read out, or to read out a subroutine or data by using a special LD instruction.

As described above, in this embodiment, the start address of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the special CALL instruction such as the CALLV instruction and the RST instruction. It is possible to call the game program by using the special CALL command of. If only the game program can be called by the special CALL command in this way, the special CALL command is used by the non-gaming program, so that the game program is called by the non-gaming program and the game is not intended. May be performed, or game data may be rewritten by an unintended game program. On the other hand, by calling the program by the normal CALL instruction instead of the special CALL instruction by the non-gaming program, by not using the vector table area and the area of the specific address, the game program is unintentionally called and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the progress of.

Further, in this embodiment, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, can specify a game RAM area by using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register) and read out predetermined game data. It is possible, and by using a special LD instruction even in the non-specific program, it is possible to easily read the game data while reducing the data capacity of the non-specific program.

The LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, can specify a game RAM area by using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register) and read predetermined game data. However, when the game data is read by a special LD command, if the specific value of the special register (Q register) is damaged, the game RAM area cannot be specified normally, and unintended data is generated. It may be read. On the other hand, by reading the data by the normal LD command without depending on the LDQ command which is a special LD command by the non-gaming program, the specific value is damaged when the game program is switched to the non-gaming program. Even in this case, since the game RAM area is specified from the non-gaming program and the data is read, it is possible to prevent unintended data from being read.

In the present embodiment, as a command that can be executed by the main control unit 41, a save command that saves the value of the register included in the main control unit 41 by storing it in the stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. , The value of the register saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction is sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of the save operation, and is set in the register corresponding to the order. And a return instruction for returning the state of 1 to the state when the state was saved by the save instruction.

The save instruction stores the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 in the stack area of the RAM 41c, and the operation result of all the registers included in the main control unit 41. Second saving instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the save instruction in the game program, it is possible to save the register value in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and execute the save instruction in the non-game program. Thus, it is possible to save the register value in the non-gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-gaming program.

The return instruction includes a first return instruction (POP ALL) for setting and returning the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all registers included in the main control unit 41, and all registers included in the main control unit 41. Among them, the flag register that stores the calculation result includes a second return instruction (POP AF) that sets and restores the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first return instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second return instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing a return instruction in the game program, it is possible to call the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, set it in the corresponding register, and restore it. It is possible, and by executing a return instruction in the non-gaming program, the value of the register saved from the non-gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-gaming program is called, and the corresponding register is written. It can be set and restored.

[Relationship between game area and non-gaming area]
As shown in FIG. 6, the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls the non-gaming program in the processing based on the game program to execute the processing based on the non-gaming program, and after the processing based on the non-gaming program ends, the gaming program. Return to the process based on.

As shown in FIG. 6, in principle, the main CPU 41a refers to the game data in the game data area to execute the processing based on the game program when executing the processing based on the game program, and uses the game RAM area as work. However, it is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. In addition, in principle, the main CPU 41a refers to the non-gaming data in the non-gaming data area to execute the processing based on the non-gaming program, and also uses the non-gaming RAM area as work in performing the processing based on the non-gaming program. However, it is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-gaming RAM area.

Further, the main CPU 41a does not refer to the non-gaming data area and does not update the non-gaming RAM area when executing the processing based on the game program, but can refer to the non-gaming RAM area. Yes, in executing the processing based on the non-gaming program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

Further, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area necessary for the game program (for example, an area for setting an error flag indicating detection of an abnormality) in the non-game RAM area. The processing based on the game RAM area can refer only to a specific area required for the non-gaming program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.). Further, a specific area in the non-gaming RAM area where processing based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area in the gaming RAM area where processing based on the non-gaming program can be referenced are assigned to consecutive address areas. Although preferable, it may be configured such that a part or all of the address area is not continuous.

As described above, in this embodiment, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of a game is stored, a game data area in which the game data referred to by the game program is readably stored, and work data referred to by the game program. Is a game RAM area that is readably and writably stored, and a program that is called by a game program. Since the non-gaming data area in which data is readably stored and the non-gaming RAM area in which work data referenced by the non-gaming program are stored in a readable and writable manner are separately allocated, the gaming program, It is possible to easily specify the game data and the work data of the game program, and the non-gaming program, the non-gaming data, and the work data of the non-gaming program according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, by dividing the game program area and the game data area from the non-game program area and the non-game data area, it is possible to manage the area occupied in the ROM 41b compactly according to their respective functions. It will be easier to identify the relevant data.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to refer to the non-gaming RAM area when executing the game program, and it is possible to refer to the game RAM area when executing the non-gaming program. When executing the game program, the data used by the non-game program can be easily used, and when executing the non-game program, the data used by the game program can be easily used. On the other hand, when executing the game program, it is impossible to update the non-gaming RAM area, and when executing the non-gaming program, it is impossible to update the game RAM area. Does not affect the processing of the non-gaming program, and the non-gaming program does not affect the processing of the gaming program.

Further, in this embodiment, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area required for the game program (for example, an area for setting an error flag indicating abnormality detection) in the non-game RAM area. The process based on the non-gaming program can be referred to only a specific area (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game status setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-gaming program in the game RAM area. Therefore, since the data that the game program can refer to in the non-gaming RAM area and the data that the non-gaming program can refer to are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-gaming program can be easily specified. be able to.

[About the game state]
As shown in FIG. 7, the main control unit 41 selects one of RT0 (non-internal), RT1 (inside BB1), RT2 (inside BB2), and special state (BB1, BB2) as a game state. It is possible to control. The gaming state is a state in which the type of re-game combination to be selected by the internal lottery and the probability that the re-game combination is won by the internal lottery are common. The probability of winning the re-game combination is different for each game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2), but the probability of winning the re-game combination is uniform in the same game state.

RT0 (non-internal) is a state in which the winning of the special combination (BB1, BB2) has not been carried over. When the slot machine 1 is activated in a state in which the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory or a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data regarding a game state is stored is initialized, first, the slot machine 1 is controlled to the non-internal state. .. Further, when the special state (BB1, BB2) is ended, the control is made to RT0. Then, RT0 is to be transferred to RT1 (inside BB1) or RT2 (inside BB2) by winning a special role in an internal lottery in the game of RT0 and losing the special role. Is ended by. Also, in the game in which the special combination is won in the internal lottery, the special combination is won and the game is also ended by shifting to the special state (BB1, BB2).

Also, at RT0 (non-inside), it is possible to set a bet number of 2 or 3 as a prescribed number and play the game. In a game in which a bet number of 2 is set as a prescribed number, BB1 can be won as a special role, while in a game in which a bet number of 3 is set as a prescribed number, BB2 can be elected as a special role. Is becoming It is possible to shift to RT1 (inside BB1) by playing a game with two bets at RT0 (not inside), while RT2( BB2 inside).

At RT0 (non-internal), the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in a game mode within a predetermined period in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the medals per game during the period are displayed. While the payout rate exceeds 100%, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. It has become. As will be described later, at RT0, the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100% by not notifying the operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

At RT1 (inside BB1), the winning of the special part (BB1) has been carried over. It starts when the special combination (BB1) is won in the internal lottery at RT0 (non-inside), and ends when the carried over BB1 wins.

In RT1 (inside BB1), in a game in which a bet number of 3 is set as a prescribed number, it is possible to shift the section state described later to an advantageous section which is advantageous to the player, while In a game in which the bet number of two cards is set as, there is no transition to the advantageous section. Then, in the advantageous section, the AT is controlled so that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player can be notified. As a result, at RT1, the player sets a bet number of 3 as a prescribed number and prompts the player to play the game.

In RT1 (inside of BB1), the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in the game within the predetermined period, so that the medals per game during the period are operated. The payout rate of 100% is over 100%, but the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous for the player, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. In the period in which the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified, while the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%, in the period when the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified. The payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100%. Further, in RT1 (inside BB1), the probability that the small win is won in the internal lottery is the same as that in RT0 (inside non-internal) and RT2 (inside BB2), which will be described later. The probability that a gaming role (in this embodiment, a re-gaming role) will be won in the internal lottery is set higher than RT0 and RT2, and RT1 is 1 during a predetermined period as compared with RT0 and RT2. The payout rate of medals per game is high, which is an advantageous state.

In addition, as described above, the special combination (BB1) can be won in a game in which the bet number (two) equal to the specified number in the game that triggered the winning of the special combination is set. Games with a specified number of bets (3) that is different from the number of games that triggered the winning of the special role will not win, and once the game is transferred to RT1. By setting the bet number of three as the prescribed number and playing the game, the special role (BB1) is not won, and the RT1 is continued. Further, as will be described later, in a game in which a bet number of 2 is set as a prescribed number in RT1, the probability of not being won without winning any of the winning roles in the internal lottery is 0, It is difficult to win the winning BB1. As a result, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is controlled by RT1 (inside the BB1) in most of the game. , 1 to 6) so that the payout rate of medals according to each set value becomes a value determined according to each set value, it is determined whether to control AT at RT1, for example, whether to control AT. By setting the winning probability of the AT lottery, etc., the payout rate of medals according to the set value is set, and designed so that the payout rate of medals at RT1 (inside BB1) is appropriate. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, in RT1 in which BB1 is carried over, as compared with RT0 in which RT0 and BB2 are carried over, the payout rate of medals per game during the predetermined period is higher, and thus the payout of medals is achieved. Although the rate is appropriate, the right to be controlled by the AT can be granted to RT1 in RT1 where BB1 is carried over, whereas the right to be controlled by AT can be granted in RT2 where RT0 and BB2 are carried over. It is configured that the payout rate of medals is proper by not being awarded, or that the right to be controlled by the AT is given to RT1 in which BB1 is carried over and RT0 and BB2 are favored over RT2 in which it is carried over. By doing so, the payout rate of medals may be appropriate.

Further, since the payout rate of medals according to the set value is set on the premise that the medals are paid out at RT1 (inside BB1), the payout of medals is controlled when the gaming state other than RT1 is controlled. The rate may deviate from the payout rate as designed, and it is preferable to control the rate to RT1 as much as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a recommended operation mode recommended to the player and a special operation mode so that the player can easily shift to RT1 in the game state (RT0, RT2, BB1, BB2) other than RT1 (inside BB1) The operation mode for winning the winning combination (BB1) is different. That is, as long as the player performs the stop operation in the recommended operation mode at RT1, the special combination (BB1) does not win.

At RT2 (inside BB2), the winning of the special part (BB2) has been carried over. It starts when the special combination (BB2) is won in the internal lottery at RT0 (non-inside), and ends when the carried over BB2 wins.

As described above, the special combination (BB2) can be won in a game in which the bet number (3 pieces) is set to the same number as the specified number in the game that triggered the winning of the special combination, while the special combination is awarded. In a game in which a specified number of bets (2 cards) that is different from the number specified in the game that triggered the winning of the winning combination is set, no prizes will be awarded. By setting the bet number and playing the game, it is possible to win the winning BB2 and shift to the special state (BB2).

In RT2 (inside BB2), the section state is not shifted to the advantageous section in the game in which the bet number of 2 or 3 is set as the specified number, and RT2 is ended. Then, it is urged to shift to RT1. As a result, the game is not played as much as possible in a game state other than RT1 where the payout rate of medals according to the set value is set as described above, and the payout rate of medals is designed to be the payout rate. ..

Further, at RT2 (inside BB2), it is possible to win the winning BB2 in a game in which a bet number of 3 is set as a prescribed number, and RT2 is ended to finish BB2 and RT0. By shifting to RT1 after that, it is possible to control to a gaming state in which the payout rate of medals is the payout rate as designed.

The special state includes BB1 controlled in accordance with winning of the special winning combination BB1 and BB2 controlled in accordance with winning of the special winning combination BB2. The special state (BB1, BB2) is more advantageous to the player than the other game states (non-internal (RT0) and internal (RT1, RT2)) due to the higher winning probability of the small winning combination in the internal lottery. This is a state, and is a gaming state that ends when a predetermined predetermined ending condition (in this embodiment, the total payout number of medals exceeds a specified number) is satisfied. The winning probability is high (1/1), which is higher than that in the state where the game is not controlled by BB1 and BB2, but the payout rate of medals per game is less than 100%.

BB1 is started when the BB1 wins in the game in which the special role BB1 is won in the internal lottery of RT0 (non-internal) or when BB1 wins in RT1 (inside BB1) Is satisfied (for example, when the total payout number of medals in the special state exceeds a predetermined number). In addition, BB2 is started by winning the special BB2 in a game won by the special role BB2 in the internal lottery of RT0 (non-internal), or by winning BB2 in RT2 (inside BB2). Depending on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (for example, the total payout number of medals in the special state may exceed a predetermined number, the condition may be the same as or different from the end condition of BB1). Will be terminated. After completion of BB1 and BB2, both are shifted to RT0 (non-internal).

In the present embodiment, the special state (BB1, BB2) is configured to be continuously controlled to the same game state, but the special state is BB in which the winning probability of the RB advantageous to the player in the internal lottery increases. It is composed of a general game and an RB that is won by the RB and the symbol combination of the RB is transferred by being stopped by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It may be configured to be controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the special role is carried over, if the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the special role carried over is not set, the carried special role is prevented from winning. It has become. As a result, in the game state where the winning of BB1 is carried over at RT1, the number of bets is selected and the game is played, so that no part is won in the internal lottery (unwinning). Even if BB1 does not win, the game state can be maintained at RT1.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when BB1 is carried over and the gaming state shifts to RT1, the internal lottery is unsuccessful in the game in which the bet number of two is set as the prescribed number in RT1. There is no winning, that is, there is no loss, and the re-game role or the small role is surely won, and the control for aligning the re-game role or the small role that has been won is prioritized, so that the BB1 is not won. Further, as described above, in the game in which the bet number of 3 is set as the prescribed number, the BB 1 is controlled so as not to win. Therefore, once BB1 is elected and carried over, the gaming state shifts to RT1. Even if a player sets two bets and plays the game, he or she sets three bets and plays the game. Even so, RT1 at which the payout rate of medals is appropriate is maintained.

Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is controlled by RT1 (inside BB1) in most of the game as described above, it is premised that the slot machine 1 is controlled by RT1, and the set value (this embodiment is Then, it is determined whether or not the AT is controlled in RT1, for example, the AT is controlled, so that the payout rate of medals according to 1 to 6) becomes a value determined according to each set value. By setting the winning probability of the AT lottery, etc., the payout rate of medals according to the set value is set, and the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate at RT1 (inside BB1). Is designed. Then, when the payout rate of medals is controlled to be RT1 which is appropriate, the status display LED 17 is controlled to be in a lighting state. Thus, by confirming the lighting state of the status display LED 17, it is possible to confirm that the slot machine 1 is in a state where the payout rate of medals is appropriate.

The status display LED 17 included in the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a predetermined value (1) different from the initial value (0) set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process controls the lighting state.

The main control unit 41 sets a predetermined value (1) in the output buffer of the status display LED 17 when it is determined that the special winning combination (BB1) is won in the internal lottery process included in the main process described later and performing the internal lottery. By doing so, the state display LED 17 is controlled to be in a lighting state at the start of the game in which the special combination (BB1) is won. Then, when the winning special combination (BB1) is won, the output buffer of the status display LED 17 is initialized and the initial value (0) is set, so that at the end of the game in which the special combination (BB1) is won. The status display LED 17 is controlled to be off. When the special part (BB1) does not win at the end of the game and the winning is carried over, the output buffer of the state display LED 17 is not initialized and the state where the predetermined value (1) is set is maintained. In the state (RT1) in which the winning of the special combination (BB1) is carried over, the state display LED 17 is always kept in the lighting state.

Further, when the special winning combination (BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the winning of the special winning combination (BB2) has been carried over, the main control unit 41 sets the predetermined value (1) in the output buffer of the status display LED 17. Without setting, the state in which the initial value (0) is set is maintained, and the state display LED 17 is controlled to be in the off state.

Further, when controlling the set value currently set in the slot machine 1 to the setting confirmation state in which it can be confirmed, the main control section 41 outputs the output buffer of the state display LED 17 in the state before shifting to the setting confirmation state. When the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, the status display LED 17 is maintained in the lighting state even during the period in which the setting confirmation state is controlled. It is supposed to be done.

Further, when the game state is controlled to RT1, the output buffer of the state display LED 17 is set to a predetermined value (1), and the state display LED 17 is controlled to the lighting state, the state is changed to the setting change state. Even after the advantageous section is ended, the game state is maintained at RT1 and the state display LED 17 is maintained in the lighting state.

As described above, when the specific special combination (BB1) is won and carried over, the state display LED 17 is controlled to the lighting state and the state display is performed, so that the bet number of two (the second bet number). On the condition that is set, the fact that the winning of the specific special part (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery has been carried over is notified. Further, since the status display is continued even if it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state once started, even if it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, a specific special character ( It is possible to confirm that the winning of BB1) has been carried over.

Further, in the game in which a specific special role (BB1) is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 starts the status display before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is activated, and the special display in the game is performed. When the winning combination (BB1) is won, the status display is terminated, while when the winning combination (BB1) is not won in the game, the status display is continued. As a result, in the game in which a specific special character (BB1) is won in the internal lottery, the status display is started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. After confirming, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R can be operated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the section display LED 19 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c which is initialized when the setting is changed to the setting change state under the control of the RT1 or when the advantageous section is ended. While the information about the advantageous section such as the output buffer of No. 1 is included, the output buffer of the status display LED 17, the information about the game state such as the winning flag of the special combination and the flag indicating the game state are not included, and thus the control is performed by RT1. After the power is cut off in the state, the advantageous section is ended and the section is displayed both when the power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed and when the power supply is started while the initialization operation is being performed. On the other hand, RT1 is maintained, while RT1 is maintained, so that it is not necessary to carry out work for setting the gaming state to RT1 every time the advantageous section and section display is finished.

On the other hand, in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, which is initialized when the state is changed to the setting change state while being controlled to the game state (RT0, RT2, BB1, BB2) other than RT1, the output buffer of the state display LED 17, Since the information regarding the game state is included, when the power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed after the power is cut off in the state of being controlled to the game state other than RT1, the game state before the power cut is If it is controlled by RT2, BB1 and BB2, the game state before the power failure is not maintained, and in any case, RT0, that is, non-internal. For this reason, even if it is mistakenly moved to RT2, BB1, or BB2, it is possible to shift to RT0 by shifting to the setting change state without the work of shifting to RT0 by itself.

[Regarding production in non-internal]
As shown in FIG. 9A, when the game state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), the main control unit 41 puts the state display LED in the off state, and the sub control unit 91 produces a normal effect. Execute. The normal effect is an effect that is executed in the non-AT state that occupies the majority after the transition to RT1.

In the situation where the game state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), when the game start operation is performed and BB1 is won in the internal lottery, as shown in FIG. 9B, the main control unit 41 Controls the status display LED 17 to the lighting state at the start of the game that BB1 has won. In addition, at this time, the main control unit 41 transmits an internal winning command capable of specifying the winning of BB1 to the sub control unit 91 after the internal lottery. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command and specifies the winning of BB1, the sub-control unit 91 executes the specific effect of displaying the white navigation image on the liquid crystal display 51 while continuing the normal effect.

In the game in which BB1 is won, the stop operation is performed so that BB1 is not won, and when all reels are stopped, BB1 does not win and the winning flag of BB1 is carried over. As shown, the main control unit 41 keeps the status display LED 17 in a lighting state. In addition, at this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 a winning determination command that can specify that BB1 has not won. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning determination command and specifies that BB1 has not won, the sub-control unit 91 keeps the specific effect, so that the winning flag of BB1 is carried over. That is, it means that the game state has become RT1 (inside). After that, at the time when the operation for starting the next game is performed, that is, at the time when the internal winning command for the next game is received, the sub control unit 91 ends the specific effect, while the main control unit 41 causes the main game unit 41 to start the next game. Even if the start operation is performed, the lighting state of the status display LED 17 is continued as long as RT1 (inside of BB1) is maintained to notify that the gaming state is RT1 (inside of BB1).

On the other hand, in the game in which BB1 is won, when all reels are stopped and BB1 is won and the winning flag of BB1 is not carried over, as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing after the final stop operation, that is, the stop operation of the reel that finally stops, the state display LED 17 is controlled to be in the off state. In addition, at this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 a winning determination command that can specify that BB1 has won. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the prize determination command and specifies that BB1 has won, it is an effect different from the normal effect and displays a special image in the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51. By executing the special effect to be performed, it is notified that BB1 has won the prize, that is, that the gaming state has not become RT1 (inside BB1). After that, the sub-control unit 91 continues the special effect until the special state (BB1) due to the winning of BB1 ends, the special state (BB1) ends, and the game state becomes RT0 (non-inside), The normal production is executed again.

Further, in the situation where the game state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), when the game start operation is performed and BB2 is won in the internal lottery, as shown in FIG. The unit 41 keeps the state display LED 17 in the off state at the start of the game in which BB2 is won. In addition, at this time, the main control unit 41 transmits an internal winning command that can specify the winning of BB2 to the sub control unit 91 after the internal lottery. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command and specifies the winning of BB2, the specific effect is not executed and the normal effect is continued.

In a game in which BB2 is a winning game or a game in which BB2 is carried over, when BB2 is won when all reels are stopped, as shown in FIG. At a later timing, a win determination command that can specify that BB2 has won is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning determination command and specifies that BB2 has won, by executing the special effect in the same manner as when specifying that BB1 has won, BB2 wins. That is, that is, the game state is not RT1 (inside BB1) is notified. After that, the sub-control unit 91 continues the special effect until the special state (BB2) due to the winning of BB2 ends, the special state (BB2) ends, and the game state becomes RT0 (non-internal), The normal production is executed again.

In addition, in the situation where the game state is controlled to RT0 (non-inside), the sub-control unit 91 always executes the normal effect, executes the special effect only when BB1 is won, and performs the internal lottery including BB2. The special effect is not executed except when the result of BB1 is winning. Therefore, it is possible to specify that BB1 has been won by executing the specific effect when the game start operation is performed.

Further, the sub-control unit 91, when the game state is RT1 (inside BB1), can execute a winning combination suggesting effect that suggests a winning combination based on the result of the internal lottery specified from the internal winning command. As shown in FIG. 11A, the winning combination suggesting effect is an effect that suggests the winning combination by displaying a color navigation image corresponding to the result of the internal lottery on the liquid crystal display 51. ), by displaying a red color navigation image (red navigation image), it is suggested that one of cherries 1 to 3 described later be won, and display a green color navigation image (green navigation image). The winning of the watermelon described below is suggested, and the winning of the common multi-bell described below is suggested by displaying the yellow color navigation image (yellow navigation image), and the blue color navigation image (blue navigation image) is displayed. This suggests winning of Replays 1 and 2 described later, and displaying a white color navigation image (white navigation image) suggests a loss in which neither a small role nor a re-gaming role has been won. Of these, the winning combination suggesting effect in which the white navigation image is displayed is the same effect as the specific effect described above. That is, the sub-control unit 91 controls the game state to RT1 (inside BB1) as a specific effect to be executed when BB1 is won in a situation where the game state is controlled to RT0 (not inside). The same effect as the winning suggestion effect that can be executed in the present situation is executed.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate at RT1 (inside BB1) as described above. On the other hand, in the factory shipment or in the state where the data regarding the game state is initialized, the game state is RT0 (non-inside), so in such a situation, the clerk of the game store or the like plays the game. , It is necessary to shift the game state to RT1 (the inside of BB1) where the payout rate of medals is appropriate, but when BB1 is won in the situation where the game state is controlled to RT0 (not inside) At the start of the game in which BB1 is won, the status display LED 17 is switched from the unlit state to the lit state, and the specific effect of displaying the white navigation image on the liquid crystal display 51 is executed to identify that BB1 is won. Since it becomes possible to prompt the stop operation in which BB1 does not win, it is possible to efficiently perform the work of shifting to RT1 (inside BB1).

On the other hand, when BB2 is won in a situation where the game state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), the state display LED 17 is not turned on at the start of the game won by BB2, and the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed. Since the specific effect of displaying the white navigation image is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that BB1 has won, even though BB2 has won.

Further, the specific effect is the same effect as the winning combination suggesting effect that can be executed in a situation where the game state is controlled to RT1 (inside BB1), and the game state is controlled to RT0 (not inside). It is possible not only to suggest winning of BB1 in the situation where it is present, but also to suggest that the result of the internal lottery is a loss in the situation where the game state is controlled to RT1 (inside BB1), It is possible to eliminate waste of production.

Further, in the game in which BB1 is won, if BB1 wins, that is, if it is not possible to shift to RT1 (inside BB1), the specific effect ends at the timing after the final stop operation of the game. On the other hand, in the game in which BB1 is won, if the winning flag of BB1 is carried over after the final stop operation and the winning flag of BB1 is carried over to RT1 (inside BB1), the specific effect continues after that. After the final stop operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the transition has been made to RT1 (inside BB1), depending on whether or not the specific effect continues.

When the BB1 is won, the timing for ending the specific effect may be the timing after the final stop operation, the timing at which the final stop operation is started, the timing at which the final stop operation is released, or the corresponding action. It may be the later one of the timings at which the reels are stopped.

Further, when BB1 wins and shifts to a special state (BB1), or when BB2 wins and shifts to a special state (BB2), it is an effect different from the normal effect and the liquid crystal display 51 It is suggested that the special effect of displaying the special image in the entire display area of is not RT0 (non-inside) which is a prerequisite for shifting to RT1 (inside of BB1). It is possible to prompt the shift to RT1 (inside of BB1) at which the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate.

Further, when BB1 wins and shifts to the special state (BB1), the special effect is started at the timing after the final stop operation, which is an opportunity for BB1 to win, so BB1 wins and the special state (BB1). It is possible to clearly recognize that it has moved to.

The same applies to the case where BB2 wins and shifts to the special state (BB2). Since the special effect is started at the timing after the final stop operation that triggers BB2 to win, BB2 wins the special state. It is possible to clearly recognize that the process has moved to (BB2).

In addition, when BB1 and BB2 are won, the timing for starting the special effect may be the timing after the final stop operation, the timing at which the final stop operation is started, or the timing at which the final stop operation is released. Alternatively, the later timing of the timing when the corresponding reel is stopped may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is suggested that the special effect of displaying the special image on the liquid crystal display 51 is not executed, and thus RT0 (non-inside) which is a prerequisite for shifting to RT1 (inside of BB1) is not suggested. However, by controlling the lighting mode of the LED to a special mode different from the normal effect or controlling the output mode of the sound effect to a special mode different from the normal effect, RT1 (inside of BB1) It may be configured to suggest that it is not RT0 (non-inside inside) which is a premise for shifting to middle). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to shift to RT0 (non-inside inside) and further the medal payout rate. Can be urged to shift to RT1 (inside of BB1) where is appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), when BB2 is won, the normal effect continues, as shown in FIG. 12(d). In the situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), the sub control unit 91 receives the internal winning command and specifies the winning of BB2, that is, when the winning flag of BB2 is carried over, It may be configured to execute a special effect. Further, in such a configuration, the special effect may be continuously performed even in the RT2 (inside the BB2) in which the winning flag of the BB2 is carried over. With such a configuration, even when the game state is controlled to RT2 (inside the BB2), the effect is different from the normal effect, and the special image is displayed on the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51. When a special effect for displaying is executed and it is suggested that it is not RT0 (non-inside inside) which is a prerequisite for moving to RT1 (inside inside BB1), it is moved to RT0 (not inside), Further, it is possible to prompt the player to shift to RT1 (inside of BB1) where the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate.

In addition, as described above, a special part is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that is initialized when the setting is changed while the game state (RT0, RT2, BB1, BB2) other than RT1 is controlled. Since information about the gaming state such as the winning flag and the flag indicating the gaming state is included, the power supply is started in the state where the setting operation is performed after the power is cut off in the state of being controlled to the gaming state other than RT1. In this case, if the game state before the power failure is controlled to RT2, BB1, and BB2, the game state before the power failure is not maintained, and in any case, RT0, that is, non-internal. For this reason, even if it is mistakenly moved to RT2, BB1, or BB2, it is possible to shift to RT1 (inside BB1) by resetting the set value without the work of shifting to RT0 by itself. It becomes possible to shift to RT0 (non-inside) which is a premise, and the work to shift to RT1 (inside BB1) where the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate becomes easy. Further, since the predetermined area of the RAM 41c which is initialized when the state is changed to the setting change state while being controlled by the RT1 (inside the BB1), the information regarding the game state is not included. When the power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed after the power is cut off under the control of (inside), RT1 (inside of BB1) is maintained, so that RT1 (inside of BB1) After shifting to (middle), even if the setting value is set, it is not necessary to perform the work for shifting to RT1 (inside BB1) again.

[About internal lottery target]
The internal lottery target combination that is a lottery target in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 will be described based on FIGS. 13 to 30.

The internal lottery target combination includes a plurality of internal lottery target combinations. Each internal lottery target combination includes one or more winning combinations, and when one internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, it means that the winning combination included in the internal lottery target combination is won at the same time. ..

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 30, replay 1A, replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F, replay 2, cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3 and chance replay 1 are included in the internal lottery target combination. , Chance Replay 2, Watermelon, Common 1-sheet, Common 3-sheet, Common Multi-bell, Multi-bell 123A, Multi-bell 123B, Multi-bell 123C, Multi-bell 123D, Multi-bell 132A, Multi-bell 132A 132B, multi-bell 132C, multi-bell 132D, multi-bell 213A, multi-bell 213B, multi-bell 213C, multi-bell 213D, multi-bell 231A, multi-bell 231B, multi-bell 231C, multi-bell 231C 231D, multi-bell 312A, multi-bell 312B, multi-bell 312C, multi-bell 312D, multi-bell 321A, multi-bell 321B, multi-bell 321C, multi-bell 321D, 3-win 123A, 3-win 123B, three-combination 123C, three-combination 123D, three-combination 132A, three-combination 132B, three-combination 132C, three-combination 132D, three-combination 213A, three-combination 213B, three-combination 213C, three-combination 213D, three-piece combination 231A, three-piece combination 231B, three-piece combination 231C, three-piece combination 231D, three-piece combination 312A, three-piece combination 312B, three-piece combination 312C, three-piece combination 312D, three-piece combination 321A, three-piece combination 321B, three-piece combination 321C, three-piece combination 321D, BB1, BB2, BB middle A, and BB middle B are included.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 24, each of the winning combinations other than BB1, BB2, A in BB, and B in BB is a slot machine in a game in which a bet number of 3 is set as a prescribed number. Regardless of the set value (1 to 6) set to 1, while the game state is RT0, RT1, RT2, the lottery target, while when the game state is BB1, BB2, it is not the lottery target It has become. In the internal lottery target combination, BB1 is a set value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and a controlled game state ( Regardless of (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2), the lottery is not selected. In addition, in the game in which the bet number of three is set as the specified number, BB2 of the internal lottery target winning combination is set to RT0 regardless of the set value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1. While controlled, it is targeted for internal lottery, while when the gaming state is controlled to RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2 other than RT0, it is not targeted for internal lottery. In addition, in the game in which the bet number of 3 is set as the stipulated number, A in BB and B in BB among the internal lottery targets are irrespective of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1. When the gaming state is BB1 and BB2, the lottery target is selected, while when the gaming state is controlled to RT0, RT1 and RT2 other than BB1 and BB2, the internal lottery is not selected. Further, of the internal lottery target combinations, Replay 1B is controlled regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in the game in which the bet number of 3 pieces is set as the prescribed number. The probability of winning in the internal lottery differs depending on the gaming state (RT0, RT1, RT2). In addition, in a game in which a bet number of 3 is set as a prescribed number, the probability that any internal lottery target winning combination will not be won in the internal lottery (unwinning) is the set value (1 to 1) set in the slot machine 1. 6) and the game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2), the predetermined probability is greater than 0.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 26, among the internal lottery target combinations, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, BB 1, In the game in which the bet number of two cards is set as the prescribed number, each combination except BB2, A in BB, and B in BB is a game regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1. When the state is RT0, RT1, or RT2, the lottery target is set. Also, among the internal lottery targets, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2 have a bet number of 2 as a prescribed number. In the game to be set, regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and the controlled game state (RT0, RT1, RT2), the game is not set as a lottery target. In addition, in the game in which the bet number of two cards is set as the specified number, BB1 of the internal lottery targets is set to the game state RT0 regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1. While controlled, it is targeted for internal lottery, while when the gaming state is controlled to RT1 and RT2 other than RT0, it is not targeted for internal lottery. Further, among the internal lottery target combinations, BB2 is a set value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and a controlled game state ( Regardless of (RT0, RT1, RT2), the lottery will not be selected. Replay 1A of the internal lottery target combination is controlled regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in the game in which the bet number of 2 is set as the specified number. The probability of winning in the internal lottery differs depending on whether the game state is non-internal (RT0) or internal (RT1, RT2). Further, in a game in which a bet number of 2 is set as the prescribed number, the probability that no internal lottery target winning combination will be won in the internal lottery (unwinning) is the set value (1 to 1) set in the slot machine 1. 6) and the game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2) regardless of the state. When the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, the specified number is only three, so the bet number of two is not set as the specified number, and when the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, the internal lottery is performed. In the game in which the bet number of two pieces is set as the prescribed number, BB in A and BB in 2, which are targeted for the lottery, are not targeted for the internal lottery.

When the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, it is possible to play the game when the bet number of 3 is set as the prescribed number, and the payout of 9 medals is possible with a probability of about 1/6.5. Accompanying BB in A wins, and BB in B accompanied by payout of one medal wins with a probability of about 5.5/6.5. Therefore, one game when the gaming state is BB1 or BB2 The payout rate of the medals is about 69%, and the medals are gradually reduced during the period when the gaming state is controlled to BB1 or BB2.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, a predetermined winning combination number is assigned in advance to each internal lottery target winning combination. Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, Watermelon, 1 common role, 3 common role, A value within the range of 1 to 16 is assigned as each combination number of the common multi-bell. Also, multi-bell 123A, multi-bell 123B, multi-bell 123C, multi-bell 123D, multi-bell 132A, multi-bell 132B, multi-bell 132C, multi-bell 132D, multi-bell 213A, multi-bell 213B, multi-bell 213C, multi-bell 213D, multi-bell 231A, multi-bell 231B, multi-bell 231C, multi-bell 231D, multi-bell 312A, multi-bell 312B, multi-bell 312C, multi-bell 312C A value within the range of 17 to 40 is assigned as each combination number of 312D, multi-bell 321A, multi-bell 321B, multi-bell 321C, and multi-bell 321D. Also, three-role combination 123A, three-role combination 123B, three-role combination 123C, three-role combination 123D, three-role combination 132A, three-role combination 132B, three-role combination 132C, three-role combination 132D, three-role combination 213A, three-role 213B, three-role 213C, three-role 213D, three-role 231A, three-role 231B, three-role 231C, three-role 231D, three-role 312A, three-role 312B, three-role 312C, three-role A value within the range of 41 to 64 is assigned as each combination number of 312D, three-piece combination 321A, three-piece combination 321B, three-piece combination 321C, and three-piece combination 321D. The winning combination number of BB1 is 65, and the winning combination number of BB2 is 66. The winning combination number of A in BB is 66, and the winning combination number of B in BB is 67.

Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, and Chance Replay 2 are re-winning prizes, respectively. In a game in which a gaming role is included and a winning combination of these internal lottery target roles, a re-gaming role is won and a re-gaming is given. Hereinafter, Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2 may be collectively referred to as a replay combination. ..

In addition, among the internal lottery targets, the watermelon, the common one-card combination, the common three-card combination, and the common multi-bell each include a small role as a winning combination, and the winning combinations included in these winning internal lottery combinations are A predetermined number of prizes by winning (for example, 5 watermelons, 1 common 1 role, 3 common 3 roles, 9 common multiple bells, 9 in BB, 9 BBs) (Medium B has one medal).

In addition, multi-bell 123A, multi-bell 123B, multi-bell 123C, multi-bell 123D, multi-bell 132A, multi-bell 132B, multi-bell 132C, multi-bell 132D, multi-bell 213A, multi-bell 213B, multi-bell 213C, multi-bell 213D, multi-bell 231A, multi-bell 231B, multi-bell 231C, multi-bell 231D, multi-bell 312A, multi-bell 312B, multi-bell 312C, multi-bell 312C The 312D, the multi-bell 321A, the multi-bell 321B, the multi-bell 321C, and the multi-bell 321D are stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in predetermined operation modes (in this embodiment, operation order) assigned to each winning combination. Is operated, the number of medals greater than the number of bets (three) in the winning combinations included in each combination (9 in this embodiment) is paid out, and the winning combination is dealt with. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode other than the operation mode, the reduced winning combination in which the number of medals less than or equal to the bet number is paid out can be won. However, there are cases where none of the winning combinations wins. Therefore, multi-bell 123A, multi-bell 123B, multi-bell 123C, multi-bell 123D, multi-bell 132A, multi-bell 132B, multi-bell 132C, multi-bell 132D, multi-bell 213A, multi-bell Bell 213B, multi-bell 213C, multi-bell 213D, multi-bell 231A, multi-bell 231B, multi-bell 231C, multi-bell 231D, multi-bell 312A, multi-bell 312B, multi-bell 312C, multi-bell Whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R were operated in the operation mode according to the type of the winning combination when the bell 312D, the multi-bell 321A, the multi-bell 321B, the multi-bell 321C, and the multi-bell 321D were elected You can change the expected value of the number of medals paid out by.

Below, multi-bell 123A, multi-bell 123B, multi-bell 123C, multi-bell 123D, multi-bell 132A, multi-bell 132B, multi-bell 132C, multi-bell 132D, multi-bell 213A, multi-bell 213B, multi-bell 213C, multi-bell 213D, multi-bell 231A, multi-bell 231B, multi-bell 231C, multi-bell 231D, multi-bell 312A, multi-bell 312B, multi-bell 312C, multi-bell 312C The 312D, the multi-bell 321A, the multi-bell 321B, the multi-bell 321C, and the multi-bell 321D may be collectively referred to as a multi-press pushing win.

When any one of the multiple-push press winning combinations is won, there are many operation modes in which it is possible to win an increasing number of winning combinations included in the multiple-press pressing combination, that is, an operation mode that is advantageous to the player. For the single-bell 123A, multi-bell 123B, multi-bell 123C, and multi-bell 123D, the left reel 2L is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third. It is an operation in order (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a left-middle-right stop operation), and in the multi-bell 132A, multi-bell 132B, multi-bell 132C, multi-bell 132D, the left reel 2L is stopped first. Then, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (in the following, it may be referred to as left/right middle stop operation). The multi-bell 213A, multi-bell In the 213B, the multi-bell 213C, and the multi-bell 213D, the operation sequence is such that the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third (hereinafter, It may be referred to as a middle left/right stop operation), and in the multi-bell 312A, multi-bell 312B, multi-bell 312C, and multi-bell 312D, the middle reel 2C is stopped first and the right reel 2R is second. And the left reel 2L is stopped at the third position (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as middle right/left stop operation). The multi-bell 231A, multi-bell 231B, multi-bell 231C, multi-bell 231C, In the single-bell 231D, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (in the following, it may be referred to as right/left middle stop operation). In the multi-bell 321A, multi-bell 321B, multi-bell 321C, and multi-bell 321D, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is stopped. It is an operation in the order of the third stop operation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as right-middle-left stop operation).

In addition, three-piece combination 123A, three-piece combination 123B, three-piece combination 123C, three-piece combination 123D, three-piece combination 132A, three-piece combination 132B, three-piece combination 132C, three-piece combination 132D, three-piece combination 213A, three-piece combination 213B, three-role 213C, three-role 213D, three-role 231A, three-role 231B, three-role 231C, three-role 231D, three-role 312A, three-role 312B, three-role 312C, three-role 312D, the three-role combination 321A, the three-role combination 321B, the three-role combination 321C, and the three-role combination 321D are the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a predetermined operation mode (in the present embodiment, the operation order) assigned to each combination. By operating, among the winning combinations included in each combination, a combination in which three medals are paid out is won, while the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode. As a result, among the winning combinations included in each winning combination, a winning combination in which less than three medals are paid out may be won, but none of the winning combinations may be won. Therefore, in a game in which the bet number is set to 3 as the prescribed number, the three-role combination 123A, the three-role combination 123B, the three-role combination 123C, the three-role combination 123D, the three-role combination 132A, the three-role combination 132B, and the three-role combination 132B, three. Single role 132C, triple role 132D, triple role 213A, triple role 213B, triple role 213C, triple role 213D, triple role 231A, triple role 231B, triple role 231C, triple role 231D, 3 312A, 3C 312B, 3C 312C, 3C 312D, 3C 321A, 3C 321B, 3C 321C, 3C 321D, depending on the type of winning combination The expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed according to whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in a corresponding operation mode.

Below, three-role combination 123A, three-role combination 123B, three-role combination 123C, three-role combination 123D, three-role combination 132A, three-role combination 132B, three-role combination 132C, three-role combination 132D, three-role combination 213A, three-role combination 213B, 3 pieces combination 213C, 3 pieces combination 213D, 3 pieces combination 231A, 3 pieces combination 231B, 3 pieces combination 231C, 3 pieces combination 231D, 3 pieces combination 312A, 3 pieces combination 312B, 3 pieces combination 312C, 3 pieces combination In some cases, the combination of 312D, the three-role combination 321A, the three-role combination 321B, the three-role combination 321C, and the three-role combination 321D is referred to as a three-push press forward combination.

In a game in which a bet number of 3 is set as a prescribed number, when three-push press winning combination is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode in which a winning combination of three medals is won. As a result, the player can play the game without reducing the medals.

When one of the three-push press winning combinations is won, an operation mode in which a winning combination of three winning medals included in the three-push pressing combination can be won, that is, an advantage for the player In the three-role combination 123A, the three-role combination 123B, the three-role combination 123C, and the three-role combination 123D, the left-middle-right stop operation is performed, and the three-role combination 132A, the three-role combination 132B, the three-role combination 132C, and the three-role combination 132C. In the combination role 132D, it is a middle/left/right stop operation, in the three-part combination 213A, the three-part combination 213B, the three-part combination 213C, and the three-part combination 213D, it is a middle/left/right stop operation, and in the three-part combination 312A, three-part combination 312B, The three-role combination 312C, the three-role combination 312D is a middle right/left stop operation, the three-role combination 231A, the three-role combination 231B, the three-role combination 231C, the three-role combination 231D is a right/left center stop operation, and the three-role combination 321A. The three-role combination 321B, the three-role combination 321C, and the three-role combination 321D are right-middle-left stop operations.

As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the main control unit 41 can shift a game section, which will be described later, to an advantageous section when a predetermined internal lottery target winning combination is won in the internal lottery. In the game in which the bet number of two cards is set as the prescribed number, no matter which internal lottery target winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the game section is not shifted to the advantageous section. Further, in a game in which the bet number of 3 pieces is set as the prescribed number, an advantageous section non-shifting hand (in the present embodiment, replay 1A, replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F) , Replay 2) is won, the game section is not shifted to the advantageous section, while the internal section is used to shift to the advantageous section (cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3, chance replay 1, chance replay in this embodiment). (2, watermelon, common 1-card combination, common 3-card combination, common multi-bell, multi-press normal win, 3-press normal win), the game section is shifted to the advantageous section. There is.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to shift the game section to the advantageous section by winning the predetermined internal lottery target in the internal lottery, but the predetermined internal lottery in the internal lottery. It is also possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section when the target winning combination is elected, and to shift to the advantageous section by winning the lottery.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the main control unit 41 transmits an internal winning command including group information capable of specifying the type of the internal lottery target winning combination won in the internal lottery to the sub-control unit 91. The group information includes special combination information that can specify the winning status of the special combination and general combination information that can specify the winning status of the general combination. The special combination information of the group information is set to 0 when no special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery, 1 is set when the special combination BB1 is elected, and the special combination BB2 is set. When winning, 2 is set. The general role information of the group information is Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, by internal lottery. If any of watermelon, common 1-win, common 3-win, common multi-bell, A in BB, or B in BB is won, the winning number of the winning hand is set, and internal lottery When a multiple-pressing winning combination is won, a common 17 is set regardless of which winning combination is included in the multiple-pressing winning combination, and three winning combinations are selected in the internal lottery. When set, a common 41 is set regardless of which winning combination included in the three-push press winning combination is winning. When no general winning combination is won in the internal lottery, 0 is set. It is supposed to be done.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the main control unit 41 transmits a test signal capable of specifying the winning combination number of the internal lottery target winning combination that is won in the internal lottery, to the test device connected to the slot machine 1. The test signal includes special-role information that can specify the winning situation of the special-role, and general-role information that can specify the winning situation of the general-role. The special combination information is set to 0 when no special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery, 1 is set when the special combination BB1 is selected, and the special combination BB2 is selected. If it is, 2 is set. The general role information is set to the role number of the winning role when any of the internal lottery targets is won in the internal lottery, and when no general role is won in the internal lottery, 0 is set.

The test device connects to the slot machine 1 and automatically performs a simulation test to thereby obtain medals between specific games (for example, 400 games, 1600 games, 6400 games, 17600 games) in the slot machine 1. It is possible to calculate the payout rate between each specific game by totaling the total number of inserted coins and the total number of paid out coins, and inspect whether or not the payout rate falls within the range of a predetermined regulation value. It is a device.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the main control unit 41 can control the AT to notify the navigation, and in a game in which the bet number of two is set as the stipulated number, as described later. In the game in which the navigator notification is not executed by not performing the process related to the navigator notification on the other hand, in the game in which the bet number of 3 pieces is set as the stipulated number, the navigator notification is involved by winning a predetermined navi target as described later. Navigation notification may be performed by performing processing. In a game in which a bet number of 3 is set, for example, a common multi-bell, a multi-pressing winning combination, and a three-pressing winning combination are selected by an internal lottery to perform navigation notification There is.

Further, the main control unit 41 is controlled to any of the payout state A, the payout state B, and the payout state C in which the payout state is controlled by AT in the processing related to the navigation notification, and When the navi target combination corresponding to the payout state is won in the lottery, the sub control unit 91 is provided with a navi number capable of specifying a stop mode advantageous for the player according to the navi target combination. While it is possible to send, the payout status is not controlled by any of the payout status A, the payout status B, and the payout status C, and the AT is not controlled, or the payout is made by an internal lottery. When the navigation target combination corresponding to the state has not been won, it is possible to transmit to the sub-control unit 91 a navigation number for which a stop mode that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified.

As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, when the payout state is controlled to be the payout state A, the main control unit 41 has a combination other than the navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state A in the internal lottery. In the winning game and the game in which none of the parts was won in the internal lottery, while the navigation number is set to 0, the payout state is controlled to be the payout state A, and the payout state is in the internal lottery. In the game in which the navigation target combination corresponding to A is won, 1 to 6 are set as the navigation numbers in accordance with the selected navigation target combination. In addition, when the payout state is controlled to the payout state B, any combination other than the navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state B is won in the internal lottery, and any combination is won in the internal lottery. In the game that did not exist, while the navigation number is set to 0, the payout state is controlled to the payout state B, and in the game in which the navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state B is won in the internal lottery, The navigation numbers 1 to 6 are set according to the selected winning navigation target. In addition, when the payout state is controlled to the payout state C, the winning combination is a game in which a combination other than the navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state C has been won in the internal lottery, and any combination has been won in the internal lottery. In the games that did not exist, while the navigation number is set to 0, the payout state is controlled to the payout state C, and in the game in which the navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state C is won in the internal lottery, The navigation numbers 1 to 6 are set according to the selected winning navigation target.

In addition, the main control unit 41 performs a process related to the navigation notification to display a navigation display capable of specifying a stop mode advantageous to the player according to the navigation target winning combination selected in the internal lottery, as a game auxiliary display. It is possible to perform navigation notification that is displayed on the screen 12 and notifies the player of a stop mode that is advantageous. As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, when the payout state is controlled to the payout state A, a game and an internal lottery in which a combination other than the navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state A is won in the internal lottery In the game in which none of the winning combinations is won, the payout state is controlled to the payout state A while the game auxiliary display 12 is not turned off to display the navigation display. , In the game in which the navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state A is won in the internal lottery, the navigation target which is won by controlling the game auxiliary display 12 to a predetermined lighting state (for example, "12"). The navigation display is displayed according to the role. In addition, when the payout state is controlled to the payout state B, any combination other than the navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state B is won in the internal lottery, and any combination is won in the internal lottery. In the game that did not exist, while the game auxiliary display 12 is not turned off and the navigation display is not displayed, the payout status is controlled to the payout status B, and the payout status is determined by the internal lottery. In the game in which the navigation target combination corresponding to B is won, the game auxiliary display device 12 is controlled to a predetermined lighting state (for example, "12" or the like) to display the navigation display corresponding to the selected navigation target combination. It is designed to let you. In addition, when the payout state is controlled to the payout state C, the winning combination is a game in which a combination other than the navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state C has been won in the internal lottery, and any combination has been won in the internal lottery. In the game that did not exist, while the game auxiliary display 12 is not turned off to display the navigation display, the payout status is controlled to the payout status C, and the payout status is determined by the internal lottery. In the game in which the navigation target combination corresponding to C is won, the game auxiliary display device 12 is controlled to a predetermined lighting state (for example, "12" or the like) to display the navigation display corresponding to the selected navigation target combination. It is designed to let you.

The navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state differs depending on whether it is the payout status A, the payout status B, or the payout status C, and in particular, the multiple-pushing forward combination and the three-pushing order In the payout state C, all of the winning combinations are set as navigation target combinations, whereas in the payout status B, 3/4 of the winning combinations are set as navigation target combinations, and If the payout state A is not set as the navigation target combination, 1/2 of the winning combination is set as the navigation target combination, and 1/2 is not set as the navigation target combination. Thus, depending on whether the payout status is the payout status A, the payout status B, or the payout status C, a navigation number that can specify a stop mode advantageous for the player is set, Also, the navigation target combination to be displayed in the navigation is different, and even if the controlled payout state is any of the payout states A to C in which the AT is controlled, The expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether the state is the payout state A, the payout state B or the payout state C.

In this embodiment, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed by changing the target object for navigation depending on whether it is the payout status A, the payout status B or the payout status C. Although it is a configuration that is possible, the navigation target combination is the same depending on whether it is the payout state A, the payout state B, or the payout state C, but is the payout state A or the payout state. Depending on whether it is the state B or the payout state C, by setting a navigation number that can identify a stop mode that is advantageous to the player at the time of winning the navigation target combination, and changing the ratio at which the navigation display is performed. The configuration may be such that the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed.

[About navigation notification and navigation production]
The mode of navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 and the mode of navigation effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main control unit 41, during a predetermined game that performs processing related to the navigation notification (from when the rotation of the reels is started until when the rotation of all reels is stopped), the navigation selected in the internal lottery. By displaying the navigation display corresponding to the target combination on the game auxiliary display unit 12, it is possible to perform the navigation notification for notifying the stop mode advantageous for the player according to the navigation target combination. Further, the main control unit 41 may transmit a command including a navigation number that can identify a stop mode advantageous to the player to the sub control unit 91 at the start of a predetermined game that performs processing related to navigation notification. It is possible.

On the other hand, in the game in which the stop mode advantageous for the player can be specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 displays the navigation effect for notifying the stop mode on the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. It can be done using.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), the game auxiliary display unit 12 is composed of two display units 12L and 12R capable of turning on/off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and the main control unit 41 displays the respective segments. It is an indicator that can be turned on. By controlling a predetermined segment of each of the display devices 12L and 12R in a lighting manner, a predetermined number (“0” to “9”), a symbol (for example, “−”, “.”, etc.), an alphabetic character (for example, “E”). , Etc.) in 1 digit or 2 digits, it is possible to display the number of medals paid out (not shown), an error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred, and a navigation display that notifies by a navigation notification. It is possible.

As shown in FIG. 31B, during the game in which the navigation number is set to "1" by performing the process related to the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 finds the left stop mode advantageous to the player. In the game in which the navigation display 1 (displaying “12” on the game auxiliary display 12) indicating that the operation is right stop is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and “2” is set as the navigation number Displays a navigation display 2 (displaying "13" on the game auxiliary display 12) on the game auxiliary display 12, which suggests that the stop mode that is advantageous to the player is the left and right middle stop operation. In the game in which "3" is set as, the navigation display 3 (the display for displaying "21" on the game auxiliary display 12) suggesting that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the middle left/right stop operation. During the game displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation number is set to "4", the navigation display 4 (game auxiliary display 4) suggests that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the middle right left stop operation. Displaying "23" on 12) is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12, and during the game in which "5" is set as the navigation number, the right and left middle stop operation is a stop mode that is advantageous for the player. It is advantageous for the player during the game that the navigation display 5 (displaying "31" on the game auxiliary display 12) indicating "" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and "6" is set as the navigation number. A navigation display 6 (displaying "32" on the game auxiliary display 12) indicating that the stop mode is a right-middle-left stop operation is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, the sub control unit 91 is advantageous to the player during the game in which the navigation number “1” is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41. Image 1 suggesting that the stop mode is the left-middle-right stop operation (for example, "1" is displayed in the display area corresponding to the stop switch 8L in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, and the stop switch 8C is displayed. In the game in which the navigation number "2" is specified by displaying "2" in the corresponding display area and displaying "3" in the display area corresponding to the stop switch 8R on the liquid crystal display 51. In the above, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the navigation image 2 indicating that the stop mode that is advantageous to the player is the left/right center stop operation, and during the game in which the navigation number “3” is specified, During the game in which the navigation image 3 indicating that the advantageous stop mode is the center left/right stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and the navigation number "4" is specified, the advantageous stop mode for the player is medium. During the game in which the navigation image 4 indicating the right/left stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and the navigation number “5” is specified, the right/left middle stop operation is a stop mode advantageous for the player. In the game in which the navi number 5 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and the navi number "6" is specified, the navi image suggesting that the stop mode that is advantageous to the player is the right-middle-left stop operation. 6 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

In the present embodiment, in the navigation notification, the operation order (correct answer pressing order) is notified as an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous to the player, but the navigation notification notifies the player. It may be a configuration that suggests the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player, or a configuration that suggests a combination of the operation order and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player. For example, when the operation mode of the stop switch, which is advantageous to the player, is the predetermined operation timing for the predetermined reel, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the symbol number or the like corresponding to the predetermined operation timing on the predetermined reel. The operation mode can be suggested by displaying it together with the corresponding number or by displaying the image of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined operation timing on the liquid crystal display 51 at the position corresponding to the predetermined reel. is there.

[About the game section]
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control either the normal section or the advantageous section as the game section.

The normal section is a game section in which navigation information is not given, and is started by starting the next game after the advantageous section is ended. After that, in the normal section, as described above, the bet number of 3 pieces is set as the prescribed number, and in the game in which the gaming state is controlled to the state other than the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section transition combination is performed by the internal lottery. It ends in the winning game. In the normal section, the section display LED 19 is always controlled to be in the off state.

The advantageous section is a game section in which navigation notification may be performed, and is a gaming section that is advantageous as compared with the normal section because navigation notification can be executed. In the advantageous section, the bet number of three bets is set as the stipulated number in the normal section, and the advantageous section transition hand is won by the internal lottery in the game in which the game state is controlled to the game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2). Then, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the next game is started. After that, the predetermined advantageous zone end conditions (end conditions 1 to 3 described later) are satisfied, and the process is ended. In the advantageous section, the navigation notification is first performed after the start of the advantageous section, and at the start of the game in which the payout rate (the number of payouts/the number of bets) of medals can exceed 100%, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized. A predetermined value (1) different from the value (0) is set, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to be in a lighting state, so that section display for informing that the advantageous section is controlled is started. The output buffer of the section display LED 19 is included in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c which is initialized when the setting is changed or when the advantageous section is ended. When the advantageous section is ended, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized and the initial value (0) is set, so that the section display LED 19 is controlled to the off state and the section display is ended. Has become.

A predetermined navi condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (in the present embodiment, the AT state described later is controlled, a bet number of 3 pieces is set as a prescribed number, and the navi target winning combination is won in the internal lottery. By doing so, it is possible to perform the navigation notification, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous for the player is notified.

The main control unit 41 controls the AT under the AT lottery conditions (when the AT lottery target winning combination is won in the internal lottery and when the point value described later reaches a specified value) while controlling the advantageous section. An AT lottery is performed to determine whether or not. Then, by winning the AT lottery, the AT is shifted to the payout state (the payout state A, the payout state B, the payout state C) in which the AT is controlled. Then, in the case where the AT is controlled to a payout state in which the AT is controlled, when the navigation target combination corresponding to the payout state is won in the internal lottery, the navigation notification control (the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed) Control for displaying the navigation display, control for transmitting a command capable of specifying the navigation number corresponding to the navigation display, etc.) to notify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous to the player. The advantageous section is a gaming section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section.

The end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the first specified number (1500 games in this embodiment) defined as the upper limit number of games. The second prescribed number defined as the upper limit number is the net additional number of medals after the increase/decrease number of medals has changed from the decreasing tendency to the increasing tendency in the advantageous section (in the present embodiment, 2394 (from 2400 upper limit number to slot machine End condition 2, which is satisfied by subtracting the maximum value (9) of the number of payouts in 1 and adding the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet number), the number of advantageous section games And a termination condition that can be satisfied without being based on the net increase in the number of medals, and a predetermined arbitrary condition (in this embodiment, the AT2 state described later is terminated and the navigation stock described later does not remain). The end condition 3 that is satisfied when the condition is satisfied is included, and the advantageous section is ended when at least one of the end conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, a predetermined advantageous section transition combination is elected, so that the game section is shifted to the advantageous section. When controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition lottery target winning in the internal lottery wins the advantageous section transition lottery, and the advantageous section transition lottery wins the game section It may be configured to shift to.

[Regarding the flow from the normal section to the AT state]
Next, a flow from the normal control section 41 to the control from the normal section to the AT state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the advantageous section transition winning combination is won in the normal section, the main control unit 41 determines from a plurality of predetermined values after the internal lottery and before the reel starts to rotate. A specified value lottery for determining the value is performed, and the selected specified value is set in the RAM 41c. In the prescribed value lottery, the prescribed value that is easily determined differs depending on the result of the internal lottery, that is, the type of winning advantageous zone transition combination. In particular, when an AT lottery target, which will be described later, among the advantageous zone transition winning combinations is elected, a smaller value is easily determined than when other advantageous zone transition winning combinations are elected, and the AT lottery is not performed. Even when the AT lottery target winning combination is won in the normal section, it can be expected that the point value required until the later-described second AT lottery is performed after the transition to the advantageous section can be expected to be small.

Next, after the prescribed value lottery, before the rotation of the reels starts, the main control unit 41 performs an initial value lottery to determine an initial value from a plurality of predetermined values, and the winning initial value is used as a point value. Set in the RAM 41c. In the initial value lottery, the initial value that is easily determined differs depending on the result of the internal lottery, that is, the type of winning advantageous zone transition combination. In particular, when an AT lottery target, which will be described later, among the advantageous zone transition winning combinations is elected, a larger value is more likely to be determined than when other advantageous zone transition winning combinations are elected, and the AT lottery is not performed. Even if the AT lottery target winning combination is won in the normal section, it can be expected that a large initial value is set as the initial value of the point value.

In addition, when the advantageous zone transition winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 transmits an internal winning command capable of specifying the winning of the advantageous zone transition winning combination to the sub control unit 91, and the specified value lottery is performed. A specified value command that can specify the specified value that has been won and an initial value command that can specify the initial value that has been selected in the initial value lottery are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. All of these commands are transmitted when the game starts.

Further, when the advantageous section transition combination is won in the normal section, the main control unit 41 sets the specified value and the initial value as described above, and then shifts to the advantageous section from the next game.

After shifting to the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 increments the advantageous section game number counter for each game in each game. The advantageous section game number counter is a counter assigned to the RAM 41c for counting the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section, and the main control unit 41 updates the advantageous section game number counter and then calculates the advantageous section game number. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter has reached the ceiling price (1000 in this embodiment). When the value of the advantageous section game number counter has reached the ceiling value, the AT state is reached after a warning period over a predetermined number of games. Control. At this time, the main control unit 41 issues a ceiling arrival command that can specify that the value of the advantageous section game number counter has reached the ceiling price and a precursor period command that can specify the number of games controlled in the precursor period to the sub control unit 91. Send to.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter does not reach the ceiling price, the AT lottery target winning combination (in this embodiment, cherry 1 to 3, chance replay 1, 2, watermelon, common 1). It is determined whether or not the winning combination has been won, and if the winning combination targeted for AT lottery is won, the first AT lottery for determining whether or not to control the AT state is performed. When the first AT lottery is performed, the main control unit 41 transmits a first AT lottery result command capable of specifying the result to the sub control unit 91. Even when the player wins the first AT lottery, the AT state is controlled after a precursory period of a predetermined number of games. At this time, the main control unit 41 transmits a precursory period command capable of specifying the number of games controlled in the precursory period to the sub control unit 91.

In addition, the main control unit 41 determines the addition value to the point value from a plurality of predetermined values when the AT lottery target combination has not been won and when the first AT lottery has not been won. The winning value is added to the point value set in the RAM 41c. In the additional value lottery, the additional value that is easily determined differs depending on the result of the internal lottery of the game. In particular, when the AT lottery target wins, it is easier to decide a larger value than when other lottery results are obtained, and even if the AT lottery target wins and does not win the first AT lottery, points It can be expected that the value will be added significantly. At this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 an addition value command that can specify the addition value to be added to the point value.

Then, after adding the point value, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the point value reaches a specified value set in the RAM 41c, and if it is less than the specified value, the value of the game number counter is The above control is performed for each game until the ceiling value is reached, the first AT lottery is won, or the point value reaches a specified value set in the RAM 41c.

On the other hand, when the point value reaches the specified value set in the RAM 41c, the main control unit 41 performs the second AT lottery that determines whether to control the AT state. In the 2nd AT lottery, the probability of winning in the AT state is set higher than in the 1st AT lottery, and when the point value reaches the specified value than when the winning combination targeted for AT lottery is won, the AT state is controlled. Can be expected to. When the second AT lottery is performed, the main control unit 41 transmits a second AT lottery result command that can specify the result to the sub-control unit 91.

When the second AT lottery is won, the main control unit 41 controls to the AT state after a warning period over a predetermined number of games. At this time, the main control unit 41 transmits a precursory period command capable of specifying the number of games controlled in the precursory period to the sub control unit 91.

In addition, the main control unit 41 ends the advantageous section after the end of the AT state, and controls again to the normal section.

On the other hand, when the second AT lottery is not won, the main control unit 41 performs the same prescribed value lottery and initial value lottery as when the advantageous zone transition hand is won in the normal zone while maintaining the advantageous zone, and wins. The new specified value is set in the RAM 41c, the point value is further initialized, and the winning initial value is set as the point value in the RAM 41c again, and these controls are performed by checking whether the value of the game number counter reaches the ceiling value or not. Repeat until the 1AT lottery or the 2nd AT lottery is won and the AT state is controlled.

Further, in the specified value lottery that is performed when the second AT lottery is not won, the specified value that is easy to be decided differs depending on the result of the internal lottery in the game in which the second AT lottery is performed. When an AT lottery target that becomes a lottery is won, a smaller value is more likely to be decided than when other lottery results are obtained, and even when the AT lottery target is won and the first AT lottery is not won Therefore, it can be expected that the point value required until the next second AT lottery is performed is small.

In addition, in the initial value lottery performed when the second AT lottery is not won, the initial value that is easily determined is different depending on the result of the internal lottery in the game in which the second AT lottery is performed. When an AT lottery target that becomes a lottery has been won, it is easier to determine a larger value than when the other lottery results are obtained, and even when the AT lottery target wins and does not win the first AT lottery , It can be expected that a large initial value is set as the initial value of the point value.

Further, the main control unit 41 does not win the second AT lottery, and even when the specified value lottery and the initial value lottery are performed, the specified value command and the initial value lottery that can specify the specified value won in the specified value lottery. The initial value commands capable of specifying the initial values won in are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, respectively.

When the number of bets is two, the advantageous section game number counter is not added, and the ceiling price is not reached with a smaller number of medals than when the game is performed with three bets. .. Further, even when the number of bets is two, the point value is not added, and the second AT lottery is not performed with a smaller number of medals than when the game is performed with three bets. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the transition to the advantageous section, not only when the first AT lottery performed when the AT lottery target winning combination is won, but also when the points updated in the advantageous section reach the specified value. Even if the player wins the second AT lottery, which is performed in the second AT lottery, the player is controlled to the AT state advantageous to the player. Therefore, even if the AT lottery target winning combination is not won, it can be expected to be controlled to the AT state.

Further, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made, the specified value that is easily determined according to the type of the advantageous section transition hand that triggered the change, the second AT lottery is first performed after the transition to the advantageous section. The period up to can be changed. In addition, since the initial value that is easily determined differs depending on the type of the advantageous zone transition combination that has triggered the transition to the advantageous zone, the point value that is initially set after the transition to the advantageous zone can be changed.

In addition, when the point value reaches the specified value after the transition to the advantageous section and the second AT lottery is performed and the second AT lottery is not won, the specified value and the initial value are determined again. , At that time, the prescribed value that is easily determined according to the result of the internal lottery in which the second AT lottery is performed is different, and the initial value that is easily determined according to the result of the internal lottery in which the second AT lottery is performed is different. Even if the second AT lottery is not won after the shift to the advantageous section and the prescribed value and the initial value are decided again, the period until the next second AT lottery can be changed and is set first. The point value can be changed.

Also, after the transition to the advantageous zone, even if the number of games that have passed without winning the first AT lottery and winning the second AT lottery has reached the ceiling price, it will be controlled to the AT state, so it is extremely Moreover, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, after the transition to the advantageous section, the winning probability of the second AT lottery may be changed according to the number of times the second AT lottery has been performed. By increasing the winning probability of the second AT lottery, it is possible to expect that the point value will reach the specified value over a specific number of times and be controlled to the AT state. Further, in the second AT lottery for the predetermined number of times, the player may be made to win the AT state without fail, which can prevent the player from being extremely disadvantageous.

[About notification of point value]
As shown in FIG. 33A, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 to hide the point display unit that displays the current point value in the normal section. In this state, when the advantageous zone transition winning combination is won on the main control unit 41 side, the initial value lottery is performed at that time, and the initial value determined in the RAM 41c is set as the point value, and at the same time as that point. The internal winning command that can specify the winning of the advantageous zone transition combination and the initial value command that can specify the initial value that was won by the initial value lottery will be transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Even when an internal winning command or an initial value command capable of specifying the winning of the advantageous zone transition combination is received, at that timing, as shown in FIG. 33B, the point display unit is kept in the non-display state. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 33C, the sub control unit 91 is transmitted from the main control unit 41 at the timing after the final stop operation in the game in which the command capable of specifying the winning of the advantageous zone transition combination is received. When the prize determination command is received, that is, at the timing after the final stop operation in the game in which the advantageous zone transition combination is won, the point display unit is set to the liquid crystal display with the initial value specified from the initial value command received in the game as the display value. 51 is displayed.

From the next game, it will be controlled to the advantageous section, and in the advantageous section, an addition value command that can specify the addition value of the points determined by the main control unit 41 side at each game start will be transmitted. Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 updates the point value displayed on the point display unit to a value obtained by adding the addition value specified by the addition value command every time the addition value command is received.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the second AT lottery result command in the advantageous section and specifies that the second AT lottery is won, the sub-control unit 91 determines the number of games in the precursory period specified by the precursory period command transmitted thereafter. The chance zone (CZ) state is controlled. In the CZ state, the sub control unit 91 performs a CZ effect that suggests that the AT state is highly likely to be won, and notifies that the AT state is controlled in the final game of the precursory period. Then, since the point value is not updated after the second AT lottery is won and the CZ effect is performed, the sub control unit 91 hides the point display unit.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the second AT lottery result command in the advantageous section and it is specified that the second AT lottery has not been won, the sub-control unit 91 determines the number of games from a plurality of games, The CZ state is controlled over the determined number of games. In this case as well, the sub control unit 91 performs the CZ effect. When the CZ state is controlled without winning the second AT lottery, the main control unit 41 determines the specified value and the initial value, and the point value is updated in each game. However, the sub-control unit 91 keeps the point display unit in the non-display state until the CZ state ends, so that it is not specified that the second AT lottery has not been won. After that, the sub control unit 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the point display unit with the latest point value at that time as the display value at the start of the next game when the CZ state ends.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the ceiling arrival command in the advantageous section, the sub-control unit 91 receives the first AT lottery result command, and when the fact that the first AT lottery is won is specified, the sub-control unit 91 transmits the precursor period command. Control the omen state for the number of games in the omen period specified. The sub-control unit 91 performs a precursor effect that suggests the possibility of winning the AT state in the precursory state, and notifies that the AT state is controlled in the final game of the precursory period. Then, since the sub-control unit 91 does not update the point value after the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the ceiling value and the precursor effect is performed or when the first AT lottery is won and the predictive effect is performed, the point value is not updated. Hide the point display section.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the first AT lottery result command in the advantageous section and it is specified that the first AT lottery has not been won, the sub-control unit 91 determines any one of the plurality of games, Control the warning state over the determined number of games. In this case as well, the sub control unit 91 performs the indication effect. Further, when the player is controlled to the precursory state without winning the first AT lottery, the point value is updated in each game on the main control unit 41 side, but the sub-control unit 91 ends the precursory state. Until the point, the point display unit is in the non-display state, so that it is not specified that the first AT lottery has not been won. Then, the sub-control unit 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the point display unit with the latest point value at that time as the display value at the start of the next game when the precursory state ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the advantageous section transition combination is won in the normal section and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the point display unit is displayed to update the points updated during the advantageous section. Since the display of the value is started, it can be suggested that the advantageous display is started by displaying the point display unit from the non-display state of the point display unit.

In the present embodiment, the point display unit is displayed from the non-display state to suggest that the point display unit is moved to the advantageous section, but the point display unit is displayed even in the normal section. In the normal section, for example, a value other than “−−” is displayed in the point display section, while “00” is displayed in the point display section in the game in which it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. Alternatively, a configuration in which a numerical value is displayed, such as "01," suggests that the shift to the advantageous section is possible. In addition, the point display section is displayed both in the normal section and the advantageous section, and in the game in which it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the point display section is decorated with decorations not applied in the normal section. For example, by changing the mode of the point display unit, it may be suggested that the shift to the advantageous section is made.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the advantageous section transition winning combination is elected in the normal section and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the point value display is not started at the timing when the start operation of the game is performed, Since the point display section is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 at the timing after the final stop operation in the game and the display of the point value is started, expect to shift to the advantageous section until the final stop operation is performed. You can

It should be noted that the timing after the final stop operation in the game in which the advantageous section transition hand is elected in the normal section and the transition to the advantageous section is decided may be the timing after the final stop operation, and the final stop operation is started. The timing may be either the timing when the final stop operation is released or the timing when the corresponding reel is stopped, whichever is later. Further, in the case where the advantageous zone transition winning combination is won and the payout of medals is accompanied, the timing at which the payout of medals is completed may be used.

[About the flow of AT status]
Next, control regarding the AT state performed by the main control unit 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 34(a), the main control unit 41 wins the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery described above in the non-AT state in which the AT state is not controlled, or When the ceiling value is reached, the AT state is controlled.

In the AT state, the main control unit 41 can control a plurality of states including an AT1 state, an AT2 state, an addition state, and an ED state.

When transitioning to the AT state, the main control unit 41 first controls the AT1 state, as shown in FIG. In the AT1 state, as shown in FIG. 34(b), the payout state C is controlled, and in the payout state C, as described above, the multi-push forward combination and the 3-push forward combination are performed. Although there is a 100% probability that the navigation will be notified at the time of winning, the payout rate of medals per game will be approximately 237%, although the average will be slightly increased depending on the set value, and the average net additional number per game will be approximately 4. Will be one. In addition, in the AT1 state, when winning a specific combination (cherry 1 to cherry 3, chance replay 1, 2, watermelon, one common combination), it is determined whether or not to give the navigation stock that is the right to control in the AT1 state. Navi stock lottery to be done. The winning probability of the navigation stock in the AT1 state is set to a low probability (about 1/5 to about 1/40 in this embodiment). In the AT1 state, 10 times is set as the remaining number of navigation notifications at the time of start, and the remaining number of navigation notifications becomes 0, that is, when the navigation notification is performed 10 times in the AT1 state, the process ends.

When the AT1 state ends, the main control unit 41 controls the AT2 state as shown in FIG. In the AT2 state, as shown in FIG. 34(b), the payout state A is controlled, and in the payout state A, as described above, the multi-push forward combination and the 3-push forward combination are performed. Although there is a 50% probability that the navigator will be notified at the time of winning, the payout rate of medals per game will be about 152%, although the average payout rate per game will be about 1. It will be 6 sheets. Further, even in the AT2 state, the navigation stock lottery is performed when the specific winning combination is won. The winning probability of the navigation stock in the AT2 state is also set to a low probability (about 1/5 to about 1/40 in this embodiment). In the AT2 state, 30 is set as the number of remaining games at the start, and when the number of remaining games becomes 0, that is, after 30 games have elapsed after the start of the AT2 state, the AT2 state ends. The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the navigation stock remains at the end of AT2, and if the navigation stock remains, the main control unit 41 again controls to the AT1 state. On the other hand, when no navigation stock remains, the AT state is ended and the non-AT state is entered.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 34A, when the main control unit 41 wins the additional state lottery in the AT2 state, the main control unit 41 suspends the AT2 state and controls the additional state. In the addition state, as shown in FIG. 34(b), it is controlled to the payout state A. In the payout state A, as described above, the multi-push forward combination and the 3-push forward combination are performed. Although there is a 50% probability that the navigator will be notified at the time of winning, the payout rate of medals per game will be about 152%, although the average payout rate per game will be about 1. It will be 6 sheets. In addition, in the addition state, the navigation stock lottery is performed in all the games. The winning probability of the navigation stock in the added state is set to a higher probability than that in the second AT state (in this embodiment, about 1/5 except when the specific combination is won, and 1/1 when the specific combination is won). In the addition state, the number of games of either 10 games or 20 games is set as the number of remaining games at the start, and the number of remaining games becomes 0, that is, 10 games or 20 games have elapsed after the start of the addition state. It ends with that. When the loading state ends, the main control unit 41 restores the interrupted AT2 state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 34(a), the main control unit 41 establishes the ED transition condition when the ED transition condition is satisfied, regardless of which of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state is controlled. To control. At this time, the main control unit 41 controls from the game next to the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied to the ED state, and at the timing when the game start operation for starting the ED state is performed for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 2 The progress of the game (start of rotation of the reel) is delayed over a period of 2 seconds to control the ED freeze state. In the ED state, as shown in FIG. 34(b), the payout state B is controlled, and in the payout state B, as described above, the multi-pushing forward operation and the 3-pushing forward operation are performed. Although there is a 75% probability that the navigation notification will be given at the time of winning, the payout rate of medals per game will be about 194%, although the average will be slightly increased depending on the set value, and the average net increase per game will be about 1. It will be 9 sheets. In the ED state, the navigation stock lottery is not performed. In the ED state, the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the first specified number (1500 games in this embodiment) and the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied, or the net increase of medals in the advantageous section. When the number of sheets exceeds the second specified number (2394 in this embodiment), the advantageous condition ending condition 2 is satisfied, and the advantageous period ends.

Although the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number, it may be satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds the first specified number. good. The advantageous condition end condition 2 is satisfied when the net number of medals in the advantageous period exceeds the second specified number, but the net number of medals in the advantageous period becomes equal to or more than the second specified number. It can also be established.

The ED transition condition is that the net increase in the number of medals after the change in the increase/decrease number of medals from the decreasing tendency to the increasing tendency in the advantageous section, that is, the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is the third specified number (this In the embodiment, the first ED transition condition that is satisfied by exceeding 2250) and the net number of medals after being controlled to the AT state are smaller than the third specified number by the fourth specified number (in the present example, 1700) and the rest of the navigation stock exceeds a predetermined number (7 in this embodiment) and the second ED transition condition, and the bet number is 3 in the advantageous section and the game state is RT1. And a third ED transition condition that is satisfied when the number of existing games (the number of ED transition games) reaches the fifth prescribed number (1420 in this embodiment).

In any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state, if the increasing operation is won by performing the stop operation in the stop order notified in the game in which the navigation notification is performed, after being controlled to the AT state The first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition may be satisfied due to the increase in the net increase in the number of medals, and the state may shift to the ED state.

In addition, in the AT2 state or the added state, even if the game does not give the navigation notification at a rate of 50% when the winning combination of multiple presses that can increase the net number of medals is won, the navigation notification is not given. , When the winning combination is won by itself, the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition is established by the increase of the net number of medals after being controlled to the AT state, and it is possible to shift to the ED state. is there.

Further, in any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state, when a watermelon that is not the subject of the navigation notification wins, the first ED increases due to an increase in the number of medals added after being controlled to the AT state. The transition condition or the second ED transition condition is satisfied, and the transition to the ED state may occur.

In addition, in any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state, when the navigation stock is won in the game in which the specific player who is the target of the navigation stock lottery is won, the remaining number of the navigation stock is equal to or more than the predetermined number. As a result, the second ED shift condition may be satisfied, and the ED state may shift.

Further, in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, the third ED transition condition is satisfied by increasing the number of games in which the bet number is 3 and the game state is RT1 in the advantageous section, and the ED It may shift to a state.

The first ED transition condition is established when the net number of medals added after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third specified number, but the net number of medals added after being controlled to the AT state is the first. It may also be established when the number is 3 or more. The second ED transition condition requires that the net number of medals added after the AT state is controlled exceeds the fourth prescribed number, but the net number of medals added after the AT state is controlled is It may be a requirement that the number is equal to or greater than the fourth prescribed number. The second ED transition condition requires that the rest of the navigation stock is equal to or more than the predetermined number, but may be the requirement that the remaining amount of the navigation stock exceeds the predetermined number. The third ED transition condition is satisfied when the number of ED transition games reaches the fifth prescribed number, but may be satisfied when the number of ED transition games exceeds the fifth prescribed number.

In one AT1 state, it takes an average of 14.4 games until the end, that is, until the navigation notification is made 10 times, and the average net increase in number of games per game is about 4.1. The average net addition number per time is about 59. In addition, in one AT2 state, 30 games are required until the end, and the average net increase per game is about 1.6. Therefore, the average net increase per AT2 is about 48. is there. Further, since one navigation stock remains, the AT1 state and the AT2 state are controlled once, so that a net increase of about 107 medals per navigation stock can be expected. When the second ED transition condition is satisfied, the net number of medals to be added exceeds 1700 at that time, and it is possible to expect a net increase of about 742 by consuming all 7 of the navigation stock. Therefore, the predicted net additional number of medals that will be predicted in the future when all of the navigation stock is consumed is 2442. Therefore, in the second ED transition condition, the predicted net increase in number of sheets exceeds the number of 2250 sheets in which the first ED transition condition is satisfied, and the number of sheets in excess of 2394 sheets in which the advantageous condition end condition 2 is satisfied. Will be established by.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the AT1, AT2, and additional states, the net number of medals added after being controlled to the AT state at the time of winning the watermelon, the multiple-common bell, and the multiple-press pushing combination increases. There is a possibility that the 1ED transition condition or the 2nd ED transition condition will be met, and when a specific combination (cherry 1 to cherry 3, chance replay 1, 2, watermelon, common 1-card combination) is won, a navistock lottery is conducted. As a result, the second ED transition condition may be satisfied, while the replay 1A to the replay 1F, the replay 2, the common three-card combination, and the three-card pushing normal combination are elected, the first ED transition condition and the second ED transition condition are also satisfied. There is no possibility. That is, it includes a shiftable hand in which the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition can be satisfied, and a non-shiftable hand in which neither the first ED transition condition nor the second ED transition condition is satisfied. Then, the sub-control unit 91, in a state after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, a performance mode when the shiftable combination is won and a performance mode when the non-shiftable combination is won, May be controlled so as to be different, and with such a configuration, it is specified whether or not the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition can be satisfied in the game from the difference in the rendering mode. be able to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the transition to the AT state, the ED transition condition is satisfied, so that the ED state is controlled. In the present embodiment, the ED state is advantageous because the ED transition condition, which is satisfied when the net number of medals and the number of navistocks after being controlled to the AT state satisfy the predetermined conditions, is satisfied. It is a state in which the AT state is guaranteed to continue until the end condition of the section is satisfied, that is, until the period during which the AT state can be controlled ends. Therefore, by shifting to the ED state after shifting to the AT state, it is possible to guarantee a certain increase in medals, and the game can be played with peace of mind as compared to the state in which the ending condition before shifting to the ED state changes. It can be carried out.

In the present embodiment, after the transition to the AT state, the ED transition condition is satisfied, so that the AT state is controlled to continue until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. After the transition to the ED, the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled, so that a predetermined profit (the number of games controlled to the AT state, the number of times the navigator is notified, and the medal that can be increased in the AT state It is not always necessary to continue the ED state until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and after the transition to the ED state, the ED state is satisfied before the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. The configuration may end.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the transition to the AT state, until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the state can be controlled to a plurality of states including the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state, while the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is satisfied. After shifting to, the ED state is controlled only until the AT state ends, and while the game characteristics can be changed until the ED shifting condition is satisfied, the ED shifting condition can be given. After is established, stable game play can be achieved.

In the present embodiment, the number of times of navigation (the number of times of notification of navigation), which is the condition for ending the AT1 state, is fixed to 10 in the AT1 state, but any number of times can be selected from a plurality of times. The number of times of navigation, which is the ending condition of the AT1 state, may be changed by increasing the number of times of navigation when the condition of addition is satisfied. Further, the AT1 state is configured to end in accordance with the number of times of navigation, but the AT1 state may be configured to end when the remaining game number is set to 0 as in the AT2 state. Even in such a configuration, the number of remaining games to be set as the ending condition of the AT1 state varies by selecting the remaining number of games initially set from a plurality or by adding the number of remaining games when the condition for addition is satisfied. It may be configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state, which is a condition for ending the AT2 state, is fixed to 30 games. However, the remaining number of games is selected from a plurality of games, and the addition condition is satisfied. The number of remaining games, which is the ending condition of the AT2 state, may be changed by adding the number of remaining games. Further, the AT2 state is configured to end when the number of remaining games becomes 0, but it may be configured to end according to the number of times of navigation as in the AT1 state. Even in such a configuration, the number of times of navigation, which is the ending condition of the AT2 state, may be changed by selecting the number of times of navigation initially set from a plurality of times or adding the number of times of navigation by addition condition being satisfied. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the added-on state has a configuration in which the number of remaining games as the ending condition of the added-on state is selected from 10 games or 20 games, but the initially set remaining number of games is fixed. It may be configured. Further, the number of remaining games may be added when the addition condition is satisfied. Further, the addition state is configured to end when the number of remaining games becomes 0, but may be configured to end according to the number of times of navigation as in the AT1 state. Even in such a configuration, the number of times of navigation, which is the end condition of the additional state, may be changed by selecting from a plurality of initially set numbers of times of navigation or by adding the number of times of navigation when the addition condition is satisfied. Further, the added-on state is a configuration that is shifted by winning the added-on state in the AT2 state, but may be a configuration that is shifted by winning the added-on state in the AT1 state. In addition, in the addition state, the winning probability of the navigation stock is set to be higher than in other states, so that the navigation stock is more likely to be added, but during the period in which the AT2 state is controlled, such as the number of remaining games in the AT2 state. May be added more easily than when it is controlled to the AT2 state. Further, as long as the AT1 state can be shifted to the additional state, the number of times of navigation in the AT1 state or the like may be increased more easily than when the AT1 state is controlled in the AT1 state.

In the present embodiment, as a state after the transition to the AT state and until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the AT1 state in which the navigation notification is performed at a rate of 100% at the time of winning the multiple-push forward combination, the three-push forward combination, A configuration that includes a multi-pushing winning combination, a navigation notification of 50% AT2 state at the time of winning a three-pushing winning combination, that is, a ratio of navigation notifications performed when winning a multi-pushing winning combination and a three-pushing winning combination is different. Since the configuration includes a plurality of states, it is possible to change the medal acquisition amount until the ED transition condition is satisfied.

In addition, as a state after the transition to the AT state and until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the first state in which the navigation notification is performed when the multi-push forward combination, the triple-push forward combination is elected, and the multi-push forward combination. A configuration including a second state in which navigation notification is not performed when the player presses the winning combination is also possible. Even in such a configuration, the amount of medals acquired can be changed until the ED transition condition is satisfied. In addition, the amount of medals acquired can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

Further, in the configuration including the first state in which the navigation notification is performed and the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed as the state until the ED transition condition is satisfied after the transition to the AT state, in the second state, Is likely to decrease the number of medals added after being controlled to the AT state, but even in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, it will increase by itself in the game in which multiple pushes win is won When a winning combination is won, the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition may be established due to an increase in the number of medals that have been added since the AT state was controlled, and the state may transition to the ED state.

Even if the navigation information is not displayed in the second state, if a watermelon that is not the navigation notification target wins, the net addition number of medals after being controlled to the AT state increases and the first ED shifts. The condition or the second ED transition condition may be satisfied and the state may shift to the ED state.

Further, even in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, when the navigation stock is won in the game in which the specific player who is the target of the navigation stock lottery is won, the remaining number of the navigation stock becomes the predetermined number or more. As a result, the second ED shift condition may be satisfied, and the ED state may shift.

Even in the second state in which the navigation information is not issued, the third ED transition condition is satisfied by the increase in the number of games in which the bet number is 3 and the game state is RT1 in the advantageous section, and the ED state is established. May move to.

Even in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed as described above, the first ED transition condition, the second ED transition condition, and the third ED transition condition may be satisfied. In the configuration including the first state in which the navigation information is given when the winning combination is won, and the second state in which the navigation information is not given when the multi-pushing multiple winning order and the three-piece pushing normal combination are won, the state is controlled to the first state. Regardless of whether the ED transition condition is established or the second state is controlled, the ED state is entered when the ED transition condition is satisfied.

Further, in the configuration including the first state in which the navigation notification is performed and the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed as the state until the ED transition condition is satisfied after the transition to the AT state, the navigation notification is performed. In the first state, the ED transition condition is satisfied when the winning combination is won in the game for which the navigation notification has been made, and the ED state is entered, while in the second state where the navigation notification is not made, the navigation notification is given. It may be configured such that the player does not enter the ED state even if the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning the increasing role by himself without performing it. With such a configuration, the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed is further enhanced. Can be increased.

Further, in the configuration including the first state in which the navigation notification is performed and the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed as the state until the ED transition condition is satisfied after the transition to the AT state, the navigation notification is performed. In the first state, a watermelon that is not the subject of navigation notification wins, and the ED transition condition is satisfied to shift to the ED state, while in the second state in which navigation notification is not performed, it is not subject to navigation notification. Even if the watermelon wins the prize and the ED transition condition is satisfied, the configuration may not be changed to the ED state. With such a configuration, the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed can be further enhanced. ..

Further, in the configuration including the first state in which the navigation notification is performed and the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed as the state until the ED transition condition is satisfied after the transition to the AT state, the navigation notification is performed. In the first state, when the navigation stock wins and the ED transition condition is satisfied, the ED state is entered, while in the second state when the navigation notification is not issued, the navigation stock wins and the ED transition condition is changed. Even if it is established, it may be configured not to shift to the ED state. With such a configuration, the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed can be further enhanced.

In the configuration in which the ED transition condition is not established even when the ED transition condition is satisfied in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, the ED transition condition is satisfied when the state is subsequently shifted to the first state in which the navigation notification is performed. If so, the ED state is entered.

Also, as a state after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed in a part of the winning of the multiple push forward combination. In the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the multiple push forward combination in the configuration including and, by increasing the winning combination by itself even in the game in which the navigation notification is not performed, While the ED transition condition is met, the ED state is entered, while in the second state where the navigation notification is not performed, the player is not allowed to enter the ED state even if the ED transition condition is met by winning the winning combination by himself. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed at a part of the winning of the multiple-push press winning combination.

Also, as a state after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed in a part of the winning of the multiple push forward combination. In the configuration including and, in the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the multi-push winning combination, the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning the watermelon that is not the target of the navigation notification. On the other hand, in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, the configuration may be such that, in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, a watermelon that is not a target of the navigation notification is won so that the ED transition condition is not established even if the ED transition condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed at a part of the winning of the multiple-push press winning combination.

Also, as a state after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed in a part of the winning of the multiple push forward combination. In the configuration including and, in the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the multiple push forward combination, the navigation stock is transitioned to the ED state when the navigation stock is elected and the ED transition condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, even if the navigation stock is elected and the ED transition condition is satisfied, it may be configured not to shift to the ED state. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation information is given at a part of the time when the winning combination is won.

In the configuration in which the ED transition condition is satisfied in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed and the ED state is not transitioned, then the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the multiple-push forward combination. If the ED transition condition is satisfied when the state shifts to the state, the state shifts to the ED state.

In addition, as a state after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, a state in which the average net additional number per game exceeds 100% by the navigation notification, that is, a first state in which medals increase, A configuration including a state in which the average net addition number per game is 100% or less due to no navigation notification or a low ratio of navigation notification, that is, a second state in which medals do not increase or medals decrease. In the first state in which the medals increase, while the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning the winning combination to be notified of the navigation, the ED state is entered, while the medals do not increase or the medals decrease. In the 2 state, even if the winning combination of the navigation notification is won and the ED transition condition is satisfied, the configuration may not be changed to the ED state. With such a configuration, the medals are increased. The interest of the state can be further enhanced.

In addition, in a configuration including a first state in which medals increase and a second state in which medals do not increase or medals decrease as a state after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the number of medals increases. In the first state, the watermelons that are not subject to navigation notification enter the ED state when the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning the watermelon, while in the second state where the medals do not increase or the medals decrease, Even if a watermelon that is not a notification target wins the prize and the ED transition condition is satisfied, the configuration may not be changed to the ED state. With such a configuration, the interest of the first state in which medals increase can be further enhanced. You can

In addition, in a configuration including a first state in which medals increase and a second state in which medals do not increase or medals decrease as a state after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the number of medals increases. In the first state, when the navigation stock wins and the ED transition condition is met, the ED state is entered, while in the second state when the medals do not increase or the medals decrease, the navigation stock wins and ED. It may be configured such that the transition to the ED state is not made even if the transition condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, the interest of the first state in which medals increase can be further enhanced.

In the configuration in which the ED transition condition is satisfied in the second state in which the medals do not increase or the medals decrease, in the configuration in which the ED state is not changed, the ED transition condition is set when the medals increase in the first state. If the condition is satisfied, the ED state is entered.

In the present embodiment, as a condition after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, control is performed to extend the period controlled to the AT state by setting the winning probability of the navigation stock to a low probability. A configuration including a low proportion of the AT1 state and the AT2 state and a high proportion of addition state in which control for extending the period controlled in the AT state is performed by setting the winning probability of the navigation stock to a high setting, that is, Since the configuration includes a plurality of states with different control ratios for extending the period in which the AT state is controlled, the period in which the AT state is controlled must be changed until the ED transition condition is satisfied. You can

It should be noted that, as a state after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the first state in which control for extending the period controlled in the AT state such as navigation stock lottery can be performed, and the control to the AT state And a second state in which the control for extending the control period is not performed. Even in such a configuration, the control period in the AT state can be changed until the ED transition condition is satisfied. In addition, it is possible to greatly change the period in which the AT state is controlled depending on whether the first state or the second state is controlled.

In the present embodiment, after the transition to the AT state, regardless of whether it is controlled to the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the addition state, the ED state is controlled by the establishment of the ED transition condition. It is not necessary to change the control according to the state at that time, and the process of shifting to the ED state can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state is the average net increase in the number of medals per game among the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state, which are controlled before the ED transition condition is satisfied. Is set to be smaller than the AT1 state in which a large number is set, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling even if the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is entered after the AT state is entered.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ED state is controlled to a payout state B which is different from the payout state in any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state, and one game per ED state is controlled. Since the average net increase in medals is different from the average net increase in medals per game in any of the AT1, AT2, and additional states, the amount of increase in medals can be made appropriate according to the characteristics of the ED state. ..

In the ED state, the payout state is controlled to be the same as the payout state in any one of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state, and the average net additional number of medals in one game in the ED state is the AT1 state, The configuration may be the same as the average net increase in the number of medals per game in either the AT2 state or the added state. With such a configuration, the control in the ED state and the control in other states, Can be shared.

In the present embodiment, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be obtained per AT1 state is about 59, and the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be obtained per AT2 state is about 48. The minimum number of medals that can be expected for each round is about 16. On the other hand, when the first ED transition condition is satisfied, the number of medals that can be expected to be acquired in the ED state is smaller than when the second ED transition condition is satisfied or the third ED transition condition is satisfied, but even in that case, You can expect to win about 150 medals. As described above, after the ED transition condition is satisfied, the number of medals that can be expected to be acquired in the ED state is the lowest in one of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state controlled before the ED transition condition is satisfied. Since the number of medals that can be expected to reach the limit is increased, it is possible to enhance the interest of being controlled to the ED state.

In the present embodiment, as the ED transition condition for shifting to the ED state after shifting to the advantageous state, the net increase in number of medals after the increasing/decreasing number of medals in the advantageous section changes from the decreasing tendency to the increasing tendency, that is, A future increase is predicted in accordance with the first ED transition condition established when the net number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third specified number (2250 in this embodiment) and the remaining number of navigation stocks. The second ED transition condition, which is established based on the predicted net additional number of medals, is included. Therefore, the net additional number of medals after the AT state is controlled and then the AT state is controlled exceeds the third prescribed number. Not only that, even if the net number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third stipulated number, the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net number of medals expected to increase in the future is satisfied. Since it may be controlled to the ED state, it can be expected to be controlled to the ED state even if the net number of medals added after being controlled to the AT state is the third prescribed number or less.
In the present embodiment, the predicted net increase in the number of medals predicted to increase in the future is specified based on the number of navigation stocks. However, the predicted net increase in medals depends on the number of remaining games in the AT state and the number of remaining navigation notifications. The number of coins may be specified, and if the ending condition of the AT state is a structure in which the net number of medals is managed, the predicted net number of medals may be specified by the net number of medals that can be acquired thereafter. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net additional number of medals predicted to increase in the future is the net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net additional number of medals expected to increase in the future. Is a condition that can be satisfied when the total value of and exceeds the third prescribed number (2250 in this embodiment) that is shifted to the ED state when the actual net number of medals increases exceeds the AT state. It is recognized that the net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third stipulated number by being controlled to the ED state when the number of medals to be added after the control is set to the third prescribed number or less. Can be made.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net additional number of medals predicted to increase in the future is the net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net additional number of medals expected to increase in the future. Is a condition that can be satisfied when the total value of and exceeds the second specified number (2394 in the present embodiment) in which the advantageous section ends when the actual number of medals added increases. When the net increase in the number of medals after the control is set to the third prescribed number or less is controlled to the ED state, the net increase in the number of medals after the control to the AT state becomes the end condition of the advantageous section. It can be recognized that the specified number is exceeded.

In the present embodiment, after the transition to the AT state, even if the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition is made to the ED state, and if the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition is made to the ED state, the advantageous section is set. Although the ED state continues until the end conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied, the ED state may be ended after the transition to the ED state and before the end conditions 1 and 2 of the advantageous section are satisfied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net additional number of medals predicted to increase in the future is the net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net additional number of medals expected to increase in the future. And the total value of and exceeds the third specified number (2250 in this embodiment) that the ED transition condition is satisfied by the actual net additional number of medals being exceeded, and after being controlled to the AT state. This is a condition that can be established if the net number of medals exceeds the fourth stipulated number (1700 in this embodiment), which is smaller than the third stipulated number, and the net number of medals added after the AT state is controlled and the future increase. Even if the total value of the predicted number of medals and the expected net increase in medals exceeds the third specified number, until the net added number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the fourth specified number less than the third specified number. Since it is not controlled to the ED state, it can be prevented from being controlled to the ED state at an early stage after being controlled to the AT state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled, the main control unit 41 does not determine whether or not the second ED transition condition is satisfied until the AT state ends. When the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled, it is not determined whether or not the first ED transition condition is satisfied until the AT state ends. After one of the second ED transition conditions is satisfied and the ED state is controlled, it is not determined whether the other of the first ED transition condition and the second ED transition condition is satisfied. The control of can be simplified.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the non-AT state and the AT state after shifting to the advantageous section, and further, in the AT state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state before shifting to the ED state. Although it is possible to control the state, it is determined whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game regardless of which state it is controlled, and according to the current state. Since it is not necessary to change the control, the control for shifting to the ED state can be simplified.

It should be noted that it is not determined whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied until the transition to the AT state, and after the transition to the AT state, any of the AT1, AT2, and addition states is performed until the transition to the ED state. Even if it is controlled to the state, it may be configured to determine whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game. Even with such a configuration, the current state after the transition to the AT state is possible. Since it is not necessary to change the control according to, the control for shifting to the ED state can be simplified.

[Regarding performance during AT state]
Next, the effect in the AT state will be described. The main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 a state command that can specify the state of the next game at the end of the game. The state command can specify whether the state of the next game is the non-AT state or the AT state, and if it is the AT state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the addition state. It is possible to specify whether it is the state or the ED state. Further, in the AT1 state, it is possible to specify the number of remaining navigations, and in the AT2 state and the addition state, it is possible to specify the number of remaining games.

Then, the sub control unit 91 can execute an effect peculiar to the AT state according to the state specified by the state command. Note that the effects specific to the AT state include effects of displaying images on the liquid crystal display 51, sound effects from the speakers 53 and 54, and light emission of the effect LED 57, but here the liquid crystal display 51 is mainly used. The effect using is explained.

The sub-control unit 91 sets the bet number of the next game when the AT command is received in a situation where the non-AT state is specified, that is, when the start of the AT state is specified. At a timing, as shown in FIG. 35A, an AT state start effect indicating the start of the AT state is executed. In the AT state start effect, the AT start image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

When the AT state starts, the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command and specifies the game start operation while the AT start effect is being executed because the AT1 state is controlled first. As shown in FIG. 35B, an AT1 state effect peculiar to the AT1 state is executed. In the AT1 state presentation, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the AT1 state image peculiar to the AT1 state, the number of remaining navigation notifications, the number of games since the transition to the AT state, and the net number of medals after the transition to the AT state. Is displayed.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command that specifies the AT2 state in a situation where the AT1 state is specified, that is, when the start of the AT2 state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command to start the game. When the start operation is specified, the AT2 state effect peculiar to the AT2 state is executed as shown in FIG. In the AT2 state effect, the image is different from the AT1 state image, and the AT2 state image peculiar to the AT2 state, the number of remaining games, the number of games after shifting to the AT state, and the net increase of medals after shifting to the AT state The number of sheets and the like are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command that specifies the AT1 state in a situation where the AT2 state is specified, that is, when the start of the AT1 state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command to start the game. When the start operation is specified, the AT1 state effect is executed again as shown in FIG.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command that specifies the additional state in a situation in which the AT2 state is specified, that is, when the start of the additional state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command to start the game. When the start operation is specified, as shown in FIG. 35(d), the added-on state effect peculiar to the added-on state is executed. In the add-on state effect, the image is different from the AT1 state image and the AT2 state image. The add-on state image peculiar to the add-on state, the number of remaining games, the number of games after the transition to the AT state, and the transition to the AT state The number of net medals and the like are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command that specifies the non-AT state in the situation where the AT2 state is specified, that is, when the end of the AT state is specified, as shown in FIG. Then, the result notification effect is executed. In the result notification effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the number of games since the transition to the AT state, the net number of medals in the AT state, a message prompting the user to prevent leaning in, and the like. The result notification effect may end at the timing when the bet number for the next game is set, may end at the timing when the operation for starting the next game is performed, or may continue until the end of the next game. It may be configured to end at the timing when the bet number of the next game is set or the timing when the game start operation is performed.

Further, when the sub control unit 91 receives a state command that specifies the ED state in a situation in which any one of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state is specified, that is, when the start of the ED state is specified, When the internal win command is received and the game start operation is specified, the ED start effect indicating the start of the ED state is executed as shown in FIG. As described above, the main control unit 41 delays the progress of the game for a predetermined time (two seconds in this embodiment) at the time of the start operation of the next game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied, that is, the game for starting the ED state. The ED freeze state is controlled so that the ED start effect is executed during the period in which the ED freeze state is controlled. In the ED start effect, the ED start image is displayed in the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

Further, in the AT1, AT2, and additional states, the sub-control unit 91 navigates when a common multi-bell, a common three-combination, a multi-push forward combination, and a multi-three-combination are won as described later. The effect is executable and the specific role winning suggestion effects (A) and (B) can be executed when the specific role is won, but in the game that starts the ED state, a common multi-bell, a common 3 When the winning combination, the multiple-pushing winning combination, or the multiple-three winning combination is executed to perform the navigation effect, or when the specific combination is won and the specific combination winning suggestion effect (A) is executed, the ED start effect is generated. Priority is given to the execution, and after the end of the ED start effect, the navigation effect and the specific winning combination suggestion effect (A) are executed.

In addition, in the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state, the sub control unit 91 does not execute the effect that suggests that the ED transition condition is satisfied, and does not perform a navigation effect or a specific role described later. Winning suggestion effects (A) and (B), winning notification effects, chance effects, etc. are executed according to the result of the internal lottery of the game and the result of the game.

After the start of the ED effect, the sub control unit 91 executes the ED state effect peculiar to the ED state when a predetermined time has passed, that is, at the timing when the ED freeze state ends. .. In the ED state effect, the images are different from the AT1 state image, the AT2 state image, and the addition state image. The ED state image peculiar to the ED state, the number of games after the transition to the AT state, and the transition to the AT state The number of net medals and the like are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 receives the status command specifying the non-AT status in the situation where the ED status is specified, that is, when the end of the AT status is specified, as shown in FIG. Then, the result notification effect is executed. It should be noted that the common result notification effect is executed regardless of whether the AT state ends in the AT2 state or the ED state, depending on whether it ends in the AT2 state or in the ED state. You may make it perform the result alert production of a different aspect.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 executes the common ED start effect when the start of the ED state is specified, regardless of which of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state is specified. In the subsequent ED state, the common ED state effect is executed, and when the ED state ends, the common result notification effect is executed.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 shifts to the ED state after the shift to the AT state, the first ED shift condition that is satisfied when the net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third specified number is satisfied. Also in the case, when the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals expected to increase in the future is satisfied and the ED state is entered, the common ED start effect is produced when the start of the ED state is specified. In the ED state thereafter, the common ED state effect is executed, and when the ED state ends, the common result notification effect is executed.

Further, after the transition to the AT state, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the number of medals has increased to a predetermined number or more after the net number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the fourth prescribed number, which is smaller than the third prescribed number. Even when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the ED state, the net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state after the navigation stock has reached a predetermined number or more after shifting to the AT state is Even when the fourth ED number, which is less than the 3 stipulated number, is exceeded and the second ED transition condition is satisfied to shift to the ED state, when the start of the ED state is specified, a common ED start effect is executed, In the subsequent ED state, the common ED state effect is executed, and when the ED state ends, the common result notification effect is executed.

In the AT state, the sub-control unit 91 can execute a navigation effect, a specific winning combination suggesting effect (A), a specific winning combination suggesting effect (B), a small winning combination winning effect, and a chance effect.

As shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b), the navigation effect is such that when a game start operation is performed, an image showing the pressing order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is superimposed on a part of the effect image being displayed. By displaying on the liquid crystal display 51, it is an effect that suggests an advantageous pressing order for the player, and when a common multi-bell, a common three-card combination, a multi-press general combination, and a three-press general combination are won, It is executed when a part of the re-game role is won.

As shown in FIGS. 36(c) and (d), the specific combination winning suggestion effect (A) is superimposed on a part of the effect image being displayed with an image indicating the winning of the specific combination when the game start operation is performed. By displaying it on the liquid crystal display 51 by using the display, a specific character (cherry 1 to 3, chance replay 1, 2, watermelon, common 1 piece) is suggested that the navigation stock may be added or transitioned to the added state. It is an effect that suggests that a winning combination has been won, and is executed when a specific winning combination is won.

As shown in FIGS. 36(e) and 36(f), the specific combination winning suggestion effect (B) is an image different from the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 when the game start operation is performed. Therefore, by switching to a specific image showing the winning of the specific role, in addition to suggesting that the specific role has been won, there is a possibility that the navigation stock may be added or added rather than the specific role winning suggestion effect (A). It is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the state, and is executed when the specific combination is won.

As shown in FIG. 36(g), the winning notification effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by superimposing an image of the characters "GET!" It is a performance that suggests that the prize has been won, and the common 3 cards, the common multi-bell, the multi-pushing win, and the 3-pushing win are won, and the stop operation is performed in the push order specified by the navigation effect. It is executed when a winning combination is won.

As shown in FIG. 36(g), the chance production is performed by superimposing an image of the characters “CHANCE!” on a part of the effect image being displayed and displaying it on the liquid crystal display 51, so that the navigation stock is added. This is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of being played or that there is a high possibility of shifting to the addition state, and is executed at the end of the game in which the specific winning combination has been won.

As shown in FIG. 37, the sub-control unit 91, in any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the addition state, and the ED state, which form the AT state, has a common three-piece role, a common multi-bell, and a multi-push order. It is possible to execute the navigation effect when the winning combination of the winning combination of the winning combination and the triple pressing is selected.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 is capable of executing the specific combination winning suggestion effect (A) in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state among the states forming the AT state, regardless of the type of the specific combination. On the other hand, in the ED state, when a winning combination that cannot be won unless a stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing among the specific winning combinations (when the player is pushing the key), a specific winning combination suggestive effect (A) However, when the special prize that wins regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the specific winning combination is won (when the pressing is unnecessary), the specific winning combination suggestion effect (A) is not executed.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 is capable of executing the specific combination winning suggestion effect (B) in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state among the states forming the AT state, regardless of the type of the specific combination when winning. On the other hand, in the ED state, the specific combination winning suggestion effect (B) is not executed at the time of winning the specific combination regardless of its type.

Further, the sub-control unit 91, in any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the add-on state, and the ED state, which form the AT state, has a common three-card combination, a common multi-bell, a multi-press forward combination, and three-plate pressing. When the winning combination is won, the small winning combination wins because the stop operation is performed in the push order designated by the navigation effect and the small winning combination wins.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91, in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the add-on state among the states forming the AT state, allows the chance effect to be executed regardless of the type of the specific winning combination, while it is in the ED state. Does not execute a chance effect when a specific winning combination is won, regardless of its type.

The sub-control unit 91 selects any one of a plurality of types of patterns as the ED effect, and executes the ED effect in a mode according to the selected pattern.

As shown in FIG. 38, the pattern of the ED effect is composed of four types of patterns A, B, C, and D, and at least some of the elements constituting the ED effect such as the background of the effect image and the appearing characters are different.

The sub-control unit 91 is configured to select any one of the patterns A, B, C, and D with a probability according to the currently set value, and depending on which pattern the ED effect is executed. The currently set value will be suggested.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the pattern A is selected regardless of whether the setting value is an odd setting, an even setting, or a high setting (setting value 4 or more). There is a possibility that it will be selected with almost the same probability regardless of whether it is an odd setting or an even setting, and whether it is a high setting or a low setting (setting value 3 or less). Since the selection is performed with almost the same probability, when the pattern A is executed, it is highly likely that the odd setting is set and the even setting is likely set. It is not suggested that it is likely.

Pattern B may be selected regardless of whether the setting value is an odd setting, an even setting, or a high setting (setting value 4 or more), and is an odd setting. , The pattern B is executed with a higher probability than the case of even setting, and the pattern B is executed with the same probability regardless of whether the setting is high or low. If this is the case, it is suggested that the odd-numbered setting is likely, but that the high-setting is not likely.

Pattern C may be selected regardless of whether the setting value is an odd setting, an even setting, or a high setting (setting value 4 or more), and in the case of an even setting. , The pattern C is executed with a higher probability than with the odd setting, and with almost the same probability regardless of whether the setting is high or low. If this is the case, it is suggested that there is a high probability that the setting is even, but there is no possibility that the setting is high.

Pattern D may be selected regardless of whether the setting value is an odd setting, an even setting, or a high setting (setting value 4 or more), and in the case of a high setting. In addition, the pattern D is executed with a higher probability than in the case of the low setting, and the probability is selected with almost the same probability in the case of the odd setting and the even setting. If it is, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that it is a high setting, but there is no suggestion that there is a high possibility that it is an odd setting or a high probability that it is an even setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the transition to the AT state, the ED transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the ED state is performed, and when the transition to the ED state is performed, the ED start effect is executed, and the AT1 state and the AT2 state are set. In the situation in which any of the additional states is specified, the common ED start effect is executed when the start of the ED state is specified even when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is entered. , It is possible to easily recognize that the ED state is controlled.

In addition, after the transition to the AT state, when the first ED transition condition that is satisfied when the net number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third stipulated number is satisfied and the state shifts to the ED state, the future increase Even when the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net additional number of medals that is predicted is satisfied and the ED state is entered, the common ED start effect is executed when the start of the ED state is specified. It is possible to easily recognize that the ED state is controlled.

Also, after the transition to the AT state, after the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the fourth stipulated number, which is less than the third stipulated number, the navigation stock becomes the predetermined number or more and the second ED transition condition Even when the condition is satisfied and the condition shifts to the ED state, the net number of medals added after the navigation stock has reached a predetermined number or more after the control has been changed to the AT state is less than the third prescribed number. Even when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the ED state is exceeded by exceeding the fourth stipulated number, the common ED start effect is executed when the start of the ED state is specified, so control to the ED state is performed. You can make it easy to understand what was done.

Further, in the ED state, when the ED effect is executed and the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is entered in a situation in which any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state is specified, the ED state is also set. Since the common ED effect is executed in, it is possible to easily recognize that the ED state is controlled.

In addition, after the transition to the AT state, when the first ED transition condition, which is established when the net number of medals added after the control to the AT state exceeds the third specified number, is established and the transition to the ED state is made, the future increase will also occur. Even when the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net additional number of medals that is predicted is satisfied and the state shifts to the ED state, the common ED effect is executed in the ED state, so that it is controlled to the ED state. You can make it easy to understand.

Also, after the transition to the AT state, after the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the fourth stipulated number, which is less than the third stipulated number, the navigation stock becomes the predetermined number or more and the second ED transition condition is reached. Even when the condition is satisfied and the condition shifts to the ED state, the net number of medals added after the navigation stock has reached the predetermined number or more after the control has been changed to the AT state is less than the third prescribed number. Even when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is exceeded by exceeding the fourth specified number, the common ED effect is executed in the ED state, so that it is easy to recognize that the ED state is controlled. be able to.

Further, when the ED effect is executed at the end of the ED state and the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is transitioned in a situation in which any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state is specified, the ED state Since the common result notification effect is executed at the end of, it is possible to easily recognize that the ED state has ended.

In addition, after the transition to the AT state, when the first ED transition condition, which is established when the net number of medals added after the control to the AT state exceeds the third specified number, is established and the transition to the ED state is made, the future increase will also occur. Even when the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net additional number of medals that is predicted is satisfied and the ED state is entered, the common result notification effect is executed at the end of the ED state, so that the ED state is completed. Can be easily recognized.

Also, after the transition to the AT state, after the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the fourth stipulated number, which is less than the third stipulated number, the navigation stock becomes the predetermined number or more and the second ED transition condition is reached. Even when the condition is satisfied and the condition shifts to the ED state, the net number of medals added after the navigation stock has reached the predetermined number or more after the control has been changed to the AT state is less than the third prescribed number. Even when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is exceeded by exceeding the fourth specified number, the common result notification effect is executed at the end of the ED state, so that the ED state is easily recognized. Can be made

In this embodiment, the ED start effect is an effect in which the ED start image is displayed in the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the start of the ED state is suggested using the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51. , It is possible to clearly recognize that the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled.

In addition, after the transition to the AT state, the ED start effect is executed when the start operation in the game next to the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied is performed. Since the start effect does not have to be influenced by the effect contents after the start of the game, the number of patterns of the ED start effect can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the ED start effect is executed when the start operation in the game next to the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied is performed. If the ED start effect is executed when the start operation is performed, the ED start effect is executed when the start operation in a game after the game subsequent to the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied is performed. Even if it is a thing, the same effect as the above is acquired.

In addition, in a game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT1, AT2, and additional states, it is not an effect that suggests that the ED transition condition has been satisfied, but a navigation effect or a specific winning suggestion effect (A) (B) described later. ), a winning notification effect, a chance effect, and the like are executed according to the result of the internal lottery of the game and the result of the game. Therefore, the ED start effect is unexpected in the game next to the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied. You can improve your sex.

In addition, in the game that starts the ED state, when a common multi-bell, a common three-role, a multi-push forward combination, and a multi-three-role combination are executed to perform the navigation effect, or a specific combination is elected and specified. Even when the winning suggestion effect (A) is executed, the ED start effect is preferentially executed, so that the unexpectedness due to the ED start effect may be weakened by the navigation effect or the specific winning effect suggestion effect (A). It can be prevented.

In this embodiment, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, the navigation effect is executed at the time of winning the common three-card combination, the common multiple-bell, the multiple-press normal combination, and the three-press normal combination to win the specific combination. Occasionally, the specific combination winning suggestion effects (A) and (B) are executed, while in the ED state, the common 3 winning combinations, the common multiple bells, the multiple pressing forward winning, and the 3 pressing forward winning navigation Although the effect is executed, when the specific role is won, the specific role winning suggestion effect (A) is not executed and the AT1 state is set in the ED state, unless a specific role that requires a push is won. , AT2 state, and the addition state, the proportion of executing the effect that suggests the result of the internal lottery such as the navigation effect and the specific combination winning suggestion effect (A) and (B) is lower, so after the transition to the ED state It is possible to focus on the ED effect.

In particular, in the AT1, AT2, and add-on states, the winning of a specific combination suggests that the navigation stock may be added or may change to the add-on state. After that, even if the specific role is won, the navigation stock is not added and the state does not shift to the addition state, and the importance of recognizing the winning of the specific role in the ED state is low, so the specific role in the ED state is low. By lowering the rate at which the winning suggestion effects (A) and (B) are executed, it is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player by suggesting the winning of a specific combination having a low importance in the ED state.

Further, in the ED state, the navigation effect may not be executed at the time of winning the common three-card combination and the common multi-bell, that is, when the combination in which the stop order does not influence is won. Then, since the proportion of the effect that suggests the result of the internal lottery is lower than the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, it is possible to focus on the ED effect after shifting to the ED state.

Further, in the ED state, by switching the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to a specific image that is different from the effect image and indicates the winning of the specific combination, it is suggested that the specific combination has won. Since the special combination winning suggestion effect (B) is not executed and the flashy effect in which the image is switched during the execution of the ED effect is limited, the ED effect can be focused after the transition to the ED state.

In particular, in the AT1, AT2, and additional states, it is suggested that the specific stock winning suggestion effect (B) is executed, so that the navigation stock is likely to be added or is likely to transition to the additional state. However, the execution of the special role winning suggestion effect (B) is restricted in the ED state in which the navigation stock is not added even if the specific role is won and the state is not changed to the addition state. , It is possible to prevent meaningless production from being performed in the ED state.

In the present embodiment, since the set value currently set is suggested by the pattern of the ED effect executed in the ED state, it is possible to enhance the interest of being controlled to the ED state.

In the present embodiment, it is suggested from the ED effect pattern whether the current setting value is highly likely to be an odd number setting, is likely to be an even number setting, or is likely to be a high setting value. However, the ED effect pattern suggests that the setting value is likely to be a specific setting value, an odd setting, an even setting, a high setting, and a specific setting value. It may be configured to determine that

[About AT-related display]
Notification of the AT-related state by the AT-related display unit will be described with reference to FIG.

In the AT-related display section, an AT display section 61, an AT2 status display section 62, and an AT1 status display section 63 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a CZ display section 64 and an addition status display section 65 are reels 2L and 2C. 2R, the sub control unit 91 identifies the current state based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41, and turns on/off the corresponding AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e (see FIG. 3). The current state can be notified by controlling the turning off.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), in the normal state (non-AT state), the sub control unit 91 controls all the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e to be in the off state, and the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, All of the AT1 status display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition status display section 65 are in the off state. This allows the player or the like to recognize that the current state is not one of the AT-related states but the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 39( b ), when the normal state is shifted to the CZ state, the sub control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58 d to be in the lighting state, while maintaining the OFF state of the AT-related LEDs 58 a to 58 c, 58 e, Of the AT display portion 61, the AT2 state display portion 62, the AT1 state display portion 63, the CZ display portion 64, and the addition state display portion 65, only the CZ display portion 64 is in the lighting mode. This enables the player or the like to recognize that the current state is the CZ state among the AT-related states.

As shown in FIG. 39(c), when the CZ state is shifted to the AT1 state, the sub control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58d to be off and controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58c to be on, while the AT-related LED 58a and 58c are turned on. The OFF state of the LEDs 58b and 58e is maintained, and only the AT display section 61, the AT1 state display section 63 of the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition state display section 65 are maintained. Is the lighting mode. As a result, the player or the like can recognize that the current state is the AT state and the AT1 state.

On the other hand, when the CZ state is shifted to the normal state, the sub control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58d to be in the off state, while maintaining the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58c and 58e in the off state, and the AT display unit 61 and the AT2 state display. All of the section 62, the AT1 status display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition status display section 65 are in the off state (see FIG. 39(a)).

As shown in FIG. 39(d), when the AT1 state is changed to the AT2 state, the sub control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58c to be in the off state and the AT-related LED 58b to be in the lit state, while the AT-related LED 58d, The extinguished state of 58e and the illuminated state of the AT-related LED 58a are maintained, and the AT display unit 61 of the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, the AT1 state display unit 63, the CZ display unit 64, and the addition state display unit 65, Only the AT2 state display portion 62 is in the lighting mode. As a result, the player or the like can recognize that the current state is the AT state and the AT2 state.

As shown in FIG. 39(e), when the state is shifted from the AT2 state to the addition state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58b to be off and controls the AT-related LED 58e to be on, while the AT-related LED 58c, The OFF display state of 58d and the ON state of the AT-related LED 58a are maintained, and the AT display unit 61 of the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, the AT1 state display unit 63, the CZ display unit 64, and the addition state display unit 65, Only the addition state display section 65 is in the lighting mode. As a result, the player or the like can recognize that the current state is the AT state and the additional state.

Further, when the state is changed from the addition state to the AT2 state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58e to be in the OFF state and controls the AT-related LED 58b to be in the ON state, while the AT-related LEDs 58c and 58d are in the OFF state and the AT-related state. The lighting state of the LED 58a is maintained, and only the AT display portion 61, the AT2 state display portion 62 of the AT display portion 61, the AT2 state display portion 62, the AT1 state display portion 63, the CZ display portion 64, and the addition state display portion 65 are turned on. It becomes a mode (see FIG. 39(d)).

When the AT2 state is changed to the AT1 state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58b to be in the OFF state and controls the AT-related LED 58c to be in the ON state, while the AT-related LEDs 58d and 58e are in the OFF state and the AT-related LED. The lighting state of the LED 58a is maintained, and only the AT display section 61, the AT1 state display section 63 of the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition state display section 65 are turned on. It becomes a mode (see FIG. 39(c)).

On the other hand, when the AT2 state is shifted to the normal state, the sub control unit 91 controls the AT related LEDs 58a and 58b to be in the off state, while maintaining the AT related LEDs 58c to 58e in the off state, and the AT display unit 61 and the AT2 state display. All of the section 62, the AT1 status display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition status display section 65 are in the off state (see FIG. 39(a)).

As shown in FIG. 39(f), when the AT1 state is changed to the ED state, the sub control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58b, 58d, 58e to be in a lighting state, while maintaining the lighting states of the AT-related LEDs 58a, 58c. However, the AT display portion 61, the AT2 state display portion 62, the AT1 state display portion 63, the CZ display portion 64, and the addition state display portion 65 are all in the lighting mode. As a result, the player or the like can recognize that the current state is the AT state and the ED state.

Further, when the AT2 state is shifted to the ED state, the sub control unit 91 controls the AT related LEDs 58c to 58e to be in a lighting state, while maintaining the lighting states of the AT related LEDs 58a and 58b, and the AT display unit 61 and the AT2 state display. All of the section 62, the AT1 status display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition status display section 65 are in the lighting mode (see FIG. 39(f)).

Further, when the addition state shifts to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58b to 58d to the lighting state, while maintaining the lighting states of the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58e, and displays the AT display unit 61 and the AT2 state display. All of the section 62, the AT1 status display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition status display section 65 are in the lighting mode (see FIG. 39(f)).

That is, when the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the addition state is changed to the ED state, the sub control unit 91 causes the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, the AT1 state display unit 63, the CZ display unit 64, and the addition state display unit. All the display units are turned on by setting the other display units that are in the off state to the turned-on state while maintaining the lighting state of the display unit that is already turned on among the 65.

On the other hand, when shifting from the ED state to the normal state, the sub-control unit 91 controls all the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e to the off state, and the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, the AT1 state display unit 63, and the CZ display. All of the section 64 and the added-on state display section 65 are turned off (see FIG. 39(a)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state other than the ED state, not all the AT-related display parts are in the lighting mode at the same time, and in the ED state, all the AT-related display parts are lighting. Since it becomes a mode, it becomes easy to understand that the ED state is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the AT-related display unit includes the AT display unit 61, the AT2 status display unit 62, the AT1 status display unit 63, the CZ display unit 64, and the addition status display unit 65, but at least the ED status. In addition to the above, in a configuration capable of controlling in a plurality of states, any configuration may be used as long as it includes two or more AT-related display units corresponding to a plurality of states other than the ED state. For example, the AT2 state display unit 62 and the AT1 state display unit 63. It may be configured with only. In addition, in the present embodiment, the AT-related display unit is turned on or off to notify that it is being controlled to a corresponding state, but it corresponds to a mode of suppressing the light amount, a mode of blinking, or the like. It may be configured to notify that the state is controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the AT-related display parts, an AT1 state display part 63, an AT2 state display part 62, and an addition state display part 65 are provided corresponding to the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state, respectively. It is possible to specify that the AT related display unit is controlled to the corresponding state by setting the lighting mode, and use each display unit as a light emitting unit that notifies the corresponding state until the ED state is entered. After the shift to the ED state, these AT-related display units can be used as a light emitting unit that notifies the ED state. In particular, the ED state is a state in which the frequency of transition is lower than that of the AT1 state and the AT2 state, and it is notified that the ED state is controlled without providing a dedicated display section for such a state. It becomes possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT1 state and the ED state is transitioned to, the AT2 state display section 62 and the addition state display section 65 are displayed while the AT1 state display section 63 remains in the lighting mode. When the lighting mode is set and the ED shift condition is satisfied in the AT2 state to shift to the ED state, the AT1 state display section 63 and the addition state display section 65 are set to the lighting state while the AT2 state display section 62 is kept in the lighting mode. When the ED transition condition is satisfied in the addition state and the state is changed to the ED state, the AT1 state display unit 63 and the AT2 state display unit 62 are turned on while keeping the addition state display unit 65 in the lighting state. When controlling to the state, only the light emitting portion that is not the lighting mode needs to be in the lighting mode, which facilitates the control.

In addition, in this embodiment, the AT-related display unit includes the AT display unit 61 that is in the lighting state in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, so that the AT1 state or the AT2 state is set in the ED state. Regardless of whether the vehicle is in the ON state or in the additional state, the AT display portion 61, which is in the lighting state, is included in the lighting state, so that it is easy to understand that the ED state is controlled.

Further, in this embodiment, the AT display portion 61, the AT2 state display portion 62, and the AT1 state display portion 63 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the CZ display portion 64 and the addition state display portion 65 are the reel 2L. By being arranged on the right side of 2C, 2R, the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, the AT1 state display unit 63, the CZ display unit 64, and the additional state display unit 65 are reels 2L that are easy to see during the game, Since it is arranged on the left and right sides of 2C and 2R, it becomes easy to understand that the ED state is controlled.

Next, a modified example when shifting to the ED state (ED state) in the notification by the AT related display unit will be described based on FIG. 40.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, when the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the addition state is changed to the ED state, the sub control unit 91 maintains the lighting mode of the display unit that is already the lighting mode of the AT-related display unit. , The other display section, which is in the off state, is in the lit state, but in the modified example shown in FIG. 40, when the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the addition state shifts to the ED state, the sub control unit 91 In the AT-related display unit, the display unit that is already in the lighting mode is turned off, all the AT-related display units are turned off, and then all the AT-related display units are turned on.

As shown in FIG. 40, when the AT1 state (see FIG. 40A) shifts to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58c to the off state, while the AT-related LEDs 58b, 58d, and 58e. The extinguished state is maintained, and all of the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, the AT1 state display unit 63, the CZ display unit 64, and the additional state display unit 65 are set to the extinguished state (see FIG. 40(d)). Then, all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e are controlled to be in a lighting state, and all of the AT display section 61, the AT2 status display section 62, the AT1 status display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition status display section 65 are set to the lighting mode. (See FIG. 40(e)).

When the AT2 state (see FIG. 40(b)) shifts to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58b to be in the extinguished state, while maintaining the extinguished state of the AT-related LEDs 58c to 58e, All of the AT display portion 61, the AT2 state display portion 62, the AT1 state display portion 63, the CZ display portion 64, and the addition state display portion 65 are turned off (see FIG. 40(d)). Then, all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e are controlled to be in a lighting state, and all of the AT display section 61, the AT2 status display section 62, the AT1 status display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition status display section 65 are set to the lighting mode. (See FIG. 40(e)).

When the addition state (see FIG. 40(d)) shifts to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58e to be in the extinguished state, while maintaining the extinguished state of the AT-related LEDs 58b to 58d, All of the AT display portion 61, the AT2 state display portion 62, the AT1 state display portion 63, the CZ display portion 64, and the addition state display portion 65 are turned off (see FIG. 40(d)). Then, all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e are controlled to be in a lighting state, and all of the AT display section 61, the AT2 status display section 62, the AT1 status display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition status display section 65 are set to the lighting mode. (See FIG. 40(e)).

As described above, the AT display portion 61, the AT2 state display portion 62, the AT1 state display portion 63, the CZ display portion 64, and the addition state display portion 65 are all turned off once and then turned on, so that Not only can the player or the like recognize that the state is the ED state among the AT-related states, but it is also easy for the player or the like to clearly recognize that the state has been switched to the ED state.

In addition, before the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, the AT1 state display unit 63, the CZ display unit 64, and the added-on state display unit 65 are set to the lighting state, a lighting mode may be set through a blinking mode. With such a configuration, when controlling the ED state, the light emitting units that have been in the lighting state according to the state are once turned off, and then all the light emitting units are turned on through the blinking mode. Since it is in the lighting mode, it becomes easier to understand that the ED state has been entered.

[Continuous production in AT state]
In the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 suggests the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state from five games before the AT2 state ends to the game in which the AT2 state ends, and whether or not to shift to the AT1 state in the final game. A continuous effect for notifying the result is executed.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 controls to a production execution state in which execution of continuous production is allowed over a period from five games before the AT2 state ends to the end of the AT2 state, and as shown in FIG. When the ED transition condition is satisfied in the execution state, control is performed not to shift to the ED state from the next game, but to shift to the ED state from the effect execution state, that is, the next game in which the AT2 state has ended. At this time, the control is performed to the ED freeze state at the start of the ED state when the start operation of the next game in which the effect execution state is finished, that is, the game in which the ED state is started is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the sub control unit 91 executes the continuous production in the period in which the main control unit 41 controls the production execution state, and when the ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous production. However, the continuous effect is continued, the ED start effect is executed after the continuous effect is completed, that is, when the main control unit 41 performs a game start operation for shifting to the ED state, and then the ED effect is executed.

Therefore, when the ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is not interrupted, the game is moved to the ED state from the next game in which the continuous effect is finished, and the next game after the continuous effect is finished. When the game start operation is performed, the ED start effect is executed, and then the ED effect is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control related to the ED state is limited during the execution of the continuous production over a plurality of games, that is, the control for shifting to the ED state is limited. Can be prevented from being damaged.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 suggests the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state, that is, the possibility of the AT state continuing, from five games before the AT2 state ends to the games where the AT2 state ends. As long as it is a configuration for executing the continuous effect, it is possible to perform the continuous effect over a plurality of games in at least the AT state, and if the configuration for limiting the control related to the ED state during the execution of the continuous effect is the same as above. It is possible to prevent the interest of continuous production from being spoiled by the interruption of continuous production due to the control related to the ED state. For example, when a specific winning combination is won in the AT2 state, a continuous effect suggesting the possibility of shifting to the additional state over a plurality of games may be executed. In addition, if the specific combination can be shifted to the additional state when the specific combination is won in the AT1 state, the possibility that the specific combination is transferred to the additional state over a plurality of games when the specific combination is won in the AT1 state is suggested. It may be configured to execute continuous production.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous production is being executed, that is, when the ED transition condition is satisfied during the period in which the main control unit 41 is controlled to the production execution state, the ED state is started after the end of the continuous production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of continuous production from being spoiled by shifting to the ED state during execution of continuous production.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is entered, the ED freeze state is controlled to delay the progress of the game when the start operation of the game that has entered the ED state is performed. Even if the continuous production is continued after the transition to the state, the transition to the ED state is specified by being controlled to the ED freeze state midway, which suggests that the AT state may continue in the continuous production. However, in the present embodiment, even if the ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous production, the state is shifted to the ED state until the continuous production is completed. Without doing so, the ED freeze state is not controlled during the continuous effect, and it is not specified that the ED transition condition is satisfied during the continuous effect.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game during the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not it is in the effect execution state. In the production execution state, when it is determined that the ED transition condition is satisfied, the ED state is not controlled until the production execution state ends, and the ED state is controlled when the production execution state ends. However, when the main control unit 41 is in the effect execution state, by not determining whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied, even if the ED transition condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect can be achieved. The configuration may be such that the transition to the ED state is not performed until the end, and with such a configuration, the main control unit 41 does not perform unnecessary determination in the effect execution state in which the transition to the ED state is restricted. Complete.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the configuration for limiting the control related to the ED state during the execution of the continuous effect, the configuration for limiting the transition to the ED state during the execution of the continuous effect is performed. When the ED transition condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 controls to shift from the next game to the ED state regardless of whether or not the continuous effect is being executed, and when the start operation of the game is performed, the ED is controlled. While controlling the freeze state, the sub-control unit 91 continues the continuous production being executed even if the ED transition condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous production, transitions to the ED state, and is controlled to the ED freeze state. The configuration may be such that the ED start effect is executed when the start operation of the next game after the end of the continuous effect is performed, and then the ED effect is started. With such a configuration, regarding the execution of the continuous effect. It is not necessary to perform special control on the side of the main control unit 41, and even if the ED transition condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous effect and the state is changed to the ED state, the continuous effect is continued and ED after the end of the continuous effect. Since the start effect is executed and the ED effect is started, the continuous effect is not interrupted even if it shifts to the ED state during execution of the continuous effect, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous effect from being spoiled.

In this embodiment, when the game is moved to the ED state, the ED freeze state is controlled to delay the progress of the game when the start operation is performed. However, in the game shifted to the ED state, the ED freeze state is controlled. The configuration may be such that the sub-control unit 91 continues the continuous effect being executed even if the ED transition condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous effect and the ED state is entered. Also, since there is no delay in the progress of the game during execution of the continuous production, the continuous production can be continued without a feeling of strangeness.

Further, in the configuration in which the sub-control unit 91 continues the ongoing continuous production even when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the state transitions to the ED state during execution of the continuous production, a part of the content of the continuous production may be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the content of the continuous production is changed to shift to the ED state by the continuous production. In particular, it is preferable to change the effect result that is initially informed in the final game of the continuous effect to the effect result of the transition to the ED state. With such a configuration, the ED can be displayed smoothly after the end of the continuous effect. It can be connected to the start effect and the ED effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the configuration for limiting the control related to the ED state during the execution of the continuous effect, the configuration for limiting the transition to the ED state during the execution of the continuous effect is performed. When the sub-control unit 91 executes the continuous production, if the ED transition condition may be satisfied during the execution period (5 games) of the continuous production, that is, the net increase of medals after being controlled to the AT state. When there is a possibility that the number of games exceeds the third prescribed number, and when there is a possibility that the number of ED transition games reaches the fifth prescribed number, the continuous production regulation period is controlled until the ED transition condition is satisfied, and that period is maintained. In this case, by not executing the continuous effect, the control related to the ED state may be limited during the execution of the continuous effect. With such a structure, the ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous effect. If there is a possibility that the continuous effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous effect from being spoiled by shifting to the ED state during execution of the continuous effect.

[Various processing executed by the main controller]
The control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 executing the game program and the non-gaming program will be described based on FIGS. 44 to 74.

[Initial setting processing]
The startup process and the initial setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The processing at startup and the initial setting processing are subroutines included in the game program.

When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 is activated in a state where the timer interrupt is set to be disabled by the occurrence of reset, and performs various processes according to the programs stored in the ROM 41b. After the activation, first, the setting process at the time of activation included in the game program is performed to initialize all the output ports 0 to 9, and the internal register of the main control unit 41 is preset in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Initialization processing included in the game program initialized based on the internal register initialization table is performed.

As shown in FIG. 44, the initial setting process is started in a state in which the timer interrupt is prohibited. In the initial setting process, first, a predetermined area of the input port is referred to (Sa1) and output from the power failure detection circuit 48. It is determined whether the power interruption detection signal is ON (Sa2). Then, if the power failure detection signal is in the ON state, it waits until the power failure detection signal is turned off. After that, after the power supply voltage of the slot machine 1 becomes normal and the power failure detection signal is turned off, the parity of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa3) and a predetermined initial address is set in the stack pointer. (Sa4). Then, it is determined whether or not the parity calculated in the step of Sa3 is normal (Sa5), and if the parity is normal, the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired when the power is cut off. Then (Sa6), it is diagnosed based on the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed (Sa7).

When it is determined that the parity is normal in the step Sa5 and when the stored contents of the RAM 41c are diagnosed in the step Sa7, the RAM 41c is stored in the RAM 41c based on the parity of the RAM calculated in the step Sa3 and the result of the diagnosis in Sa7. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality (Sa8). It should be noted that the case where the RAM 41c is abnormal means that the parity is not normal, or that the parity is normal but the storage content is abnormal.

When the RAM 41c has an abnormality, the value of the flag register in which the calculation result is stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area by using the second save instruction described above. After saving by storing in a predetermined order (Sa9), the non-gaming RAM area initialization process included in the non-gaming program is called by using the above-mentioned CALL instruction (Sa10).

In the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing, first, by using the above-mentioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP from the gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is changed. It is read and stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area and saved. Then, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program. Then, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register, using the above-mentioned first save instruction. Are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. Incidentally, when the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the gaming program to the non-gaming program. Then, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is called from the game program, the state of the registers saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is the game. The state of the register when the program calls the non-gaming RAM area initialization process may differ.

After that, the start address of the initialization target RAM (the first address of the unused area 4) and the end address (the last address of the non-gaming RAM area) are specified, and the start address is used as the initial value of the specified address, and the data of the specified address is specified. The process of updating the designated address to the next address after clearing is executed repeatedly until the designated address reaches the end address, whereby the area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM (in this embodiment, The area from the beginning of the unused area 4 to the end of the non-gaming RAM area) is initialized. In the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated by designating the start address and the end address of the initialization target RAM, and the RAM area of the capacity is stored in the initialization target RAM. The area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM may be initialized by sequentially clearing from the start address.

Then, by using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area when the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing is started is reset in the reverse order of saving. By sequentially reading from the game stack area and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing was started. After that, by using the above-mentioned LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thereby, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing is started, and the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing is ended. In addition, in order to end the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing included in the non-gaming program and to return to the gaming program, the values of all the registers saved at the start of the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing are restored. After that, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-gaming program to the gaming program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, and the LD instruction is executed. The state of the flag register may change before and after the operation. That is, the state of the register when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process ends may be different from the state of the register that was saved when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process started.

In the step Sa10, the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is performed, the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c is initialized, and when the process returns to the initial setting process, the above-mentioned second return command is used to play the game in the step Sa9. By sequentially reading the value of the flag register saved in the stack area from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving and setting it in the flag register, the flag register returns to the state before the non-gaming RAM area initialization process. The state of is restored (Sa11). The non-gaming RAM area is executed by performing the save processing and the restoration processing of all the registers inside the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing in the step Sa10, and the flag register save processing and the restoration processing in the steps Sa9 and Sa11. After the initialization processing is performed, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

When it is determined that the RAM 41c has no abnormality in the step Sa8, and when the register is restored in the step Sa11, the RAM destruction diagnosis fixed data set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sa12), and the RAM 41c has an abnormality. If there is, a RAM destruction initialization start address for designating the address of the game RAM area to be initialized is set (Sa13). After that, referring to the input port 2, it is determined whether the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (Sa14).

When it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state, the setting changing process is performed. In the setting change process, the reset/setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 are operated in a predetermined procedure to confirm the set value, and it is detected that the setting key switch 37 is turned off. Ends and shifts to a state in which the game can progress. Further, in the setting change process, when starting the setting change process, a setting command (start) indicating that the setting change process is started is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and when the setting change process is ended, A setting command (end) indicating that the setting change process is to be ended is issued. Further, in the setting change process, when the setting change process is terminated, the start address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of setting change is designated, and the process returns to the step Sb47 of the main process. Then, the RAM initialization process is performed in the step Sb47, whereby the area from the start address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of setting change to the end address of the game RAM area, that is, all the game RAM areas are initialized. It has become so. Incidentally, all the game RAM areas except the stack area in use of the RAM 41c may be initialized. In the RAM initialization process performed after the end of the setting change process, the area to be initialized includes the storage area in which the information about the advantageous section is stored, and the information about the advantageous section is initialized. The area to be initialized does not include the storage area in which the information on the carry-over state in which the winning of the special combination (BB1, BB2) has been carried over is stored, and the information on the carry-over state is not initialized. ..

When it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is determined whether or not the RAM 41c is abnormal based on the RAM parity calculated in step Sa3 and the diagnosis result in Sa7 (Sa15). When it is determined that the RAM 41c has no abnormality, the output buffer for outputting the external output signal is cleared (Sa16). Further, a reel error counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and is used for counting the number of times a rotation error of the reel is detected in the main processing described later, is cleared (Sa17). After that, by setting the address at the time of power failure to the stack pointer SP based on the stored contents of the RAM 41c, the stack pointer is returned to the status at the time of power failure (Sa18), and the port input process is performed twice consecutively (Sa19). , Sa20).

The port input processing is performed by input state data (input data indicating the current input state of various switches, the same state as the previous and current input data regarding the input states of detection signals of various switches input to the parallel input port 511). Is a process of updating fixed data indicating that the fixed data and edge data indicating that the fixed data has changed from the previous time. Input buffers 0 to 2 for storing input state data of various switches are provided in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, and input state data of various switches updated by a port input process (this embodiment). Then, the input data, the final data, and the edge data) are stored in a predetermined bit of an input buffer that is predetermined for each type of switch and input state data. In the port input processing, the detection states (ON state or OFF state) of the various switches among the input state data of the various switches are stored as the input data in the input port 0 of the parallel input port 511, so that the inputs of the various sensors are input. The data is updated to the detection state at the execution timing of this port input processing. Input data of various switches is stored in a predetermined bit of the input port 0 corresponding to each switch. In addition, in the port input processing, when storing the input data in the input buffer 0, the input data stored in the input buffer by the previous port input processing and the input data stored in the input buffer by the current port input processing are input. Compared to each sensor, the current input data is the same as the previous input data (previously, this time is ON state, or last time, this time is OFF state). Or the OFF state), the finalized data is created and stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 1, while the current input data and the previous input data are different (previously ON state, current OFF state or previous OFF state, current ON state). (State), various sensors stored in the input buffer 1 by creating finalized data so as to maintain the detection state of the previous input data and storing it in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 1. Update the confirmed data of. Further, in the port input processing, when the confirmed data is stored in the input buffer 1, the confirmed data of this time and the previous time are compared with each other, and the confirmed data is turned OFF for the various sensors whose confirmed data has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. The ON edge data indicating that the state has changed to the ON state is stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2, and the fixed data changes from the ON state to the OFF state for various sensors whose fixed data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The edge data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 2 is updated by storing the OFF edge data indicating that the data has been stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2. The input data, confirmation data, and edge data of various switches stored in the port input buffers 0 to 2 can be referenced from the game program and the non-game program.

In the initial setting process, the port input process is performed twice in succession, so that when the port input process is performed thereafter, the input state of various switches after the initial setting process, that is, the slot machine 1 is performed. Since input state data related to the input state of detection signals of various switches is created based on the input state of various switches after the power supply to the power supply is restarted, unintended input situations may be specified. Can be prevented. Further, in the port input processing, the final data may be created based on the input data (for example, the input data of the present time, the previous time, and the last time before) acquired by the port input processing of three times or more. In such a configuration, the initial setting process is performed by performing the port input process in the initial setting process consecutively less than the number of times of the port input process required to create the finalized data. When the port input process is performed after that, the input state data can be created based on the input states of various switches after the initial setting process is performed.

After performing the port input processing in steps Sa19 and Sa20, it is determined whether the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state by referring to a predetermined input port (Sa21) (Sa22), and reset/setting is performed. When the switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and kept in the ON state, the advantageous section information related to the advantageous section is initialized. Section information initialization processing is performed (Sa23). In the advantageous zone information initialization process, information about the advantageous zone in the storage area of the RAM 41c (output buffer of advantage zone signal, flag during advantage zone, output buffer of zone display LED 19, number of advantage zone games, net increase of medal in advantage zone). Initialize the area where the number of sheets is stored. In the advantageous zone information initialization process, an area in which information about internal winning flags (0 when non-winning, 1 when BB1 is winning, 2 when winning BB2: 2) and set values (1 to 6) of special roles are stored. The information about the internal winning flag and the set value (1 to 6) of the special role is maintained in the content when the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped last time. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, in the initial setting process, when the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and kept in the ON state. In the configuration, the information about the advantageous period stored in the RAM 41c is initialized by the advantageous period information initializing process. However, the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed to be in the ON state. In this case, among the information stored in the RAM 41c, the information regarding the internal winning situation and the information regarding the setting value are maintained without being initialized, while at least the information regarding the advantageous section is initialized. All that is necessary is that the information other than the information on the internal winning situation and the information on the set value can be initialized together with the information on the advantageous section.

When it is determined that the reset/setting switch 38 is not in the ON state in the step Sa22, and after the advantageous section information initialization process is executed in the step Sa23, a return command indicating that the control state before the power interruption is restored is issued. After the transmission to the sub control unit 91 (Sa24), in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main), a door command transmission flag indicating that the door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is transmitted is set in the RAM 41c. The area is set (Sa25). In the command transmission process, the door command is normally transmitted when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, but when the door command transmission flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the door opening detection switch 25 is set. Irrespective of whether or not the detection state of No. has changed, a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is transmitted.

After the door command transmission flag is set in step Sa25, all the registers are restored to the state before the power failure stored in the RAM 41c (Sa26), and the timer interrupt is set to enable (Sa27). After ending the initial setting process and shifting to the timer interrupt process (main), the process returns to the main process executed before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped.

On the other hand, in the step Sa15, when it is determined that the RAM 41c is abnormal, the game RAM initialization processing is performed (Sa28), and the game RAM area of the RAM 41c from the RAM destruction initialization start address set in the step Sa13. Initialize the area up to the end of. After that, similarly to the processing up to the steps of Sa9 to Sa11, after saving the value of the flag register in which the flag is set in the game stack area of the game RAM area (Sa29), the non-game program After calling the game RAM area initialization process (Sa30) to initialize all the non-game RAM areas of the RAM 41c, the process returns to the calling source and restores the registers saved in step Sa29 (Sa31).

After the register is restored in the step of Sa31, the door command transmission flag is set (Sa32), the timer interrupt is set to enable (Sa33), and the RAM abnormality error code (E8) indicating that the RAM 41c is abnormal is set. A predetermined register is prepared (Sa34), the initial setting process is terminated, and an error process is performed.

In the error processing, the error state is controlled such that the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of specifying the error code (E8) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error code (E8) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing (for example, It is also set as an error flag that can be referred to even in the sensor monitoring process described later). In addition, the error code (E8) is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display unit 12. After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the condition for releasing the error state according to the error code (E8) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the RAM abnormality error code (E8) is prepared in the predetermined register and the state is changed to the error state, the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power switch 39 is turned on to shift to the setting change state. By initializing all the game RAM areas by using the above, it is possible to reliably eliminate the abnormality of the data in the RAM 41c and release the error state. On the other hand, when the power switch 39 is turned on without turning the setting key switch 37 on, the abnormality of the RAM 41c is detected again, and the error state is set again.

As described above, the main control unit 41 is configured to perform the initial setting process first after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. In the initial setting process, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is performed. Depending on the state of the main control unit 41 when it is started, the process is shifted to any of timer interrupt processing (main), setting change processing, and error processing. Then, when shifting to these processes, a command that can specify the type of the shifting process is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and when shifting to the timer interrupt process (main), that is, the slot machine. In the case of returning to the control state before the power supply to 1 is stopped, a return command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and when the setting change process is started to shift to the setting change state, When a setting command (start) is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 and error processing is started due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c to shift to the error state, the error command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

Incidentally, the main control unit 41 is adapted to return to a state in which the game can proceed through the setting change state after shifting from the initial setting process to the setting change process, and the game can proceed. When returning to the state, the setting command (end) capable of specifying that the setting change state is ended is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, but the return command is not transmitted. Further, after the error processing due to the abnormality of the RAM 41c, the setting changing processing is performed and the error state is canceled as described above, so that the game can be returned to a state where it can proceed. Even when the error processing is ended and the game is returned to a state where the game can proceed, the return command is not transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

In this way, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is activated when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, performs the activation time setting process included in the game program, and executes all the activation time setting process. The output ports 0-9 are initialized.

In addition, the main control unit 41 performs the initial setting process included in the game program after performing the startup setting process. Then, in the initial setting process, when it is determined that the RAM 41c is abnormal, the non-gaming RAM area initialization process included in the non-gaming program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM initialization process included in the game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. The game RAM area is initialized by the game program and non-game. The RAM area is configured to be initialized by the non-gaming program.

Further, in the initial setting processing, when the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state, the advantageous section information initialization processing is executed to initialize the information on the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c. .. As a result, as the information on the advantageous section, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 set in the RAM 41c is initialized, and the slot machine 1 can be activated with the section display LED 19 being turned off. There is. Further, in the initial setting process, by executing the advantageous period information initializing process, the output buffer of the during-advantage period signal and the during-advantage period flag are also initialized as information regarding the advantageous period, so after the slot machine 1 is started, The game state is controlled to the normal section and the section display LED 19 is maintained in the off state until the condition for shifting to the advantageous section is satisfied.

In addition, in the RAM initialization process performed after the setting change process, the information about the advantageous section is initialized, but the information about the carry-over state of the special role is not initialized. Even if is changed, the carry-over state of the special character before the setting value is changed is maintained.

[About main processing]
The control content of the main processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. The main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. Then, one cycle of the main process corresponds to one unit of the game. The main process is included in the game program and includes a plurality of processes. Hereinafter, processing that is not particularly included in the non-gaming program is included in the gaming program. Some game programs called by the game program call non-game programs.

As shown in FIG. 45, the main control unit 41 first disables the timer interrupt (Sb1), and then sets the final address value of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the HL register (Sb2). , The address immediately before the final address value of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized is set in the DE register (Sb3). Then, 0 is written to the area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register value for initialization (Sb4), and set by Sb58 or Sb87 described later from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register and the DE register. Then, 0 is written in each storage area of the RAM initialization target size and sequentially initialized (Sb5).

After that, referring to the current game state set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the value corresponding to the game state is read into the A register (Sb6), and a game end command that can specify that one game has ended is issued. The value is set in the D register (Sb7). Then, communication data storage processing is performed (Sb8). In the communication data storage processing, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and the D register and set in the command queue. For example, when the game state is set in the A register and the value of the game end command is set in the D register, a game end command including information that can identify the current game state is generated and set in the command queue. To do. The commands set in the command queue will be sequentially transmitted by the command transmission process included in the subsequent timer interrupt process.

After the communication data storage processing is performed in step Sb8, the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored in the register is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order by using the second save instruction described above. After saving by storing in Sb9 (Sb9), the RT information output process included in the non-gaming program is called by using the CALL instruction described above (Sb10).

In the RT information output process, first, using the LD instruction described above, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, It is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and saved. Then, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program. Then, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register, using the above-mentioned first save instruction. Are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. As in the case where the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is called, the stack pointer SP is not used for the game program when the RT information output process included in the non-gaming program is called from the game program. When the LD instruction is used for the program change, the second zero flag of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the RT information output process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the RT information output process is the RT information output process by the game program. May differ from the register state when calling.

After that, referring to the information regarding the game state of the slot machine 1 set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area, the information regarding the game state (for example, RT state) is supplied to the test device connected to the slot machine 1. The test signal to be output is set to be output from the output port 7. Then, the value of the register that was stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area when the RT information output process was started is sequentially read from the non-gaming stack area in the reverse order of saving and corresponds to the order. By setting the registers, all the registers are returned to the state when the RT information output process was started. After that, by using the LD instruction described above, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the RT information output processing is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the RT information output process was started, and the RT information output process is ended. As in the case where the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is ended, the RT information output process included in the non-gaming program is ended, and the RT information output process is started in order to return to the game program. When the stack pointer SP is changed from that for the non-gaming program to that for the gaming program after the values of all the registers that have been saved at the time are restored, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is used by using the LD instruction. The status of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, the state of the register when the RT information output process ends may be different from the state of the register saved when the RT information output process starts.

After performing the RT information output process in step Sb10, the value of the flag register saved in step Sb9 is sequentially used from the game stack area in the reverse order using the second return instruction described above. It is restored by reading and setting it in the flag register (Sb11). The RT information output process is performed by performing the save process and restore process of all the registers inside the RT information output process in the step Sb10 and the save process and restore process of the flag register in the steps Sb9 and Sb11. After that, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

After the flag register is restored in the step Sb11, a value corresponding to a predetermined test signal waiting time is set in the BC register (Sb12), and the timer interrupt is waited until the number of times of the value of the BC register is reached. An interrupt BC time waiting process is performed (Sb13). In the interrupt BC wait process, the timer interrupt is set to enable and waits until the timer interrupt process is performed, and the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the BC register every time the timer interrupt process is performed is performed. Repeat until it reaches 0. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC times waiting process ends. In the step Sb12, a value (29) corresponding to 16.24 msec is set in the BC register as the value corresponding to the test signal waiting time, and the interrupt BC times waiting process is performed in the step Sb13. Thus, at least the test signal waiting time (16.24 msec) is secured after the RT information output process of Sb10 and before the next process is performed.

Further, by performing the interrupt BC time waiting process, the process performed after the interrupt BC time waiting process can be performed in a state where the time until the next timer interrupt process is performed is maximized. A timer interrupt is prevented from being unintentionally performed in the middle of a series of processes performed after the interrupt BC times waiting process. By performing the interrupt BC time waiting process in the step Sb13, a timer interrupt is unintentionally performed in the middle of the process from the step Se1 to the step Se10 of the game start waiting process performed after the interrupt BC time waiting process. This can be prevented, and the processing from the step Se1 to the step Se10 can be performed as a series of processing.

In addition, by performing the interrupt BC wait process, the timer interrupt process is surely performed at least once, so that after each process included in the timer interrupt process is performed, the interrupt BC wait process is performed. It is possible to carry out a series of processes to be performed. For example, in the step of Sb13, by performing the interrupt BC wait process, the port input process described later included in the timer interrupt process is performed, and the game starts with the input data of various switches and sensors updated. The processing from the step Se1 to the step Se10 of the waiting processing can be performed.

Then, after the timer interrupt process is performed, the game start waiting process is performed (Sb14), and the process from the end of the control of the previous one game to the start of the next one game is performed. In the game start waiting process, the number of bets is set according to the insertion of medals, etc., and when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the specified number of bets is set, the next one game is started. Perform processing to start.

Then, an internal lottery process for deciding whether to allow the generation of a prize (internal lottery) is performed (Sb15). In the internal lottery process, the occurrence of winning is allowed based on the preset values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and the random number value for internal lottery acquired at the same time as the game starts by the detection of the start switch 7. An internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not (that is, whether or not to permit the derivation of the display result). Then, a winning combination number (including winning number and loss) corresponding to the winning combination so that the winning result in the internal lottery can be specified is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, group information setting processing (general winning combination) described below is performed, and group information (general winning combination) that can specify the type of general winning combination that has been won based on the winning combination number (winning number) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. To do. In addition, when the special role is won in the internal lottery (including when the internal lottery of the game is won and when the internal lottery of the game before the game is won and carried over), An internal winning flag indicating that the special combination (BB1, BB2) has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not BB1 is won. If it is determined that BB1 is won, the RAM 41c The output buffer for controlling the lighting state of the status display LED 17 (the output buffer of the status display LED 17) is set to a predetermined area, and a predetermined value (value of ON state: 1) for controlling the lighting state is set. To do.

By setting the value of the ON state in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, the status display LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing performed thereafter. After performing the internal lottery process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by performing the reel rotation process (Sb45) described later, and all the reels are in the constant speed state. The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled on the condition that the interrupt BC has been waited (Sb28) in the period from the internal lottery process to the reel rotation process. )I do. As a result, when the timer interrupt process is performed at least once during the period and the value of the ON state is set in the output buffer of the state display LED 17, that is, when BB1 is won, the stop switch 8L The state display LED 17 is controlled to be in a lighting state before the operation of the 8C, 8C, and 8R is enabled, and the state notification is surely started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled. You can do it. Further, when the special combination (BB1) is won by the internal lottery, a predetermined value (value of ON state: 1) is set in the output buffer of the state display LED 17, and the state display LED 17 is turned on by the subsequent timer interrupt processing. Since the state display is started immediately after the special combination (BB1) is won, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective for checking whether or not the state display is being performed. It is possible to secure enough before it becomes.

After performing the internal lottery process, a payout control process for performing a process regarding a game section and a process regarding navigation notification is performed as described later (Sb16). In the payout control process, a process for determining whether or not it is the advantageous period based on the value of the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period, and when it is determined that it is not the advantageous period, three bets are set. And advantageous section transition related processing performed on condition that the game state is not a special state (BB1, BB2) (for example, processing for determining whether or not an advantageous section transition combination is won in the internal lottery, or advantageous in the internal lottery) If it is determined that the zone transition winning combination has been won, the process of shifting to the advantageous zone by setting the flag during the advantageous zone that indicates that the zone is controlled to the advantageous zone by continuous data processing. If the bet number is set to 3 or 2 when the game is determined to be an advantageous section, the game after the advantageous section starts Number of advantageous-zone games, which is the number of advantageous-zone games, is added and updated for one game, and navigation notification is performed on condition that the number of bets is two or a game state other than RT1. Process (for example, a process of updating the ED transition game number counter for specifying a game to be transitioned to the ED state in which the navigation notification control is performed for the period until the advantageous section ends, or a predetermined payout state (the payout state) Processing for setting ON data (predetermined value: 1) for controlling the lighting state in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 on condition that the state A, the payout state B, and the payout state C) are controlled, a general character Based on the winning number, the navigation number corresponding to the winning combination based on the navigation number is specified and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the process of performing various processes according to the currently-played payout state, etc. )I do. The navigation number set in the payout control process is referred to in a game start command transmission process (Sb22) described later, and a command capable of specifying the navigation number is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The navigation number is also referred to in the reel stop control process (Sb48), and corresponds to the navigation number before the reel stop control process validates the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. The display data for displaying the navigation display is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation display is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Further, in the advantageous section game number counter updated during the advantageous section by the payout control process, the advantageous section game number has reached the prescribed game number (first prescribed number) in the later-described AT state management process (Sb60). It will be referred to when determining whether or not.

After that, as in the step of Sb11, the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order by using the second save instruction described above. After saving by storing at (Sb17) and setting the timer interrupt to be disabled (Sb18), the operation information signal output process included in the non-gaming program is performed using the above-mentioned CALL command (Sb19), which will be described later. As described above, processing for outputting the operation information signal designating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the winning result of the internal lottery from the output port to the test device is performed.

In the operation information signal output process, first, similarly to the above-mentioned RT information output process, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the game program of the calling source is read by using the above-mentioned LD command, and the non-game RAM area is read. To a predetermined area. After that, by using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read and set as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP, whereby the stack pointer SP is set. Set for non-gaming programs. Then, by using the above-mentioned first save instruction, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the above-mentioned flag register are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order to save. Let Incidentally, when the operation information signal output process included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the gaming program to the non-gaming program, Since the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the operation information signal output process is called from the game program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the operation information signal output process is the operation information of the game program. The state of the register when the signal output process is called may differ.

After that, referring to the lottery result of the internal lottery set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area, the process of outputting the work information signal designating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the winning result of the internal lottery. To do.

Then, similarly to the above-mentioned RT information output processing, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers saved when the operation information signal output processing is started are sequentially read from the non-game stack area, Restores all registers to the state they were in when the operation information signal output process was started. After that, by reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the operation information signal output processing is started using the above-mentioned LD instruction, and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the operation information signal output process was started, and the operation information signal output process is ended. In addition, in order to end the operation information signal output process included in the non-gaming program and to return to the game program, after returning the values of all the registers saved at the start of the operation information signal output process, By using the LD instruction when changing the stack pointer SP from the non-gaming program to the gaming program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the flag is set before and after the LD instruction is executed. The state of the register may change. That is, the state of the register when the operation information signal output process ends may be different from the state of the register saved when the operation information signal output process starts.

The operation information signal output process is performed after the predetermined condition is satisfied and the section display LED 19 is turned on to perform the section display and the payout control processing for setting the navigation number is performed. In the signal output processing, the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started.

After performing the operation information signal output process in the step Sb19, the timer interrupt is set to enable (Sb20). Then, similarly to step Sb11, the value of the flag register saved in the game stack area in step Sb17 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order using the second return instruction described above. The flag register is restored to the state before the operation information signal output process (Sb21). The operation information signal output process is performed by performing the save process and restore process of all registers within the operation information signal output process in step Sb19 and the save process and restore process of the flag register in steps Sb17 and Sb21. After the processing is performed, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

After the register is restored in the step of Sb21, a game start command transmission process is performed (Sb22), it is possible to specify that one game has started, and various control states at the start of one game can be specified. A control status command group including a plurality of commands is set in the command queue and sequentially transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

After performing the game start command processing in step Sb22, the number of the external output signal output at the start of the game is read into the A register (Sb25), and the external output signal is output to an external device such as a call lamp or a hall computer. External output signal processing is performed (Sb26). In the external output signal processing, an external output signal corresponding to the value set in the A register at the start of the external output signal processing is output from a predetermined output port.

After performing the external output signal processing in step Sb26, a value corresponding to a predetermined game start waiting time is set in the BC register (Sb27), and waits until the timer interrupt is performed the number of times of the value of the BC register. An interrupt BC time waiting process is performed (Sb28). In the interrupt BC wait process, the timer interrupt is set to enable and waits until the timer interrupt process is performed, and the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the BC register every time the timer interrupt process is performed is performed. Repeat until it reaches 0. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC times waiting process ends. At the step Sb27, a value (238) corresponding to 133.28 msec is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the game start waiting time, and the interrupt BC time waiting process is performed at the step Sb28. Thus, at least the game start waiting time (133.28 msec) is ensured after the external output signal processing of Sb26 and before the next processing is shifted.

After performing the interrupt BC times waiting process in the step of Sb28, a waiting time effect determination process for controlling the freeze state for delaying the progress of the game for a predetermined period is performed (Sb29). In the waiting time effect determination process, it is determined whether or not it is determined to control the freeze state when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started based on the freeze flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When it is determined that it is determined that the freeze state is to be controlled, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, the interrupt BC times waiting process is performed, and the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set to be able to specify that the freeze state is controlled, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the payout control process. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect determination process, when it is determined that the control to the freeze state is not determined based on the freeze flag, the BC register setting and the interrupt BC time waiting process are not performed, and the wait state is determined. The time effect determination process is ended.

After the waiting time effect determination process is performed in step Sb29, an external output signal process for outputting an external output signal from a predetermined output port to an external device such as a call lamp or a hall computer is performed (Sb30). Then, whether or not it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and a short freeze (a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined short period, which may be hereinafter referred to as SF) is generated is determined. The identifiable SF flag value is read into the A register (Sb31), and it is determined whether or not the SF is generated based on the SF flag value (Sb32). The SF flag is generated in the SF when, for example, a predetermined condition is satisfied in the payout control process (in the present embodiment, the ED freeze condition is controlled in the game following the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied). It is set to be able to specify the effect.

When it is determined in step Sb32 that the SF is to be generated, the start address of the SF time setting table in which the period for controlling the SF is registered is set in the HL register (Sb33). , Addition processing is executed (Sb34). In the addition processing, the address value (HL) is added by adding the addition value (A) set in the A register at the start of the addition processing to the address value (HL) set in the HL register. A) The process of advancing by minutes is performed. In addition, in the addition processing, the data stored in the storage area of the ROM 41b specified by the address value (HL) after the addition value (A) is added is acquired and set in the A register. .. By setting the SF flag value in the A register, setting the address of the SF time setting table in the HL register, and performing the addition process, the period for controlling the SF based on the SF flag value and the SF time setting table is set. The set value for setting is acquired in the A register.

After the addition process is performed in step Sb34, the set value of the period for controlling the SF acquired in the A register is set in the B register (Sb35). Then, the reel effect number capable of specifying the type of the ruler effect is set in the A register (Sb36), and the reel rotation start process is executed (Sb37). In the reel rotation start processing, reel rotation control is started in a rotation mode specified based on the A register value. After that, the B register value is reset to the A register and the waiting time execution process is performed (Sb37). The waiting time execution process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times specified based on the A register value, and the waiting time execution process is ended by performing the timer interrupt process a predetermined number of times.

After it is determined that the SF is generated in the step Sb32, the waiting time execution process is performed, and the SF is performed, the RAM 41c is provided to measure the elapsed time from the reel rotation start time in the previous game. The address of the one game time management timer set in the predetermined area is set in the HL register (Sb39), and the one game time management timer is referred to based on the HL register value, and the one game time management timer is set. It is determined whether or not is operating (Sb40). After the initial value (the value corresponding to the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game) is set, the one game time management timer is decremented by a predetermined value each time the timer interrupt processing is performed, and the initial value is It will be 1 or more from the time it is set until the specified time of one game (4.1 seconds) has passed, while the specified time of the game (4.1 seconds) has passed since the initial value was set. After that, it becomes 0.

In step Sb40, if the one game time management timer value is not 0, it is determined that the one game time management timer is operating, and if the one game time management timer value is 0, the one game time management timer is used. Determine that the timer is not running. When it is determined that the specified time has not elapsed since the game was started last time based on the one game time management timer, the specified time of one game elapses based on the one game time management timer. Wait until (Sb40).

As shown in FIG. 46, after the specified time of one game has elapsed based on the one game time management timer, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited (Sb41), and a predetermined set index data at the start of the game is set. Is set in the A register (Sb42), and continuous data processing is performed (Sb43). In the continuous data processing, as will be described later, predetermined data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on a value (A) set in the A register at the start of the continuous data processing and a continuous data processing table described later. This is a process for performing a process for performing. By performing continuous data processing with the setting index data at the start of the game set in the A register, the initial value (the value corresponding to the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game) is set in the one game time management timer. ) Setting process, a process of setting an initial value (3 in this embodiment) to a stop switch operation counter that counts the number of times the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are effectively operated in one game, each stop switch Processing such as setting an initial value to the stop switch operation state flag that can specify the operation states of 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed.

The initial value set in the one game time management timer by performing the continuous data processing in step Sb43 is referred to in the timer interrupt process performed thereafter, and the initial value is set in the one game time management timer. Based on this, the test signal output timer for managing the output time of the test signal newly starts counting a predetermined time. Further, the one game time management timer is decremented each time the counter updating process (Sv20) performed by the timer interrupt process is performed so that the value becomes 0 after the time corresponding to the initial value has elapsed. Will be updated. Based on the fact that the one game time management timer is 0, the one game time management timer has been set to an initial value, that is, the reel rotation start process has been started in the previous game. It is possible to specify that the specified time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.

After performing the continuous data processing in the step Sb43, the reel effect absence data indicating that the effect using the reel is not performed is set in the A register (Sb44), and the reel rotation start process is performed (Sb45). In the reel rotation start processing, the reel rotation control is started in a rotation mode specified based on the A register value, that is, a rotation mode of a normal game. After that, after the timer interrupt is set to enable (Sb46), the reel rotation start command transmission for transmitting the reel rotation start command capable of specifying that the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started to the sub control unit 91. Processing is performed (Sb47). On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa40 that the specified time for one game has elapsed based on the one game time management timer, the processing in steps Sb41 to Sb47 is immediately performed.

After the reel rotation start command transmission processing is performed in step Sb47, reel stop control processing for performing reel stop control is performed (Sb48). In the reel stop control process, first, reference is made to a navigation number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and display data for performing navigation display according to the navigation number (when the navigation number is 0, it is not displayed. If it is data and the navigation number is 1 or more, the navigation display data corresponding to the navigation number) is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12. As a result, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled in the display mode according to the display data by the subsequent timer interrupt processing. After setting the display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12, it is determined whether the reel whose rotation is being controlled is rotated at a predetermined constant speed rotation, and when there is a reel which is not rotated at the constant speed rotation. , A reel error is detected, an excitation pattern for accelerating the corresponding reel to a constant speed rotation is set, and all reels under rotation control are controlled to rotate at a constant speed rotation. On the other hand, if all reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed, acceptance of the reel stop operation during rotation control is enabled until the reel stop operation by the stop switch is performed by the player. stand by. By enabling the acceptance of the stop operation, the stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R of the corresponding stop switches are controlled to be in the lighting state by the timer interrupt processing performed thereafter. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for the reel for which the stop operation is valid (ON edge data is detected for the stop switch for which the stop operation is valid), the reel for which the valid stop operation is performed With respect to the reel stop control, reel stop control for stopping at a predetermined stop position is performed based on the information set in the reel stop initial setting process. Such reel stop control is repeatedly performed for the reels whose rotation is being controlled, and the rotation of all reels is stopped, thereby ending the reel stop processing.

Then, after the reel stop processing is completed, the winning determination processing (Sb49) is performed. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not an illegal winning has occurred based on the internal lottery result and the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

Then, after performing the winning determination process in step Sa49, an interrupt once waiting process is performed (Sb50), and the process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed. Then, on the condition that the timer interrupt process is performed once, the interrupt once waiting process is ended.

After performing the interrupt once waiting process in the step Sb45, the operation result is stored in the registers included in the main control unit 41 by using the second return instruction described above, as in the steps Sb9 and Sb17. After saving the value of the flag register that is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order (Sb51) and setting the timer interrupt to disabled (Sb52), the non-game is executed using the CALL instruction described above. Data processing for role ratio monitor included in the program is performed (Sb53).

In this way, by performing the waiting process once for the interrupt in the step of Sb50 and then performing the data processing for role ratio monitor (Sb53), the time until the next timer interrupt process is ensured is maximally secured. In this state, it is possible to perform the relevant ratio monitoring data processing, and it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from being unintentionally performed during the relevant ratio monitoring data processing. Further, by setting the timer interrupt to be disabled in the step Sb52, performing the ratio monitor data processing in the state where the timer interrupt is disabled, and releasing the timer interrupt disable setting in the subsequent step Sb54, It is possible to surely prevent the timer interrupt from being unintentionally performed during the processing of the ratio monitoring data. Further, in the step Sb50, the timer interrupt is prohibited by performing the interrupt waiting process once before the timer interrupt is set to the disabled state in order to perform the ratio monitoring data processing, and the timer interrupt processing is performed. It is possible to prevent the timing for performing the timer interrupt when it is in the state (Sb52 to Sb54), and it is the timing to execute the timer interrupt in the state (Sb52 to Sb54) in which the timer interrupt is prohibited. As a result, when the prohibition of the timer interrupt is released, the timer interrupt is not performed and the timer interrupt process is not performed at an unintended timing.

In addition, by setting the timer interrupt to be disabled in the step Sb52, as in the case where the timer interrupt is set to be disabled in the step Sb18, the duty ratio monitor is used from the time when the flag register is saved in the step Sb51. During the period from the start of data processing to the processing of saving the values of all the registers, the timer interrupt processing is performed to change the register status from the status when the flag register was saved. It is designed so that it will not be lost.

In the data processing for role ratio monitor, first, similarly to the above-mentioned RT information output processing and the like, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the game program of the calling source is read by using the above-mentioned LD command, and the non-game is executed. It is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM area. After that, by using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, so that the stack pointer SP is non-gaming. Set for the program. Then, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are stored in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area in a predetermined order by using the above-mentioned first save instruction to save the values. By the way, the LD command is used when the stack pointer SP is changed from the game program to the non-gaming program as the data processing for role ratio monitor included in the non-gaming program is called from the game program. The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the role ratio monitor data process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the role ratio monitor data process is The state of the register may differ from when the duty ratio monitor data processing is called.

After that, each state counting process included in the non-gaming program is performed, and a predetermined predetermined period (for example, a period from the current game to 6000 games before, a period from the current game to 175000 games before, for the player, Data concerning the number of paid-out medals in a section controlled to an advantageous state (advantageous section) is updated.

Then, by using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the data processing for role ratio monitor is started is saved in the reverse order of the save. By sequentially reading from the stack area and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the data processing for role ratio monitor was started. After that, by using the above-mentioned LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the data processing for role ratio monitor is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Then, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the time of starting the role ratio monitoring data processing, and the role ratio monitoring data processing is ended. Incidentally, in order to end the data processing for role ratio monitor included in the non-gaming program and to return to the game program, the values of all the registers saved at the start of the data processing for role ratio monitoring are restored. Later, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-gaming program to the gaming program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, before and after the LD instruction is executed. May change the state of the flag register. That is, the state of the register at the time of ending the role ratio monitoring data processing may be different from the state of the register saved at the time of starting the role ratio monitoring data processing.

After performing the ratio monitoring data processing in the step Sb53, the timer interrupt is set to enable (Sb54). Then, similarly to the steps of Sb11 and Sb21, the value of the flag register saved in the step of Sb51 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order using the second return instruction described above. By setting the flag register in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before the data processing for role ratio monitor (Sb55). By performing the saving process and the restoring process of all the registers in the process of the ratio monitor data in the step of Sb53 and the saving process and the returning process of the flag register in the steps of Sb51 and Sb55, the ratio monitor data is obtained. After the processing is performed, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

After the flag register is restored in the step Sb55, the door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is set in the command queue (Sb56), and the door command is sub-processed in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main). It is transmitted to the control unit 91.

After that, a fraudulent prize check process is performed (Sb57). In the fraudulent prize check process, it is determined whether or not the fraudulent prize is generated based on the winning combination of the symbols and the internal lottery that are stopped on the reel pay line LN, and the fraudulent prize is generated. On the other hand, an error code is set in the A register and the fraudulent prize check process is ended. On the other hand, when no fraudulent prize is generated, the fraudulent prize check process is performed without setting the error code.

After the fraudulent winning prize check process is performed in Sb57, a winning combination end check process is performed (Sb58). In the winning combination end check process, it is determined whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) is in progress. If the special state is in effect, it is determined whether or not the special state end condition is satisfied in the game. .. Then, when it is determined that the special state end condition is satisfied, processing such as setting a BB end flag indicating the end of the special state in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

After performing the winning combination end check process in Sb58, a game state setting process is performed (Sb59). In the game state setting process, it is determined whether or not BB1 or BB2 that has been won in the internal lottery is won. A process for shifting to a special state is performed.

After performing the game state setting process in Sb59, an AT state management process for performing a process regarding a game section and a process regarding navigation notification is performed as described later (Sb60). In the AT state management process, it is determined whether the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0) and whether or not the advantageous section game is in the advantageous section. If determined, regardless of whether 3 bets or 2 bets are set in the game, a net increase counter for counting the net increase of medals paid out in the advantageous section is updated. Processing, processing for setting an advantageous zone end flag indicating that the advantageous zone is ended when it is determined that the net number of medals has exceeded the second prescribed number based on the updated net number increase counter, A process of setting an advantageous period end flag when it is determined that the number of advantageous period games specified on the basis of the number has reached the first specified number, a state where the number of bets is 2 or a gaming state other than RT1 Process related to navigation notification performed as a condition (for example, a process of determining whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied, a process of setting an ED transition flag indicating that the ED state is controlled when the ED transition condition is satisfied, a payout) Perform various processing according to the state).

The advantageous period end flag set by the AT state management process is referred to in a later-described process (Sb70) in the main process, and when the advantageous period end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the storage area of the RAM 41c. Information about the advantageous section (for example, advantageous section game number counter, net increase number counter, ED transition game number counter, payout state information, output buffer of section display LED 19, output buffer of signal during advantageous section, etc.) is stored. By executing the advantageous section data initialization process (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing the predetermined area, the series of advantageous sections is ended. The advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the setting of the advantageous section end flag, and the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized, whereby the section display LED 19 is controlled to be in the off state, and the section display is performed. Is ended. Further, the advantageous period data initialization processing is performed and the output buffer of the advantageous period signal is initialized, so that the advantageous period signal is controlled to the OFF state.

After performing the AT state management process in Sb60, a batch transmission data storage process is performed (Sb61), and a plurality of commands to be transmitted to the sub control unit 91 at the end of one game are collectively set in the command queue. .. The plurality of commands set by the batch transmission data storage process will be sequentially transmitted by the subsequent timer interrupt process.

After the batch transmission data storage process is performed in step Sb61, freeze processing during stop is performed (Sb62). In the freeze process during stop, it is determined whether or not it is determined to control the freeze state when the final stop operation is performed based on the freeze flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the freeze state is set. When it is determined that the control is determined, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, the interrupt BC times waiting process is performed, and the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set to be able to specify that the freeze state is controlled, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the payout control process. On the other hand, in the freeze-while-stop process, if it is determined that the control for the freeze state is not determined based on the freeze flag, the BC register setting and the interrupt BC times waiting process are not performed, and End freeze processing.

After performing the freeze process during stop in the step Sb62, a medal payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the winning generated as a result of the game is performed (Sb63). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals predetermined for each winning combination is given to the player according to the generated winning prize, the number of medals to be given is added to the credit, and the maximum number of credits ( In the present embodiment, when 50) is reached, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out the medals that have not been added to the credits from the medal payout exit 9.

After performing the medal payout process in the step Sb62, the transmission data indicating that the medal payout process is completed is set in the A register (Sb64), and the value of the payout end command is set in the D register (Sb65). Communication data storage processing is performed (Sb66). In the communication data storage processing, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and the D register and set in the command queue, and the transmission data indicating that the dull payout processing is completed is stored in the A register. Is set and the value of the payout end command is set in the D register, a payout end command indicating that the medal payout process has ended is generated and set in the command queue.

After performing the communication data storage processing in the step Sb66, the setting address of the freeze at the end of the game is set in the HL register (Sb67), and the waiting time effect processing is performed (Sb68). In the waiting time effect process, it is determined whether or not it is determined to control the freeze state at the end of the game based on the data set in the setting address of the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, and the freeze state is controlled. When it is determined that it is decided to do so, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, the interrupt BC times waiting process is performed, and the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period. For example, in the RAM 41c, an address for setting the freeze at the end of the game is set with data capable of specifying that the freeze state is controlled when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the payout control process. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect process, when it is determined that the data for specifying the freeze state at the end of the game in the RAM 41c is not set with data that can specify that the freeze state is controlled, the BC register setting and the interrupt BC are set. The waiting time effect process is ended without performing the waiting process or the like.

After performing the waiting time effect in the step Sb68, the setting process at the end of the game is performed (Sb69). In the setting process at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and if the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination is stopped, in the next game. Processing for setting the number of bets for replaying (in the present embodiment, the same number of bets as the specified number of replaying medals is set in the replaying medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. ), a process of setting the replaying flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of controlling the replaying LED 20 to an ON state (lighting state), and the like.

After performing the setting process at the end of the game in step Sb69, it is determined whether or not an advantageous period end flag indicating that the advantageous period is finished is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb70), and it is advantageous. When it is determined that the section end flag is set, a predetermined area of the storage area of the RAM 41c in which data related to control in the section is stored is initialized to end the section. Conversion processing (Sb71 to Sb79) is performed.

In the advantageous interval data initialization processing, first, the number of divisions of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the processing (2 in this embodiment) is set in the predetermined register (D) as the number of initialization area divisions (Sb71). .. Then, the RAM initialization table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas to be initialized (capacity, number of included addresses) correspond to the value indicated by the number of sections. The address of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which the set table) is stored is set in a predetermined register (HL) (Sb72). After that, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the predetermined register (D) is acquired from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, the number of addresses of the initialization target area is set in the predetermined register (B), and the value of the head address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the predetermined register (D) is acquired and set as the initialization target RAM address. It is set in a predetermined register (C) (Sb73, Sb74).

Then, after setting the initialization data (for example, 0) in the predetermined register (A), the predetermined register (A) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in the predetermined register (C). By setting the initialization data set to (), a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sb75). After that, by incrementing the value of the predetermined register (C) by 1, the initialization target RAM address is advanced by 1 (Sb76).

Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), the remaining address number is decremented by 1, and then it is determined whether or not the remaining address number is larger than 0 to determine whether or not the initialization target range has ended. Is determined (Sb78). When it is determined in step Sd78 that the number of remaining initial addresses is larger than 0 and the initialization target range has not ended, the process returns to step Sb75, and the processes of Sb75 to Sb78 are performed so that the number of remaining addresses becomes 0. Repeatedly until the initialization target determination is completed. As a result, a storage area (initialization target range) corresponding to the number of storage areas to be initialized (the number of addresses) from the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table. , Initialized with initialization data.

When it is determined in step Sb78 that the number of remaining addresses is not larger than 0 and the initialization target range has ended, that is, when all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table have been initialized. By subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (D), 1 is subtracted from the value indicated by the number of sections of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized (Sb78), and whether the value indicated by the number of sections after subtraction is 0 or not is determined. It is determined (Sb79), and if the value indicated by the number of partitions is not 0, the process returns to the step Sb73 to determine the number of storage areas to be initialized next based on the value indicated by the number of partitions in the RAM initialization table From the RAM initialization table while setting the number of addresses of the area to be initialized in the predetermined register (B) and acquiring the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the predetermined register (D). , After setting in the predetermined register (C) as the initialization target RAM address (Sb73, Sb74), the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) and set in the predetermined register (C). After initializing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c with the initialization data by setting the initialization data set in the predetermined register (A) in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address. (Sb75), by incrementing the value of the predetermined register (C) by 1, the process of advancing the initialization target RAM address by one is repeated (Sb75) until the number of addresses becomes 0 in step Sb79. Thus, the storage area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) is initialized. By repeating the processes in steps Sb73 to Sb78 until the number of divisions of the storage area becomes 0, the predetermined storage area of the RAM 41c designated by the number of divisions is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of partitions of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The data related to the control in the advantageous section includes data related to the control of the AT state, and the predetermined area in the RAM 41c in which the data related to the control in the advantageous section is stored by the advantageous section data initialization processing. Is initialized, the data relating to the control in the advantageous section and the data relating to the control of the AT state are initialized, and the advantageous section is ended and the AT state is ended.

In this embodiment, in the advantageous section data initialization process, the initial value of the number of sections is set to 2, and the storage areas in the predetermined two sections in the RAM 41c are initialized. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined one-section storage area or three or more storage areas in the RAM 41c are initialized.

As shown in FIG. 47, it is determined that the advantageous period end flag is set in the step Sb70, and the advantageous period data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) is performed, and the advantageous period end is executed in the step Sb70. After determining that the flag is not set, the currently controlled game section is determined based on whether or not an advantage section flag indicating that the advantage section is controlled is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section (Sb80). In the advantage zone flag, a predetermined advantage zone transition hand is set in the internal lottery in the game in which the bet number of three bets is set as the prescribed number by the payout control process in the step Sb16 and the game is not controlled by BB. By winning, the game section is set to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c on condition that the game section is shifted to the advantageous section.

When it is determined in step Sb80 that the advantageous period end flag is set, data (1) indicating the ON state is set in the output buffer for the advantageous period signal set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb81). ), and proceeds to step Sb82. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb80 that the advantageous period end flag is not set, the data indicating the ON state is not set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period, and the process proceeds to step Sb82. When the data indicating the ON state is not set in the output buffer of the advantageous period signal, the value of the output buffer of the advantageous period signal is 0 value (OFF state when initialized by the above-described advantageous period data initialization process. Data indicating that) is maintained.

Then, in step Sb82, the value of the data set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period is the initial value (0: data indicating the OFF state) with reference to the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period. Determine whether or not. Then, when it is determined in step Sb82 that the value of the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section is the initial value (0), that is, when the game section is not controlled to the advantageous section, the section display LED is turned off. The data number at that time is set in the A register (Sb83), and after continuous data processing (Sb84), the process proceeds to step Sb85. In the continuous data processing in Sb84, a processing of setting the output state of the signal during the advantageous section to the OFF state is performed based on the data number when the section display LED is off and the continuous data processing table described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb82 that the value of the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period is not the initial value (0), that is, the predetermined value (1) is set, and the game period is controlled to the advantageous period. If it is determined, the process of steps Sb83 and Sb84 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Sb85.

In the step Sb85, the capacity of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (RAM initialization target size) which is initialized each time one game ends is set in the BC register (Sb85), and then the BB end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) has ended in the game is determined based on whether or not there is (Sb86). The BB end flag is a flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) is ended in the game by the winning combination end check process.

When it is determined in step Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the capacity of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (RAM initialization target size) that is initialized each time the special state ends is set in the BC register. (Sb87), the process returns to step Sb1. On the other hand, if it is not determined in step Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the process returns to step Sb1 without performing the process in step Sb87.

Then, steps Sb1 to Sb87 are repeated. When the main processing completes one cycle, the processing relating to the control of one unit of the game ends, and the main processing is repeatedly executed for each unit of the game.

In this way, the initial setting process and the main process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment include processes included in the game program to processes included in the non-gaming program, for example, non-gaming RAM area initialization process, RT information output. Processing, medal sensor processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc. are called. Then, when calling the process included in the non-gaming program, every time the process of the corresponding non-gaming program is called, the value of the flag register among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is played on the calling game program side. Stored in the stack area and saved, the non-gaming program side of the callee stores the value of the stack pointer SP used in the game program in the non-gaming RAM area and saves it, and all the main control unit 41 has The value of the register is stored in the non-game stack area and saved. Then, a process according to the called non-gaming program (for example, a process for initializing the non-gaming RAM region in the non-gaming RAM region initialization process, a medal sensor check process in a medal sensor process described later, a role ratio monitor described later) Each state counting process in data processing) is performed.

Further, the main control unit 41, after performing the processing of the non-gaming program, on the non-gaming program side, the values of all the registers saved in the non-gaming stack area at the start of the non-gaming program are registered in the corresponding registers. The register is restored to the state at the start of the non-gaming program by loading the value of the stack pointer SP stored in the non-gaming RAM area at the start of the non-gaming program into the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the start of the game program, and the value of the flag register stored in the game stack area before calling the non-gaming program on the calling game program side is stored in the corresponding flag register. It is designed to read the register and restore the register to the state before calling the non-gaming program.

Further, when performing various processes according to the non-gaming program, the main control unit 41 performs various processes according to the non-gaming program by calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program using the above-mentioned CALL command or the like. Upon completion of each process according to the non-gaming program, the calling gaming program is restored.

The main control unit 41 (main CPU 41a) of this embodiment can call the RT information output processing, the operation information signal output processing, the winning ratio monitor data processing, etc. included in the non-gaming program from the main processing included in the game program. It is possible that the processes (RT information output process, operation information signal output process, role ratio monitor data process, etc.) included in the non-gaming program called by the main process are called when starting a predetermined process. First, the LD command is used to perform the process of reading the value of the stack pointer SP by using it in the main process which is the calling game program and saving it to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved at the end of the non-gaming program and setting it as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP, processing for setting the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is performed.

Further, the non-gaming program called by the main processing sets all the registers of the RAM 41c by using the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) after setting the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program using the LD instruction. A process of saving in a predetermined area is performed. At this time, since the LD instruction is used to set the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the flag register is executed before and after the execution of the LD instruction. The state of the flag register when the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set may change from the state when the main processing calls the non-gaming program. That is, on the non-gaming program side, the registers other than the flag registers among all the registers saved using the first save instruction are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-gaming program. The flag register may be different from the state when the main process calls the non-gaming program.

The non-gaming program called by the main process uses the first return command (POP ALL) when ending the non-gaming program and returning to the main process included in the game program. After restoring the values of all the registers saved at the start of the process, the LD instruction is used to set the stack pointer SP for the game program, and the process is returned to the main process. At this time, by using the LD instruction, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, the state of the flag register changes before and after the execution of the LD instruction, and the game program shifts to the main processing. The state of the flag register when returning may be different from the state when the main process calls the non-gaming program. That is, of the registers other than the flag register among all the registers when returning from the non-gaming program to the main processing, the main processing is in the same state as when calling the non-gaming program, while the flag register is , The main process may be different from the state when the non-gaming program is called.

In this way, the state of the flag register saved and restored on the non-gaming program side using the first save instruction and the first restore instruction is the state when the main processing calls the non-gaming program, that is, the main processing. The state may differ from the state of the flag register used by, and on the non-gaming program side, the state when the main process calls the non-gaming program for all registers including the flag register included in the main control unit 41 is protected. Difficult to do.

On the other hand, in the main processing of the present embodiment, when calling the processing (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.) included in the non-gaming program, the corresponding non-gaming program Each time the main processing side of the calling source uses the second save instruction (PUSH AF), the state of the flag register of the registers included in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area and saved. Then, when returning from the processing included in the non-gaming program to the main processing, the state of the flag register is saved in the game stack area by using the second return instruction (POP AF) on the main processing side. Restore. As a result, in the main process, when returning from the process included in the called non-gaming program, the state of the flag register can be restored to the state saved when calling the non-gaming program on the main processing side. Of the registers restored by the non-gaming program side, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-gaming program, while for the flag register, the main process is the non-gaming program. Even when the state when calling the non-gaming program may differ from the state when calling the non-gaming program, the state of all registers can be restored to the state when the non-gaming program was called by the main processing. It is like this.

Further, the process included in the non-game program called from the main process included in the game program uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to set the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 to the non-game stack area. The first save command (POP ALL) is used to save the status of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 to the status saved in the non-game stack area, while the main processing is performed by the second save command (POP ALL). PUSH AF) is used to save the state of only the flag register of the registers included in the main control unit 41 to the game stack area, and the second return instruction (POP AF) is used to set the state of the flag register to the game stack area. It is designed to return to the retracted state. As a result, in the game program, the state of the flag register is saved and restored using the 1-byte second save instruction and the second restore instruction, so the 2-byte first save instruction and the first restore used in the non-game program. The capacity of the game program can be reduced as compared with the case where the state of the register is saved and restored by using an instruction. In the game program, the state of only the flag register of the plurality of registers is saved in the game stack area by using the second save instruction. Therefore, the states of all the registers are made by using the first save instruction used in the non-game program. It is possible to reduce the capacity of the game stack area, as compared with the case of saving.

In the processing included in the game program such as the main processing of the present embodiment, the value of the second zero flag of the flag register is not used in the determination for advancing various processing based on the program.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when the processing (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.) included in the non-gaming program is called, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited and called. When returning from the process to the main process, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled so that the timer interrupt is disabled for the period in which the process included in the non-gaming program is being executed.

In the main processing of the present embodiment, when calling the processing (operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.) included in the non-gaming program, after saving the flag register, the timer interrupt is set to disabled. Then, when the called process returns to the main process, the timer register is set to enable and then the flag register is restored.

In the main processing and the like included in the game program of the present embodiment, it is possible to call the operation information signal output processing, the medal sensor processing, the ratio monitor data processing and the like included in the non-gaming program, and these non-gaming programs If the processing included in is executed by the main control unit 41 in a state in which the time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed is sufficiently secured, the processing within the time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed. If all the processes included in the process are completed, but when the main control unit 41 executes the process in a state where the time until the next timer interrupt process is not sufficiently secured, the next timer Configured by a program with a capacity such that all the processes included in the process are not completed within the time until the interrupt process is performed and the timing for the next timer interrupt process may be reached during the execution of the process. Has been done.

Then, in the game program of the present embodiment (main processing, game start waiting processing, etc.), when calling the non-gaming program, after the interrupt once waiting processing and the timer interrupt processing is performed, the non-gaming from the gaming program A series of processes including a process of calling a program are performed, and a non-gaming program is called. That is, by calling the non-gaming program triggered by the interrupt once waiting process, the non-gaming program is executed while the time until the next timer interrupt process is sufficiently secured. ing.

As described above, in the main process of this embodiment, the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the advantageous section is ended, the signal output during the advantageous section stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is output. After performing the advantageous period data initialization process (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing the information about the advantageous period including the buffer and controlling the signal during the advantageous period to the OFF state by initializing the signal output buffer during the advantageous period, Continuous data processing is performed based on the fact that the signal output buffer during the advantageous section has the initial value (0) (Sb82 to Sb84), and the OFF state data is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 to display the section. Is to be terminated. As a result, since the section display is terminated after the signal during the advantage section is turned off, it is possible to prevent the section display from being terminated in a state where the advantage section related information is not initialized, and the advantage section Since the medium signal output buffer is not initialized, it is possible to prevent the section display from being terminated even though the signal during the advantageous section is output to the test apparatus.

In the main processing of the present embodiment, advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing information about the advantageous section is performed, and the timer interrupt processing performed thereafter indicates the OFF state in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. When the initial value (0) is set, the signal during the advantageous period is controlled to the OFF state. As a result, by initializing the during-advantage period signal when ending the during-advantage period, the during-advantage period signal can be turned off without individually setting the output buffer of the during-advantage period signal to the off state.

In the main processing of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is during the advantageous period based on the during-advantageous period flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80), and when it is determined within the advantageous period, the advantageous period during signal is output. The predetermined value (1) indicating the ON state is set in the buffer (Sb81), and when the predetermined value is set in the signal buffer during the advantageous period by the timer interrupt processing performed thereafter, the signal during the advantageous period is turned on. Control. As a result, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section each time the game ends, and if it is determined that the advantageous section is in the advantageous section, the ON state is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the signal during the advantageous section from turning off.
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a main process that is repeatedly executed for each game of one unit and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals and performs the process. Then, it is possible to perform specific processing (processing by the game program) and special processing (processing by the non-gaming program) in the main processing, and one game time management for counting the minimum time of one game in the timer interrupt processing. It is possible to perform a timer process (Sv20) for updating the timer value for use. The timer interrupt process may be executed during execution of the specific process (game program), and the timer value for one game time management is updated, while the timer is executed during execution of the special process (non-game program). The interrupt process is not executed, and the one game time management timer value is not updated. With this, by updating the one game time management timer value as much as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, while the one game time management timer value is not updated for the period during which the special processing is performed. This prevents the processing for updating the one-game-time management timer value and the special processing from being mixed.

In the main processing of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the one game time management timer value is a specific value (0) before the reel rotation of one game is started (Sb40), and the one game time management timer value is determined. When it is determined that is not the specific value (0), the game is not allowed to proceed until the one game time management timer value is determined to be the specific value (0), and the one game time management timer value is set. Is determined to be a specific value (0), the game is advanced. As a result, the game is not allowed to proceed until it is determined that the minimum time has elapsed based on the one game time management timer value, and the game is allowed to proceed when the minimum time has elapsed, thereby reducing the minimum time per game. Can be secured.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when it is determined that the one game time management timer value is the specific value (0) (Sb40), the execution of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited (Sb41), and then the continuous data processing is executed. By performing (Sb43), an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) is set in the one game time management timer. As a result, the timer interrupt process is prohibited when the initial value is set for the one-game-time management timer, so that the one-game-time management timer is set while the initial value is set for the one-game-time management timer. It is possible to prevent the value from being updated.

As a special process (non-gaming program), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to execute a medal sensor process (Sg9) for monitoring the passing status of medals flowing down the medal receiving passage 29b. As a result, during the period in which the medal sensor process to be monitored is not performed, the one game time management timer value is not updated, which is related to the one game time management timer value update process and fraud detection. The medal sensor processing will not be mixed.

As a special process (non-gaming program), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is the data for calculating the accessory payout ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the total cumulative payout number, the total cumulative accessory payout number, and the total cumulative total. The data processing for role ratio monitor for updating the number of continuous accessory payouts is executed. As a result, during the period in which the ratio ratio monitor data processing for updating the data for calculating the role ratio payout ratio and the continuous role ratio, the game time management timer value is not updated. The process for updating the game time management timer value and the data processing for role ratio monitor related to the performance display of the gaming machine do not coexist.

As a special process (non-gaming program), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs an operation information signal output process (Sb19) of outputting a stop execution position signal to a test device that tests the slot machine 1. Is becoming As a result, during the period in which the operation information signal output process of outputting the test signal to the test device for testing the slot machine 1 is being performed, one game time management timer value is not updated, The process of updating the game time management timer value and the process of outputting the operation information signal related to the test of the slot machine 1 do not coexist.

In the main processing of the present embodiment, when the one game time management timer value is determined to be the specific value (0) (Sb40), the set index data at the start of the game is set in the A register (Sb42), and the continuous data is set. By performing the processing (Sb42), the continuous data processing sets the initial value to the one-game-time management timer value to start counting the minimum time, and also sets the one-game-time management timer value to the initial value. The test signal is output when is set. As a result, the test signal is output when the initial value is set for the one game time management timer value. Therefore, by specifying the time interval at which the test signal is output, the minimum of one game can be determined on the test device side. It is possible to identify whether the time is reserved.

[Regarding group information setting processing in internal lottery processing]
The group information setting process performed by the main control unit 41 in the internal lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

The main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery in the internal lottery process of the main process, and sets a winning combination number (winning number) that can identify a winning combination (including a loss) in the internal drawing in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, in the internal lottery process, the group information setting process (general combination) is performed, and the group information (general combination) that can specify the type of the general combination won in the internal lottery based on the combination number (winning number) is specified. , The group information is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The group information is then referred to by the game start command transmission process performed in the main process, and the internal winning command that includes the group information and can identify the type of general combination (including loss) won in the internal lottery Is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the group information setting process (general winning combination), first, a winning combination number that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the internal drawing process and can identify an internal drawing target winning combination that has been won in the internal drawing in the game. (Winning number) is read into the A register (Sc1). After that, the head address value of the RAM 41c in which the group information setting table is set is set in the HL register (Sc2), and the group information conversion process is performed (Sc3). In the group information conversion process, the group information (0, 16, 17, 41) corresponding to the winning combination number (winning number, 0 to 64) is specified based on the group information setting table and the A register value, and is stored in the A register. Set. When the winning number (winning number) is in the range of 0 to 15, 0 is set as the group information, and when the winning number (winning number) is 16, 16 is set as the group information, When the number (winning number) is in the range of 17-40, 17 is set as group information, and when the winning number (winning number) is in the range of 41-64, 41 is set as group information. Is set.

After performing the group information conversion process in the step of Sc3, it is determined whether the group information set in the A register is 0 (Sc4), and when it is determined that the group information is 0, The winning combination number is read into the A register (Sc5), the value of the A register is modified to the value of the winning combination number, and the modified value of the A register is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as group information (general winning combination) (Sc6). .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the group information is not 0 in step Sc4, the value of the A register set by the group information conversion process is stored as it is in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as group information (general combination) (Sc6). After performing the process of step Sc6, the group information setting process (general combination) is ended.

In this way, the main control unit 41 performs the group information setting process (general winning combination), so that the internal lottery target winning combination (winning number, replay 1A) in which the winning combination number (winning number) is 0 to 16 is selected. , Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, Watermelon, Common 1-Piece, Common 3-Piece, Common Multi If the winning number is (Bell), set the winning number (winning number, 0 to 16) of the winning internal lottery target as the group information (general winning role), and then use the winning number in the internal lottery. When the winning combination of the internal lottery within the range of 17-40 (the multiple-push winning combination) is won, the common 17 is set as the group information (general winning combination), and the winning combination (winning number) is set in the internal lottery. When the internal lottery target winning combination (three pressings normal winning combination) within the range of 41 to 46 is won, a common 41 is set as group information (general winning combination).

Then, by transmitting an internal winning command including the group information (general combination) as a result of the internal lottery to the sub-control unit 91, the sub-control unit 91 causes the individual internal lottery won in the internal lottery. It is not possible to specify the target winning combination, but it is possible to specify the type of winning internal lottery target winning combination.

Although not particularly shown, the main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery in the internal lottery process of the main process, and outputs a winning combination number (winning number) that can specify a winning combination (including loss) in the internal drawing. After setting in the predetermined area of No., it is determined whether or not the winning combination number (winning number) is a number corresponding to the special winning combination (BB1, BB2), and it is determined that it is the number corresponding to the special winning combination (BB1, BB2). When it is determined, the value (1 in the case of BB1 and 2 in the case of BB2) corresponding to the winning special combination is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as group information (special combination), and the special combination (BB1 , BB2), the number 0 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as group information (special role).

After the internal lottery in the internal lottery process, the main control unit 41, if the winning number (winning number) indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is in the range of 0 to 64, the winning number (winning number). ) Is set as a general combination winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the combination number (winning number) is 65 or more, that is, when the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won, the general combination winning number The value (0) indicating the deviation is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is common regardless of whether the bet number of three (first bet) or the bet number of two (second bet) is set. Group information setting process (general winning combination) is performed, and if either multiple coins or three winning combinations are won in the internal lottery, it is possible to specify that multiple coins or three winning combinations are won in the internal lottery. However, the internal winning command that can specify the group of the winning combination is transmitted so that the type of the winning combination cannot be specified. As a result, regardless of whether the bet number of three (first bet) is set or the bet number of two (second bet) is set, a large number of bells and 3 If any one of the winning combinations is subject to a lottery, and if any type of winning combination is won, the operation mode that is advantageous to the player will change depending on the type of winning combination. Even if the bet number (first bet number) is set or the two bet number (second bet number) is set, the multi-bell or the triple hand is won in the internal lottery. Can be specified, but the internal winning command that can specify the group of the winning combination is transmitted so that the type of the winning combination cannot be specified, so the bet number of 3 (the first bet number) is set. Even when the bet number of two bets (the second bet number) is set, it is possible to prevent the operation mode advantageous to the player from being specified from the internal winning command.

In addition, even when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is set and also when the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, a large number of bells or When three winning combinations are won, the internal winning command is created by the common group information setting process, so that the program capacity for creating the command can be reduced.

[About continuous data processing]
The control content of the continuous data processing performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 49 to 51. The continuous data processing is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the main processing included in the game program. The continuous data processing is called from the main processing or the like with the data number set in the A register. The data number is data indicating the type of processing performed in continuous data processing.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the continuous data processing, it is first determined whether or not the data number set in the A register when the continuous data processing is started is a number indicating that the data setting processing is to be performed. The determination is made (Sd1). When it is determined in step Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that a process other than the data setting process is to be performed, the process proceeds to step Sd18 and a 1-byte data lottery process is performed. The 1-byte data lottery process is a process of performing a predetermined lottery specified based on the data number of the A register. After the 1-byte data lottery process is performed in step Sd18, the continuous data process is terminated and the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that the data setting process is to be performed, the reference address of the index data of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register. (Sd2), addition processing is performed (Sd3). In the addition processing, the A register value is added to the HL register, and the data stored in the address specified by the HL register value after the addition is acquired in the A register. In the index data table, the relative distance from the reference address to the start address of the setting data table corresponding to the data number is stored in the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number (see FIG. 51). By performing the addition processing in the step Sd3, the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number is set in the HL register, and the register A up to the start address of the setting data table corresponding to the data number is set. The relative distance will be set. For example, when the data number 1 is set in the A register and the addition process is performed, the address m2+1 (reference address m2+data number 1) of the index data of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register as shown in FIG. Then, the relative distance data α(m6-(m2+1)) stored in the address m2+1 is set in the A register.

After the addition processing is performed in step Sd3, the value of the A register is added to the HL register (Sd4), and the address specified by the HL register value is advanced by the A register value. Thus, for example, when the data number is 1, the start address m6 of the setting data table corresponding to the data number 1 is set in the HL register.

After that, the total number of times of setting stored in the area of the address specified by the HL register value, which is an area in the setting data table, is read into the B register, and the number of initializations is read into the C register (Sd5). Then, after the HL register value is incremented by 1 and updated (Sd6), the HL register value is incremented by 1 and updated (Sd7). After that, the setting destination address value stored in the address of the HL register value is read into the E register (Sd8).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of initializations of the C register is 0 (Sd9), and when it is determined that the number of initializations of the C register is 0, the HL register value is updated by adding 1 ( Sd10), the setting data value stored in the address of the updated HL register value is read into the A register (Sd11), and it is determined whether the value of the A register is 0 (Sd12). When it is determined in step Sd12 that the A register value is not 0, the setting data set in the A register is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value (Sd13).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd9 that the C register value is not 0, the initialization count of the C register is decremented by 1 (Sd16), and the exclusive OR of the A register value is calculated to obtain A Initialization data (0) is set in the register (Sd17). Then, the initialization data is set in the A register in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value (Sd13), whereby the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value is initialized. The Rukoto.

After the A register value is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value in the step Sd13, the B register is subtracted by 1 to reduce the total set number by 1 to update (Sd14). Then, it is determined based on the B register value whether or not the total number of remaining settings is 0 (Sd15).

When it is determined in step Sd15 that the B register value is 0 and the total number of remaining settings is 0, the continuous data processing is terminated and the processing of the calling source is returned to. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd15 that the B register value is not 0 and the total number of remaining settings is not 0, the process returns to step Sd7, and the processing of each step of Ad7 to Sd15 is specified based on the B register value. Repeatedly until all the set times are zero.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50, when it is determined that the value of the A register is 0 in the step of Sd12, after subtracting 1 from the total number of times of setting of the B register (Sd19), the BC register value is set to a predetermined value in the RAM 41c. It is saved in the area (Sd20). Then, the setting destination address value specified based on the HL register value is read into the DE register (Sd21). Then, it is determined whether or not the E register value is a predetermined waiting time setting code value (Sd22). When it is determined that the E register value is not the predetermined waiting time setting code value, port output processing is performed (Sd29). In the port output process, the output signal from the output port specified by the HL register is set to the state specified by the A register (ON state or OFF state).

If it is determined in step Sd22 that the E register value is the predetermined waiting time setting code value, the determination code set in the predetermined bit of the E register value is deleted (Sd23), and DE After setting the register value as the waiting time in the BC register (Sd24), the interrupt BC times waiting process is performed (Sd25). As a result, the process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed for the number of times set in the BC register.

After performing the interrupt BC times waiting process in the step Sd25, the total number of set times of the BC register saved in the step Sd20 is restored (Sd26). If it is determined in step Sd22 that the E register value is not the waiting time code and the port output process is performed in step Sd29, the processes in steps Sd23 to Sd25 are not performed and the process proceeds to step Sd26. , Sd20, the total number of set times of the BC register saved is restored.

After the BC register has been restored to the total number of settings in the step Sd26, the B register is decremented by 1 and the total number of settings is decremented by 1 (Sd27). Then, it is determined whether or not the total remaining set number specified based on the B register value is 0 (Sd28). When it is determined that the total remaining set number is not 0, the process returns to the step Sd20, The respective processes of steps Sd20 to Sd28 are performed until it is determined that the remaining total set number is 0. Then, when it is determined in step Sd28 that the total number of remaining settings is 0, the continuous data processing is terminated and the processing of the calling source is returned to.

Thus, in the continuous data processing, the process of initializing the predetermined area specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table, A process of setting predetermined data specified based on the data processing table, and setting an output signal from a predetermined output port specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table to an output state (ON state or OFF state) Perform processing, etc.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51, when the data number is 1 (setting data when the start switch is operated), the maintenance permission flag and the payout amount display displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 are displayed based on the setting data table. (Upper digit) and payout number display (lower digit) are initialized. When the data number is 4 (setting data when the section display LED is off), output port processing is performed based on that the port output code is set, and the external output signals 1 and 2 are turned off. Then, the signal is set to the OFF state during the advantageous period. Further, when the data number is 27 (setting data at the time of transition to the advantageous section), the advantageous section (01) is set in the section state information that can specify the game section being controlled, and the payout is controlled. The highly accurate state (1) is set to the highly accurate state flag indicating the state.

[About the game start waiting process]
The control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The game start waiting process is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the game start waiting process, first, a medal insertion number display process is performed (Se1), and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 corresponding to the number of medals already inserted into the slot machine 1 are turned on (lighted state). To control. Then, an error number corresponding to the error code (E1) capable of specifying that the hopper tank 34a is full is prepared in a predetermined register (A) (Se2), and a predetermined port input buffer is referred to, Whether or not the hopper tank 34a is full is determined based on the confirmation data of the full tank sensor 35a (Se3).

When it is determined in step Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is in a full state, error processing described later is performed (Se4). In the error processing, the error state is controlled so that the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of specifying the error code (E1) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error code (E1) can be referred to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing. Error flag. In addition, the error code (E1) is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display unit 12. After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E1) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E1) is set in the register and the error state is entered, the process waits until the finalized data of the full tank sensor 35a is turned off, and the finalized data of the full tank sensor 35a is turned off. , An error command (cancel) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the error processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to step Se5.

When it is determined in step Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is not full, and when the error processing in step Se4 is finished, the value of the re-play medal counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to a predetermined value. Read into register (Se5). In the re-play medal counter, a value according to the result of the previous game is set by the game end setting process in the previous main process, and the re-game role is won in the previous game and the re-game is given. In the case of being played, a numerical value (for example, 3) corresponding to the prescribed number of bets required for playing the game is set, while 0 is given when the re-play is not given in the previous game. Is set.

After that, the replay medal counter of the RAM 41c is cleared (Se6), and it is determined whether or not the value of the replay medal counter read in the step of Se5 is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the replay is given. (Se7), if a replay is given, a medal insertion execution process is performed (Se8). In the medal insertion execution processing, the value of the re-play medal counter is set to the bet number, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the ON state (lighted state) to set a prescribed number of bets (3 in this embodiment). Notify that is set. Further, it sends to the sub-control unit 91 a command for the number of inserted coins which can specify the number of medals used for setting the bet number.

When the value of the replay medal counter is 0 in the step of Se7, that is, when it is determined that the replay is not given, and after the replay is given in the step of Se8, the medal insertion execution process is performed. Performs medal care permission setting processing (Se9). In the medal care permission setting process, the credit value set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and when the credit value does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment), the medal insertion unit 4 A medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the medal insertion is allowed is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed in the step of Se9, an interrupt once waiting process is performed (Se10). By performing the one-time interrupt waiting process, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, and the detection states of various switches, LED lighting states, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection states of these various switches are updated. After that, the subsequent processing (for example, medal insertion/payout error check processing, medal insertion signal processing, and operation input acceptance processing, which will be described later) can be performed.

After the interrupt once waiting process is performed in step Se10 and the timer interrupt is performed once, the same insertion/withdrawal error check process as in step Sb32 of the main process is performed (Se11). Then, it is determined whether or not the error processing is executed in the error check processing based on whether or not the error execution flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se12).

When it is determined that the error processing is executed in the error check processing in the step Se12, the processing returns to the step Se10 and each processing of the steps Se10 to Se12 is performed again. After that, in a state where no abnormality is detected in the transition of the medal payout signal or the transition of the medal insertion signal, the processes of steps Se10 to Se12 are performed, so that the error execution flag is not set and the step of Se12 is performed. Processing will be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se12 that the error execution flag is not set, the medal insertion signal process is performed (Se13). In the medal insertion signal process, the medal insertion state is determined based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. When the normal insertion of medals is detected, the medals are accepted for setting the bet number and credits, and the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when an abnormal insertion of a medal is detected, an error code (E5) is prepared and error processing is performed. After that, the error state is released and the error processing is ended, thereby ending the medal insertion signal processing.

After performing the medal insertion signal process in the step of Se13, the operation input acceptance process for accepting the operation by the switch is performed by enabling the operation of the various switches and operating the switch for which the operation is enabled. Is performed (Se14).

In the operation input reception process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the total value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the bet number already set (set bet number) Is greater than or equal to the value (3) required to set the bet number of three cards. When it is determined that the total value of the credits and the set number of bets is equal to or more than the value (3) required to set the number of three bets, the edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is referred to and the ON edge is set. It is determined whether or not the data is set. When it is determined that the ON edge data is set, the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted, the number of medals is set to the number of bets so that the number of bets is three, and the number of bets is set. The process of subtracting the number of medals from the credit is performed. When it is determined that the ON edge data is not set, the data for the ON state is set in the output buffer of the BET switch valid LED 21 to control the BET switch valid LED 21 to the ON state (lighting state). On the other hand, the total value of the credits set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the already set bet number (set bet number) is not equal to or more than the value (3) required to set the bet number of three cards. If it is determined, neither the process of determining whether the ON edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is set nor the process of controlling the BET switch valid LED 21 to the ON state are performed. When it is determined that the total value of the credits and the already set bet number (set bet number) is not equal to or more than the value (3) required to set the bet number of three cards, the BET switch valid LED 21 Keep the light off. As a result, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set a bet number of three, a player or the like operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set a bet number of three (first bet number). On the other hand, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is insufficient to set the bet number of three cards, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted, and only the bet number of two cards (the second bet number) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, the bet number of two is not set, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being played with the second bet number as much as possible.

In the operation input acceptance process, when the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number (2 or 3) when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the start is started. The acceptance of the operation by the switch 7 is validated. Further, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the settlement switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is validated.

Further, in the operation input reception process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in a predetermined register. After that, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off to switch the medal flow path to the medal payout opening 9 side. When the operation by the setting key switch 37 is detected and the operation by the setting key switch 37 is detected, the set value display processing for displaying the set value on the set value display 24 is performed. Further, when the operation by the settlement switch 10 is detected while the operation by the settlement switch 10 is effective, the settlement processing for returning the medal stored in the credit to the player is performed. After performing the process according to the switch in which the operation is detected, the operation input acceptance process is ended.

After performing the operation input acceptance process in the step Se14, it is determined whether or not an effective operation by the start switch 7 is detected based on the start flag (Se15). When it is determined that the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and the valid operation by the start switch 7 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Se16 to perform the LED display process for controlling the lighting state of the start valid LED 18. ..

In the LED display process, when the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is not detected in the state in which the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be valid by the operation input reception process in step Se14, the start valid LED 18 is turned on. When the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is detected and the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be valid in the state where the operation is controlled to (lighting state) and the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be valid. If not, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to the OFF state (light off state) to notify whether the operation by the start switch 7 is valid or invalid depending on the lighting state of the start valid LED 18.

In the step of Se15, when the start flag is set in the predetermined register and it is determined that the valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected, the random number value for the internal lottery is acquired from the random number circuit 42 and the RAM 41c is stored. It is set in a predetermined area (Se17). After that, the medal insertion state data capable of specifying the set bet number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se18), the start valid LED 18 is set to the OFF state (extinguished state) (Se19), and the medal maintenance permission flag is set. The game is cleared from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se20), and the display of the payout number on the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be cleared (Se21), the game start waiting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. After that, in the main process, an internal lottery is performed using the random number value acquired in the step Se17, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started in response to the detection of the operation of the start switch 7. Then, one game will be started.

In this way, in the game start waiting process included in the game program, it is possible to call the medal insertion signal process included in the game program, and when calling the medal insertion signal process, the timer interrupt process (main) is 1 After one interrupt waiting process for waiting until it is performed once, the medal insertion signal process is called. As will be described later, in the timer interrupt process (main), a port input process for updating the input data of the sensors including the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is performed, and the interrupt once waiting process is performed by the game start waiting process. Calling the medal insertion signal process after performing the above, causes the medal sensor process called by the medal insertion signal process to perform the process based on the latest input data updated by the timer interrupt process (main). Is possible.

Further, in the operation input acceptance process performed in the game start waiting process, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted when the bet number already set and the credit can be added to set the bet number of three. ing. As a result, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the bet number of three, the player operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set the three bet number (first bet number). On the other hand, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is insufficient for setting the bet number of three, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted, and only the bet number of two (the second bet number) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, the bet number of two cards is not set.

Further, in the operation input acceptance process performed in the game start waiting process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the bet number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number (2 or 3). In some cases, the acceptance of the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled, and when the bet number of three is set or the bet number of two is set, the start is started. The game can be started by operating the switch 7.

[About error handling]
The control content of the error processing performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The error process is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the main process included in the game program. The error process is called in a state where an error number corresponding to an error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred is set in a predetermined register (register A in this embodiment).

As shown in FIG. 53, in the error processing, first, the error number set in the A register at the start of the error processing is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf1). Then, the value of the error command indicating that the error processing is being performed is set in the D register (Sf2), and the communication data storage processing is performed (Sf3). In the communication data storage processing, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and the D register and set in the command queue. For example, when an error number corresponding to an error code is set in the A register and an error command value is set in the D register, an error command including an error number that can identify the type of error that has occurred is sent. Generate and set in the command queue. The commands set in the command queue will be sequentially transmitted by the command transmission process included in the subsequent timer interrupt process.

After performing the communication data storage processing in the step Sf3, the release possibility determination that defines the determination value (removability determination value) for determining whether or not the error that has occurred is a releaseable error The start address of the value table is set in the HL register (Sf4), and the release possibility determination value defined in the address obtained by adding the A register value (error number) to the HL register value is read into the E register (Sf5). ).

After that, the value of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is read into the HL register, and the value of the HL register is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf6).

After that, the address of the output buffer corresponding to the ones (lower) of the game auxiliary display 12 is set in the C register (Sf7), and the 7-segment display data storage process is performed (Sf8). In the 7-segment display data storage process, display data for displaying numbers (0 to 9 and non-display in the present embodiment) on the 7-segment display preset in the ROM 41b and used for the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. Display data is specified based on the specified 7-segment display data table and the value set in the A register at the start of the 7-segment display data storage processing, and the specified output data is stored in the output buffer of the address set in the C register. Set the display data. After that, E display data for displaying a predetermined character (“E” in this embodiment) is set in the output buffer corresponding to the tens digit (upper order) of the game auxiliary display 12 (Sf9). The display data is set in the output buffers of 1s and 10s of the game auxiliary display 12, and then the timer interrupt processing is performed, so that the game auxiliary display 12 displays in accordance with the display data (for example, , "E1", etc.).

Then, it is determined whether or not the error that has occurred based on the cancelability determination value set in the E register is a cancelable error without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 (Sf10). When it is determined that the error occurring in step Sf10 cannot be canceled, the process is stopped and stands by. When the processing is stopped, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is temporarily stopped, the setting key switch 37 is turned on to restart the power supply, and the setting change state is entered, whereby the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is changed. It is possible to initialize and clear the error state. If the cause of the error has not been removed, the error state will be temporarily canceled by shifting to the setting change state when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. It will be detected and error processing will be performed. The error that cannot be released without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 is, for example, a RAM error error that occurs when a data error in the RAM is detected. On the other hand, an error that can be released without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 is, for example, an abnormality (error code E5) related to a medal insertion signal detected by a medal sensor process included in a non-gaming program described later.

When it is determined that the error occurring in the step Sf10 can be canceled, the interrupt once waiting process is performed (Sf11), the timer interrupt process is performed once, and the output states of various sensors are changed. Wait for updates.

Then, after the interrupt once waiting process is performed in step Sf11, one of the input buffers 0 to 2 in which input state data of various switches (input data, final data, edge data in this embodiment) is stored. Input data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 0 is read into the A register (Sf12), and input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c are extracted (Sf13). Further, the confirmation data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 1 is read into the A register (Sf14), and the confirmation data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c and the confirmation data of the full tank sensor are extracted (Sf15). Then, based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, and the confirmed data of the full tank sensor, it is determined whether or not the error is released (Sf17).

When it is determined in step Sf17 that any one of the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, and the confirmed data of the full tank sensor is not a normal value and the error is not released. In step Sf11, the process returns to step Sf11 and the processes of Sf11 to Sf17 are repeated. On the other hand, in the step of Sf17, all the values of the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, the confirmation data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c, and the confirmation data of the full tank sensor are normal values, and when it is determined that the error is released. Reads the edge data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 2 into the A register (Sf18), and determines whether or not the reset operation by the reset switch 23 or the reset/setting switch 38 is performed (Sf19).

When it is determined in step Sf19 that the reset operation has not been performed, the process returns to step Sf11 and the processes of Sf11 to Sf19 are repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sf19 that the reset operation is performed, the value of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is restored to the value saved in step Sf6 (Sf20).

After that, clear data (0) is set in the A register as transmission data (Sf21), and the error number stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to 0 and cleared using the value of the A register (Sf22). ). Then, communication data setting processing is performed (Sf23).

When the communication data setting process is performed in step Sf23, the value of the error command set in step Sf2 is set in the D register, and 0 is set as the error number in the communication data setting process in step Sf23. Generates an error command that can identify that the error has been released and sets it in the command queue.

After the communication data setting process is performed in the step Sf23, an interrupt once waiting process is performed (Sf24), and the error command set in the command queue is transmitted by the timer interrupt process. Then, the error processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the processing performed before the error processing is started.

As described above, in the error processing of this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing can be performed during the execution of the error processing, and the one game time management timer value is updated. As a result, the one game time management timer value is updated during the execution of the error processing, so that the elapsed time of the minimum time is measured even during the error processing, and the game is smoothly played after the end of the error processing. be able to.

In the error processing of this embodiment, it is determined that the reset operation is performed by the reset switch 23 while the power supply to the slot machine 1 is continued (Sf19), and the error processing is ended. It is possible to terminate without interrupting the power supply. As a result, the game can be smoothly restarted even if error processing is performed.

[About medal input signal processing]
Next, the control contents of the medal insertion signal processing which the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment calls from the game start waiting processing will be described with reference to FIG. The medal insertion signal process is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the game start waiting process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the medal insertion signal process, first, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, a medal care permission flag indicating that the medal insertion from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set. It is determined whether or not (Sg1). Then, when the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the medal insertion signal process is ended, and the process returns to the game start waiting process of the calling source. On the other hand, when the medal care permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal state transition data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sg2). The medal insertion signal state transition data is data that can identify the transition of the state of the detection signals of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter, may be referred to as a medal insertion signal), and the medal sensor check included in the non-gaming program. By the processing, it is updated at a predetermined timing based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, etc., and is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c.

Then, the detection range A (see FIGS. 4 and 5) of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c in the medal selector 29 is inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 based on the medal insertion signal state transition data referred to in step Sg2. It is determined whether or not the medal is passing (Sg3). When it is determined that the medal is not passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the flow passage switching solenoid 30 is controlled to the ON state (Sg4), and the medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 is the medal selector. A hopper provided with the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 inside the casing 1a so that the flow path of the medals can be introduced into the hopper tank 34a by flowing down the medal inflow flow path 29a and the medal receiving flow path 29b. Control is performed so as to switch to the tank 34a side. After that, the medal shooting signal disregard timer is cleared (Sg6).

Here, the medal shooting signal disregard timer sets the output of at least a control signal for turning off the flow path switching solenoid 30 when setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, and then sets the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state. The passage of the switching time until the passage of the medals inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 is actually switched to the medal payout opening 9 side by the operation of 30 is measured, and during the predetermined time during the switching time, the medals are processed in a predetermined process. It is a timer for controlling so as to ignore the input signal. When the control signal output of the flow path switching solenoid 30 for switching the flow path of the medal is set in the medal insertion signal ignore timer, at least after the output setting of the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is performed, A predetermined time (504 milliseconds in this embodiment) until the medal flow path is switched is set. After that, the medal insertion signal ignore timer is subtracted and updated by the counter updating process of the timer interrupt process, and when it becomes 0, it is possible to specify that the switching time has elapsed.

When it is determined in step Sg3 that the medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and after the medal insertion signal ignore timer is cleared in step Sg6, the second evacuation command is used. Then, the value of the flag register in which the calculation result is stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is saved by storing it in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order (Sg7), and then the timer interrupt is generated. The prohibition is set (Sg8), and the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program is called by using the CALL command (Sg9).

In the medal sensor process, first, similar to the RT information output process described above, the LD command described above is used to change the current stack pointer from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the game program of the calling source. The value of the address indicated by SP is read, stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, and saved. Then, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program. Then, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register, using the above-mentioned first save instruction. Are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. Incidentally, when the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the LD instruction is used when the stack pointer SP is changed from the gaming program to the non-gaming program, so that the flag register is used. The second zero flag TZ of 1 is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the medal sensor process is called from the game program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the medal sensor process is called by the game program. It may be different from the state of the register at the time.

Then, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal. When the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) indicating that the medal has normally passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the medal is the inserted medal. The medal passage state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has started to pass the detection range A of the sensors 31a to 31c, and the previous passage state determination of the medal passage state in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. The medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that it has not changed since time is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. After that, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the input data of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the medal insertion signal state transition data, medal-related error data that can specify an error code (E5) indicating that an abnormality related to the medal insertion signal is detected is stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area. Perform processing such as setting.

Then, similar to the RT information output processing described above, the value of the register saved when the medal sensor processing is started is sequentially read from the non-game stack area using the first return instruction described above, and the medal sensor is read. Restores all registers to the state they were in when the process started. After that, by using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the medal sensor processing is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, thereby the medal. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the sensor process was started, and the winning information output process is ended. In addition, in order to end the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program and to return to the game program, the stack pointer SP is set after the values of all the registers saved at the start of the medal sensor process are restored. When the LD command is used when changing from the non-gaming program to the gaming program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register is changed before and after the LD instruction is executed. It can change. That is, the state of the register when the medal sensor process is ended may be different from the state of the register that was saved when the medal sensor process was started.

After performing the medal sensor process in step Sg9, the timer interrupt is set to enable (Sg10), and the value of the register saved in step Sg7 is saved using the second return instruction described above. By sequentially reading from the game stack area in the reverse order and setting it in the flag register, the flag register is returned to the state before performing the winning information output processing (Sg11). After the medal sensor process is performed, the saving process and the restoring process of all the registers in the medal sensor process in the step Sg9 and the saving process and the returning process of the flag register in the steps Sg7 and Sg11 are performed. In, the state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 is completely restored to the state before the processing is performed.

After that, referring to a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, the medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register (Sg12), and it is determined whether or not an error code (E5) is set by the medal sensor processing (medal sensor check processing). The determination is made (Sg13). When the error code (E5) is set, that is, when the medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register and the error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register, error processing is performed. (Sg14), control is made to an error state that disables the progress of the game.

In the error processing, the error processing controls to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of specifying the error code (E5) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the error code (E5) can be referred to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing. Error flag. In addition, the error code (E5) is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display unit 12. After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the condition for releasing the error state according to the error code (E5) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E5) is prepared in the predetermined register and is shifted to the error state, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is OFF state and the reset/setting switch is set as the condition for releasing the error state. Until it is established that the 38 or the reset switch 23 is turned on, it waits without performing control for advancing the game. Then, when the cancellation condition is satisfied, an error command (cancellation) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, the error processing is terminated, and the medal insertion signal processing is returned to.

When it is determined that the error code (E5) is not set as the medal-related error data in the step of Sg13, and after the error processing of the step of Sg14 is completed, it is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. The content of the medal passing state reference data is determined by referring to the medal passing state reference data (Sg15) (Sg16, Sg17).

When it is determined in step Sg16 that the reference data of the medal passing state (no change) is set, the medal insertion signal process is ended and the process is returned to the game start waiting process. If it is determined in step Sg17 that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is set, the process proceeds to step Sg18, and the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set in step Sg17. If it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is not set, the process proceeds to step Sg21.

When it is determined in step Sg17 that the medal passage state reference data (medal passage) is set, insertion state determination processing is performed (Sg18). In the insertion status determination process, a credit counter that counts the current number of credits set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the credit counter is the maximum credit value of the slot machine 1 (50 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the situation is one less, that is, the situation in which the next accepted medal is the final medal that can be added to the credit. Then, the final acceptance flag that can specify whether or not the next medal to be accepted is the final medal that can be added to the credit is set in a predetermined register, and the insertion status determination process ends.

After the insertion state determination process is performed in step Sg18, if it is determined that the next accepted medal is the final medal that can be added to the credit, based on the final acceptance flag set in the predetermined register. By performing the medal blocker off process (Sg20) and setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 is changed from the hopper tank 34a side to the medal payout outlet 9 side. By switching, the medals inserted into the medal insertion section 4 after the medals detected by the inserted medal sensor 31c are controlled to be returned from the medal payout opening 9 via the medal return passage 29c. Further, in the medal blocker off processing, after the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the OFF state, referring to the medal insertion signal state transition data set in the game RAM area, the detection range A of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c It is determined whether or not the medal is passing, and when the medal is passing through the detection range A, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds in the medal insertion signal disregarding timer) is determined. ) Is set to start counting a predetermined time by the medal insertion signal disregard timer. This allows the sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) to be set by determining an abnormality in the medal insertion signal regardless of the state of the medal insertion signal in the sensor monitoring process described later for a predetermined time after the completion of the medal blocker off processing. There is nothing to be done.

After performing the medal blocker off process in the step Sg20, the medal insertion signal process is terminated and the process returns to the game start waiting process. On the other hand, if it is determined based on the final acceptance flag that the next medal to be accepted is not the final medal that can be added to the credit, the medal insertion signal process is terminated without performing the medal blocker off process, and the game start waiting process is performed. Return to.

When it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is not set in the step Sg17 and the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is not set, the predetermined area of the port input buffer is referred to. Then, the confirmation data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is acquired (Sg21), and it is determined whether or not the confirmation data is in the ON state (Sg22). When it is determined that the final data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31c is acquired by referring to the predetermined area of the port input buffer (Sg23), and the input data is turned off. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (Sg24).

If it is determined in step Sg19 that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is not in the ON state, and the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the step of Sg20. When it is determined that the medal receiving passage 29b is not in the OFF state, that is, when the medal is passing through the medal receiving passage 29b or when there is no medal in the medal receiving passage 29b, the medal insertion signal process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg22 that the final data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state and in step Sg24 that the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the OFF state, that is, the medal receiving flow path When it is time for the inserted medal sensor 31c to detect a medal in 29b, the medal insertion process is performed (Sg25).

In the medal insertion process, it is determined whether or not a specified number of bets has been set by referring to the currently set number of bets stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, if the specified number of bets is not set, 1 is added to the current bet number, and if the specified number of bets is already set, 1 is added to the credit counter.

After performing the medal insertion process in step Sg25, the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed (Sg26), and when the credit value does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) based on the credit counter. A medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the medal insertion section 4 permits medal insertion is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

If the medal care permission flag is not set after performing the medal care permission setting process in step Sg26, a predetermined value (504 milliseconds in this embodiment corresponds to a predetermined value set in advance for the medal insertion signal disregard timer is set. (Value) is set to start the counting of a predetermined time by the medal insertion signal ignoring timer (Sg28), and then the medal insertion signal processing is ended. On the other hand, when the medal care permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal processing is ended without setting the medal insertion signal ignoring timer. The medal shooting signal disregard timer is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds) in step Sg28, and then subtracted every predetermined time to set a predetermined time (predetermined time). In the present embodiment, it becomes 0 when 4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed based on whether or not the medal shooting signal disregard timer is 0. ing.

As described above, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, it is possible to call the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program, and when calling the medal sensor processing, the value of the flag register is set in the game stack of the RAM 41c. When the medal sensor processing is returned to the area, the value of the flag register is restored to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program, the timer interrupt is set to disabled, the medal sensor processing is performed, and then the medal sensor processing is started. When returning to the throw-in signal process, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled so that the timer interrupt is disabled during the execution of the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program.

In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program, after saving the value of the flag register, the timer interrupt is set to disabled and the medal sensor processing is performed. Is supposed to do.

Also, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program is performed with the timer interrupt disabled, the timer is set when the medal sensor processing returns to the medal insertion signal processing. After the interrupt is set to enable, the value of the flag register is restored to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

Further, the medal insertion signal process is a process called by the game start waiting process, and as described above, in the game start waiting process, an interrupt once waiting process for waiting until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once is performed. After that, the medal insertion signal process is called. In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing, after starting the medal insertion signal processing and performing a predetermined processing, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, and the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program is called. There is. As described above, in the game machine start waiting process and the medal insertion signal process, the game start waiting process performs one interrupt waiting process and then calls the medal insertion signal process to perform the medal sensor process in the medal insertion signal process. , In the state in which the input data of the sensors are updated by the timer interrupt process (main) by at least one interrupt waiting process in the game start waiting process, and the port input process included in the timer interrupt process (main), The medal sensor process is performed.

[About medal sensor processing and medal sensor check processing]
The control contents of the medal sensor process and the medal sensor check process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 55 to 57. The medal sensor process is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program and called in the medal insertion signal process included in the game program. The medal sensor check process is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program and called in the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the medal sensor process, first, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area by using the LD command described above. Then, it is evacuated (Sh1). After that, by using the LD instruction described above, the stack pointer SP is set to the non-game by setting a predetermined value of the non-game stack area (the value stored at the end of the previous non-game program) as the value of the stack pointer SP. Set for the program (Sh2). Then, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are stored in the non-game stack area in a predetermined order by using the above-mentioned first save instruction to save them (Sh3). Then, the medal sensor check process included in the non-gaming program is performed (Sh4).

After performing the medal sensor check process in the step Sh4, the register return value saved in the step Sh3 is sequentially read from the non-game stack area by using the first return instruction described above, and the winning information output process is executed. After returning all the registers to the state at the time of starting (Sh5), using the LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP stored and saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area in the step of Sh1 By setting the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the medal sensor process was started (Sh6), the medal sensor process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling medal insertion signal process.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the medal sensor check process, first, the medal passing state reference data and the medal-related error reference data set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c are cleared (Si1, Si2). The medal passing state reference data is data that can specify the passing state of the medals in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c as the processing result of the medal sensor check process. Based on the input data of 31c, it is determined that the medal has normally passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the medal has started to pass the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It is possible to specify that it has been determined that this has been detected, and that it has been determined that the state of detection of medals by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed from the previous determination time. The initial value of the medal passing state reference data is medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that the medal detection state has not changed since the previous determination. Further, in the medal-related error reference data, as a processing result of the medal sensor check processing, an abnormality (error code E5) related to detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter, may be referred to as medal insertion signal) is detected. This is data that can specify the effect. Further, the medal passing state reference data and the medal-related error reference data are set in the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c so that they can be referenced and updated by the non-gaming program, but can only be referenced from the gaming program. is there.

After clearing the medal passing state reference data and the medal related error reference data in the steps of Si1 and Si2, the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are acquired by referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer (Si3), and the medal insertion is performed. Correct/incorrect data for determining whether or not the transition of the signal state is normal is obtained by referring to a predetermined area of the ROM 41b (Si4), and by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the medal sensor check process before the previous time. The medal insertion signal state transition data stored in is acquired (Si5).

Then, the medal insertion signal state transition data acquired in step Si5 and the correct/incorrect data acquired in step Si4 are compared to determine whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct (Si6).

If it is determined in step Si6 that the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the current data of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in step Si3. The medal insertion signal state transition data is created and stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si7).

Then, referring to the medal passing time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si8), based on the medal insertion signal state transition data updated in the step of Si7, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are detected. It is determined whether the current and previous detection states are OFF (Si9, Si10). The medal passing time timer is a timer for measuring the duration of the period in which it is determined that the medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. As will be described later, based on the medal insertion signal state transition data, the timer interrupt processing (main) updates the time after the time measurement is started when the medal insertion signal is turned on.

When it is determined that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the OFF state and the previous detection state is not the OFF state in the steps of Si9 and Si10, that is, within the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. When there is a possibility that the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state due to the presence of the medals that were present in the detection range, the medal passing time referred to in the step of Si8 It is determined whether the timer is less than the shortest value (10.08 milliseconds in this embodiment) of the normal passage time range required for the medal to normally pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. (Si11). The normal passage time range is the actual measurement value of the time required for a medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal acceptance flow path 29b of the medal selector 29, and the medal acceptance flow path 29b. It is determined in advance based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, etc. (in the present embodiment, the range is 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

If it is determined in step Si11 that the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passing time range, the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in step Si7 is cleared (Si12), and the medal passing time timer is cleared. After clearing (Si13), the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) indicating that the medal has normally passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. Then, the medal sensor check process ends. On the other hand, if the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to step Si19 described later.

When it is determined that the current and previous detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are both OFF in the steps of Si9 and Si10, that is, the medal has not passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, When the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c have not changed since the previous determination, the state where the medal passing state reference data is initialized in the step of Si1, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change) is The state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is maintained, and the medal sensor check process ends.

When it is determined in step S9 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not the OFF state, that is, the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are If it is in the ON state, it is determined whether or not the medal passing time timer referred to in step Si8 exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range (99.68 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Si15).

If it is determined in step Si15 that the medal passage time timer does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passage time range, it is determined whether the medal passage time timer is operating (Si16). When the medal passage time timer is not operating, that is, when a medal newly enters the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If the time has not yet started to be measured by the medal passing time timer, the medal passing time timer is set to 0 and started (Si17), and then the medals are detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. The medal passage state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has started to pass the detection range A is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming area of the RAM 41c, and the medal sensor check processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si15 that the medal passing time timer has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to step Si19, which will be described later. When it is determined that the medal passing time timer is operating in step Si16, that is, the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c remain in the ON state. If the medal passing state reference data is initialized in the step of Si1, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the medal passing state reference data is maintained. The sensor check process ends. The medal passage time timer is set to 0 in step Si17 and is started, and then is added at every predetermined time by the timer interrupt process. The elapsed time, that is, the elapsed time from the time when it is determined that the state transition of the medal insertion signal is correct and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state, is timed by the medal passing time timer.

If it is determined in step Si6 that the state data for transitioning to the medal insertion signal is incorrect, if it is determined in step Si11 that the medal passage time timer is less than the minimum value of the normal passage time range, in step Si15, the medal passage time timer is set. When it is determined that the value exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the medal-related error reference data (E5) indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the medal insertion signal is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. (Si19), at step Si7, the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is cleared (Si20), the medal passing time timer is cleared and the time counting is stopped (Si21), and then the medal sensor check process is performed. Ends and returns to the medal sensor process. When the medal-related error reference data (E5) is set in the step of Si19 and the process returns to the medal sensor check process, the medal-related error reference is subsequently made in the medal insertion signal process of the game start waiting process included in the game program. By referring to the data (E5), the error state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 57, in determining whether or not the state transition of the medal insertion signal in step Si6 of the medal sensor check process included in the non-gaming program is correct, the insertion medal sensors 1 to 3 (insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c). When it is detected that the medals start to pass the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 (inserted medal sensor 31a) is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, and then the inserted medal is detected. A transition in which the sensor 2 (inserted medal sensor 31b) is changed from the OFF state to the ON state and then the inserted medal sensor 3 (inserted medal sensor 31b) is changed from the OFF state to the ON state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. In this case, it is determined that the state transition of the medal insertion signal is correct.

Further, when the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 detect that the medal has passed the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, after the inserted medal sensor 1 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the inserted medal sensor 1 is inserted. When a transition from the ON state of the sensor 2 to the OFF state and then the insertion medal sensor 3 from the ON state to the OFF state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data, and when the insertion medal sensor 1 is in the ON state. When the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the inserted medal sensor 3 after the OFF state and then the transition of the inserted medal sensor 2 from the ON state to the OFF state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. The state transition of the medal insertion signal is determined to be correct.

In the medal sensor check process, the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct, and it is determined that any of the insertion medal sensors 1 to 3 is in the ON state, so that the medal passing state reference data ( Detection) will be set. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 1 of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 first changes from the OFF state to the ON state, the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct, so the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct. If it is determined that the inserted medal sensor 1 is ON, the medal passing state reference data (detection) is set.

Further, it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct, and it is determined that all of the insertion medal sensors 1 to 3 are in the ON state, so that the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is set. It will be. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 2 among the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 finally changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and when the inserted medal sensor 3 finally changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the medal insertion signal transition Since the state data is determined to be correct, the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct, and when the insertion medal sensors 2 and 3 are in the OFF state, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is Will be set.

In the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after it is determined in step Sd16 and Sd17 that the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is set, the input of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is performed in steps Sd21 to Sd24. When it is specified that the data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the process proceeds to the subsequent medal insertion process and the like. That is, when the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set by the medal sensor check process, the fall of the inserted medal sensor 2 or 3 from the ON state to the OFF state is detected, and thus the normal medal state is detected. Input is detected.

[About payout control processing]
The control content of the payout control process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The payout control process is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the payout control process, first, the output buffer value of the signal during the advantageous period is set to the initial value (OFF) by referring to the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is 0) indicating the state (Sj1). When it is determined in step Sj1 that the output buffer value of the signal during the advantageous period is the initial value (0) and the signal during the advantageous period is not output, that is, the state is not controlled to the advantageous period, , The number of bets in the game set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the A register (Sj2), and it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the game is three (Sj3).

When it is determined in the step Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is three, a game state determination process for determining a game state is performed (Sj4), and the currently controlled game state is acquired. It is determined whether or not the controlled game state is the special state (BB1, BB2) (Sj5). When it is determined that it is not the special state (BB1, BB2), the general-role winning number, which is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can specify the winning result of the general-role in the internal lottery, is acquired in the A register ( Sj6), it is determined whether or not the general role winning number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (Sj7), and it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone transition winning combination for shifting the game zone to the advantageous zone has been won by the internal lottery.

When it is determined in step Sj7 that the general winning combination number is equal to or larger than the predetermined value and the advantageous zone transition winning combination is won, the data number for setting the advantageous zone winning combination is set in the A register (Sj8). , Continuous data processing is performed (Sj9). By setting the data number for setting the advantageous section winning time in the A register and performing continuous data processing, processing such as setting the flag during the advantageous section indicating that the advantageous section is controlled in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed. It is supposed to be. By setting the during-advantage interval flag in the step Sj9, the during-advantage interval flag is referred to in the above-described main processing (Sb80), and a predetermined value (1 indicating the ON state) is output to the output buffer of the during-advantage interval signal. After being set, the output of the signal during the advantageous period is started.

After performing the continuous data processing in the step of Sj9, after performing the advantageous zone transition related processing that performs various settings related to the transition to the advantageous zone (Sj10), the payout control processing is ended and the main processing is performed. Return to.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is three and the lottery is internal, and if it is determined in step Sj5 that the currently controlled gaming state is the special state (BB1, BB2), Sj7 When it is determined that the general role winning number is less than the predetermined value and the advantageous section transition combination is not won in the internal lottery, the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section in steps Sj8 to Sj10 is performed. Instead, the payout control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

In the step of Sj1, the output buffer value of the signal during the advantageous period is not the initial value (0 which is the OFF state) but a predetermined value (1 indicating the ON state), and the state where the signal during the advantageous period is being output, that is, the advantageous period If it is determined that the advantageous period game is being controlled, the value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous period game number counter that counts the advantageous period game number, which is the number of games after the advantageous period starts. Add 1 (Sj11). The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area which is initialized when it is determined by the main processing that the advantageous section end flag is set. The section game number counter is initialized and set to an initial value (0) at the end of the advantageous section.

After adding 1 to the advantageous section game number counter in the step Sj11, the bet number and game state determination processing is performed (Sj12) to obtain the bet number set in the game and the currently controlled game state. .. Then, it is determined whether or not the bet number set in the game is two or the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1 (Sj12).

When it is determined in step Sj12 that the bet number set in the game is two or the currently controlled game state is a game state other than RT1, the payout control process is terminated and the main process is executed. Return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the bet number set in the game is 2 or the currently controlled game state is not the game state other than RT1, that is, the bet number set in the game is 3, When it is determined that the currently controlled gaming state is RT1, 1 is added to the ED transition game number counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj14).

The ED transition game number counter is executed in a predetermined state (the number of bets set in the game is three and the currently controlled game state is RT1) after the advantageous section is started. This is a counter for counting the number of games played. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the ED transition game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area that is initialized when it is determined by the above-described main processing that the advantageous period end flag is set, The ED transition game number counter is initialized and set to an initial value (0) at the end of the advantageous period, similarly to the advantageous period game number counter described above. The ED transition game number counter is referred to in the later-described AT state management process, and when the ED transition game number counter value reaches the specified value, the navigation notification control is performed for the period until the advantageous section ends. Will be moved to.

After adding 1 to the ED transition game number counter in step Sj14, freeze setting processing is performed (Sj15), and freeze control for delaying the progress of the game for a predetermined period is performed based on the payout state and the winning situation of the small winning combination. When it is determined whether or not to perform the freeze control, and when it is determined to perform the freeze control, the setting for performing the freeze control is performed.

After performing the freeze setting process in the step Sj15, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the next payout state information set by a payout state process or a payout state-related process in the AT state management process described later is stored. The address is set in the HL register (Sj16), and the next payout state information stored in the address is acquired in the A register (Sj17). Then, the current payout status information indicating the payout status controlled in the game is updated to the next payout status information acquired in step Sj17 (Sj18), and the payout status controlled based on the present payout status information is updated. It is determined whether or not there is a payout state A, a payout state B, or a payout state C in which navigation notification may be performed (Sj19). The value of the payout status information is assigned a value of 1 or more for the payout status A and the payout status B, and 0 for the payout status other than the payout status A, the payout status B and the payout status C. Whether or not the payout state to be controlled this time is assigned to the payout state A, the payout state B, or the payout state C by being allocated and determining whether or not the present payout state information is 1 or more. It is possible to judge.

When it is determined in step Sj19 that the payout status is the payout status A, the payout status B, or the payout status C, the section display LED 19 that indicates by lighting that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section After the ON state data is set in the output buffer of (Sj20), the interrupt once waiting process is performed (Sj21). By setting ON state data in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 and performing one-time interrupt waiting processing, the timer interrupt processing is performed by the one-time interrupt processing, and the section display LED19 is performed by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing. Will be controlled to the lit state.

After performing the interrupt once waiting process in the step Sj21, the payout state information is acquired in the A register (Sj22), and the initial value (1) of the external output signal number is set in the B register (Sj23). External output signal number correction processing is performed (Sj24). In the external output signal number correction processing, the value of the B register is corrected to the external output signal number corresponding to the payout state information set in the A register.

After that, the corrected external output signal number set in the B register is set in the external output signal output buffer (Sj25). The external output signal number set in the external output signal output buffer is referred to when the external output signal processing in the above-mentioned main processing is performed (Sb25), and the external output signal number is determined by the external output signal processing (Sb26). The external output signal is output, and when the AT control is started, the AT signal indicating that the AT is being controlled is started to be output.

After setting the external output signal number in the external output signal output buffer in the step of Sj25, the payout state information is again acquired in the A register (Sj26) and the general winning number is acquired in the B register (Sj27). , Navi number identification processing is performed (Sj28). In the navigation number identification processing, a navigation number (see FIG. 29 and FIG. 30) that is predetermined according to the payout state information and the general combination winning number (winning number) is identified.

After performing the navigation number identification process in the step Sj28, the navigation number identified by the navigation number identification process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj29). Also, when it is determined in the step Sj19 that the payout status is not the payout status A, the payout status B, or the payout status C, the process proceeds to the step Sj29, and the value of the payout status information, that is, 0 is set to the navigation number. Store as. When 0 is set as the navigation number, the navigation notification is not performed and the navigation display is hidden. By setting 1 to 6 as the navigation numbers, the navigation display showing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the navigation numbers is performed. The navigation number stored in the step Sj29 is referred to in the game start command transmission process (Sb22) in the main process described above, and the push order command that can specify the navigation number is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Becomes

After the navigation number is stored in the step Sj29, a payout state process is performed (Sj30). In the payout status process, processing according to the current payout status specified based on the payout status information, processing for determining whether to shift the payout status based on the winning result of the internal lottery, etc. When it is determined to shift the ball state, a process of setting the next ball output state information in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

When the payout state process ends in step Sj30, the payout control process ends and the process returns to the main process.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is advantageous in that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is the predetermined value (1) in the payout control process (first process) that is called from the main process at the start of the game. If it is specified as a section (Sj1), the advantageous section game number counter is updated by adding one game regardless of whether the bet number is set to 3 or 2 (Sj11). ) Do. Then, in the AT management processing (second processing) called from the main processing at the end of the game, the value of the advantageous section game number counter updated by the payout control processing in the game becomes the prescribed number of games (first prescribed number). It is determined whether or not it has been reached, and when it is determined that the specified number of games has been reached, the advantageous section end flag is set. After that, in the main process, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the setting of the advantageous section end flag, thereby initializing the information about the advantageous section and ending the advantageous section.

When controlling the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 updates the advantageous section game number counter regardless of whether the bet number of three is set or the bet number of two is set. The advantageous period is ended when the advantageous period game number counter value reaches the prescribed number of games (first prescribed number). The number of games in the advantageous section is limited so that the advantageous section is not controlled for a long period of time (1500 games in this embodiment) or more. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance of the slot machine 1 from being excessively increased.

In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is advantageous by determining whether or not the during-advantage period signal is being output based on whether or not the value of the during-advantage period signal buffer is the initial value. It is determined whether the section is in progress. When it is determined that the advantageous zone is in effect, as the processing (Sj11 to Sj30) relating to the advantageous zone in the payout control process, a process of updating the advantageous zone game number counter, a state in which the bet number is 2 or Process related to navigation notification performed on condition that the game state is other than RT1 (for example, the number of ED transition games for specifying a game to be transitioned to the ED state in which the navigation notification is controlled over the period until the advantageous section ends) The output buffer of the section display LED 19 is controlled to be in a lighting state on the condition that the process of updating the counter and the control of the predetermined payout state (the payout state A, the payout state B, the payout state C) are controlled. Process of setting ON data (predetermined value: 1), process of specifying the navigation number corresponding to the winning combination based on the navigation number based on the general winning number and setting it in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, current control It is designed to perform various processes according to the payout state that is being performed). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the processing relating to the advantageous section is performed while the signal during the advantageous section is being output.

In the payout control process that is called from the main process at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal signal buffer during the advantageous period is not the predetermined value (1) and is not the advantageous period ( Sj1), as a start condition of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the winning combination of the advantageous section is achieved in the internal lottery (Sj6, Sj7), and it is determined that the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied. In this case, an advantage zone flag indicating that the advantage zone is controlled is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj9). In the subsequent main process, it is determined whether or not the advantage zone flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80), and when the advantage zone flag is set and it is determined that the advantage zone is in effect, A predetermined value (data (1) indicating the ON state) is set in the signal buffer during the advantageous period. Then, after that, the LED dynamic display process is performed in the timer interrupt process to output the signal during the advantageous period. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the process (Sj8, Sj8) of shifting to the advantageous period is performed when the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is not the predetermined value (1) and the signal during the advantageous period is not being output. it can.

In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to determine whether or not it is during the advantageous period based on the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period. This is a signal output to a test device that performs a performance test of the machine 1. As a result, processing relating to the advantageous section is performed while the signal during the advantageous section used for the performance test is being output, and processing for shifting to the advantageous section is performed when the signal during the advantageous section is not being output. That can be guaranteed. Further, in the payout control process, by determining whether or not during the advantageous period based on the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period, to determine whether during the advantageous period in the payout control process The data capacity can be reduced because it is not necessary to provide a flag separately.

In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not in the advantageous zone based on the signal buffer in the advantageous zone (Sj1) and that the bet number of 3 is set. (Sj3), while performing processing (Sj7, Sj8) for shifting to the advantageous period, it is determined that the period is not the advantageous period based on the signal buffer during the advantageous period (Sj1), but the number of bets of three is not set. When it is determined (Sj3), the payout control process is terminated without performing the process (Sj7, Sj8) of shifting to the advantageous section, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the payout control process, if three bets (first bet) are not set, the process of shifting to the advantageous section is not performed, so that three bets are given to the player or the like. A number (first bet number) can be prompted to play the game.

In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not in the advantageous zone based on the signal buffer during the advantageous zone (Sj1) and is not controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2). If (Sj5), the process (Sj7, Sj8) for shifting to the advantageous zone is performed, while it is determined that the zone is not the advantageous zone (Sj1), but it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) is controlled. In this case, the payout control process is terminated without performing the process (Sj7, Sj8) of shifting to the advantageous section, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the payout control process, when the game state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the process for shifting to the advantageous section is not performed, and therefore the special state (BB1, It is possible to encourage the player to play a game other than BB2).

In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not in the advantageous section based on the signal buffer in the advantageous section (Sj1), and determines that the bet number of 3 is set (Sj3). If it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) is not controlled (Sj5), the process of shifting to the advantageous zone (Sj7, Sj8) is performed, but it is determined that the zone is not the advantageous zone (Sj1). ) When it is determined that the number of bets for three cards is not set, or when it is determined that the bet number is set to the special state (BB1, BB2), the process (Sj7, Sj8) of shifting to the advantageous section is executed. The payout control process is terminated without performing the process and the process returns to the main process. Thereby, in the payout control process, when the bet number of three (first bet number) is not set, or when the game state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section is set. Since the process of shifting is not performed, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play the game in a game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2) and a bet number of three (first bet number).

In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is the predetermined value (1) and is in the advantageous section (Sj1), and sets the number of bets of three bets. If it is determined (Sj13) that the process related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is the predetermined value (1), which is determined to be the advantageous period. However, (Sj1), when it is determined that the number of bets for three cards is not set (Sj13), the process related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is not performed, and the payout control process is ended to finish the main process. It is designed to return to processing. As a result, in the payout control process, if three bets (first bet) are not set, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed. A number (first bet number) can be prompted to play the game.

In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section is the predetermined value (1) and is in the advantageous section (Sj1), and the game state is BB1. When it is determined that the RT1 has been carried over (Sj13), the processing related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is the predetermined value (1) and the value is in the advantageous period. Although it is determined that there is (Sj1), if it is determined that the game state is a game state other than RT1 (Sj13), the payout control process is performed without performing the process (Sj14 to Sj30) related to the navigation notification. It ends and returns to the main processing. As a result, in the payout control process, when the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the player or the like is urged to play the game at RT1. it can.

In the payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is the predetermined value (1) and is in the advantageous section (Sj1), and sets the bet number of three bets. When it is determined that the gaming state is RT1 in which the winning of BB1 has been carried over (Sj13), the process related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is When it is determined that it is the predetermined value (1) and the advantageous section (Sj1), but it is determined that the number of bets of three bets is not set, or when it is determined that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1. In this case, the payout control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process without performing the process (Sj14 to Sj30) related to the navigation notification. Thereby, in the payout control process, when the bet number of three (first bet number) is not set, or when the game state is a game state other than RT1, a process related to the navigation notification is performed. Since there is none, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play the game with the bet number of three (first bet number) and RT1.

In the payout control process of the present embodiment, in the game after the game in which the process (Sj1 to Sj10) for shifting the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed, the external output signal number is output to the external output signal. Each process of steps Sj11 to Sj30 including a process (Sj25) to be set in the output buffer is performed, and when the output of the AT signal is started, the game in which the output of the AT signal is started. In the previous game, the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj1 to Sj10) is performed, so that the output of the AT signal is started in the state where the section is displayed.

In the payout control process of the present embodiment, when the output of the AT signal is started, the ON state data (predetermined value 1) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and after the interrupt once waiting process is performed. Since the external signal number is stored in the output buffer (Sj25), the AT signal is output after the section display is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the external device, which has received the AT signal, from specifying that the advantageous section is being controlled before the section display is started.

In the payout control process of the present embodiment, when three bet numbers (first bet number) are set, the process related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the two bet number ( When the second bet number) is set, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, and in the advantageous section, one of the multi-bell and the three-win role is won in the internal lottery. In this case, when the bet number of three cards (first bet number) is set, the operation mode (the correct stop order) corresponding to the winning multi-bell and the type of the three-card combination is notified. When the bet number of 2 cards (second bet number) is set, the operation mode (the correct stop order) corresponding to the winning multi-bell and the type of the 3-combination is not notified. ing. As a result, when the bet number of two (the second bet) is set, the navigation notification does not indicate the operation mode advantageous to the player, so that the bet number of three (the second bet) is set. You can encourage them to play games.

[About operation information signal output processing]
The control content of the operation information signal output processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The operation information signal output process is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program and called in the main process included in the gaming program.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the operation information signal output processing, first, by using the LD instruction described above, the current stack pointer SP is moved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. The value of the indicated address is read, stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, and saved (Sz501). Then, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program (Sz502). Then, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register, using the above-mentioned first save instruction. Are saved in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order (Sz503). Incidentally, when the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the gaming program to the non-gaming program. Then, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is called from the game program, the state of the registers saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is the game. The state of the register when the program calls the non-gaming RAM area initialization process may differ.

After saving all the registers in the step of Sz503, a communication setting process is performed (Sz504). In the communication setting process, the baud rate value of the communication signal is set and the signal transmission function of the main control unit 41 is set.

After performing the communication setting process in step Sz504, the navigation number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the A register (Sz505). Then, it is determined whether or not the navigation number is 0 and navigation notification is not performed (Sz506). When it is determined that the navigation number is 0, after the winning state of the general winning combination specified based on the general winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the flag register Z (Sz507), the small A value (0) indicating the operation mode (recommended operation mode) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that minimizes the loss of the winning combination is set in the A register (Sz508). Then, based on the winning situation of the general winning combination read in the flag register Z in the step Sz507, it is determined whether or not the general winning combination is a non-winning loss (Sz509).

When it is determined that the general winning combination has not been won in step Sz509 and it is a loss, the leading address of the symbol stop signal pattern setting table is set in the HL register (Sz510), and the winning status of the special winning combination can be specified. The value of the internal winning flag (non-winning: 0, BB1 winning: 1, BB2 winning: 2) is read into the A register (Sz11), and symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing is performed (Sz512). In the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process, the symbol stop signal pattern setting data is acquired in the A register based on the value of the symbol stop signal pattern setting table and the internal winning flag. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data is data for obtaining a reel number set value by an addition process (Sz516) described later according to the winning situation of the special combination when no general combination is won.

When the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in step Sz512, and when it is determined in step Sz506 that the navigation number is not 0 and navigation notification is performed, the general role is won in step Sz509. If it is determined that the reel number signal data table is stored in the HL register, the process proceeds to step Sz513. After that, the A register value is subjected to a predetermined correction process for correction (Sz514), the values of the A register and the flag register are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz515), and the addition process is performed (Sz516). In the addition process, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the reel number setting value stored at the address of the HL register value after the addition is acquired in the A register. Then, the A register value is set as a reel number signal in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz517).

When it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 in step Sz506 and the processing of steps Sz513 and thereafter is performed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and in step Sz517, the navigation number is set. A reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, when it is determined that the general combination is won in the step of Sz509 and the processing of the steps of Sz513 and thereafter is performed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, when the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in step Sz512 and the processes in steps Sz513 and subsequent steps are performed and the special combination is won, the A register is won. There is a symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the reel number signal that indicates the stop order that can win the special role, and the stop that can win the winning special role A reel number signal indicating the order is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, when the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in the step Sz512 and the processes of the steps Sz513 and subsequent steps are performed, and the special combination is not won, the DDT point is stored in the A register. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to is set, and the reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become.

After setting the reel number signal in the step Sz517, the values of the A register and the flag register saved in the step Sz515 are restored (Sz518), and the start address of the stop execution symbol number table is set in the HL register (Sz519). .. Then, addition processing is performed. In the addition processing, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the stop execution symbol number stored in the address of the HL register value after the addition is acquired in the A register. Then, the A register value is set as a stop execution symbol number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz521).

After that, the stop execution step calculation processing for calculating the stop execution step based on the stop execution symbol number is performed (Sz522), and the stop execution step acquired by the calculation is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a stop execution position signal that can be specified. (Sz523).

When it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 in step Sz506 and the processing in steps Sz518 and thereafter is performed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and in step Sz523, the navigation number is set. A stop execution position signal indicating a stop timing corresponding to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When it is determined in step Sz509 that a general winning combination has been won and the processing in steps Sz518 and thereafter is performed, a DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set. The stop execution position signal indicating is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, when the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing is performed in the step Sz512 and the processing in steps Sz518 and thereafter is performed, and the special combination is elected, the A register is elected. There is data for the symbol stop signal pattern setting for setting the stop execution position signal that indicates the stop timing at which the special part can be won, and it is possible to win the winning special part. A stop execution position signal indicating stop timing is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, when the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in step Sz512 and the processes in steps Sz518 and subsequent steps are performed, and the special combination is not won, the DDT point is stored in the A register. Symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to is set, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become so.

After the stop execution position signal is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step Sz523, the value of the reel number signal set in the step Sz517 is read into the A register (Sz524) and the reel number signal output process is performed (Sz525). In the reel number signal output process, a process of outputting a reel number signal, which can specify the stop order of each reel specified based on the A register value, from a predetermined output port to the test apparatus.

After performing the reel number signal output processing in the step Sz525, the value of the stop execution position signal set in the step Sz523 is read into the A register (Sz526), and the stop execution position signal output processing is executed (Sz527). In the stop execution position signal output process, a process of outputting a stop execution position signal capable of specifying the stop timing of each reel specified based on the A register value from a predetermined output port to the test apparatus is performed.

After performing the stop execution position signal output process in step Sz527, the values of all the registers saved in step Sz503 are restored (Sz528), and the values of the stack pointer saved in step Sz501 are restored. Then, the operation information signal output process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

As described above, in the operation information signal output process of the present embodiment, the stop execution position signal and the stop execution position signal are output to the test apparatus as the operation information signals that specify the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is possible. In the above-mentioned payout control processing, a predetermined value (1 indicating ON state) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 when the control of the AT is started, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to the lighting state by the timer interrupt processing. The operation information signal output process is called in the main processing after the section display indicating that the section is being controlled to the advantageous section is started. In the operation information signal output process, the operation information is output after the section display is started. The signal is output to the test equipment. As a result, the operation information signal is output to the test apparatus after the section display is started, so that the test apparatus side can specify the operation mode designated in the state where the section display is being performed.

In the operation information signal output process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the navigation notification for instructing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed based on the navigation number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz506) If it is determined that the navigation notification is performed, the process (Sz523) of outputting the stop execution position signal that specifies the operation mode instructed based on the navigation number is performed, and the navigation notification is not performed. When it is determined, the winning number indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is referred to (Sz509), and the process of outputting the stop execution position signal designating the operation mode corresponding to the winning number (Sz509) is performed. There is. Accordingly, in the operation information signal output process, when it is determined that the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is instructed, the process of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery can be omitted, and thus the operation mode is designated. The process for outputting the stop execution position signal can be simplified.

[Data processing for role ratio monitor]
The control content of the data processing for role ratio monitoring performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 60 to 65. The winning ratio monitor data process is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program and called in the main process included in the gaming program. Further, the ratio ratio monitor data process calls each state count process which is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program, and each state count process is a subroutine ratio update process which is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program and a continuous role. The material ratio update processing and the instructed combination ratio update processing are further called.

The main control unit 41 displays a credit display 11 and a game auxiliary display composed of a 2-digit 7-segment display, with the character payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the character payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout as a ratio display. Control for displaying on the container 12 is performed. The credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12 are indicators for displaying information according to the progress of the game, and cannot always display the ratio display, so that the game shop is not playing the game. The ratio display is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by the store clerk.

Specifically, when the game is not being played, the front door 1b that is normally locked is unlocked by a key held by a clerk of the game store and opened, and then provided inside the housing 1a. When the reset/setting switch 38 is operated, the main control unit 41 switches the current display contents on the credit display device 11 and the game auxiliary display device 12 to start the display of the ratio display.

In addition, the ratio display is composed of four-digit alphanumeric characters consisting of the upper two digit alphanumeric characters that make up the abbreviation that indicates the type of ratio display and the lower two digit numbers that indicate the ratio. The display contents are displayed on the credit display unit 11 and the display contents in the lower two digits are displayed on the game auxiliary display unit 12, and the ratio display is displayed by switching at a predetermined time in a predetermined display order from the start of the ratio display.

With the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 displaying the ratio display, the front door 1b is closed, a medal is inserted into the slot machine 1, an error occurs, the setting key switch 37 is operated, and the settlement switch 10 is displayed. When any one of the operation of (1) and the stop of power supply to the slot machine 1 is detected, the display contents are switched to the original display contents displayed before displaying the ratio display, and the ratio display is ended.

The main control unit 41 performs a process of determining whether or not a win has occurred according to the display result derived to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in the winning determination process (step Sb49 of FIG. 46) in the main process. After performing the interrupt once waiting process (Sb50), save the flag register value (Sb51), set the timer interrupt to disabled (Sb52), and process the ratio ratio monitor data included in the non-gaming program. To execute.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the data processing for role ratio monitor, first, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is set to a predetermined value in the non-gaming RAM area by using the LD instruction described above. The area is stored and saved (Sk1), and then a predetermined value of the non-gaming stack area (the value stored at the end of the previous non-gaming program) is set as the value of the stack pointer SP using the LD instruction. By doing so, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program (Sk2). Then, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are stored in the non-game stack area in a predetermined order by using the above-mentioned first save instruction to save them (Sk3). Then, after each state counting process (Sk4) included in the non-gaming program is executed, the value of the register saved in the step of Sk3 is sequentially read from the non-gaming stack area by using the first return instruction described above. After all the registers are restored to the state they were in when the data processing for role ratio monitor was started (Sk5), the LD instruction is used to store and save them in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area in the step of Sk1. By setting the value of the stack pointer SP to the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is restored to the state when the data processing for role ratio monitoring was started (Sk6), and the data processing for role ratio monitoring is ended. It returns to the main processing of the calling source and proceeds to the step Sb54. In the step Sb54 of the main process, the timer interrupt is permitted, and the flag register value saved before the subsequent execution of the combination ratio monitoring data process is restored (Sb55).

As shown in FIG. 61, in each state counting process, it is determined whether the total cumulative game number can be added (Sp1). The total cumulative number of games is stored in a storage area of 3 bytes, and can count up to 16777215 games as an upper limit value.

If the total cumulative game count cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Sp22. When the total cumulative number of games can be added, 1 is added because the game has been played (Sp2 to Sp4). As described above, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform the operation of the values of 2 bytes at the maximum, this addition is executed by calling the subroutine of the 3-byte data addition & storage processing (Sp4). Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit (Sp4). If the total cumulative number of games has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sp7. If the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit value, a value indicating that the total cumulative count stop flag has reached the upper limit value is set (Sp5, Sp6), and the process proceeds to step Sp7. In the step Sp1 described above, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games can be added by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag.

In the steps from Sp7, it is determined whether the total cumulative game number is in the range of 0 to 5999 games, in the range of 6000 to 174999 games, or in the range of 175,000 games or more (Sp7 to Sp20). Depending on the result of the determination, a value indicating that each of the ranges is set is set as a lighting identification segment (Sp8, Sp18, Sp19). The set lighting identification segment is stored in the display monitor digestion game determination flag. Then, after performing the accessory ratio update process (Sp22), the continuous accessory ratio update process (Sp23), and the instructed ratio ratio update process (Sp24) included in the non-gaming program, the process returns to the ratio monitor data process. To do.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the accessory ratio update processing, first, the game count for game count determination is incremented by 1 (Sq1). Here, 1 is added to the determination game number counter described later. Next, the number of prize medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of a prize in this game is added (Sq2, Sq3). Here, the total payout counters of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 are respectively added with the number of winning medals.

The total buffer 1 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter. When a prize is generated in a game and medals are paid out, the respective counters perform counting. When the game reaches 6000 games after the counting is started, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to 0 which is an initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value.

Like the total buffer 1, the total buffer 2 is also provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter, which count when the prize is generated in the game and the medals are paid out. Is done. When the game reaches 6000 games after the counting is started, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to 0 which is an initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value. However, the game to start counting is shifted from the cumulative buffer 1 by 2000 games.

Like the total buffer 1 and the total buffer 2, the total buffer 3 is also provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter. The counter is used for counting. When the game reaches 6000 games after the counting is started, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to 0 which is an initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value. However, the games to start counting are deviated from the cumulative buffer 1 and 4000 games, and the cumulative buffer 1 and 2000 games.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the total cumulative payout number can be added (Sq4). If the total cumulative payout number cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Sq10. When it is possible to add the total cumulative payout number, the total number of payout coins is added to the number of winning medals. Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether the total cumulative payout number has reached the upper limit (Sq7). If the total cumulative payout number has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sq10. If the total cumulative payout number has reached the upper limit value, a value indicating that the total cumulative count stop flag has reached the upper limit value is set (Sq8, Sq9), and the process proceeds to step Sq10. Whether or not the total cumulative payout number can be added is determined by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag, and when the total cumulative number of games reaches the upper limit value and when the total cumulative payout number reaches the upper limit value. The same flags are used when you do this.

In steps Sq10 and Sq11, it is determined whether or not the accessory is operating in the game, that is, whether or not the period is controlled by the RB. If the accessory is not operating, the process proceeds to Sq17. When the accessory is operating, the number of winning medals to be paid out when a prize is generated in the current game is added as the payout number in the accessory operating period (Sq12, Sq13). Here, the number of winning medals is added to the accessory payout counters of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3, respectively.

Then, it is determined whether it is possible to add the total cumulative number of accessory payouts (Sq14). If it is not possible to add the total cumulative number of payouts, the process proceeds to step Sq17. When it is possible to add the total cumulative bonus payout number, the total number of bonus prize payouts is added to the total cumulative bonus payout number (Sb15, 16), and the process proceeds to step Sq17. Whether or not the total cumulative accessory payout number can be added is determined by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag.

The accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is calculated from the total cumulative payout number and the total cumulative accessory payout number updated as described above (Sq17, Sq18). Then, the calculated value is stored as the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number (Sq19).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game is the updated game number by referring to the determination game number counter (Sq20 to Sq23). The determination game number counter is a counter that is circulated and counted from 1 to 6000 games, and in order to determine whether the number of games from the start of counting reaches 2000 games, 4000 games, or 6000 games. This is the counter used. The above-mentioned determination is made by dividing the determination counter by 2000 and determining whether or not there is a remainder. If there is a remainder, it is determined that the game is not the updated game number, and the process returns to each state counting process.

When the judgment counter is divided by 2000 and no remainder is generated, it is determined from the quotient of the division result whether the game is an updated game of 2000 games, 4000 games or 6000 games (Sq24). Then, of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3, the total payout counter value is read from the cumulative buffer corresponding to the identified update game, stored in the calculation buffer for 6000 times as the cumulative payout number of 6000 games, and the total payout counter of the reading source. Is updated to an initial value of 0 (Sq25 to Sq27). Similarly, the value of the accessory payout counter is read from the cumulative buffer corresponding to the identified update game, stored in the calculation buffer for 6000 times as the cumulative game payout number of 6000 games, and the accessory payout counter of the reading source is set to the initial value. It is updated to a certain 0 (Sq28 to Sq30).

Further, the bonus payout ratio to the cumulative payout number of 6000 games is calculated from the cumulative payout number of 6000 games and the cumulative payout number of bonus games of 6000 games stored in the buffer for calculating 6000 times (Sq31, Sq32). Then, the calculated value is stored as the bonus payout ratio in the past 6000 games (Sq33). After that, the process returns to each state counting process.

The accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount and the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games are referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and a gaming machine information display together with an abbreviation indicating the type of the ratio display being displayed. 50 will be sequentially displayed.

With reference to FIG. 63, the update statuses of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the buffer for calculating 6000 times by the data processing for role ratio monitoring, and the total cumulative calculation buffer storing the total cumulative payout number and the total cumulative accessory payout number are shown. explain. The storage contents of the accumulation buffers 1 to 3 and 6000 times calculation buffer and the total accumulation calculation buffer are retained unless the data of the RAM 41c is abnormally initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason.

Counting in the cumulative total buffer 1 and the total cumulative total calculation buffer is started from the state where each buffer value is initialized. When 2000 games have passed, counting in the cumulative buffer 2 is started. The accumulation buffer 1 continues counting. Subsequently, when 2000 games have passed, counting in the cumulative buffer 3 is started. The cumulative buffer 1 and the cumulative buffer 2 continue counting.

When 2000 games have further passed, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 1 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count content of the cumulative buffer 1 is stored in the calculation buffer for 6000 times. Then, the counting contents of the cumulative buffer 1 are initialized and the counting is started from the initial value (0).

When the next 2000 games have passed, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 2 reaches 6000 games. Here, the counting content of the accumulation buffer 2 is stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times. Then, the counting contents of the accumulation buffer 2 are initialized and the counting is started from the initial value (0).

In this way, the counting results for 6000 games counted in the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times for every 2000 games. During this period, the counting result of the total cumulative calculation buffer is cumulatively counted without being initialized.

Next, the control content of the continuous accessory ratio updating process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the continuous role ratio updating process, first, when the gaming state is controlled to the special state (B1, BB2), the BB indicating that the special state is (B1, BB2) Whether or not it is in the special state is determined based on whether or not the output buffer of the output port that outputs the medium signal to the outside of the slot machine 1 has the initial value (0) (Sr1). When it is determined that the special state is in effect, the continuous accessory payout number counter (for addition), which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and counts the payout number of medals in the special state (B1, BB2) The address is set in the HL register (Sr2). Then, after the payout number of medals in the game is set in the B register (Sr3), 3-byte data addition processing is performed (Sr4). In the 3-byte data addition process, a process of adding 1-byte payout amount data to a 3-byte continuous accessory payout amount counter (for addition) is performed.

After that, an upper limit reached, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and is capable of specifying whether or not a payout number counter (total accumulation) for counting the total payout number of medals paid out in the slot machine 1 has reached the upper limit value The address of the determination flag is set in the HL register (Sr5), and it is determined whether or not the payout number counter (total accumulation) has reached the upper limit based on the value of the upper limit determination flag (Sr6). .. The upper limit arrival determination flag is set to 0 when the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has not reached the upper limit value, and is set to 1 when the upper limit value has been reached.

When it is determined in the step Sr6 that the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has not reached the upper limit value, the payout number of medals in the game is set in the E register (Sr7), and 0 is set in the D register. (Sr8). Further, the address of the payout number counter (total sum) is set in the HL register (Sr9), and 3-byte data addition and storage processing is performed (Sr10). In the 3-byte data addition/storing process, a process of adding 1-byte payout amount data to the 3-byte payout amount counter (total cumulative total) is performed.

When the 3-byte data addition and storage process is performed in step Sr10, it is determined in step Sr1 that the special state is not in progress, and in step Sr6 it is determined that the payout number counter (total accumulation) has reached the upper limit value. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sr11 to set the address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (total accumulation) in the HL register (Sr11) and set the address of the payout number counter (total accumulation) in the DE register (Sr12). .. Then, a division process is performed (Sr13). In the division process, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the continuous accessory ratio (total cumulative total) (Sr14).

After that, the address of the game number counter (for addition) for counting the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is set in the HL register (Sr15), 2000 is set in the DE register (Sr16), and the value of the HL register is set to DE. The remainder value obtained by dividing by the register value is set in the DE register (Sr17). Then, based on the value of the DE register, it is determined whether or not the remainder value is 0 (Sr18). If it is determined that the remainder value is not 0 in Sr18, the continuous accessory ratio updating process is terminated and the process returns to each state count process, while if it is determined that the remainder value is 0 in Sr18, the step of Sr19 is performed. Then, the address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (for addition) is set in the HL register (Sr19) and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and during the special state between the most recent 6000 consecutive games (B1, BB2). The address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (6000G cumulative total) for counting the number of paid out medals (4) is set in the DE register (Sr20), and 6000G cumulative data transfer processing is performed (Sr21). In the 6000G cumulative data transfer process, the value of the HL register is added to the DE register value.

After that, the address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (6000G cumulative total) is set in the HL register (Sr22), and the address of the payout number counter (6000G cumulative total) updated by the aforementioned accessory ratio updating process is set in the DE register. (Sr23), division processing is performed (Sr24). In the division process, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the ratio of continuous character during the past 6000 games (Sr25).

In step Sr25, after storing the continuous character ratio between the past 6000 games in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the continuous character ratio updating process is terminated and the process returns to each state counting process.

The bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games will be referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and will be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display being displayed.

In this way, in the continuous accessory ratio updating process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) is controlled (Sr1), and when it is determined that the special state is controlled, It is determined whether or not the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to the player has reached the upper limit value (Sr6), and if it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached. , The total cumulative accessory payout number and the total cumulative continuous accessory payout number (Sr7 to Sr10) are not performed, and when it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached, the total cumulative accessory payout number, A process (Sr7 to Sr10) for updating the cumulative continuous accessory payout number is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total cumulative bonus payout number and the total cumulative continuous bonus payout number from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total number of medals given to the player cannot be updated.

Next, the control content of the instruction combination ratio update processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the instructed accessory role ratio update processing, first, it is determined whether or not the payout number counter (total accumulation) for counting the total payout number of medals paid out in the slot machine 1 has reached the upper limit value. Is set in the HL register (St1), and whether or not the payout amount counter (total accumulation) has reached the upper limit value based on the value of the upper limit arrival determination flag. Is determined (St2). The upper limit arrival determination flag is set to 0 when the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has not reached the upper limit value, and is set to 1 when the upper limit value has been reached.

When it is determined in step St2 that the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has not reached the upper limit value, when the game state is controlled to the special state (B1, BB2), the special state (B1) , BB2) indicating that the BB signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 1 is read into the A register (St3), and whether the value of the output buffer is the initial value (0). Based on whether or not it is in the special state, it is determined (St4).

Then, if it is determined in step St4 that the special state is not in progress, the navigation number in the game set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the above-mentioned payout control process is read into the A register (St5), and one or more navigations are performed. It is determined whether or not a number is set and the game is a game for which navigation notification is performed (St6).

If it is determined in step St4 that the game is in the special state, and if it is determined in step st6 that the game is the navigation notification, the payout number of medals in the game is read into the A register (St7). ), 0 is set in the D register (St8), and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and an instruction input combination for counting the total payout number of medals in the game in which the navigation notification is performed and the game in the special state The address of the item payout number counter (total sum) is set in the HL register (St9), and 3-byte data addition and storage processing is performed (St10). In the 3-byte data addition/storing process, a process of adding 1-byte payout amount data to the 3-byte instructed accessory payout amount counter (total total) is performed.

Then, after the 3-byte data addition and storage process is performed in step St10, the process proceeds to step st11. If it is determined in step St2 that the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step st11 without performing the processes in steps st3 to st10. If it is determined in step St6 that the game is not the game for which navigation notification is performed, the process of steps St7 to St10 is not performed and the process proceeds to step St11.

In the step St11, the address of the instructed bonus product payout number counter (total accumulation) is set in the HL register (St11) and the address of the payout number counter (total accumulation) updated by the above-described continuous accessory ratio updating process is set. It is set in the DE register (St12) and division processing is performed (St13). In the division process, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division processing is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as an instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number (St14).

After storing the instructed auditor product payout ratio to the total cumulative payout amount in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step St15, the instructed auditor product ratio update process is terminated and the process returns to each state count process.

The instructed accessory product payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number is referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and is displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display being displayed. ..

In this way, in the instruction-included accessory ratio updating process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals given to the player has reached the upper limit value. (St2), if it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process of updating the cumulative instruction instructed accessory product payout number (St3 to St10) is not performed, and it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached. Determines whether or not it is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2) (St4), and if it is determined to be controlled to the special state, a process of updating the cumulative instruction instructed accessory product payout number (St7). ~St10) is performed, and when it is determined that the special state is not controlled, it is determined whether or not an operation mode advantageous to the player is instructed by the navigation notification (St6), and it is advantageous to the player by the navigation notification. When it is determined that a different operation mode has been instructed, a process (St7 to St10) of updating the cumulative instruction instructed accessory payout number is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total instruction payout amount payout number from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number given to the player cannot be updated.

[About AT status management processing]
The control contents of the AT state management processing performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described based on FIG. 66. The AT state management process is a subroutine included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the AT state management process, first, the value of the advantageous section game number counter is set to the initial value (0) by referring to the value of the advantageous section game number counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not (Su1). It is to be noted that, by the above-mentioned payout control processing, it is determined that the advantageous section is in the advantageous section based on the value of the output buffer of the advantageous section signal, so that the advantageous section game number is updated by adding 1 to the advantageous section. The value of the advantageous section game number counter is 1 or more. When the value of the advantageous section game number counter remains at the initial value (0) in the step Su1, and it is determined that the advantageous section is not in the advantageous section, the AT is skipped without performing each processing of steps Su2 to Su31 described later. The state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when the value of the advantageous-zone game number counter is not the initial value (0) in the step Su1, and it is specified that the advantageous zone is in the advantageous area, the process proceeds to the step Su2 and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The total number of medals paid out in the advantageous zone (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used to set the bet number in the advantageous zone from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous zone) With reference to the net increase counter for reading, the net increase counter value is read into the HL register (Su2). After that, the winning flag which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and which can specify the winning situation of the general combination in the game is referred to (Su3), and it is determined whether or not the re-gaming combination is won in the game (Su4). ).

When it is determined in the step Su4 that the re-play combination is not won, the payout number of medals in the game is read into the A register (Su5), and the payout number of the A register is added to the net increase counter value of the HL register. Yes (Su6). Then, the bet number set in the game is read into the A register (Su7), and the bet number in the A register is subtracted from the net increase number counter value in the HL register (Su8).

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the HL register is 0 or more (Su9). If the value of the HL register is not 0 or more, the value of the HL register is corrected to 0 (Su10), and the value of the HL register is changed. The value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a net increase counter value (Su11). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the HL register is 0 or more in the step of Su9, the value of the HL register is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the net increase number counter value without performing the correction in the step of Su10. The process proceeds to (Su11) and Su12.

When it is determined in step Su4 that the replay combination has won in the game, the process of steps Su5 to Su11 is not performed and the process proceeds to step Su12.

When the net increase counter value is stored and updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Su11, and when it is determined in step Su4 that the replay combination is won in the game, the net increase is based on the value of the HL register. When it is determined that the counter value has exceeded the second specified number (2394 sheets in this embodiment) that is the end condition of the advantageous zone (Su12), and it is determined that the net additional number counter value has exceeded the second specified number. In step S15, the advantageous period end flag indicating that the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Su15), the AT state management process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the step Su12 that the net additional number counter value does not exceed the second specified number, the value of the advantageous section game number counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the HL register (Su13). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section game number counter has reached a first specified number (1500 games in the present embodiment) which is a condition for ending the advantageous section (Su14). Then, when it is determined that the value of the advantageous section game number counter has reached the first specified number, the process proceeds to step Su15, and an advantageous section end flag indicating that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Su15), the AT state management process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the step Su12 that the net additional number counter value does not exceed the second specified number, and it is determined in the step Su14 that the advantageous section game number counter value has not reached the first specified number, , Su16, the bet number and game state determination processing is performed (Su16), and the bet number set in the game and the currently controlled game state are acquired. Then, it is determined whether or not the bet number set in the game is 2 or the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1 (Su17).

If it is determined in the step Su17 that the bet number set in the game is two or the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, the navigation notification in the steps Su18 to Su31 described later is given. The AT state management process is ended and the process returns to the main process without performing the related processes (the process related to the transition to the ED state, the payout state related process for performing the process related to the payout state, etc.).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Su17 that the bet number set in the game is 2 or the currently controlled game state is not the game state other than RT1, the bet number set in the game is 3 When it is determined that the number of cards is one and the currently controlled game state is RT1, the process proceeds to step Su18, and the ED transition flag value set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the A register (Su18). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the current state is the ED state based on the ED transition flag flag value (Su19).

When it is determined in step Su19 that the current state is the ED state, the process of transition to the ED state in Su20 to Su29 described later is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Su30. When it is determined that the current state is not the ED state in the step Su19, the process proceeds to the step Su20, the value of the net increase counter that is updated in the step Su11 and set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the HL register. (Su20). Further, the third specified number (2250 in this embodiment) relating to the net increase in number of medals, which is a requirement for establishing the first ED transition condition, is read into the DE register (Su21). Then, the HL register value and the DE register value are compared to determine whether or not the number of medals netly increased in the advantageous section exceeds the third prescribed number (Su22).

When it is determined in the step Su22 that the net number of medals in the advantageous zone has exceeded the third specified number, the process proceeds to the step Su29, and the ED transition flag indicating that the ED state is to be set is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Yes (Su29). On the other hand, if it is determined in the step Su22 that the net number of medals in the advantageous zone does not exceed the third specified number, the fourth specified number (the present implementation In the example, 1700 sheets are read into the DE register (Su23). Then, the HL register value and the DE register value are compared, and it is determined whether or not the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the fourth prescribed number (Su24).

When it is determined in step Su24 that the net number of medals in the advantageous zone does not exceed the fourth prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Su27. On the other hand, if it is determined in the step Su24 that the net number of medals in the advantageous zone exceeds the fourth prescribed number, the process proceeds to the step Su25 and the current navistock number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to the A register. Read in (Su25). Then, it is determined whether or not the current number of navigation stocks is equal to or more than a predetermined number (7 in this embodiment) which is a requirement for establishing the second ED transition condition (Su26).

If it is determined in step Su26 that the current number of navigation stocks is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step su29 to set an ED transition flag indicating transition to the ED state in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Su29. ). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su26 that the current number of navigation stocks is not greater than or equal to the predetermined number, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, updated by the above-mentioned payout control processing, and the advantageous section is started. , An ED transition game number counter value for counting the number of games played in a predetermined state (the number of bets set in the game is 3 and the currently controlled game state is RT1) Is read into the HL register (Su27), and it is determined whether or not the ED transition game number counter value is equal to or greater than a fifth prescribed number (1420 games in this embodiment) regarding the number of advantageous section games which are conditions for transition to the ED state. The determination is made (Su28). When the ED transition game number counter value has reached the fifth prescribed number and is determined to be equal to or greater than the fifth prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Su29, and the ED transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Su29). After setting the ED transition flag in the step Su29, the process proceeds to the step Su30.

In the step of Su30, the payout state information, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and is controlled in the game, is obtained in the A register (Su30), and the payout state-related processing is performed. (Su31). In the payout state-related process, a process according to the payout state specified based on the payout state information acquired in the A register, and the ED state is controlled based on the ED transition flag being set in step Su29. Then, the process for controlling the navigation notification over the period until the end of the advantageous period, the process for managing the number of AT games for which the navigation is informed, and the advantageous period end flag is set to the RAM 41c when a predetermined arbitrary condition is satisfied. Processing for setting the predetermined area to end the advantageous section, processing for stopping the output of the AT signal when ending the AT control, and the like.

Then, after the payout state-related processing is completed, the AT status management processing is ended and the processing returns to the main processing.

As described above, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section is controlled, the end condition of the advantageous section (the number of medal net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number, the number of advantageous section games is the first specified number) Is reached), the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section is controlled to end. The advantageous period end flag is then referred to in the main process, and the advantageous period data initialization process is executed based on the fact that the advantageous period end flag is set, and the data related to the control in the advantageous period is initialized. This ends the control of the advantageous section.

In the AT state management process, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games (the first prescribed number (1500 games) in this embodiment) while being controlled in the advantageous section. Whether or not it is determined based on the value of the advantageous section game number counter, and when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. , Control to end the control of the advantageous section. It should be noted that the end condition of the advantageous section is replaced by the end condition that is satisfied when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), The ending condition may be satisfied when the number of games exceeds the number of games (1499 in this embodiment) obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of games.

In the AT state management process, when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number and when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first specified number, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. To do. Then, the advantageous zone end flag is referred to in the subsequent main processing, and the advantageous zone data initialization process is performed based on the fact that the advantageous zone end flag is set, thereby ending the advantageous zone. ing.

In the AT state management process, when the net number of medals added in the advantageous zone exceeds the second prescribed number, the advantageous zone is ended. By setting the second prescribed number as the prescribed number, a predetermined maximum number is obtained. The slot machine 1 can be designed so that the payout rate of medals in the advantageous section over the number of games is within a predetermined rate. For example, the second prescribed number is 2394 (the maximum number of payouts (9) in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from 2400 as the upper limit number, and the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet number is added. Value), the net number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section can be set to 2400 or less, and the payout rate of medals during 1600 games can be set to 150% or less. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of medals from being paid out in the slot machine 1 in a predetermined period. The medal paid out in the advantageous section is replaced with an end condition established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined second prescribed number (2394 in this embodiment). The same applies to the case where the end condition is reached when the net increase in number reaches a number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number (2395 in this embodiment). It should be noted that the end condition of the advantageous section is changed to the end condition that is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined second prescribed number (2394 in this embodiment). The end condition may be set when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the section reaches the number obtained by adding one to the predetermined number (2395 in this embodiment).

In the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous zone games reaches the first prescribed number (upper limit number of games (1500 games)), or the net number of medals in the advantageous zone exceeds the second prescribed number (2395) In this case, the advantageous section is ended. When the number of advantageous section games reaches the first prescribed number which is the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section is ended so as to prevent the advantageous section from continuing for a long time, and the medal in the advantageous section. When the net increase in the number exceeds the second specified number, the AT state and the advantageous section are ended, so that the payout rate is rapidly increased even when the number of advantageous section games does not reach the first specified number which is the upper limit number of games. It is designed to prevent the advantageous section from continuing in the case where it increases.

In the AT state management process, a common advantageous zone end flag is set when the net number of medals in the advantageous zone exceeds the second prescribed number and when the number of advantageous zone games reaches the first prescribed number, and thereafter In the main process, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to control the advantageous section. As a result, even if the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number and the number of advantageous section games reaches the first specified number, the common advantageous section data initialization process is performed to be advantageous. It is designed to end the section.

In the AT state management process, in the process of updating the medal net increase counter, the value of the net increase counter is acquired as a net increase value in a predetermined register (HL register), and the payout amount value is added to the net increase value. When the value obtained by subtracting the bet value is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, so that the number of medals increased or decreased as shown in FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b). And is smaller than the reference value (the value of the net increase in the number of coins at the start of the advantageous section (initial value 0)), the value of the net increase counter is 0, and when the increase/decrease in the number of medals is increasing, The increase/decrease number of sheets after the increasing tendency becomes the value of the net number of sheets increasing counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), after the transition to the advantageous section, the navigation number is not notified and the number of medals increased/decreased tends to decrease. When the value of the counter is below the initial value (0 in this embodiment), the value of the net number-of-addition counter is 0 during the period when the number of medals increased or decreased is less than the initial value. After that, when the number of medals increases or decreases due to the stop operation being performed in accordance with the navigation notification after being controlled to the AT state, the value of the net increase counter is the value of the net increase of medals ( The value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout number value) is sequentially added and updated. As a result, the value of the net increase counter is based on the number of medals increased or decreased when the number of medals increases or decreases, that is, when the number of medals increases or decreases to the lowest value. It becomes a value indicating the number of sheets increased from the value.

In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the number of medals increased or decreased once exceeds the initial value of the net increase counter, and then decreases, and again falls below the initial value (0 in this embodiment). In this case, the number of medals increases or decreases to 0 during the period when the number is below the initial value. After that, as the number of medals increased or decreased tends to increase, the value of the net additional number counter is updated by sequentially adding the value of the net additional number of medals (the value obtained by subtracting the bet numerical value from the payout number value). As a result, the value of the net number-of-addition counter becomes a value indicating the number of increased medals from the reference value, with the number of medals increased and decreased when the number of medals increased or decreased to the lowest value. ..

In the AT state management process, the calculated value obtained by adding the payout number of medals in the game to the net increase number counter value and subtracting the bet value in the game from the net increase number counter value is 0 during the advantageous section. If it is larger, the payout amount value is added to the net increase amount counter value and the bet numerical value is subtracted, and the value is set and updated in the net increase amount counter, while if the calculated value is smaller than 0, By setting the value 0 to the net increase counter and updating it every game, if the net increase is a negative value during the advantageous period, the net increase counter is corrected to 0 and the net increase is counted from 0 again. Since the net increase counter is updated so as to start, the increase width (net increase) of medals in the transition of the actual increase/decrease of coins in the advantageous section can be directly specified as the net increase counter value (FIG. 67(a )reference).

In the present embodiment, the process of updating the net additional number counter during the advantageous period is performed to start the counting of the net number of medals from the transition to the advantageous period, and to increase the net increase during the advantageous period. Although the number of sheets is counted, the processing for updating the net number-of-addition counter is not performed when the AT state is not in the advantageous section, and the processing for updating the net-number-of-increasing counter is performed when the AT state is in the advantageous section. good. Even with such a configuration, when the navigation notification is not performed in the AT state, the net additional number of medals does not increase. By the navigation notification in the AT state, the net additional number of medals increases. The net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous zone can be counted in the same manner as the configuration for updating the net increase counter during the middle period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 67(a), for example, after the transition to the advantageous section, in a period in which the navigation notification is not performed, a payout rate of more than 1 does not occur, and the number of medals increased or decreased to a reference value. If it changes to a lower value, the number of medals increased or decreased from the game in which the navigation was started after the transition to the advantageous section and then to the AT state, and the net increase in the advantageous section in the game. Is the least. It should be noted that, even in a period in which the navigation notification is not performed after the transition to the advantageous section, a prize with a payout rate of more than 1 may occur. If a payout rate of more than 1 occurs during the period so that the increase/decrease of the number of medals during that period tends to increase monotonically, the net increase in the advantageous period in the game transitioned to the advantageous period The least. In addition, if a payout rate of more than 1 occurs during the period so that the number of medals increases/decreases once below the reference value during the period, the number of medals increases/decreases. In the game, the net increase in the number of advantageous sections is the smallest. In this way, the time at which the net increase in number becomes the smallest in the advantageous section may change depending on the situation. On the other hand, in the process of updating the medal net increase counter, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment acquires the value of the net increase counter in the predetermined register as the net increase value and pays out the value to the net increase value. If the value obtained by adding the numerical values and subtracting the bet numerical value is smaller than 0, the value of the net additional coin counter is corrected to 0, so that the increase/decrease in the number of medals changes from a decreasing tendency to an increasing tendency. , The net increase counter is reset and the net increase value is counted again from 0. The net increase is counted from the point when the net increase is the smallest in the advantageous interval, and the accurate net increase is counted. You can do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, by performing the processing of updating the net number increase counter during the advantageous period, the counting of the number of medals net increase is started from the transition to the advantage period, and the net increase in the advantage period is started. Although the number of sheets is counted, the processing for updating the net number-of-sheets counter may be performed regardless of whether or not it is in the advantageous section. In such a configuration, when the net increase in medals is increasing in the section before the transition to the advantageous section, the net increase in medals in the section is succeeded and the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is counted. Can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of medals can be increased to 1 or more by performing the stop operation in the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification. When the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification, the payout rate of medals becomes less than 1, and the AT state (output In the ball state A, the ball-out state B, and the ball-out state C), the number of medals increased/decreased by following the navigation notification, while the number of medals increased/decreased in a state other than the AT state, By controlling the section display LED 19 to be in the ON state in the AT state, it is informed that the advantageous section is a period in which the number of medals increased or decreased tends to increase.

In the present embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set because the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number, the advantageous section game number is the first specified number (upper limit game). Number of times), the advantageous section end flag is set by the arrival of the number of times), and the advantageous section end flag is set by the payout-related processing. By executing the process to initialize the data regarding the advantageous section (including the data regarding the AT state), the advantageous section is terminated, that is, in the AT state management process, regardless of the termination condition of the established advantageous section, common By performing the advantageous section data initialization process of (1), the data regarding the advantageous section is initialized in the same manner, and the advantageous section is ended. However, at the end of the advantageous section, an advantage according to the end condition of the established advantageous section is obtained. The configuration may be such that the data regarding the section is initialized and the advantageous section is ended.

In the present embodiment, the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section is added to the net additional number counter to count the number of medals added in the advantageous section. When a specified small role with payout of medals is elected, the specified small role wins and the medal is won regardless of whether the specified small role is actually paid out as a result of the game. It is also possible to consider that the number of medals has been paid out, and to add the medals to be paid out to the net additional number counter to count the number of medals net increased in the advantageous section. With such a configuration, when a predetermined small winning combination is won in the internal lottery in the advantageous section, it is considered that the predetermined small winning combination has been won and the medals have been paid out, and the medals to be paid out are counted as a net increase counter. Since the predetermined small winning combination is intentionally dropped, it is possible to prevent the number of games in the advantageous section from being intentionally extended without causing the net additional number counter to exceed the specified number.

In addition, when a specified small role is won in the internal lottery, regardless of whether the specified small role is won and the medal is actually paid out as a result of the game, the predetermined small role is won and the medal is awarded. In the configuration in which the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted by assuming that the payout has been paid out and adding the number of medals to be paid out to the net increase number counter, a small win accompanied by the payout of medals is included in the internal lottery. When a winning combination is won, regardless of whether or not it is possible for the player to reliably win the small role, if the small role wins, In addition to adding the paid-out medals to the net number increase counter, if the winning target of the lottery including the small win accompanied by the payout of the medals is won in the internal lottery, the player will surely win the small win. However, if it is not possible to win the prize, for example, the stop switch 8L which is advantageous to the player by winning the navigation target winning combination as a lottery winning combination in the internal lottery and notifying the navigation. , 8C, 8R have been notified, it is possible to win a predetermined small winning combination included in the navigation target combination, but the operation mode is different from the notified operation mode. If a specific winning combination cannot be won by doing this, or if a specific winning combination is won and operated in a certain operation mode (operation at the operation timing within the pulling range of the specific winning combination) Although it is possible to win the small winning combination, if the specific small winning combination cannot be won by being operated in an operation mode other than a certain operation mode, the player can win the prize. It is considered that the small role that was possible was won and the medals were paid out, and by adding the paid-out medals to the net additional number counter, while counting the number of medals in the advantageous section, the internal lottery In the situation where the player cannot win the small winning combination in a situation where the player cannot reliably win the small winning combination including the small winning combination involving payout of medals, In a situation where the navigation target winning combination is won as a lottery target winning combination in the internal lottery and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player is not notified by the navigation notification, the predetermined small amount included in the navigation target winning combination. If the winning combination cannot be won, it is preferable not to add to the net number-up counter, and with such a structure, the player can surely increase the number of medals. In a situation where it is not possible to do so, the net additional number counter is incremented only when the number of medals is actually increased, which can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the present embodiment, when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter to determine the bet number. When the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medal used for the setting is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0 so that the increase/decrease of the medal is 0 in the net increase counter. If the value is less than 0, the numerical value less than 0 is not counted, but only the value greater than 0 is counted. However, the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase counter to 0 by the start of the advantageous period. , When the medals are paid out during the advantageous section, the value for the number of medals paid out is added to the net increase counter, and when medals are used for setting the bet number, By repeating the process of subtracting the value of from the net increase counter, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted. good. With such a configuration, the net increase counter is not corrected to 0 when the number of medals increased or decreased is less than 0. Therefore, the process of counting the net increase by the net increase counter can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, when updating the net increase counter, the main control unit 41 adds the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter, and is used for setting the bet number. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of medals is less than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, and if the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is increased by the net increase. By controlling the value of the net increase counter to be the value of the counter, the net increase of medals is counted starting from the point when the net increase of medals has decreased most since the start of the advantageous section. .. Since the timing at which the net increase in medals is most decreased after the start of the advantageous zone may change depending on the situation, the starting point of the net increase in medals specified based on the net increase counter of the present embodiment may be changed depending on the situation. However, the main control unit 41 causes the net increase counter to start counting the number of medals, which is set uniformly after the start of the advantageous section, and the trigger is given. A configuration may be adopted in which the net increase in the number of medals up to the present, which is the starting point, is counted, and the advantageous section is ended when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number.

For example, the main control unit 41 counts the net number of medals up to the present, which is triggered by a uniform set after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net number of medals exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is counted. As a configuration to end the, the net increase in the number of medals is started from the time when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, and the net increase in medals up to the present starting from the time when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section reaches the specified number. The configuration may be such that the advantageous section is ended when the number exceeds the limit. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is set uniformly, and the net increase in medals starting from the time other than when the normal section transitions to the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net number-of-addition counter.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net number of medals up to the present, which starts from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net number of medals exceeds the specified number. As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, when the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the AT state is entered after the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section, and the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification, It is also possible to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section when the net increase in the number of medals up to the present, which is the starting point, exceeds the specified number. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is set uniformly, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from a time other than when the operation mode for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section It is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the counter.

In addition, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present, which is triggered by a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number. As a configuration for terminating the advantageous zone, it is suggested that the advantageous zone notification LED 12a has shifted to the AT state after the transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, regardless of whether the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. At this time, when the net increase in the number of medals up to the present, which is the starting point, exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be ended and the normal section may be shifted to. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is set uniformly, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation to increase the medals by the navigation notification Regardless of whether or not the mode has been notified, it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous zone based on the net increase in medals starting from a time other than when the advantageous zone notification LED 12a suggests that the advantageous zone has been shifted. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase counter.

In the present embodiment, the AT state management process is configured to end the advantageous period when the net number of medals in the advantageous period exceeds the second prescribed number. However, in the AT state management process, each game is controlled. In the above, the number of medals used to set the number of bets is not counted, only the number of medals paid out in each game is counted, and the total payout number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the predetermined prescribed number, and the advantageous section is ended. The configuration may be such that the control is performed. For example, the specified total payout number is 2865 (1600 net increase in number of medals payout ratio is 150% (2400) and the shortest number of games to which the net increase in number of medals is awarded (160 games=2400/1). The maximum payout amount per game (15)) and the number of medals used to set the number of bets (480 = 160 games x the specified number per game 3), and the payout in one game at the slot machine 1 As a result of subtracting the maximum value (15) of the number of coins), when the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous period exceeds the specified number, the advantageous period is ended, which is advantageous. The maximum net number of medals to be paid out in a section can be set to 2400 or less, and the payout rate of medals during 1600 games can be set to 150% or less. The same effect can be obtained even if the advantageous period is ended when the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number (specified number+1).

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is advantageous in that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is the predetermined value (1) in the payout control process (first process) that is called from the main process at the start of the game. When it is determined that it is a section (Sj1), it is determined that the bet number of three (first bet number) is set, and it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to RT1 (Sj13) , The ED transition game number counter for counting the number of ED transition games is updated (Sj14). Then, in the AT management processing (second processing) called from the main processing at the end of the game, it is determined that the bet number of three (first bet number) is set, and the gaming state is controlled to RT1. When it is determined that the number of ED transition games has been updated by the payout control process in the game (Su17), it is determined whether or not the value of the ED transition game number counter reaches the prescribed number of games (fifth prescribed number) (Su22). ), if it is determined that the specified number of games has been reached, the process (Su29) of shifting to the ED state in which the navigation notification control is performed for the period until the advantageous section ends is executed, while the bet number of three ( If it is determined that the first bet number) is not set, or if the game state is not controlled to RT1, the AT state management is performed without performing the process (Su29) of shifting to the ED state. The process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the AT state management process, if the three bet number (first bet number) is not set, or if the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, a process of shifting to the ED state is performed. Since there is none, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play the game with the bet number of three (first bet number) and RT1.

In the AT state management process that is called from the main process at the end of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that there is an advantageous period when the advantageous period game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0). Judgment (Su1), regardless of whether 3 bets are set or 2 bets are set, the net increase counter is updated based on the number of medals paid out and the number of bets in the game. (Su3 to Su11), after updating the net increase counter, it is determined whether or not the value of the net increase counter exceeds the second specified number (Su12). When it is determined that the value exceeds the second specified number, , The advantageous zone end flag is set (Su15). After that, in the main process, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the setting of the advantageous section end flag, thereby initializing the information about the advantageous section and ending the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 updates the net number increase counter to control the net number increase when the bet number of three is set or the bet number of two is set when controlling to the advantageous zone. Since the advantageous section is ended when the counter value exceeds the specified number (second specified number), the upper limit number (in the present embodiment, whether 3 bets or 2 bets is selected) (2400) medals are not paid out, so that the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is not excessively increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance of the slot machine 1 from being excessively increased.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but the advantageous section (Su1), and sets the bet number of three bets. If it is determined (Su17) that the navigation notification processing (Su18 to Su30) is performed, it is determined that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but the advantageous section. However, if it is determined that the number of bets for three cards is not set (Su1) (Su17), the AT state management processing is terminated without performing the processing (Su18 to Su30) related to the navigation notification. It returns to the main processing. As a result, in the AT state management process, if the number of bets (first bet number) of three is not set, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed. A number (first bet number) can be prompted to play the game.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but the advantageous section (Su1), and the gaming state is RT1. If the determination is made (Su17), the processing related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su30) is performed, while it is determined that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but the advantageous section (Su1). ), if it is determined that the game state is a game state other than RT1 (Su17), the AT state management process is terminated without performing the process (Su18 to Su30) related to the navigation notification, and the process returns to the main process. It is like this. As a result, in the AT state management process, if three bets (first bet) are not set, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the player or the like plays the game at RT1. Can be prompted to do.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but the advantageous section (Su1), and sets the bet number of three bets. When it is determined that the game state is RT1 (Su17), the process related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su30) is performed, while the value of the advantageous section game number counter is the initial value (0. ) Is determined to be an advantageous section (Su1), but it is determined that the bet number of three is not set, or when it is determined that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1. (Su17), the AT state management process is terminated without performing the process (Su18 to Su30) related to the navigation notification, and the process returns to the main process. Accordingly, in the AT state management process, when the bet number of three (first bet number) is not set and the game state is a game state other than RT1, the process related to the navigation notification is performed. Since there is none, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play the game with the bet number of three (first bet number) and RT1.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the bet number of three (first bet number) is set, and that the gaming state is controlled to RT1. In this case (Su17), it is determined whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied (Su22 to Su28), and when the ED transition condition is satisfied, the navigation notification control is performed over the period until the advantageous section ends. While performing the process (Su29) of shifting to the ED state, it is determined that the bet number of three (first bet number) is not set, or the game state is not controlled to RT1. If so (Su17), the process of determining whether the ED transition condition is satisfied (Su22 to Su28) and the process of transitioning to the ED state (Su29) are not performed. As a result, in the AT state management process, if the three bet number (first bet number) is not set, or if the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, is the ED transition condition satisfied? Since it is not determined whether or not there is no processing for shifting to the ED state, it is possible to encourage the player or the like to play the game with the bet number of three (first bet number) and RT1. it can.

[About timer interrupt processing]
The control content of the timer interrupt processing (main) performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described based on FIG. 68. The timer interrupt process (main) is a subroutine included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the timer interrupt processing (main), first, after exchanging all the front and back registers (Sv1), the timer interrupt is set to be disabled (Sv2), and then set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The value of the voltage drop state counter which is being operated is acquired (Sv3). Then, with reference to the input port to which the voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48 (Sv4), it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sv5). When the voltage drop signal is input, it is determined whether the voltage drop state counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Sv6), and the voltage drop state counter has the upper limit value. When the value has been reached, the power interruption process (main) is performed (Sv7).

In the power interruption process, all the front and back registers are exchanged, and the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order to save the stack pointer. The current address of the game stack area indicated by SP is saved by storing it in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. A predetermined area of the game RAM area including the game stack area of the game RAM area in which the main control unit 41 stores the value of the register and the predetermined area of the game RAM area in which the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP is stored is backed up. It is backed up by the power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, as long as the power is supplied by the backup power supply, the stored contents of the game RAM area are saved.

Then, of the parallel output ports included in the main control unit 41, the output port 3 to which the drive signal of the hopper motor 34b is output is initialized and the output state is turned off. Accordingly, when the hopper unit 35 is paying out medals, the payout of medals is first stopped first. After that, among the parallel output ports, the output ports 0 and 1 to which the drive signals of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are output are initialized, and when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotationally controlled, the reel 2L, Stop rotation of 2C and 2R.

After that, among the parallel output ports, the control signals of the left/middle/right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R and the output port 2 from which the control signals of the flow path switching solenoid 30 are output, the credit display 11, and the game auxiliary display 12 are transmitted. The output ports 4 and 5 to be output, the output ports 6 and 7 for outputting a test signal, and the output ports 8 and 9 for transmitting a command to the sub control unit 91 are sequentially initialized to control signals for various switches. Stop the output of etc.

After initializing the output ports 0 to 9, the destruction diagnosis data (5A(H) in this embodiment) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the parity adjustment data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set. clear. Then, the parity adjustment data of the new RAM 41c is calculated so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, the parity adjustment data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the RAM 41c is accessed. Is set to prohibit and loop processing is started.

In the loop processing, it waits while monitoring the output status of the voltage drop signal. In this state, when the voltage drop signal is not input, the recovery of the voltage is determined, and the program is started from the starting process (main). On the other hand, if the voltage drops while the voltage drop signal is input, the operation is stopped internally.

By the above processing, when the power supply of AC100V is stopped, the power interruption processing (main) is executed, the value of the register before the power interruption is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area, and the game concerned. Since the content of a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c including the stack area is also retained by supplying the backup power, in the starting process (main) executed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. , It is possible to return to the control state before the power failure. Furthermore, it is also possible to specify whether or not the stop operation was effective in the control state before the power failure.

If it is determined in step Sv5 of the timer interrupt process that the voltage drop signal is not input, and if it is determined in step Sv6 that the voltage drop state counter has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step Sv8, Update the degraded state counter. When the process proceeds from the step Sv5 to the step Sv8, the current value is maintained by adding 0 to the voltage drop state counter, while the voltage is reduced when the process proceeds from the step Sv5 to the step Sv8. Update so that 1 is added to the low state counter.

Then, the detection states of various switches are input from the input port, and port input processing for generating input data, finalized data, and edge data (ON edge data and OFF edge data) is performed (Sv9). After that, the value of the flag register in which the calculation result is stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order by using the above-mentioned second save instruction to save. After that (Sv10), the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program is performed (Sv11). After that, by using the above-described second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in the game stack area in step Sv10 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving and set in the flag register. Then, the flag register is restored to the state before the time monitoring update processing (Sv12).

In the time monitoring update process, first, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program by using the aforementioned LD instruction, It is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and saved. Then, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program. Then, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register, using the above-mentioned first save instruction. Are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, when the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the LD instruction is used when the stack pointer SP is changed from the gaming program to the non-gaming program. Since the second zero flag TZ of the register is changed, the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the time monitoring update process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the time monitoring update process is the time monitoring update process performed by the game program. May differ from the register state when calling.

After that, a sensor monitoring process for detecting an abnormality regarding the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, a test signal output process for outputting a test signal generated in association with the result of the game, and various timers used by the non-gaming program are updated. A timer update process and a ratio monitor output data selection process for selecting output data to be displayed on the ratio monitor are sequentially performed. In addition, in the sensor monitoring process, when an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the payout sensor 34c is detected, the sensor error reference data that can specify the type of the detected abnormality is stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is supposed to be set.

Then, by using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area at the time of starting the time monitoring update process is reversed in the reverse order from the case of saving the non-game stack area. By sequentially reading from and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the time monitoring update processing was started. After that, by using the LD instruction described above, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the time monitoring update processing is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the time monitoring update processing was started, and the time monitoring update processing is ended. In addition, in order to end the time monitoring update processing included in the non-gaming program and to return to the game program, after returning the values of all the registers saved at the start of the time monitoring update processing, the stack pointer When the SP is changed from the non-gaming program to the gaming program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, and the flag register is changed before and after the LD instruction is executed. The state may change. That is, the state of the register when the time monitoring/updating process is terminated may be different from the state of the register saved when the time monitoring/updating process is started.

After the flag register is restored in step Sv12, the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update processing in step Sv11 is referred to (Sv13), and the sensor set by the time monitoring update processing in the current timer interrupt is referenced. The logical sum of the error reference data and the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update process in the previous timer interrupt is calculated (Sv14). Then, a sensor error flag which is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and which can specify whether or not an abnormality regarding the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c is detected is calculated in the step Sv14. Update based on disjunction. When it is specified that the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data by performing the steps Sv13 to Sv15, it is determined whether the sensor error flag is in a state indicating that the abnormality is detected. Regardless of this, the sensor error flag is updated to indicate that the abnormality is detected. On the other hand, when it is specified that no abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the state of the sensor error flag is maintained. That is, when it is specified that the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the content of the sensor error reference data is reflected in the sensor error flag while the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data. When it is specified that the error has not been performed or the abnormality has been canceled, the content of the sensor error reference data is not reflected in the sensor error flag.

After updating the sensor error flag in step Sv15, a random number updating process for updating a random number value in a random number circuit provided inside the main control unit 41 is performed (Sv16), and the random number circuit is provided inside the main control unit 41. The watchdog timer (WDT) register is cleared (Sv17). After that, the value of a branch counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for branching the process included in the timer interrupt is read into a predetermined register, and a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) is added to update the value. The updated value is set as the value of the branch counter in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sv18). In the process of updating the branch counter, when the branch counter is 0 to 2, 1 is added, and when the branch counter is 3, the counter is initialized and returned to 0. Update. That is, the value of the branch counter is looped in the order of 0→1→2→3→0... Every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The value of the branch counter is referred to in each process executed in the timer interrupt process (main), and for example, a predetermined control is executed when the branch counter reaches a predetermined value. Control will be branched.

After updating the branch counter in step Sv18, it is determined whether or not the branch counter is 4 (Sv19). When the branch counter is 4, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Counter update processing (Sv20) for updating various predetermined timers, display devices such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit display device 11, game auxiliary display device 12, 1 to 3 bet LEDs 14 to 16, status display LED 17, start effective) An LED dynamic display process (Sv21) for controlling to set a lighting signal for dynamically lighting the lighting state of the LED 18, the section display LED 19, the replaying LED 20, etc.) in accordance with the setting by each process such as the main process (Sv21) )I do.

When it is determined that the branching counter is not 4 in the step Sv19, and after the LED dynamic display processing is performed in the step Sv21, a medal insertion signal indicating that a medal has been inserted among the external output signals and a medal payout. The output setting of the medal payout signal indicating that is performed is transmitted, and the medal insertion payout signal transmission process (Sv22) of transmitting to the outside of the slot machine 1 and the security signal (door opening signal, setting change signal) of the external output signals. , Input error signal, payout error signal) output settings are updated and security signal transmission processing (Sv24) for transmitting to the outside of the slot machine 1 and various commands such as door commands and operation end commands set in the command queue are executed. A command transmission process (Sv25) for transmitting the data is sequentially performed.

After that, the branch counter is referenced to determine whether or not the branch counter is 2, and when the branch counter is 2, when a reel abnormality occurs (during reel error). Based on whether or not the reel error flag that is set is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not a reel error is occurring (Sv26). Then, when the reel error is not occurring, the reel control process for controlling the rotation and stop of the reel is performed by setting the excitation pattern of each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R according to the progress status of the game and the like (Sv27). ..

Then, if it is determined in step Sv25 that the branching timer is not 2, if it is determined in step Sv26 that there is a reel error, and if the reel control processing in step Sv27 is completed, the reel control processing is performed. A reel motor drive signal output process for rotating and stopping each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R in a predetermined control mode by outputting a drive signal corresponding to the generated excitation pattern to each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R ( Sv29), a process of transmitting a control signal to the solenoid drive circuit 46, a process of updating the lighting state of the left/middle/right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, a process of setting the signal during the advantageous section to the OFF state, and the like. After sequentially performing the port output update processing (Sv30) to be performed, the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the predetermined value indicating the ON state in the output buffer (in the present embodiment, It is determined whether 1) is set (Sv31). It should be noted that the advantage interval flag is set by the payout control processing of the main processing, so that the output buffer of the advantage interval signal has a predetermined value indicating the ON state by the processing at the end of the game in the main processing (Sb82). Then, 1) is set.

In the step Sv31, when it is determined that the predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) indicating the ON state is set in the output buffer for the advantageous period signal, the advantageous period signal is controlled to the ON state, After the output of the signal during the advantageous period to the test apparatus is started (Sv32), the process proceeds to step Sv33. On the other hand, in the step Sv31, the initial value (0 in this embodiment) indicating the OFF state is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period, and the predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) indicating the ON state is set. If it is determined that it is not set, the process of step Sv32 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Sv33.

In the step of Sv33, all the front and back registers are exchanged (Sv33), the timer interrupt is set to enable (Sv34), the timer interrupt process (main) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (main) is terminated. ) Is returned to the main process when it was started.

As described above, in the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the counter update process (Sv20) that updates a plurality of timer values used in the specific process (game program) including the one game time management timer value, and the special process ( The time monitoring update process (Sv11) for updating the timer value used in the non-gaming program) is performed separately. As a result, the time monitoring update process for updating the timer value used by the special process does not coexist with the counter update process for updating the timer value used by the specific process.

In the timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the time monitoring update process including the process of outputting the test signal is performed before the counter update process of updating the one game time management timer value. As a result, after the output of the test signal is started, the update of the one game time management timer value is started, so that the time interval at which the test signal is output can be reliably set to the minimum time of one game or more. ..

[About time monitoring update processing]
The control content of the time monitoring update processing performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 69 to 75. The time monitoring update processing is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program and called by the timer interrupt processing (main) included in the gaming program. Further, the time monitoring update processing is designed to sequentially call the sensor monitoring processing, the test signal output processing, the medal passing time timer update processing, and the display monitor output data selection processing included in the non-gaming program.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the time monitoring update processing, first, the value of the current address of the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the game program of the calling source is changed by using the LD instruction described above. It is stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area and saved (Sv201). After that, using the LD instruction, a predetermined value of the non-gaming stack area as the value of the stack pointer SP (stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program) Value), the stack pointer SP is set for the non-gaming program (Sv202). Then, using the above-mentioned first save instruction, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are stored in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. It is saved by storing it (Sv203). After that, it is included in the non-gaming program, a sensor monitoring process (Sv204) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, and the slot machine 1 is connected. Test signal output processing for outputting a test signal to the test device (Sv205), medal passage time timer updating processing (Sv206) for updating a timer for measuring the passage time of medals in the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and a ratio The ratio monitor display data selection process (Sv207) for selecting the ratio data to be displayed on the monitor is sequentially performed.

After performing the role ratio monitor display data selection processing in the step Sv207, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area in the step Sv203 is used by using the first return instruction described above. By sequentially reading from the non-game stack area in the reverse order of saving, and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the time monitoring update processing was started (Sv208). After that, by using the LD instruction described above, the value of the stack pointer SP for the game program saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area in step Sv201 is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the monitoring update processing was started (Sv209), the time monitoring update processing is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing (main) of the calling source is returned to.

In this way, the main control unit 41 performs various processes (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer updating process, winning ratio monitor display data selecting process) according to the time monitoring updating process included in the non-gaming program. In this case, by calling the time monitoring update process from the timer interrupt process (main) (Sv11) included in the game program, various processes of the time monitoring update process are performed, and the caller is terminated by the end of each process. It returns to the timer interrupt processing (main) of.

Further, in the time monitoring update process, after being called from the timer interrupt process (main) which is a game program, first, the process of saving the stack pointer SP and the register is performed, and then the sensor monitoring process, the test signal output process, A plurality of processes such as a medal passing time timer updating process and a winning ratio monitor display data selecting process are performed. Then, after all of these processes are completed, the stack pointer SP and the registers saved when called from the game program are restored, and the timer interrupt process (main) of the calling source is returned. In such a configuration, that is, in the non-gaming program called by the calling process once from the gaming program, a plurality of processes (for example, sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer updating process, winning ratio monitor display data selection) In the configuration for performing processing, etc., the processing for saving the stack pointer SP and the registers and the processing for restoring these may not be performed for each of a plurality of processings performed in the non-gaming program, but may be collectively performed once.

Further, when calling a non-gaming program (for example, time monitoring update processing) from the gaming program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the arithmetic result is stored in the register included in the main control unit 41 on the gaming program side. After saving the value of the flag register that is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area, call the non-gaming program, and save it after the non-gaming program is finished and before calling the non-gaming program. By sequentially reading the value of the flag register from the game stack area and setting it in the corresponding flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before calling the non-gaming program. As a result, when the game program returns to the game program by calling the non-gaming program, the non-gaming program uses the flag register to perform the calculation and changes the value of the flag register. In addition, the value of the flag register is returned to the state before the non-gaming program is called, and the subsequent processing can be performed.

In the non-gaming program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by the gaming program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), first, the stack pointer SP used by the calling gaming program is used. The value of the current address of the indicated game stack area is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and saved. Then, after performing a predetermined process according to the non-gaming program, when terminating the non-gaming program, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the non-gaming program is started Is set to the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-gaming program was started. Thereby, the non-gaming program uses the stack pointer SP in the non-gaming program to change the stack pointer SP, and when the non-gaming program ends, the non-gaming program starts With the stack pointer SP returned to the state, the calling game program can be restored.

In addition, in the non-gaming program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by the gaming program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are set in the non-gaming RAM. It is saved by storing it in the non-game stack area of the area. Then, after performing a predetermined process according to the non-gaming program, when ending the non-gaming program, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area when the non-gaming program is started By sequentially reading from the non-gaming stack area and setting the corresponding registers, all the registers are restored to the state when the non-gaming program was started. Thereby, the non-gaming program uses the register to perform various processes in the non-gaming program and changes the value of the register even when the non-gaming program is terminated, the non-gaming program. It is possible to return to the calling game program in a state where all the register values are returned to the state at the time of starting.

Further, in the non-gaming program, when called by the gaming program, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are stored in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area to save the non-gaming program. When you finish, set the value of the register that was saved and saved in the non-gaming stack area to the corresponding register, so that all the registers are restored to the state when the non-gaming program was started. Is becoming The value of the register used by the game program is stored in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area, saved, and restored from the non-gaming stack area to the register, so all the register values are loaded in the gaming stack area. Since it is not necessary to provide an area for saving, and only the area for saving the value of the flag register need be provided in the game stack area, the capacity of the game stack area can be reduced.

Further, the main control unit 41 needs a program capacity of 1 byte for the instruction to save the value of the flag register, while the main control unit 41 needs a program capacity of 2 bytes for the instruction to save the value of all the registers. To do. Then, when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, on the gaming program side, the value of the flag register among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is saved in the gaming stack area of the gaming RAM area, and then the non-gaming program is opened. On the non-gaming program side, all register values are saved in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area, and the program of the gaming program is more saved than when all the registers are saved on the gaming program side. The capacity can be reduced.

[Sensor monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 70, in the sensor monitoring process, the payout sensor is referred to by referring to the branching counter of the timer interrupt process (main) that is updated in the timer interrupt process (main) and set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is the timing (timing at which the branching timer is 0) for the processing relating to the payout sensor that monitors whether or not the detection states of 34c and 34d are abnormal (Sz101). Then, if it is the time to perform the process related to the payout sensor, the process proceeds to step Sz102. On the other hand, if the process regarding the payout sensor is not timed, the process proceeds to step Sz117, and the process regarding the insert sensor that monitors whether or not the detection state of the insert medal sensors 31a to 31c is abnormal is performed.

When it is determined in step Sz101 that it is time to perform the process related to the payout sensor, a sensor error set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c for transmitting the monitoring result of the sensor monitoring processing to the game program. The reference data is cleared (Sz102). Then, referring to the error flag which is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and which can specify whether or not the error code E1 to E5 is abnormal (Sz103), the error code E2, E3, It is determined whether or not the abnormality of E4 has occurred (Sz104).

If it is determined in step Sz104 that the error codes E2, E3, and E4 are abnormal, the process proceeds to step Sz117, while if it is determined that the error codes E2, E3, and E4 are not abnormal. After referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the finalized data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are stored (Sz105), referring to a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, the hopper unit 35 pays out medals. It is determined whether or not a payout flag indicating that control is being performed is set (Sz106).

When it is determined in the step Sz106 that the payout flag is set, whether or not one of the payout sensors 34c, 34d is in the ON state based on the confirmation data of the payout sensors 34c, 34d referred to in the step Sz105. It is determined (Sz107), and if one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON, the predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the edge data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is stored is referred to (Sz108), and the edge is detected. It is determined whether data (ON edge data or OFF edge data) is set (Sz109).

When it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state in the step of Sz107 and the edge data is set in the step of Sz107, that is, one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 is When it is time to start passing the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or when one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 has finished passing the detection range of the payout sensor, the non-gaming RAM of the RAM 41c. The sensor check timer 1 set in a predetermined area of the area is initialized and set to 0 (Sz110), and the counting of the passing time of a new medal is started. Then, when it is determined that the edge data is not set in the step Sz109, and after the sensor check timer 1 is initialized in the step Sz110, the sensor check timer 1 is updated by adding 1 (Sz111).

The sensor check timer 1 determines the time from when the medal starts to pass the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d to when the medal has finished passing, and from when the medal has finished passing the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It is a timer for measuring the time until the next medal starts to pass. By being updated in the step Sz111 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 1 relates to the payout sensor during the period during which the payout flag is set, that is, during the period when the hopper unit 35 controls the payout of medals. It is adapted to be updated every processing timing (one timing every 4 times of timer interrupt processing (main), 2.24 milliseconds).

When it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state in the step of Sz107 and the edge data is not set in the step of Sz109, that is, the medal payout control is performed for one sheet paid out from the hopper unit 35. If the medal is passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or if it is a period from when one medal is paid out during payout control until the next medal is paid out, the sensor The check timer 1 is added by one unit time (2.24 milliseconds in this embodiment) and updated (Sz111).

After updating the sensor check timer 1 in step Sz111, it is determined whether or not the value of the sensor check timer 1 exceeds a predetermined maximum value of the monitoring time (11.20 milliseconds in this embodiment). The determination is made (Sz112).

Here, the maximum value of the monitoring time of the sensor check timer 1 is at least the maximum value of the time taken from when the medals are paid out by the hopper unit 35 and when the medals start to pass the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d until they finish passing, After the medals paid out by the hopper unit 35 have finished passing the detection range of the payout sensors 34c, 34d, the next medal is paid out by the hopper unit 35 and passes the detection range of the payout sensors 34c, 34d. It is set to a time longer than the longer of the time required to start. Accordingly, based on the sensor check timer 1, at least the time during which the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d can be continued in the ON state and the payout sensors 34c and 34d during the payout control for paying out the medals. It is configured to determine whether or not a period longer than the time that the detection state of 1 can continue in the OFF state has elapsed.

When it is determined that the value of the sensor check timer 1 exceeds the maximum value of the monitoring time in the step Sz112, the sensor error reference data indicating that the abnormality is detected based on the detection states of the payout sensors 34c and 34d (the payout sensor). ) Is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz113), the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0 (Sz114), and the passage time of a new medal is started to start Sz114. The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in step is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to step Sz117. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sz112 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 does not exceed the maximum value of the monitoring time, the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and Sz117. Go to step.

Further, when it is determined in step Sz106 that the payout flag is set, and when it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, the processing in steps Sz108 to Sz113 is executed. Without proceeding, the process proceeds to step Sz114 to maintain the sensor error reference data in the state cleared in step Sz102, and proceeds to step Sz114 to initialize the sensor check timer 1 and set it to 0. The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in the step Sz114 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to step Sz117.

Further, when it is determined that the payout flag is not set in the step Sz106, both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state based on the confirmation data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in the step Sz105. It is determined whether or not (Sz116), and when both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to Sz107. Then, in the step of Sz107, it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, so that the process proceeds to the step of Sz117 without setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sz106 that the payout flag is not set, and when it is determined in step Sz116 that both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are not in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step Sz113. After setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor) in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c, the sensor check timer 1 is initialized (Sz114), and the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz115), the process proceeds to steps Sz117.

By performing the processing of the above steps Sz11 to 116, processing relating to the payout sensor for determining whether or not an abnormality relating to the payout of medals has occurred based on the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, After the processing is performed, the processing related to the insertion sensor is performed subsequently to the processing related to the payout sensor by performing the processing of step Sz 117 and thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the processing relating to the insertion sensor in the sensor monitoring processing, first, it is determined whether or not a medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the insertion of medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz117), and when the medal care permission flag is not set, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the calling time monitoring updating process.

When it is determined that the medal maintenance permission flag is set in the step of Sz117, the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sz118), and the abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c (hereinafter referred to as the medal. (Sometimes referred to as a sensor error) is determined based on whether or not a sensor error flag that can specify whether or not a medal sensor error is occurring is detected (Sz119). Then, when the medal sensor error is occurring, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the calling time monitoring updating process.

If it is determined in step Sz119 that the medal sensor error is not occurring, the current state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (in FIG. 71, inserted medal sensors 1, 2, and 3) set in the port input buffer in the game RAM area. By referring to the data (Sz120), it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state (Sz121).

When it is determined that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state in the step of Sz121, the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz122), and the non-operation of the RAM 41c is stopped. By referring to the sensor check timer 2 set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area, it is determined whether or not the sensor check timer 2 is 0 (Sz123).

The sensor check timer 2 is a timer for measuring the time from when a medal starts to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c to when it finishes passing. The sensor check timer 1 is updated by the step Sz127 in the sensor monitoring process, so that the sensor check timer 1 performs the sensor monitoring process (at each timer interrupt process (main)) while the inserted medal sensor 31a is in the ON state. It is updated every 0.56 milliseconds).

If it is determined in step Sz123 that the sensor check timer 2 is 0, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c (in FIG. 31, the inserted medal sensors 2 and 3) referred to in step Sz120 are in the ON state. (Sz124), and if the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are not in the ON state, the medal insertion signal ignore timer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the medal insertion signal processing is used to refer to the medal insertion signal. It is determined whether or not it is within the signal ignoring time (in the present embodiment, within 504 milliseconds after switching control of the flow path of the medal by the flow path switching solenoid 30 is started) (Sz125), and the medal insertion signal is ignored. If it is not within the time, the sensor check timer 2 is updated by adding one unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sz126), and the value of the sensor check timer 2 after the addition is the inserted medal sensor. It is determined whether the maximum value (99.68 m in this embodiment) of the normal passage time range required for the medal to normally pass through the detection range of 31a is exceeded (Sz127). The normal passage time range is the actual measurement value of the time required for a medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal acceptance flow path 29b of the medal selector 29, and the medal acceptance flow path 29b. It is determined in advance based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, etc. (in the present embodiment, the range is 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

If it is determined in step Sz127 that the value of the sensor check timer 2 exceeds the maximum value of the normal passage time range, and if it is determined in step Sz124 that the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are in the ON state, the inserted medal is determined. After setting sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) indicating that an abnormality is detected based on the detection states of the sensors 31a to 31c in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz128), the sensor check timer 2 is set. It is initialized and set to 0 (Sz129), and the counting of the passage time of a new medal is started. Then, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the calling time monitoring updating process.

Further, when it is determined in step Sz121 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are not in the ON state, when it is determined in step Sz126 that it is not within the medal insertion signal ignore time based on the medal insertion signal ignore timer, the sensor is detected in step Sz127. When it is determined that the value of the check timer 2 does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the value of the sensor check timer 2 is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz130), and the sensor monitoring process is terminated. Return to the time monitoring update process of the calling source.

As described above, in the sensor monitoring process, the processes related to the payout sensor are performed by performing the processes of steps Sz101 to Sz116, and an abnormality related to the payout of medals occurs based on the detection states of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. Whether or not there is an abnormality related to the insertion of medals is determined based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c by performing the processing of the steps Sz117 to Sz130. It is like this.

In the sensor monitoring process, after performing a process related to the payout sensor to determine whether or not an abnormality related to the payout of medals has occurred, the process related to the insertion sensor is continuously performed regardless of the determination result. It is designed to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred regarding the input of.

[About test signal output processing]
The test signal output process performed by the main controller 41 will be described with reference to FIG. After performing the sensor monitoring process described above, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs the test signal process.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the test signal output processing, first, the one game time management timer set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to by the main processing (Sz201), and the one game time management timer is set. It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, a value at the time of starting the counting by the one game time management timer, a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) (Sz202). In addition, when the step Sb43 of the main process is performed before the timer interrupt process (main) that is the caller of the time monitoring update process that calls the test number output process is performed, one game time management is performed. The value of the timer for use is set to a predetermined value.

When it is determined that the one game time management timer is the initial value in the step of Sz202, the branch counter set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to by the timer interrupt processing (main) (Sz203), When the branching counter has a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment), a predetermined value (output to be output to the test device) preset in the test signal output timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is a value according to the number of data, and in this embodiment, the time ((22.4 milliseconds) x number of output data (4)) for continuing the output of the test signal capable of specifying one output data is set. To start timing (Sz204). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz202 that the one game time management timer is not the initial value, if it is determined in step Sz203 that the branching timer is not 3, after setting the test signal output timer in step Sz204, The initial address of the output data address for specifying the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the output data to be output as the test signal is stored is acquired (Sz205). The output data is data that can specify the winning status of the special winning combination and the winning status of the general winning combination in the internal lottery.

After that, the value of the test signal output timer is referred to (Sz206), and it is determined whether or not the test signal output timer has finished counting a predetermined time (Sz207). When the test signal output timer is not 0 and the test signal output timer has not finished counting the predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the output data fixed mode is set (Sz208). The output data fixed mode is set when the output data set by the RT information output processing performed in step Sb2 of the main processing described above is output as a test signal.

If the output data fixing mode is not set, the test signal output timer is decremented by 1 unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sz209), and then in step Sz206. When the value of the referenced test signal output timer is divided by a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, a value corresponding to the time (22.4 milliseconds) during which the output of the test signal that can specify one output data is continued) It is determined whether the remainder value is 0 (Sz210). Then, when the remainder value is 0, the process returns to the step Sz205, and the processing of the steps Sz205 to Sz210 is performed based on the value of the test signal output timer updated in the step Sz209. On the other hand, when the remainder value is not 0, the value of the test signal output timer referred to in step Sz206 is set to a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, the time (22. The value obtained by dividing by 4) is calculated, the quotient value is added to the output data address of the initial address obtained in step Sz205 (Sz211), and the process proceeds to step Sz212. Then, the output data address is further advanced by one address, and the output data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sz213).

If it is determined in step Sz208 that the output data fixing mode is set, the process proceeds to step Sz212, and the output data address of the initial address set in step Sz206 is advanced by one address (Sz212). The output data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sz213).

After that, the output data acquired in the step of Sz213 is set as a test signal output (Sz214), and the test signal output is set and output to the output port 6 (Sz215). If it is determined in the step Sz207 that the value of the test signal output timer referred to in the step Sz206 is 0, the test signal output is set to the OFF state (Sz216), and the test signal output is output to the output port 6. It is set and output (Sz215). After setting the output of the test signal in the step Sz215, the test signal output process is terminated and the process returns to the calling time monitoring update process.

According to such control, the main control unit 41 sets the one game time management timer to an initial value and starts the timer, that is, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as a game. The test signal is output from the output port 6 for a predetermined period (89.6 milliseconds (22.4 milliseconds×4) in this embodiment).

Further, the main control unit 41 sequentially outputs, as a test signal, four pieces of output data capable of specifying the winning statuses of the general winning combination and the special winning combination in the internal lottery at predetermined time intervals (22.4 milliseconds in this embodiment). The output port 6 is switched to output.

Next, the medal passing time timer updating process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. After performing the test signal output process described above, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs the medal passing time timer updating process.

As shown in FIG. 73, in the medal passing time timer updating process, first, the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program refers to the medal passing time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c, It is determined whether or not the value of the medal passing time timer is 0 (Sz301).

If the value of the medal passing time timer is 0, that is, if the time for the medal to pass the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not measured by the medal sensor process, the medal passing time timer updating process is ended. , And returns to the time monitoring update process of the calling source.

On the other hand, when the value of the medal passing time timer is not 0, that is, when the time taken for the medal to pass the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is measured by the medal sensor process, a predetermined value is added to the medal passing time timer. By doing so (Sz302), the medal passing time timer updating process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling time monitoring updating process.

[Display monitor output data selection processing]
The display monitor output data selection processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. After performing the medal passing time timer updating process described above, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs the display monitor output data selecting process.

The display monitor output data selection process is started after the port input process in the timer interrupt process (main) performed every 0.56 milliseconds by the main control unit 41, and is used in the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process (main). This is a process for setting the lighting data of the LED to be generated.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the display monitor output data selection processing, first, the address of the display monitor selection timer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set in the HL register (Sz401), and the display of the address is performed. The monitor selection timer value is incremented by 1 and updated (Sz402). Thereafter, it is determined whether the display monitor selection timer value has reached the upper limit value (8928) (Sz403), and when it is determined that the display monitor selection timer value has reached the upper limit value (8928), The display monitor selection timer value is initialized and set to 0 (Sz403). Display monitor Display content vector is incremented by 1 and updated (Sz405). The display monitor display content vector is updated within the range of 0 to 4 by correcting it to 0 when the value exceeds 4 by adding 1.

When the display monitor display content vector is updated in step Sz405, and when it is determined that the display monitor selection timer value has not reached the upper limit value in step Sz403, the process proceeds to step Sz406 to refer to the game state. (Sz406), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state is in progress (Sz407). When it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting is in the confirmation state, the processing of steps Sz447 to Sz463 described below is performed to display the display test pattern on the 7-segment display of the gaming machine information display 50.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting confirmation state is not in progress, the address of the display monitor identifier output data table is set in the HL register (Sz408), and the value of the display monitor display content vector is set in the A register and the B register. Read (Sz409). Then, the address at which the identifier output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display content vector is stored is calculated based on the A register value and the HL register value (Sz410), and the identifier output data stored at the address is calculated. It is read into the DE register (Sz411).

After that, in the step of Sz409, the value of the display monitor display content vector read into the B register is incremented by 1 and updated (Sz412). Then, the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The digested game number determination flag capable of specifying whether or not the prescribed number of games is exceeded is read into the A register (Sz413), and the relevant flag is set. The determination value included in the digested game number determination flag is extracted into the C register (Sz414).

Then, based on the determination value extracted in the C register, it is determined whether or not the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the specified number of games (Sz415).

When it is determined in the step Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 does not exceed the specified number of games, the address of the display monitor selection timer is set in the HL register (Sz416), and the predetermined area of the ROM 41b is set. The arithmetic constant 1 registered in advance is read into the BC register (Sz417). Then, the display monitor selection timer value of the HL register is divided by the arithmetic constant 1 of the BC register (Sz418), and it is determined whether the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is 0 (Sz419). If it is determined that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is not 0 in the step of Sz419, the DE register is cleared and 0 is set to output the output data that makes the display of the 7-segment display unit blank (non-display). The DE register is set (Sz420), and the process proceeds to step Sz421.

If it is determined in step Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the specified number of games, the process of steps Sz416 to Sz420 is not performed and the process proceeds to step Sz421. If it is determined in step Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value by the operation constant 1 is 0, the process of step Sz420 is not performed. , Sz421.

In the step of Sz421, the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 as the identifier display data (Sz421).

After that, display data for displaying "---" on the gaming machine information display 50 is set in the DE register (Sz422). Then, the start address of the display monitor threshold data table is set in the HL register (Sz423), the value of the display monitor display vector is read into the A register (Sz424), and the display monitor display vector is read based on the A register value and the HL register value. The address in which the threshold value data corresponding to the value is stored is calculated (Sz425). Then, the ratio display is valid by referring to the ratio monitor display valid data stored in a predetermined area corresponding to the value of the display monitor display vector and capable of specifying whether or not the ratio display is valid. It is determined whether there is any (Sz426).

When it is determined in step Sz426 that the winning combination ratio display is not valid, the process proceeds to Sz446 described below, and the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 as the winning combination ratio display (Sz446), and then displayed. The monitor output data selection process is terminated and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz426 that the combination ratio display is valid, the data stored in the address specified by the HL register value is read as the threshold value into the B register (Sz427), and the display monitor combination ratio is calculated. The start address of the output data table is set in the HL register (Sz428), and the address where the output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display vector is stored is calculated based on the A register value and the HL register value (Sz429). Then, the output data stored at the address is read into the A register (Sz430). After that, the output data of the A register is compared with the threshold value of the B register, and the value indicating the comparison result is set in the C register (Sz431).

Then, data for which the display mode is not blinking is provisionally set in the B register (Sz432), and it is determined whether the output data is less than the threshold value based on the C register value (Sz433). If it is determined in step Sz433 that the output data is not less than the threshold value, the data indicating that the display mode is blinking is provisionally set in the B register (Sz434), and the process proceeds to step Sz435. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sz433 that the output data is less than the threshold value, the process of step Sz434 is not performed and the process proceeds to step Sz435. In the step of Sz435, the quotient obtained by dividing the output data of the A register by 10 is set in the A register, and the remainder is set in the E register (Sz435).

After the output data of the A register is divided by 10 and the quotient and the remainder are set in the predetermined registers in the step of Sz435, the start address of the display data table is set in the HL register (Sz436), and the HL register value is set. The display data stored in the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value is read into the D register, and the display of the tens digit of the ratio display is set (Sz437).

After that, the E register value is read into the A register (Sz438), the display data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is read into the E register, and the ratio display 1 The display of the place of is set (Sz439).

After that, it is determined based on the value of the B register whether or not there is a blinking setting (Sz440), and when it is determined that there is a blinking setting, the display monitor selection timer value is read into the HL register (Sz441). Then, a predetermined timer reference value (a value corresponding to 0.3 second in this embodiment) is read into the BC register (Sz442), and the quotient obtained by dividing the HL register value by the BC register value is set in the HL register. Then, the remainder is set in the DE register (Sz443). After that, it is determined whether or not the least significant bit of the quotient set in the HL register is 0 (Sz444). When it is determined that the least significant bit of the quotient is not 0, the display data (value of the DE register) Is set to 0 (Sz445), and the process proceeds to step Sz446.

If it is determined in step Sz440 that the blinking is not set based on the value of the B register, the process of steps Sz441 to Sz445 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Sz446. When it is determined in step Sz444 that the least significant bit of the quotient is 0, the process of step Sz445 is not performed and the process proceeds to step Sz446.

In the step of Sz446, the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display device 50 as the ratio display (Sz446). After that, the display monitor output data selection process is terminated and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

If it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting is in the confirmation state, the process proceeds to step Sz447, 0 is set as the display data (DE register value) (Sz447), and the DE register value is displayed as an identifier. It is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display device 50 as the ratio display (Sz448, Sz449).

After that, the display monitor selection timer value is read into the HL register (Sz450), the HL register value is corrected (Sz451), and the arithmetic constant 2 previously registered in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b is read into the BC register (Sz452). ). Then, the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value of the HL register by the calculation constant 2 of the BC register is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz453). After that, the arithmetic constant 3 previously registered in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b is read into the BC register (Sz454), and the HL register value (the quotient value set in the step of Sz453) is divided by the arithmetic constant 3 of the BC register. The quotient thus obtained is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz455).

Then, the value of the L register is read into the A register (Sz456), the address of the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 for displaying the winning combination is read into the HL register (Sz457), and the A register value is added to the HL register. Correct (Sz458). After that, the C register value is read into the A register (Sz459), the address of the display test pattern data of the gaming machine information display device 50 is read into the DE register (Sz460), and the A register value is added to the DE register for correction (Sz461). ).

After that, the output data of the display test pattern stored in the address specified by the DE register value is read into the A register (Sz462), and the output of the gaming machine information display device 50 for displaying the winning ratio specified by the HL register value. The A register value is stored in the buffer (Sz463). After that, the display monitor output data selection process is terminated and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

[Counter update processing]
The counter updating process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The counter update process is a subroutine included in the game program and called in the timer interrupt process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the counter updating process, first, in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which a medal insertion signal ignoring timer for measuring a medal insertion signal ignoring time that does not refer to the medal insertion signal by the above-mentioned medal insertion signal process is set. The address is set in the HL register (Sv301). Then, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, whether the medal shooting signal ignore timer value is 0, that is, whether the medal shooting signal ignore time is being counted. If it is determined that the medal shooting signal ignore timer value is not 0 and the medal shooting signal ignore time is being timed, the medal shooting signal ignore timer value is updated by subtracting 1 ( Sv303).

After that, the address of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the one game time management timer for counting the minimum time of one game is set as described above is set in the HL register (Sv304). Then, with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, whether or not the one game time management timer value is 0, that is, whether or not the minimum time of one game is being counted. If it is determined (Sv305) that the one game time management timer is not 0 and the minimum time of one game is being counted, the one game time management timer value is decremented by 1 and updated. Yes (Sv306). After that, the counter updating process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

Thus, in the counter updating process, the medal insertion signal ignore, which is a counter for counting the time (medal insertion signal ignore time, minimum time of one game, etc.) managed by the game program (main process, medal insertion signal process, etc.) The timer and the one game time management timer are updated. On the other hand, a medal passage time timer that measures time (medal sensor monitoring time, test signal output time, medal passing time, etc.) managed by a non-gaming program (medal sensor check processing, sensor monitoring processing, test signal output processing, etc.) The sensor check timer 1, the sensor check timer 2, and the test signal output timer are not updated in the counter update process included in the game program, but are processed in various ways (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process) included in the non-game program. , Timer update processing).

[About display mode of gaming machine information display]
As shown in FIG. 77, in the state where the game control board 40 is attached at a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a 7-segment display is provided on the lower portion on the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. A gaming machine information display 50 is arranged. The gaming machine information display 50 allows the display contents to be visually recognized from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a. A clerk or the like can recognize information such as an advantageous section ratio in the slot machine 1 displayed on the machine information display 50.

Therefore, the display contents of the gaming machine information display device 50 can be visually recognized through the substrate case 120a with the front door 1b opened. Further, inside the housing 1a, the visibility of the display contents of the gaming machine information display device 50 is not disturbed. Specifically, at the position on the display side of the gaming machine information display 50, there are no general components such as reels provided in the slot machine 1 and other substrates, and the display side of the gaming machine information display 50 is Wiring for connecting the electronic components provided in the slot machine 1 does not pass through the position. In addition, in the board case 120a that houses the game control board 40 on which the gaming machine information display 50 is mounted, a seal sticker, an entry section for entering the opening person, management information and management history of the slot machine 1 and the game control board 40. Etc., such as a label displaying information such as a label, a sticking part to which the label is stuck, a display part on which the information is printed or engraved, a heat dissipation hole, a fan for heat dissipation, etc. It is provided avoiding the position on the display side.

Further, the board case 120a is designed to be sealed after housing the game control board 40, and in the sealed state, the seal cannot be released and opened without leaving a trace. Has become. As a method of sealing, there are a method of sealing the sealing piece with a one-way screw, a method of welding a part of the case, and a method of sticking a sealing sticker on which a trace of peeling remains. Thereby, the connection line connecting the gaming machine information display 50 and the gaming control board 40 is broken, and the gaming machine information display 50 mounted on the gaming control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a is correctly displayed. It is possible to prevent the contents from being displayed, and prevent a fraudulent activity such as sticking a sticker or the like on the display surface of the gaming machine information display device 50 to hinder the visibility.

The main control unit 41, as shown in FIG. 78, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games. , The advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the combination payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout, the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout, and the instructed accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout on the gaming machine information display 50. Control to display.

The advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games is the rate of the number of games controlled to the AT-related advantageous section between the past 6000 games. The advantageous section related to the AT is a period from when the AT is won in the AT non-winning state to when the control of the AT associated with the winning AT is completed and the AT is shifted to the non-AT. The ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games is controlled by the advantageous section related to AT with respect to the total cumulative number of games which is the cumulative number of games after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. It is a percentage of numbers. The combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the number of medals paid out in the BB controlled during the past 6000 games, which is the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the cumulative number of combined payouts. The bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the ratio of the bonus payout number, which is the cumulative total of the number of medals paid out during the controlled RB during the past 6000 games to the total payout number during the past 6000 games. is there. The instructed accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the payout quantity of the accessory payout between the past 6000 games in the total payout quantity during the past 6000 games and the game in which the navigation notification is issued between the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the number of coins paid out instructed, which is the total number of medals. The combination payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount is set at the time of factory shipment or for some reason at the time of factory shipment or the total cumulative payout amount, which is the total number of medals paid out since the data of the RAM 41c was initialized for some reason. It is the ratio of the combined payout number after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present. The ratio of the bonus payout to the total cumulative payout number is the ratio of the bonus payout number from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present in the total cumulative payout number at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. The instructed instructed accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is the ratio of the instructed payout number to the present after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized in the total cumulative payout number at the time of factory shipment or for some reason.

In this embodiment, as the bonus, only the RB and the BB in which the RB continuously operates are mounted, but winning of all kinds of small wins is allowed, but some reels are drawn. The CT may be limited and the CB in which the CT operates continuously may be mounted. The number of medals paid out in CB is reflected in the number of paid-out coins, and in the case of mounting CB, the combination payout ratio is reflected.

The main control unit 41 controls the ratio of advantageous intervals between the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous intervals to the total cumulative number of games, the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games during the period after the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. Inter-role payout ratio, instructed bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games, combined payout ratio to total accumulated payouts, accessory payout ratio to total accumulated payouts, instructed accessory payout ratio to total accumulated payouts Are switched every predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) in the display order shown in FIG. 78 to be displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50.

At this time, on the gaming machine information display 50, an abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content in the upper two digits (for example, when the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games in the display order 1 is displayed, 1A”) is displayed. In the abbreviations indicating the display contents currently being displayed, the display contents of the least significant digit of the two displayed digits are characters other than numbers (in this embodiment, alphabetic characters "A" "C" "F"). Therefore, when the abbreviations, percentages, and ratios are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, the numerical portions of the abbreviations are not adjacent to the percentages and ratios. As a result, it is possible to prevent the abbreviated numeral part from adjoining the ratio and the ratio, and erroneously recognizing the display contents of the ratio and the ratio.

Further, at this time, the gaming machine information display 50 displays the ratio and ratio (hereinafter, may be referred to as data to be displayed) which should be currently displayed corresponding to the above-mentioned abbreviation in the last two digits. The data is also displayed in %. Although 0 to 99% will be displayed as the data displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, in the present embodiment, both lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are used for display. The data to be displayed is displayed. For example, when the data to be displayed is one digit, "0" is displayed in the upper digit of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. , The value of the data to be displayed is displayed in the lower digit (for example, when 5% is displayed, "05" is displayed in the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50). Further, when the data to be displayed is two digits, the data to be displayed in the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed (for example, when displaying 15%, the gaming machine information display 50). "15" is displayed in the last two digits of "." Thus, regardless of whether the data to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 is one digit or two digits, the data to be displayed using both lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 By displaying, it is possible to prevent the display contents of the ratio and the ratio from being erroneously recognized. Further, regardless of whether it is one digit or two digits, by displaying the data to be displayed using both lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are always displayed. One of the data is displayed in the digit, and for example, when the data is not displayed on one of the lower two digits of the display, the abnormality of the display can be recognized.

It should be noted that the abbreviations indicating the display contents currently being displayed are set so that the display contents of the most significant digit of the two displayed digits are characters other than numbers (for example, "A1"). Even when the aforesaid abbreviation is displayed in the lower two digits of 50 and the data to be currently displayed (for example, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games) is displayed in the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, the abbreviated numbers are also displayed. It is possible to prevent the display contents of the ratio and the ratio from being erroneously recognized when the part and the ratio and the ratio are adjacent to each other.

Further, regardless of whether the abbreviation and the data to be currently displayed are displayed in the lower two digits or the upper two digits in the gaming machine information display 50, the two digits for displaying the abbreviation and the data to be currently displayed are displayed. Even with a configuration in which the two-digit color is different, it is possible to prevent the abbreviated numeral portion from adjoining the ratio and the ratio and erroneously recognizing the display contents of the ratio and the ratio.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the advantageous section ratio, the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the commanded accessory payout ratio, the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the commanded accessory payout ratio. , In the display order shown in FIG. 78, when the display is switched every predetermined period, the game is advanced and the values are updated to new values within one period until the display is completed. Even if it can be done, updating to a new value is restricted and the display is cycled using the original value. More specifically, in the case where the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values within one period until the display is completely cycled, new values are calculated and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated. However, by setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display content on the gaming machine information display unit 50, the display on the gaming machine information display unit 50 can be displayed. The original value may be used for one cycle, and after the one cycle of display is completed, a new value may be set in the output buffer so that the new value is displayed thereafter. If these values can be updated to new values within one period until one cycle is completed, the calculation on the new value is restricted to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. It is also possible to make one cycle, and when the display of one cycle is completed, perform a calculation for obtaining a new value, and then perform display on the gaming machine information display 50 using the new value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display contents such as the advantageous section ratios calculated at different times from being mixed in the period until the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50 make one round.

Further, when the ratio of the advantageous section between the past 6000 games and the ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games exceeds the specified rate (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the normal mode (for example, the normal mode). If it is always lit, blinking lighting, etc.) is used to display the advantageous section ratio. In addition, when the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the combination payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount exceed the specified ratio (for example, 60%), the main control unit 41 displays differently from the normal display mode (for example, If normal is always on, the combination payout ratio is displayed by blinking etc.). Further, when the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount exceed the prescribed ratio (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays differently from the normal display mode (for example, If normal is always on, blinking lights, etc.) are used to display the accessory payout ratio. Further, the main control unit 41 displays differently from the normal display when the instructed bonus product payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the instructed bonus product payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount exceed the specified ratio (for example, 80%). The instruction-included accessory payout ratio is displayed in a form (for example, blinking if normal is always lit).

In this way, when the advantageous section ratio, the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the instructed accessory payout ratio exceed the specified ratio, the display mode is different from the normal display mode, and the gambling is highly likely. It is now possible to warn you that your state may be under control.

Further, the main control unit 41 determines the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the instructed accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games. In the case of displaying on the machine information display 50, when the number of games in the past has not reached 6000 games, for example, blinking the upper two digits of the game machine information display 50 By controlling to different display modes, it is possible to recognize that the total has not reached 6000 games, and it is possible to recognize that there is a bias in the displayed ratio and ratio. There is.

Further, when the main control unit 41 causes the gaming machine information display 50 to display the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the specified game number at which the advantageous section ratio of the past game number converges to the design value of the slot machine. When the game has not reached (for example, 175,000 games), the advantageous section ratio is controlled by controlling the display mode different from the normal one, such as blinking the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. It is possible to recognize that the number of games has not reached the specified number of games that converges to the design value of the slot machine, and it is possible to recognize that there is a bias in the displayed ratio and ratio. There is.

Further, in the case where the combination payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, the main control unit 41 regulates that the past game number is such that the combination payout ratio substantially converges to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 17500 games) has not been reached, for example, by controlling the display mode different from the normal one such as blinking the upper 2 digits of the gaming machine information display 50, the continuous play It is possible to recognize that the payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that converges to the design value of the slot machine, and it is possible to recognize that there is a bias in the displayed ratio and ratio. It has become.

Further, when the main control unit 41 causes the gaming machine information display device 50 to display the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the provision is such that the past game number is such that the accessory payout ratio substantially converges to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 6000 games) has not been reached, for example, by controlling the display mode different from the normal one such as blinking the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, It is possible to recognize that the payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that converges to the design value of the slot machine, so that it is possible to recognize that there is a bias in the displayed ratio and ratio. It has become.

In the case where the main control unit 41 causes the gaming machine information display unit 50 to display the instructed accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the past game number is approximately the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games has not reached the specified number of games (for example, 175,000 games) that converges to, for example, the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is controlled to be different from the normal display mode. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that the ratio of instructed accessory payout has not reached the specified number of games that converges to the design value of the slot machine, and there is a bias in the displayed ratio and ratio. The possibility is recognized.

The main controller 41 displays "00" in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 when the game has not reached the 6000 game, and displays the gaming machine information when the game has reached the 6000 game. The proportion and ratio to be displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine 50 are displayed, that is, in the state after reaching the 6000 game, the display manner of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is changed to the display manner after the 6000 game. Is preferably configured to have a different display mode. With such a configuration, when the 6000 game is not reached, the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are displayed (for example, "1A"). It is possible to recognize that the total of the advantageous section ratios specified by) has not reached 6000 games, and it is possible to recognize that the displayed ratios and ratios may be biased. Further, when the game has not reached the 6000 game, by displaying "00" in the lower two digits of the game machine information display 50, the game machine information is always displayed when the game has not reached the 6000 game. The data is displayed in the lower two digits of the device 50. For example, when the data is not displayed on one of the lower two digits of the display device, the abnormality of the display device can be recognized.

Further, the main control unit 41 determines the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio to the total cumulative number of games, the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games. Whether the data used to calculate the ratio of instructed accessory payouts, the ratio of combined payouts to the total accumulated payouts, the ratio of accessory payouts to the total accumulated payouts, and the ratio of commanded accessory payouts to the total accumulated payouts are normal If it is determined to be abnormal (when the number of accessory payouts, the number of combined payouts, and the number of advantageous section payouts is larger than the total number of payouts, the stored value is in a certain data format (01 repeat, etc.). In some cases, etc.), the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data are initialized, and the gaming machine information display device 50 displays a message indicating that the abnormality has been detected (for example, “FFFF”), The fact is notified so that it is possible to recognize that the calculation of these data is not normally performed.

When initializing the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, for example, the ratio of the advantageous section to the past 6000 games, the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the commanded accessory payout ratio. If at least one of them is determined to be abnormal, the data regarding all of them may be initialized, or only some of the data may be initialized. When it is determined that at least one of the advantageous section ratio, the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the instructed accessory payout ratio with respect to the total number of games is abnormal, the data related to all of them is initialized. Alternatively, only some data may be initialized. In addition, when it is determined that a part of the data for the past 6000 games is abnormal, all the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative game number are initialized, or conversely, a part of the data for the total cumulative game number is initialized. When it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, all the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games may be initialized.

In addition, it is determined whether or not the data used for calculating the advantageous section ratio, the combination combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the instruction-included accessory payout ratio are normal between the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games, and it is determined as abnormal. If the determination is made, a notification to that effect is given, and thereafter, predetermined operations (for example, the switches such as the start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the setting key switch 37 are operated in a predetermined procedure). By doing so, the initialization regarding the data may be performed.

In addition, in the notification that the abnormality is determined, as described above, even if the gaming machine information display 50 is made to display that the abnormality has been detected (for example, “FFFF”) and the notification is made. When the abnormality is determined, a command capable of specifying the abnormality is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 to inform the sub-control unit 91 side that the abnormality is determined by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. You may do it.

In addition, the main control unit 41, during the period from the start of data collection until reaching 6000 games, that is, the ratio of the advantageous section between the past 6000 games, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games, and the connection between the past 6000 games. Role payout ratio, role payout ratio between the past 6000 games, commanded role payout ratio between the past 6000 games, combination payout ratio to the total accumulated payouts, ratio payout ratio to the total cumulative payouts, total cumulative payouts A mode in which the display content of the gaming machine information display device 50 is different from the display mode after the 6000 game from the start of the data collection during the period when the data for calculating the instruction-included accessory payout ratio or the like is insufficient. It is possible to recognize that the period for which the data for calculating the display content is insufficient is insufficient.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the advantageous section between the past 6000 games, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games, the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 in the period after the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. In-game bonus payout ratio, instructed bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games, combined payout ratio to total cumulative payout, bonus payout ratio to total cumulative payout, instructed bonus payout to total cumulative payout The ratio is switched and displayed every predetermined period, but it may be displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected, or a predetermined operation switch (for example, the reset/setting switch 38). ) Operation is displayed only when it is detected, when it is not in a game, when it is being changed or while the settings are being confirmed, and for a certain period after the power is turned on. It may be displayed only. Further, the display content may be switched every time a predetermined operation is performed, instead of being automatically switched every predetermined period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine information is that the data abnormality used for calculating the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 has been determined, and that the data for calculating the display content is insufficient for a period. Although it is configured to be notified using the display device 50, a command capable of specifying that fact may be transmitted to the sub control unit 91 so that it can be confirmed by the display device or the effect device controlled by the sub control unit 91. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games. The ratio of instructed accessory payouts, the ratio of combined payouts to the total cumulative payouts, the ratio of accessory payouts to the total cumulative payouts, and the ratio of commanded accessory payouts to the total cumulative payouts are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. With respect to the configuration, in addition to these displays, when the RAM 41c is initialized by a setting change, or when a disconnection of a wire (a backup power supply wire or the like) provided in the slot machine 1 is detected, the fact is notified. The recognizable content may be displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50.

In particular, if the setting is changed during the bonus, the advantageous section or during the carryover of the bonus, the bonus or the advantageous section is forcibly ended, or the bonus during the carryover is cleared, the game is defined as the carryover of the bonus. It was done more than a few times, or the operation to intentionally end the advantageous section was performed (for example, in RT2, RT3 during AT, intentionally letting RT1 transfer replay or SB win, or stopping a specific symbol) When an operation to shift to RT1 is performed, that is, when a player intentionally shifts from a relatively advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state), and the gaming machine information display 50 is disconnected. When the possibility that the connection is not normally established due to the occurrence of the above is detected, the fact is notified so that it can be specified. By doing this, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that it was manipulated illegally so that correct information such as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combination payout ratio, the instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. may not be displayed. You can

In addition, as will be described later, in the process of avoiding the overflow of the total accumulated data, when the total accumulated data is initialized, it is possible to specify that fact, as described above, the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, It is preferable to notify in a manner different from the case where there is a possibility that an illegal operation has been performed such that correct information is not displayed as the combination payout ratio, the commanded accessory payout ratio, etc. The fact that the total cumulative data has been initialized by the process of avoiding can be recognized separately from the initialization due to an illegitimate operation for preventing the correct information from being displayed as the advantageous section ratio.

In addition, if there is a possibility that it was manipulated illegally so that the correct information is not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, accessory payout ratio, combined payout ratio, instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. Is detected and the history of the detection is recorded on the main control unit 41 side, and the predetermined operation (for example, start switch 7 or stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, setting key switch 37 By operating switches and the like in a predetermined procedure, connecting a predetermined external device such as a terminal for inspection to the game control board 40, etc.), these histories are stored in the main control unit 41 side. It can be confirmed by a display provided (for example, gaming machine information display 50 or the like), a display provided on the sub-control unit 91 side (for example, liquid crystal display 51 or the like), a display external to the slot machine 1, or the like. You may do so.

Further, the setting is changed, the disconnection is detected, the connection failure of the gaming machine information display 50 occurs, and the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combination payout ratio, the instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. There is a possibility that correct information may not be displayed as, and as described above, it was operated illegally so that correct information was not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, accessory payout ratio, combined payout ratio, instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. It may be possible to confirm that there is a possibility on a display device or an effect device controlled by the sub control unit 91. Also, during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the carryover of the bonus, the setting is changed and the bonus or the advantageous section is forcibly ended, the bonus during the carryover is cleared, the advantageous section ratio, the character payout ratio, The sub-control unit 91 records a history of the fact that it may have been operated illegally so that correct information is not displayed as the combination payout ratio, the instructed accessory payout ratio, etc., and the predetermined operation is performed. You may make it possible to confirm these histories with.

[About the display test pattern of the gaming machine information display]
In the display monitor output data selection processing, each processing of Sz447 to Sz463 is performed, so that the gaming machine information display device 50 sequentially performs the display based on the display test pattern, as shown in FIG. 79. Each segment from the first segment to the eighth segment of the 7-segment display 50a that constitutes the gaming machine information display 50 is in a predetermined order (in the present embodiment, the first segment → the second segment → the third segment → the fourth segment). →5th segment→6th segment→7th segment→8th segment→1st segment... By controlling the respective segments to be turned on sequentially, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the gaming machine information display device 50 is out of order, for example, whether or not there are any unlit segments.

[Regarding notification while the section display LED is on]
The section display LED lighting notification performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81.

As described above, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 19 to be in a lighting state when the control of the AT is started after controlling the section in the advantageous section, and displays the section indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous section. It is possible. Then, the main control unit 41 displays the section when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed and the power supply is restarted in the normal procedure. It is designed to return to the existing state.

In addition, the main control unit 41 sends to the sub control unit 91 a command capable of specifying that the section display is to be performed when the section display is started along with the start of control of the AT after controlling the advantageous section. To send. Further, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the state before the power supply is stopped is restored, when the section display is restarted, a command that can specify that the section display is performed is issued to the sub control unit 91. Send to.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 detects that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the sub control unit 91 determines the time specified based on the RTC (real time clock) included in the sub control unit 91. It is stored in the storage means included in 91. When it is specified that the section display is to be performed on the main control unit 41 side based on the command from the main control unit 41 when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the RTC is referred to. The current time is specified, the current time is compared with the time stored in the storage means when the power supply is stopped, and the current time is stored in the slot machine 1 across the specific time (4:00 am in this embodiment). It is determined whether the power supply has been restarted. Then, when it is determined that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted across a specific time (in the present embodiment, 4:00 am), the main control unit 41 side indicates that the section is being displayed. The liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 57 are used to notify that the section display LED is lit.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the section display LED lighting notification, a notification image that indicates that the section display LED 19 is controlled to be in the lighting state by the main control unit 41 (indicates that the section display LED 19 is in the lighting state). An image A of a character (“section display LED is lit”), an image B indicating the position of the section display LED 19 in the slot machine 1, an image C of a predetermined character) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the front surface of the slot machine 1 is displayed. The effect LED 57 installed on the player side of the door 1b is controlled to be turned on in a lighting mode different from that during a normal game, thereby notifying that the lighting state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the main control unit 41 controls the game section to an advantageous section, starts section display when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and controls the section display LED 19 to a lighting state. Then, the fact that control is performed in the advantageous section is notified. At this time, the sub control unit 91 does not perform the notification while the section display LED is lit. In this state, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and then the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted by the normal procedure in which the section display LED turn-off operation described later is not performed, the main control unit 41 Controls the section display LED 19 to a lighting state. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 controls so as to give a notification while the section display LED is lit. Then, after the section display LED lighting notification is started, a predetermined specific period elapses, or a game start operation is performed before the specific period elapses, whereby the section display LED lighting notification is performed. Control to finish.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81(b), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the main controller 41 is displaying the section, and then the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. In addition, when the section display LED is extinguished, the main control unit 41 initializes the information about the advantageous section and then returns to the state in which the game can be played. As a result, the section is not displayed and the section display LED 19 is returned to the ON state without being controlled. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not display the section, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command capable of specifying that the section is displayed to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 does not receive the command capable of specifying that the section is to be displayed from the main control unit 41 when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, and thus the section display LED is turned on. Control is performed such that the control of the effect is restarted without performing the middle notification.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81(c), the main control unit 41 does not display the section even when the game section is being controlled to the advantageous section when the predetermined start condition is not satisfied. In this state, even when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted, the section display is not performed until a predetermined start condition is satisfied. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not display the section, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a command capable of specifying that the section is displayed to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 does not receive the command capable of specifying that the section is to be displayed from the main control unit 41 when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, and thus the section display LED is turned on. Control is performed such that the control of the effect is restarted without performing the middle notification.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment has an RTC (real-time clock) and can specify the time, but the sub-control unit 91 does not have to have the RTC. In the configuration in which the sub control unit 91 does not include the RTC, when it is specified that the section display is performed on the main control unit 41 side when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the section display is always performed. The configuration may be such that notification is made while the LED is on.

In this way, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs the section display LED lighting notification for a certain period after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and the section display LED is lit after the certain period of time has elapsed. It is designed to end the middle notification. As a result, when the section display is returned to the state where the section display is being performed when the power supply is started, the section display LED indicating that is displayed is notified, so that the clerk is informed when the game shop is opened. It is possible to recognize that the section is being displayed. On the other hand, since the section display LED lighting notification is finished in a certain time, it is possible that the section display LED lighting notification is continued after the amusement store is opened, which gives a feeling of strangeness to the player or the like. It can be prevented.

After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section is displayed on the main control unit 41 side, the sub control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs the specific time outside the business hours of the amusement store (the present embodiment). In the example, when the power supply is started across 4 am) and the section display is restored, the section display LED indicating that the section display is restored is lit. While notifying using the liquid crystal display device 51, when the power supply is started without crossing a specific time and the section display is returned to, the section display LED lighting is not notified. Is becoming As a result, it is possible to prevent the player or the like from feeling uncomfortable even if the power is temporarily cut off during business hours.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to end the section display LED lighting notification without waiting for a certain period of time when the game is started while the section display LED lighting notification is being performed. There is. As a result, after the section display LED lighting notification is started, it is possible to end the section display LED lighting notification by starting the game even if a certain period of time has not elapsed.

In the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment, after the power supply is stopped in the section before the AT in which the section display is not performed on the main control section 41 side, the power supply is started and the section display is not performed. When returning to the state, the section display LED is not informed during lighting. Thereby, only when the section is controlled to the advantageous section and the section is displayed again, it is possible to make the clerk of the gaming shop recognize that the store is opened in the section displayed. it can.

[Operation effect 1]
As a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-gaming program not related to the progress of the game is stored are separately assigned to the ROM. There is a configuration. With such a configuration, if the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program each time the processing included in the non-gaming program is executed in the gaming program, the gaming program and the non-gaming program are switched back and forth many times. However, there arises a problem that the processing becomes complicated.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area for storing a program, and a main control section 41 for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored. And a plurality of types of abnormality determinations in the non-gaming program (a determination of abnormality relating to payout of medals and insertion of medals) by a single call from the timer interrupt processing which is a gaming program to the time monitoring update processing which is a non-gaming program. This is a configuration for performing (abnormality determination). In such a configuration, a non-game of the ROM 41b in which a game program area of the ROM 41b in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and which is not related to the progress of the game are stored. In a configuration in which the program area and the non-gaming program are separately allocated, a plurality of types of abnormality determinations are made in the non-gaming program by calling the non-gaming program once from the gaming program, so that the game program and the non-gaming program are switched back and forth. It can be reduced as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, in the time monitoring and updating process included in the non-gaming program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, two types of abnormalities, that is, determination of abnormality relating to payout of medal and determination of abnormality relating to insertion of medal are performed. However, in the non-gaming program called by the game program once, it is also possible to make a judgment of three or more kinds of abnormalities.

Further, in the present embodiment, the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, and the time interrupt updating process included in the non-gaming program to determine a plurality of types of abnormalities is performed from the timer interrupt process included in the non-gaming program. Although it is a configuration for calling, as a game program for calling a non-game program that determines a plurality of types of abnormalities, processing included in the game program other than the timer interrupt processing may be applied.

Further, in this embodiment, in the time monitoring update processing included in the non-gaming program called from the timer interrupt processing included in the game program, the sensor monitoring processing, which is one subroutine, is performed to determine an abnormality related to the payout of medals. And, the configuration for determining an abnormality related to the insertion of medals, that is, a configuration for determining a plurality of types of abnormality by one subroutine, the non-gaming program called by the game program is configured by a plurality of subroutines, one type for each subroutine Of a plurality of types by performing a first subroutine for determining an abnormality related to payout of medals and a second subroutine for determining an abnormality related to insertion of medals in the time monitoring update process. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the above abnormality determination is performed. With such a configuration, the management of the program is facilitated by setting the processes for performing a plurality of types of abnormality determination as subroutines for each type of abnormality determination.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The unit 41 is configured to include the register and stack pointer SP used in the game program when calling the time monitoring update process which is the non-game program from the timer interrupt process which is the game program, and the non- When the game program is returned to the game program, the saved registers and the stack pointer SP are restored. With such a configuration, when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, it is possible to prevent the data of the register and the stack pointer SP used in the gaming program from being damaged.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area for storing a game program and a non-gaming program area for storing a non-gaming program, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The RAM 41c includes a unit 41 and a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data. The RAM 41c is used by a non-game program and a game RAM area in which game data used by the game program is readable and writable. A non-gaming RAM area in which non-gaming data is readablely stored, and by calling the time monitoring update processing included in the non-gaming program once from the timer interrupt processing included in the game program, the time monitoring update As a plurality of types of abnormality determination in the process, the determination of the abnormality regarding the payout of medals and the determination of the abnormality regarding the insertion of medals are performed, and the sensor error reference data capable of specifying the result of the abnormality determination is stored in the non-gaming RAM area, When returning from the time monitoring update process to the timer interrupt process, in the timer interrupt process which is the game program, the sensor error reference data stored in the non-gaming RAM storage area is referred to without performing any other process. is there. In such a configuration, since the result of the abnormality determination by the non-gaming program is referred to before other processing is performed, the result of the abnormality determination can be reflected in the processing performed by the gaming program as soon as possible. In addition, after returning to the game program from the non-gaming program that performs abnormality determination, the sensor error reference data is referenced before any other processing is performed, so that other information is displayed based on the error flag that reflects the latest sensor error reference data. Can be performed.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area for storing a game program and a non-gaming program area for storing a non-gaming program, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The unit 41 is provided, and the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program is called once from the timer interrupt process included in the game program to pay out medals as a plurality of types of abnormality determination in the time monitoring update process. It is configured to determine an abnormality related to medal insertion and an abnormality related to medal insertion, and in the time monitoring update processing, even when an abnormality is determined by determining an abnormality related to medal payout, an abnormality determination related to medal payout is performed. After that, it is configured to continuously determine an abnormality related to the insertion of medals. In such a configuration, in the time monitoring update process, which is a non-gaming program called from the timer interrupt process, which is a game program, regardless of whether or not an abnormality is determined by determining an abnormality regarding payout of medals, other It is also possible to make a determination regarding an abnormality relating to the insertion of medals, which is the type of abnormality.

In the present embodiment, in the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, two types of abnormalities are determined: an abnormality determination regarding medal payout and an abnormality determination regarding medal insertion. However, in the non-gaming program that is called by the game program once, it may be possible to judge two or more kinds of abnormalities. In such a structure, the non-gaming program Even if one type of abnormality is determined from among the multiple types of abnormality determinations made in step 1, it is possible to determine whether any type of abnormality is determined by continuously performing the other type of abnormality determination. Regardless, the abnormality determination can be performed for other types of abnormality.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment calls the time monitoring update processing included in the non-gaming program once from the timer interrupt processing included in the game program, thereby determining a plurality of types of abnormalities in the time monitoring update processing and playing the game. This is a configuration for determining an abnormality regarding payout of a medal, which is a medium, and an abnormality regarding insertion of a medal. With such a configuration, abnormality determination regarding payout of medals, which are game media, and abnormality determination regarding insertion of medals can be performed by calling the non-gaming program once.

The slot machine 1 which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a storage area in which a program is stored, and a main control unit 41 which controls based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The area includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored, By calling the non-gaming program (time monitoring update processing) once from the gaming program (timer interrupt processing), in the non-gaming program, abnormality determination (determination of abnormality relating to payout of medal in sensor monitoring processing, abnormality regarding insertion of medal) Judgment), output control of the test signal output to the test device connected to the slot machine 1 (test signal output processing), a predetermined display of the winning ratio which is a state based on the history of the game (credit display 11, game assistance) This is a configuration in which a plurality of controls including display control (role ratio monitor display data selection processing) to be displayed on the display device 12) are performed. In such a configuration, a non-game of the ROM 41b in which a game program area of the ROM 41b in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and which is not related to the progress of the game are stored. In the configuration in which the program area and the non-gaming program are separately allocated, the non-gaming program is called once to determine an abnormality in the non-gaming program, output control of test signals, and a ratio based on the history of the game. Since a plurality of controls including display control for displaying on a predetermined display device are performed, it is possible to reduce traffic between the game program and the non-game program as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 calls the non-gaming program (time monitoring and updating process) once from the game program (timer interrupt process) to determine abnormalities as a plurality of controls in the non-gaming program ( Judgment of abnormalities related to payout of medals in the sensor monitoring process, judgment of abnormalities related to insertion of medals), output control of test signals output to the test device (test signal output processing), and a role ratio based on the history of games. It is configured to perform display control to display on a predetermined display (role ratio monitor display data selection processing) and control to update the timer (medal passage time timer update processing), but at least two types by calling the non-gaming program once. A configuration for performing the above control may be used. For example, a configuration for performing abnormality determination and output control of a test signal by calling a non-gaming program from the gaming program, a display for displaying an abnormality determination and a winning combination on a predetermined display device A configuration for performing control, an output control for a test signal, a display control for displaying a ratio on a predetermined display device, a configuration for performing abnormality determination, and a control for updating a timer may be used. Even with these configurations, it is possible to reduce traffic between the game program and the non-gaming program as much as possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 calls the non-gaming program (time monitoring update processing) once from the gaming program (timer interrupt processing) to determine abnormality in the non-gaming program and output it to the test device. It is configured to perform a plurality of controls including output control of a test signal and display control for displaying a winning combination that is a state based on a history of games on a predetermined display device. In the abnormality determination, two types of abnormality determination (payout of medals are performed. However, it may be configured to perform one type of abnormality determination in the abnormality determination, or may be configured to perform a plurality of types of abnormality determination of three or more types. .. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to reduce traffic between the game program and the non-gaming program as much as possible.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The unit 41 is configured to include an abnormality determination in the time monitoring and updating process by calling the time monitoring and updating process included in the non-gaming program from the timer interrupt process included in the game program (an error regarding payout of medals is detected. It is configured to perform a sensor monitoring process that is a process of performing a determination and an abnormality determination regarding insertion of a medal, and a test signal output process that is a process of controlling an output of a test signal output to a test device. In the above, the sensor monitoring process and the test signal output process are each called as a subroutine. In such a configuration, the process of determining an abnormality and the process of controlling the output of the external output signal output to the external device are set as subroutines, respectively, so that the management of the program becomes easy.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an abnormality judgment is made in the non-gaming program by a single call from the timer interrupt processing which is the game program to the time monitoring update processing which is the non-gaming program (for example, judgment of abnormality relating to payout of medals, medals It is configured to perform a sensor monitoring process that is a process of determining an abnormality regarding the input of a test signal and a test signal output process that is a process of controlling the output of a test signal. In the test signal output process in the non-gaming program, the game program process is performed. In the configuration, the output state of the test signal is set using the output port (the output port 6 in this embodiment) where the ON data and the OFF data are not set, that is, the output port which is not used in the processing of the game program. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal whose output state is controlled by the process of the game program from being unintentionally controlled to the output state by the test signal output process in the non-gaming program.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The unit 41 is configured to include an abnormality determination in the time monitoring and updating process by calling the time monitoring and updating process included in the non-gaming program from the timer interrupt process included in the game program (an error regarding payout of medals is detected. Display control that causes a predetermined display (credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12) to display a winning combination that is a state based on the history of the game and a sensor monitoring process that is a process of performing determination, determination of abnormality regarding insertion of medals) In the time monitoring/updating process, the sensor monitoring process and the display monitoring data selecting process are each called as a subroutine. In such a configuration, the process of performing abnormality determination and the process of performing display control of the winning combination are set as subroutines, respectively, so that management of the program becomes easy.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a ROM 41b having a game program area for storing a game program and a non-gaming program area for storing a non-gaming program, and a main control for performing control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The unit 41 and the test device connected to the slot machine 1 in the time monitoring update process by calling the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program from the timer interrupt process included in the game program once. Display control for displaying a winning combination which is a state based on a test signal output process and a game history, which is a process for controlling output of a test signal output to a predetermined display device (credit display device 11, game auxiliary display device 12) In the time monitoring update process, the test signal output process and the display monitor data selection process are each called as a subroutine. In such a configuration, the process of controlling the output of the test signal and the process of controlling the display of the ratio are set as subroutines, respectively, so that the management of the program becomes easy.

In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program not related to the progress of the game is stored are separately assigned to the ROM. There are configurations. In such a configuration, the storage area for the game data used in the game program and the storage area for the non-game data used in the non-gaming program are also allocated to different areas, but refer to the non-gaming data in the gaming program. If the data in the non-gaming data area is referenced from the gaming program each time the processing is executed, it is necessary for the gaming program to access both the gaming data area and the non-gaming data area many times, which complicates the processing. The problem arises that

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, has a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, and data. And a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing, the storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored and a program called by the game program. A non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program that is not related to the progress is stored, and a storage area of the RAM 41c is a gaming RAM area in which game data used by the gaming program is readable and writable and a non-gaming program is stored. The non-gaming RAM area in which the non-gaming data to be used is readably stored, and in the sensor monitoring process of the time monitoring update process which is a non-gaming program, the abnormality determination relating to the payout of medals and the insertion of medals are performed as the abnormality determination. A timer, which is a game program that determines the abnormality, updates the sensor error reference data as the first abnormality data stored in the non-gaming RAM area based on the results of these abnormality determinations, and calls the time monitoring update process In the interrupt process (main), when returning to the game program from the time monitoring update process, the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM region is referred to, and the game RAM region is stored based on the first abnormal data. The sensor error flag can be updated as the stored second abnormality data, and in the main processing which is the game program to be performed thereafter, the progress of the game is referred by referring to the second abnormality data stored in the game RAM area. This is a configuration for determining whether or not to shift to an error state that disables.

In such a configuration, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored, Are separately allocated, and the game RAM area in which the game data used by the game program is stored in a readable and writable manner, and the non-game RAM area in which the non-game data used by the non-gaming program is stored in a readable manner are separated. In the configuration assigned to, in the game program, when returning from the non-gaming program to the game program, the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming data area is referred to and the game is played based on the first abnormal data. Update the second abnormal data stored in the data area, and in the game program, refer to the second abnormal data stored in the game data area to shift to an error state that disables the progress of the game. Since it is determined whether or not, once referring to the first abnormal data in the non-gaming data area and updating the second abnormal data in the gaming data area, in the gaming program such as the main processing to be performed thereafter, the abnormality determination is made. Since it is possible to refer to the result of the abnormality determination by the non-gaming program without accessing the first abnormality data in the non-gaming data area many times each time the related processing is performed, the non-gaming data area can be referred from the gaming program. The frequency of referring to can be reduced as much as possible.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment refers to the medal-related error as the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM area when returning from the time monitoring and updating process which is a non-gaming program to the timer interrupt process which is a gaming program. With reference to the data, the sensor error flag can be updated as the second abnormal data stored in the game RAM area based on the first abnormal data, and when the non-gaming program returns to the gaming program, Referring to the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM area, the logical sum of the first abnormal data and the sensor error flag stored in the gaming RAM area is calculated, and the sensor is detected according to the calculation result. By updating the error flag, the second abnormality data is updated when the occurrence of the abnormality is identified from the first abnormality data, and the second abnormality is updated when the occurrence of the abnormality is not identified from the first abnormality data. The data is not updated. In such a configuration, the second abnormal data is updated when the occurrence of the abnormality is identified from the first abnormal data, and the second abnormal data is not updated when the occurrence of the abnormality is not identified from the first abnormal data. So, even if the abnormality is resolved after the abnormality occurs and the first abnormality data is updated in the non-gaming program, the abnormality occurs from the second abnormality data until the abnormality is confirmed on the gaming program side. Can be specified.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the time monitoring update processing which is a non-gaming program called by the timer interrupt processing (main) which is a gaming program, a first abnormality that can make an abnormality determination and specify the result of the abnormality determination It is configured to store the medal-related error reference data as data in the non-gaming RAM area, and the timer interrupt process (main) that is the gaming program is not available when the time monitoring update process that is the non-gaming program returns to the gaming program. The medal-related error reference data is referred to as the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM area without performing the process of 2. and the second abnormal data stored in the gaming RAM area based on the first abnormal data. As a result, the sensor error flag can be updated. In such a configuration, since the result of the abnormality determination by the non-gaming program is referred to before other processing is performed, the result of the abnormality determination can be reflected in the processing performed by the gaming program as soon as possible. Further, in such a configuration, after the time monitoring update process is performed, the process using the second abnormal data before being updated based on the first abnormal data is performed by another process. It can be prevented.

In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program not related to the progress of the game is stored are separately assigned to the ROM. There are configurations. In such a configuration, when the signal output by the game program and the signal output by the non-gaming program are performed using the common output port, the output data of the signal set by the non-gaming program remains. Therefore, it may be output as an output signal by the game program.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, has a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, a main control section 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, and a signal. Output ports 0 to 9 for outputting, and the storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored and a program called by the game program, A non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program that is not involved is stored, and the output ports 0 to 9 are output data in the gaming program, for example, control signals of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R and the flow path switching solenoid 30. A first output port (output ports 0-5, 7-) in which a control signal, a control signal for the credit indicator 11, a command to the sub-control unit 91, etc. are set, and output data is not set in the non-gaming program. 9) and a second output port (output port 6) in which output data, for example, a test signal or the like is set in the non-gaming program and output data is not set in the gaming program, the first output The initialization of the port and the second output port is performed from the setting process at startup and the power interruption process (main) which are game programs. In such a configuration, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored, , The output data is set in the game program, the output data is not set in the non-gaming program, and the output data is set in the non-gaming program. In, since the output data is not set, and the second output port is provided separately, the output data of the signal set by the non-gaming program remains and is output as an output signal by the gaming program. It is possible to ensure the independence of the control by the game program and the control by the non-gaming program, and the initialization of the first output port and the second output port is carried out from the game program. The control when initializing the output port can be simplified.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the output data is set in the game program, and the output data is not set in the non-gaming program. The output data is set in the game program, and the second output port (output port 6) in which the output data is not set in the game program is provided, and the game program has a slot machine as an initialization condition. The configuration is such that the first output port and the second output port are initialized when the supply of power to No. 1 is started and the detection of the power failure is established. With such a configuration, the control when the initialization condition is satisfied can be simplified.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the output data is set in the game program, and the output data is not set in the non-gaming program. A configuration in which output data is set in the game program and a second output port (output port 6) in which output data is not set in the game program is provided, and a test signal is output from the second output port. Is. With such a configuration, the capacity for the game program can be reduced by performing control in the non-gaming program to output a test signal that is not essential for advancing the game.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by a game program is stored in a readable and writable manner. And a non-gaming RAM area in which non-gaming data used by the non-gaming program is readably stored. The gaming RAM area is a gaming program and is initialized by a RAM initialization process called from an initialization process or a main process. The non-gaming RAM area is a non-gaming program, which is initialized by non-gaming RAM area initialization processing called from the initialization processing. In such a configuration, in the game program and the non-gaming program, it is possible to refer to the game data and the non-gaming data with each other, but by making the rewriting impossible including the initialization, the gaming program The independence of the control by and the control by the non-gaming program can be ensured.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by a game program is stored in a readable and writable manner. And a non-gaming RAM area in which the non-gaming data used by the non-gaming program is readably stored, and when the setting change processing is performed, the gaming RAM area is initialized by performing the gaming RAM area initialization processing. While not initializing the non-gaming RAM area. In such a configuration, the non-gaming RAM area is not initialized even when the setting change process accompanied by the initialization of the gaming RAM area is performed, and therefore, the storage content stored in the non-gaming RAM area, for example, It is possible to prevent data or the like for displaying the winning combination, which is a state based on the history of games, on a predetermined display device from being initialized.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by a game program is stored in a readable and writable manner. And a non-gaming RAM area in which non-gaming data used by the non-gaming program is readably stored, and the non-gaming RAM area is stored in the RAM 41c by using the RAM parity and the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis in the initialization process. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM 41c, the game RAM area initialization processing and the non-game RAM area initialization processing are performed to initialize all the areas of the RAM 41c. .. With such a configuration, the contents stored in the RAM 41c are abnormal and the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c can be initialized when there is a risk that the game control may not be performed normally. In addition, when there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM 41c, the non-gaming RAM area is initialized, so even if the setting is changed, the contents stored in the non-gaming RAM area that are not initialized, for example, a game. It is possible to normalize the data and the like for displaying the winning combination, which is a state based on the history of, on a predetermined display device, and to ensure the normal operation of the processing based on the storage content stored in the non-gaming RAM area. ..

In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program not related to the progress of the game is stored are separately assigned to the ROM. There are configurations. In such a configuration, the non-gaming program detects fraud of passing medals, but the non-gaming program does not operate normally because the gaming program determines only the passing of inserted medals. In this case, there is a possibility that the passage of the medal may be determined even if the fraud is performed.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a program called by the game program, and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored. In the game program, the first condition in the game program is that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, that is, the input data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. As a result, the first detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting the passage of a medal, which is a game medium, is performed, and the second condition in the non-gaming program is based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. The passage of a medal, which is a game medium, is detected when the medal insertion signal state transition data specified by the above is normal and the establishment data of the insertion medal sensor 31b or 31c is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed, and in the game program, when the passage of the game medium is detected in both the first detection process and the second detection process, the game medium to be added to the bet amount and the credit is passed. This is a configuration for determining what has been done.

In such a configuration, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored, In a configuration in which are separately assigned, a first detection process of detecting passage of a game medium when a first condition is satisfied in a game program, and a passage of a game medium is detected when a second condition is satisfied in a game program. Since the passage of the game medium is determined when the passage of the game medium is detected in both of the second detection processes, it is possible to appropriately determine the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the first condition, it is established that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state. First detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting passage is performed, and as a second condition, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal and the insertion is performed. The configuration is such that a second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting passage of a medal, which is a game medium, is performed when the determination data of the medal sensor 31b or 31c is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The two conditions are configured based on the state transition of the medal insertion signal including more information than the first condition. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate fraud associated with the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the medal sensor check process which is a non-gaming program, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal as the second condition. In addition, a second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed to detect passage of a medal, which is a game medium, when it is established that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If the passage of the game medium is not normally detected by the second detection process, it is determined to be abnormal and the medal-related error reference data (E5) is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to detect fraud associated with passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the first condition, it is established that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state. First detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting passage is performed, and as a second condition, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal and the insertion is performed. The configuration is such that a second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting passage of a medal, which is a game medium, is performed when the determination data of the medal sensor 31b or 31c is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. In the first detection process and the second detection process, the common inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are used to detect passage of the game medium. In such a configuration, since the passage of the game medium is detected by both the game program and the non-game program for the common sensor, it is possible to appropriately determine the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity of the game program. it can.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can acquire the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c by the timer interrupt processing (main) that executes the periodical processing at regular intervals, and as the first condition, the inserted medal sensor 31b. Alternatively, when it is established that the confirmed data of 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, the first detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting the passage of the medal which is the game medium is performed. As the two conditions, the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. Is established, the second detection process (medal sensor check process) for detecting the passage of a medal which is a game medium is performed. In the first detection process and the second detection process, the same timer interrupt process (main) is performed. It is configured to detect the passage of the game medium by using the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired by the above. In such a configuration, since the passage of the game medium is detected by both the game program and the non-game program using the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in the same timer interrupt process (main), It is possible to appropriately determine the passage of the game medium without increasing the capacity.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment gives a predetermined number of medals when a small winning combination is won, and controls the player in favor of winning a special winning combination for a predetermined specific period, for example, during the past 6000 games. , Counting the total cumulative payout number, which is the total number of medals awarded in the period from the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized to the present, for example, at the time of factory shipment, or is controlled advantageously during a specific period. It is possible to count the number of bonus payouts, which is the total number of medals awarded in the period (RB), and the ratio of the bonus payout count calculated by the bonus payout count to the total accumulated payout count. It is configured such that a certain accessory payout ratio can be calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 so that the calculated accessory payout ratio can be specified, and a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is reached. It has a plurality of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 with different timings, calculates the accessory payout ratio using the count value of the corresponding counter every time the specific period is reached, and starts counting from the cumulative buffers 1 to 3. The display of the accessory payout ratio blinks during the period until the specific period is first reached. With such a configuration, it can be recognized that the accessory payout ratio displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 is not a normal value. In addition, since each has a plurality of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 that arrive at a specific period at different timings, after the first cumulative buffer reaches the specific period once, until the cumulative buffer reaches the next specific period. It is possible to update the accessory payout ratio to the latest information each time another cumulative buffer reaches a specific period without waiting.

[Operation effect 2]
In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored, Are separately allocated, and when the non-gaming program is executed, it is proposed to call the corresponding non-gaming program from the gaming program. With such a configuration, when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, the value of the register in the non-gaming program is saved and protected in the stack area, and saved when all the processing based on the non-gaming program is completed. After returning the value to the register to the game program, the value of the register after the value is updated by the instruction executed in association with the calling of the non-gaming program is saved. When returning, the register may be returned to a state different from that when the non-gaming program is called.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main CPU 41a that controls based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored. In addition, the main CPU 41a executes the process based on the values stored in the plurality of registers, and the plurality of registers are updated in value by the read instruction LD executed in association with the calling of the non-gaming program. Including a flag register, processing included in the game program (main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) to processing included in the non-gaming program (non-gaming RAM area initialization processing, RT information output processing, winning information output processing, winning ratio When calling the monitor data processing, the medal sensor processing, etc.), the calling game program saves the value of the flag register to the game stack area of the RAM 41c used by the game program, and the read non-game program reads the read instruction LD. After setting the stack pointer SP used by the non-gaming program, the non-gaming program saves the values of all of the plurality of registers in the non-gaming stack area. With such a configuration, in the RAM 41c, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-gaming program which is a program called by the game program and which is not related to the progress of the game is stored. In a configuration in which the area and the area are separately allocated, when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, the value of the flag register whose value is updated by executing the read instruction LD is saved in the gaming stack area of the RAM 41c used by the gaming program. After setting the stack pointer SP used by the non-gaming program by using the read command LD by the non-gaming program, the values of all the registers are saved in the non-gaming stack area of the RAM 41c, so the value of the flag register is set in the gaming stack area. The non-gaming program can be executed with the evacuation protected.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a is configured to save the value of the flag register to the game stack area by using the second save instruction (PUSH) by the game program when calling the non-game program from the game program. When calling the non-game program from the game program, the value of the flag register may be saved in a predetermined area other than the game stack area (for example, a game RAM area other than the game stack area, a back flag register, etc.). Further, when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, the gaming program may save the values of at least a plurality of registers including the flag register.

The main CPU 41a of the present embodiment stores the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the plurality of registers in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP, and the value of the flag register among the plurality of registers as the stack pointer SP. , A second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by can be executed, and the second save instruction for saving the value of only the flag register has a plurality of registers. The program capacity is smaller than that of the first save instruction for saving the value of. In such a configuration, the value of the flag register is saved by using the second save instruction in the game program, and the values of all of the plurality of registers are saved by using the first save instruction in the non-game program. The capacity can be reduced.

The main CPU 41a of the present embodiment can execute a read instruction LD for reading the data stored in the designated area to another designated area, and the stack pointer SP can be read by using the read instruction LD. The indicated value can be read and stored in a designated area of the RAM 41c, and the value stored in the designated area of the RAM 41c can be read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Is configured to update the value of the second zero flag of the flag register, and the main CPU 41a uses the game program to call the value of the flag register including the second zero flag to the RAM 41c when the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program. Of the values stored in the flag register, the value of the second zero flag that is updated by the execution of the read instruction LD is a value that is not used for the determination of the progress of the program in the game program. It is a structure which is. In such a configuration, the value of the second zero flag updated by the execution of the read command LD is a value that is not used for determination by the game program, but includes the second zero flag when calling the non-gaming program. By saving and protecting the value of the flag register, it is possible to reliably prevent unintended operation when the game program returns from the non-gaming program.

The main CPU 41a of the present embodiment is included in the game program, and includes a main process that performs a basic process and a timer interrupt process (main) that can be interrupted and executed during execution of the main process. It is possible to execute processing, and when calling the processing (winning information output processing, winning ratio monitor data processing, medal sensor processing, etc.) included in the non-gaming program from the main processing included in the gaming program, the value of the flag register is changed. After saving to the game stack area of the RAM 41c, the interrupt of the timer interrupt processing (main) is prohibited. With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the period in which interruption is prohibited when calling the non-gaming program as much as possible. Further, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed by performing the timer interrupt process (main) after saving the value of the flag register.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a saves the value of the flag register in the game stack area when calling the process included in the non-gaming program from the main process included in the game program, and then the timer interrupt process (main) Although the main CPU 41a calls the process included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program, the main CPU 41a saves the value of the flag register in the game stack area of the RAM 41c. The timer interrupt processing (main) interrupt may be prohibited. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed by performing the timer interrupt process (main) after saving the value of the flag register in the game stack area.

In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored, Are separately allocated, and when the non-gaming program is executed, it is proposed to call the corresponding non-gaming program from the gaming program. In such a configuration, when the non-gaming program is called from the game program, the timer interrupt is prohibited in advance, and when the process based on the non-gaming program is completed and the game program is restored, the prohibition of the timer interrupt is released. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from being performed during the execution of the non-gaming program, but there is a fear that the execution of the timer interrupt may be delayed by prohibiting the timer interrupt along with the execution of the non-gaming program. ..

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, and a main CPU 41a that controls based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-gaming program area in which a non-gaming program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored. The main CPU 41a includes a basic process (main process, game start waiting process included in the main process, medal insertion signal process, etc.) and when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during execution of the basic process is satisfied. Timer interrupt processing (main) that can be executed by interrupting the basic processing can be executed, and is basic processing, which is a non-game from the processing (main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) included in the game program. When calling the processes (winning information output process, medal sensor process, role ratio monitor data process) included in the program, prohibit the timer interrupt during execution of the non-gaming program, and call the non-gaming program from the gaming program. Before executing a series of processing including processing, the interrupt once wait processing that waits until the interrupt condition is satisfied and the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing (main) After that, a series of processes including a process of calling the non-gaming program from the game program is performed to call the non-gaming program. In such a configuration, in the RAM 41c included in the main control unit 41, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-gaming program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. In the configuration in which the non-gaming program area to be stored is allocated separately, the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, and before calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, The non-gaming program is called from the gaming program in a situation where the period until the next interrupt condition is satisfied is sufficient because the non-gaming program is called after the interrupt once waiting process is executed and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. A series of processes including the process of calling the program is performed, the non-gaming program is called and executed, and the interruption of the non-gaming program is prohibited, so that the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. It is possible to prevent the delay.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes the RT information output process from the main process when calling the medal sensor process included in the non-game program from the medal insertion signal process which is a part of the main process included in the game program. When calling, a non-gaming program is called from the game program and waits for one interrupt before the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, then the non-gaming program is called. It is configured to call the non-gaming program after a plurality of processes included in the game program have been performed, but when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, perform an interrupt once waiting process immediately before calling the non-gaming program. The configuration may be adopted, and with such a configuration, it is possible to surely prevent the interrupt condition from being satisfied while the interrupt is prohibited due to the execution of the non-gaming program.

The main CPU 41a of the present embodiment has a main process that executes a basic process and a timer interrupt that can execute the process by interrupting the main process when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during the execution of the main process is satisfied. Processing (main) and processing including can be executed, and when calling the non-gaming program from the main processing, it is configured to call the non-gaming program after executing the waiting process once for interrupt, and the main included in the gaming program. The ratio monitor data process included in the non-gaming program called from the process is a process that requires a predetermined time (time that can exceed the timing at which the interrupt that triggers the next timer interrupt process (main) occurs) to execute. is there. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) from being delayed even if the period in which the timer interrupt is prohibited by the execution of the non-gaming program becomes long.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main process included in the game program and a timer capable of interrupting the main process and executing the process when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during execution of the main process is satisfied. The interrupt process (main) and a process including can be executed. The main process calls the medal insertion signal process included in the game program through the game start waiting process included in the game program, and from the medal insertion signal process It is possible to call the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program, and in the game start waiting process before calling the medal sensor process from the medal insertion signal process, execute the interrupt once waiting process, and the timer interrupt process (main) Is configured to call the medal sensor process after the process is performed, and various switches (for example, the start switch 7 and the like) and sensors (for example, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the like) are input in the timer interrupt process (main). A port input process for updating the data is executed, and in the medal sensor process, the input state of the medal is determined by referring to the input data. With such a configuration, the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program can be executed by referring to the latest input data updated in the timer interrupt process (main).

[Operation effect 3]
In the conventional slot machine, the AT is controlled to an advantageous section in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified, and the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the limit value of 1,500 games. There is a configuration in which the information related to the control of the advantageous section such as the number of remaining games of the AT is initialized while the advantageous section is ended.

In the slot machine having such a configuration, no consideration has been given to a configuration in which the bet number can be selected from a plurality of bet numbers in limiting the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to set the bet number to either 3 (first bet number) or 2 (second bet number) depending on the selection of the player. The game can be executed when the bet number of 3 is set and the bet number of 2 is set, and the main control unit 41 is advantageous for the player during the game section. When it is possible to control to the advantageous section and in the payout control process (first process) performed at the start of the game, it is specified as the advantageous section based on the value of the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, Regardless of whether 3 or 2 is set as the bet number, the advantageous section game number counter for counting the number of advantageous section games, which is the number of games since the start of the advantageous section, is incremented by 1 game. Then, after updating the advantageous section game number counter, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section game number counter has reached the prescribed number of games (first prescribed number), and the prescribed number of games has been reached. When it is determined that the advantageous period is initialized, the advantageous period data is initialized. According to this configuration, the game is executed regardless of whether the bet number of three (first bet) is set or the bet number of two (second bet) is set by the player's selection. In a possible configuration, the main control unit 41 controls the number of advantageous section games when the number of bets is set to 3 or when the number of bets is set to 2 when the advantageous section is controlled. The counter is updated, and the advantageous period is ended when the counter value of the advantageous period game number reaches the specified number of games (first prescribed number). Therefore, even if three bet numbers are selected, two bet numbers remain. Even if it is selected, the advantageous section is limited so that it is not controlled to the advantageous section for a long period of time which is equal to or more than the specified number of games (1500 games), so that it is possible to prevent the gambling performance in the slot machine 1 from being excessively increased.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to perform payout control processing at the start of the game and update the advantageous section game number counter when the advantageous section is identified. The main control unit 41 may be configured to perform a process of updating the advantageous section game number counter in the process at the end of the game, for example, the AT state management process after the reel stop control process. Whether the configuration is such that the advantageous section game number counter is updated at the end of the game, the advantageous section game number counter is updated regardless of whether three bets are set or two bets are set. Since the advantageous section is ended when the counter value of the number of advantageous section games reaches the specified number of games, the advantageous section is restricted so as not to be controlled to the advantageous section for a long period of time equal to or more than the predetermined number of games. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance in the slot machine 1 from being excessively increased.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can output an advantageous-interval signal indicating that it is in the advantageous zone to the outside of the slot machine 1 when controlling to the advantageous zone, and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is configured to output the signal during the advantageous period by setting a predetermined value (1) different from the initial value (0) in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous period set to 1. It is determined whether or not it is during the advantageous period by determining whether or not the signal during the advantageous period is being output based on whether or not the value of the output buffer of the medium signal is the initial value. In this case, the processing relating to the advantageous section is performed in the payout control processing and the like. According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not it is during the advantageous period based on whether or not the during-advantage period signal is being output. It can be guaranteed that it is done.

In the present embodiment, the main controller 41 determines whether or not the signal during the advantageous period is being output based on whether or not the value of the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous period is the initial value in the main process or the payout control process. Although it is a configuration for determining whether or not during the advantageous period by determining whether, the determination whether or not during the advantageous period is not limited to the determination whether or not during the output of the advantageous period signal, for example, The determination may be made based on an advantageous section flag indicating that the advantageous section is in progress, an advantageous section game number counter that counts the number of games in the advantageous section, or the like.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can set the advantageous-interval flag to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when controlling in the advantageous interval, and outputs the advantageous-interval signal in the payout control process of the main process. If it is determined that the advantageous zone is not in operation due to the output of the signal during the advantageous zone based on the value of the buffer, the condition for starting the advantageous zone (that the advantageous zone transition hand is won in the internal lottery) is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied, an advantage section flag indicating that the advantage section is controlled is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the subsequent main processing, it is determined whether or not the advantage zone flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the advantage zone flag is set and it is determined that the advantage zone is in effect, By setting a predetermined value (1) in the signal output buffer, a signal during the advantageous period is output by subsequent timer interrupt processing. According to this configuration, when the advantageous period start signal is not being output, it is determined whether or not the advantageous period start condition is satisfied, and when the advantageous period start condition is satisfied, the advantageous period during flag is set to the RAM 41c. Since it is set to the predetermined area and is shifted to the advantageous zone, it is possible to ensure that the processing of shifting to the advantageous zone is performed in the state where the signal during the advantageous zone is not output.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to output a predetermined signal to the test device that performs the performance test of the slot machine 1, and the signal during the advantageous period is output to the test device, and the slot machine 1 This is a signal used for the performance test of. According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 performs the processing relating to the advantageous section while the signal during the advantageous section is being output to the test apparatus which performs the performance test, and the test apparatus which performs the performance test. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the main control unit 41 performs the process of shifting to the advantageous period in the state where the signal during the advantageous period is not output.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether the signal during the advantageous period is output based on whether or not the value of the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period as the test signal in the main process or the payout control process is the initial value. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not it is during the advantageous period by determining whether or not it is outputting, but whether or not during the advantageous period is determined by not the signal during the advantageous period as the test signal, but the call lamp or hall control. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section based on a signal output to an external device such as.

In the payout control process performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the advantageous section transition related processing relating to the transition of the advantageous section, and the bet number of three (first bet number). It is possible to perform a process for determining whether or not it is, the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period, it is determined that it is outside the advantageous period, and the bet number of three If it is determined that it has been set, it is determined that it is out of the advantageous zone because the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous zone while performing the processing related to the advantageous zone transition. When it is determined that the number of bets has not been set, the advantageous section transition related process is not performed. According to this configuration, when the bet number of three (first bet) is not set, the advantageous section transition related process is not performed, so that the bet number of three ( The first bet number) may be prompted to play the game.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control a plurality of game states including the special state (BB1, BB2), and is related to the transition of the advantageous section in the payout control process performed at the start of the game. It is possible to perform an advantageous period transition related process and a process of determining whether the game state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), and the initial value (0) is output to the output buffer of the advantageous period signal. When it is determined that it is set and is outside the advantageous zone, and when it is determined that the state is not controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the processing related to the transition to the advantageous zone is performed while the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous zone is output. Although it is determined that the initial value (0) is set and it is outside the advantageous zone, when it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) is controlled, the advantageous zone transition related processing is not performed. .. According to this configuration, when the game state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section transition related process is not performed, and therefore the special state (BB1, BB2) for the player or the like. You can encourage them to play the game outside of.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling a plurality of game states including the special state (BB1, BB2), and is related to the transition of the advantageous section in the payout control process performed at the start of the game. Advantageous section transition related processing, processing for determining whether the gaming state is controlled to a special state (BB1, BB2), determination for determining whether or not three bet numbers (first bet number) are set It is possible to perform processing, and when the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period and it is determined that it is outside the advantageous period, it is determined that the bet number of three is set. If it is determined that the control is not performed in the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous interval transition related processing is performed, and the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous interval signal, which is advantageous. If it is determined that it is out of the interval, but it is determined that it is controlled to a special state (BB1, BB2), or if it is determined that the bet number of three is not set, the advantageous interval transition related processing The configuration is not performed. According to this configuration, when the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), or when the bet number of three cards (first bet number) is not set, the advantageous section transition related process is performed. Since it is not played, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2) and the number of bets of three cards (first bet number).

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment includes stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated by a player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (stop order). It is possible to perform a navigation notification for informing, and in the payout control process performed at the start of the game, a process related to the navigation notification (a process for performing a navigation notification according to the payout state currently controlled, an ED transition). It is possible to perform updating of the game number counter, payout state processing for performing processing according to the payout state, etc., and processing for determining whether or not three bet numbers (first bet number) have been set. When it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period and the advantageous period is in effect, and it is determined that the bet number of three bets is set, the navigation notification is given. When it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period and the period is during the advantageous period while the process related to is performed, but it is determined that the bet number of three bets is not set. In this configuration, processing related to navigation notification is not performed. According to this configuration, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, so the number of bets of three (first number of bets) ) Can encourage you to play the game.

When the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special combination does not win, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment carries over the winning of the special combination to the next game or later. When the winning of the special part (BB1) that is the target of the internal lottery has been carried over on condition that the number of bets (the second number of bets) is set to two, the gaming state is set to RT1. Is provided with stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and notify the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to perform navigation notification, and in the payout control processing performed at the start of the game, processing related to navigation notification (processing for performing navigation notification according to the payout status currently being controlled, ED transition game number counter) It is possible to perform the process of determining whether or not the game state is controlled to RT1, and the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period. When it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is set in the advantageous interval and the gaming state is controlled to RT1, while performing the process related to the navigation notification, the advantageous interval is determined. When it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is set in the signal output buffer and the advantageous period is in effect, but the gaming state is not controlled by RT1, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed. The composition. According to this configuration, the specific gaming state in which the winning of the specific special combination (BB1) that is the target of the internal lottery is carried over on condition that the number of bets on the second bet (the second bet number) is set. If it is not controlled by RT1, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the player or the like can be prompted to play the game at RT1.

When the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special combination does not win, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment carries over the winning of the special combination to the next game or later. When the winning of the special winning combination (BB1), which is the target of the internal lottery, has been carried over under the condition that the number of bets on the second bet (second bet) has been set, the gaming state is Is provided with stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and notify the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to perform navigation notification, and in the payout control processing performed at the start of the game, processing related to navigation notification (processing for performing navigation notification according to the payout status currently being controlled, ED transition game number counter) Update, a payout state process for performing a process according to the payout state, etc., and a process for determining whether or not the gaming state is controlled at RT1, the number of bets of three (first bet number) is set. It is possible to perform a process of determining whether or not it is, and when the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period and it is determined that it is during the advantageous period, the gaming state becomes RT1. When it is determined that the bet number is controlled and the bet number of three cards is set, the process related to the navigation notification is performed, while the predetermined value (1) is output to the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period. If it is determined that it is set and is in an advantageous zone, if it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled to RT1, or if it is determined that the bet number of 3 is not set, the navigation notification is given. This is a configuration in which processing related to is not performed. According to this configuration, when the bet number of three (first bet) is not set, the target of the internal lottery is that the bet number of two (second bet) is set. If the winning of the specific special part (BB1) is not controlled by RT1 which is a specific game state in which the winning is carried over, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, and thus the player etc. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game with the bet number of three (first bet number) and RT1.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is provided with an ED transition game number counter that counts the number of ED transition games in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and increments the ED transition game number counter by 1 each time a game is played in the advantageous section. When the number of ED transition games updated and the number of ED transition games specified based on the ED transition game number counter reaches a predetermined number (fifth prescribed number), navigation notification control is performed for a period until the advantageous section ends. In the game in which it is determined that the bet number of three cards (first bet number) is set and the gaming state is controlled to RT1, In the game in which it is determined that the three bet number (first bet number) is not set while the process of updating the transition game number counter is performed, or the game state is determined not to be controlled to RT1 , ED transition game number is not updated. According to this configuration, the target of the internal lottery is the condition that the bet number of three (first bet) is not set or the bet number of two (second bet) is set. In a game that is not controlled by RT1 which is a specific game state in which the winning of the specific special role (BB1) is carried over, the transition to the ED state is reached by reaching a predetermined number of games (fifth prescribed number). Since the processing of updating the number of different ED transition games is not performed, it is possible to encourage the player or the like to play the game with the bet number of three (first bet number) and RT1.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can set the bet number to either three (first bet number) or two (second bet number) depending on the player's selection, and three bets can be set. The game can be executed both when the number of bets is set and when the bet number of two is set, and the main control unit 41 controls the game section to an advantageous section which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to count the number of games controlled by the advantageous section in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the net increase in the number of medals paid out after the advantageous section is started (payment during the advantageous section). Equipped with a net increase counter that counts the total number of medals that have been used to set the bet number from the total number of medals that have been issued) The section game number counter can be incremented by 1 and updated, and in the AT state management processing performed after the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the advantageous section game number counter is set to the initial value (0 ) Is a value other than ), the net increase counter is updated and the net increase counter is updated regardless of whether three bets or two bets are set. It is configured to determine whether or not the value of the net number-of-addition counter exceeds the second specified number, and when it is determined that the value exceeds the second specified number, control is performed to end the advantageous section. According to this configuration, the game is executed regardless of whether the bet number of three (first bet) is set or the bet number of two (second bet) is set by the player's selection. In the possible configuration, in the advantageous section, the medal number counter is updated regardless of whether the first bet number is set or the second bet number is set, and the medal number counter value becomes the second specified number. If the number of bets is set to 3 (first bet number) or two bets (second bet number) is selected, the net increase of medals in the advantageous period Since it is restricted so as not to increase excessively, it is possible to prevent the gambling property in the slot machine 1 from increasing.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can set the bet number to either three (first bet number) or two (second bet number) depending on the player's selection, and three bets can be set. The game can be executed both when the number of bets is set and when the bet number of two is set, and the main control unit 41 controls the game section to an advantageous section which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R that the player operates to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and an operation mode (stop order) of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R during the advantageous section. In the AT state management process performed after the rotations of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, it is possible to perform the navigation notification that notifies the navigation notification. It is possible to perform a payout state related process for performing a process related to a ball state) and a process for determining whether or not a bet number of three cards (first bet number) is set, and an advantageous section game When it is determined that the number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), and it is determined that the bet number of 3 is set, the process related to the navigation notification is performed, while the advantageous section game number counter Is determined to be a value other than the initial value (0), but when it is determined that the bet number of three is not set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed. According to this configuration, in a game in which the bet number of three cards (first bet number) is not set, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the bet number of three cards is not given to the player or the like. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game with (the first bet number).

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether the advantageous section game is in the advantageous section based on whether the advantageous section game number counter is the initial value (0) in the AT state management process. However, the determination as to whether or not it is in the advantageous zone is not limited to the determination as to whether or not the advantageous zone game number counter is the initial value (0), and for example, an advantageous zone indicating that the advantageous zone is in effect. The configuration may be determined based on the flag, the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period, or the like.

When the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special combination does not win, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment carries over the winning of the special combination to the next game or later. When the winning of the special winning combination (BB1), which is the target of the internal lottery, has been carried over under the condition that the number of bets on the second bet (second bet) has been set, the gaming state is set to RT1. It is possible to control the game section to an advantageous section which is advantageous for the player, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled. It is possible to perform the navigation notification for notifying the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R during the advantageous section, and the AT performed after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. In the state management process, it is determined whether or not the process related to the navigation notification (the process of shifting to the ED state, the payout state related process of performing the process related to the payout state, etc.) and the gaming state are controlled by RT1. When it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0) and the gaming state is controlled to RT1, the navigation notification is given. While performing related processing, when it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), but it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled to RT1, processing related to navigation notification The configuration is not performed. According to this configuration, the specific gaming state in which the winning of the specific special combination (BB1) that is the target of the internal lottery is carried over on condition that the number of bets on the second bet (the second bet number) is set. If it is not controlled by RT1, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the player or the like can be prompted to play the game at RT1.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment carries over the winning of the special role to the next game or later when the special role (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special role is not won. When the winning of the special winning combination (BB1), which is the target of the internal lottery, has been carried over under the condition that the number of bets on the second bet (second bet) has been set, the gaming state is set to RT1. It is possible to control the game section to an advantageous section which is advantageous for the player, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled. It is possible to perform the navigation notification for notifying the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R during the advantageous section, and the AT performed after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. In the state management process, it is determined whether or not the process related to the navigation notification (the process of shifting to the ED state, the payout state related process of performing the process related to the payout state, etc.) and the gaming state are controlled by RT1. It is possible to perform a process for determining whether or not a bet number of 3 is set, and when it is determined that the advantageous-zone game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), the game When it is determined that the state is controlled to RT1 and it is determined that the bet number of 3 is set, the process related to the navigation notification is performed, while the advantageous section game number counter is set to the initial value (0. If it is determined that the game state is not controlled to RT1, or if it is determined that the bet number of three bets is not set, a process related to navigation notification The configuration is not performed. According to this configuration, when the bet number of three (first bet) is not set, or when the bet number of two (second bet) is set, the target of the internal lottery is set. If the winning of the specific special role (BB1) is not controlled to RT1 which is the specific game state in which the winning is carried over, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, and thus the player etc. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game with the bet number of three (first bet number) and RT1.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the net increase in the number of medals paid out after the advantage section starts in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (used to set the bet number from the total number of medals paid out during the advantage section). Equipped with a net increase counter that counts the total number of medals that are obtained by subtracting the total number of medals that have been obtained, and updates the net increase counter each time a game is played in the advantageous zone, and specifies based on the net increase counter. When the net increase in the number of medals to be played exceeds the third specified number, it is possible to shift to the ED state in which the navigation notification control is performed for the period until the advantageous section ends, and the bet number of three (the In the game in which it is determined that the 1 bet number) is set and the gaming state is controlled to RT1, it is determined whether or not the value of the net additional number counter exceeds the third stipulated number. In a game in which it is determined that the bet number of three cards (first bet number) is not set, or in a game in which the gaming state is not controlled to RT1, the value of the net increase counter is the third specified number. The configuration is such that it is not determined whether or not it has exceeded. According to this configuration, when the bet number of three (first bet) is not set, the internal lottery is subject to the condition that the bet number of two (second bet) is set. If the winning of the specific special combination (BB1) is not controlled to RT1 which is the specific game state in which the winning is carried over, the number of net increase counter that will be shifted to the ED state by exceeding the third specified number Since it is not determined whether or not the value exceeds the third prescribed number, it is possible to encourage the player or the like to play the game with the bet number of three (first bet number) and RT1.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can set the number of bets to either three (first bet number) or two (second bet number) depending on the player's selection, and the main controller 41. In the game, if a special role (BB1, BB2) is won by an internal lottery and the special role does not win, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special role to the next game or later. Includes a specific special combination (BB1) that is the target of the internal lottery, provided that the number of bets for the second bet (the second bet) is three, and the number of the third bet (the first bet) is three. In the set game, the symbol combination in which a specific special combination (BB1) wins is controlled so that it cannot be derived to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R regardless of the winning result of the internal lottery. According to this configuration, in the game state where the winning of the specific special combination (BB1) has been carried over to RT1, the bet number of three (first bet number) is selected and the game is played, whereby the internal lottery is performed. Even if none of the winning combinations is won, the specific special winning combination (BB1) will not be won, and the gaming state can be maintained at RT1.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can set the number of bets to either three (first bet number) or two (second bet number) depending on the player's selection, and the main controller 41. Is capable of storing credits in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and is provided with a MAXBET switch 6 which is operated when the player sets the number of bets using the credits. This is a configuration in which the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted when the total number of credits and the number of bets for three cards can be set. According to this configuration, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the bet number of three, the player operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set the three bet number (first bet number). On the other hand, when the remaining number of credits is insufficient to set the bet number of three, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted, and only the two bet number (the second bet number) is set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated in such a situation that the number of bets is not set to two, it is possible to prevent the game from being played with the second number of bets as much as possible.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can set the number of bets to either three (first bet number) or two (second bet number) depending on the player's selection, and the main controller 41. Is a setting change state in which any one of the setting values (1 to 6) having different advantages for the player can be selected and set, and the currently set setting. It is possible to control the value to a setting confirmation state where it can be confirmed, and when the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special combination does not win, the special combination It is possible to carry over the winnings to the next game or later, and a special special role that is targeted for internal lottery, provided that the number of bets for the special role is set to 3 (first bet number). (BB2) and a specific special combination (BB1) that is a target of the internal lottery on condition that the bet number of two (the second bet) is set, the main control unit 41 includes two bets. When the winning of the special part (BB1) that is the target of the internal lottery has been carried over on condition that the bet number (second bet number) has been set, it suggests that the winning of the special part has been carried over. While displaying the status, the status display is displayed when the winning of the special winning combination (BB2) that is the target of the internal lottery has been carried over on condition that the number of bets (first bet) is set to three. After the status display is started without performing the status display, the status display is continued regardless of whether the setting change state is controlled or the setting confirmation state is controlled. According to this configuration, by displaying the status, the winning of the specific special combination (BB1) that is the target of the internal lottery is provided on the condition that the number of bets on the second bet (the second bet) is set. In addition to being notified of carry-over, once the status display is started, it continues even if it is controlled to the setting change status or setting confirmation status. Even in this case, it is possible to confirm that the winning of the specific special role (BB1) has been carried over.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when the winning of the special winning combination (BB1) that is the target of the internal lottery has been carried over, provided that the number of bets of two (the second number of bets) is set, It is possible to display a status indicating that the winning of the special role has been carried over, and the special lottery target subject to the internal lottery provided that the number of bets on the second bet (second bet) has been set. In the game in which the winning combination (BB1) has been won, the status display is started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is enabled, and when the special winning combination (BB1) is won in the game, the status display is ended. In the game, when the special combination (BB1) is not won, the state display is controlled to continue. According to this configuration, since the status display is started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, the presence or absence of the status display is confirmed before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Will be possible. Further, when the special combination (BB2) is won, the state display is ended in the game, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the state in which the special combination (BB2) has been won has ended.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a main process that is repeatedly executed for each game of one unit and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals to perform the process. In the internal lottery process executed in, it is determined whether or not the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery, and when it is determined that the special combination is won, the special combination (BB1, BB2) An internal winning flag indicating that the player has won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the LED dynamic display process executed in the timer interrupt process refers to the internal winning flag to identify a specific special character based on the internal winning flag ( BB1) determines whether or not the special winning combination (BB1) is elected, and outputs a control signal for turning on the status display LED 17 from a predetermined output port to determine the status. The display of the status is started by controlling the display LED 17 to the lighting state. According to this configuration, when the special combination (BB1) is won by the internal lottery, the status display is started immediately, so the time for confirming whether or not the status display is performed is set to the stop switches 8L, 8C. , 8R can be sufficiently secured before the operation becomes effective.

In the internal lottery process executed in the main process, when the main controller 41 of the present embodiment determines that the special winning combination (BB1, BB2) has been won, the special winning combination (BB1, BB2) wins. After setting the internal winning flag indicating that to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the interrupt BC time waiting process of waiting until the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times is performed, and then the reel rotation start process for starting the reel rotation and the reel rotation start process. The reel stop control process for performing the stop control is executed, and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the condition that the reel whose rotation is controlled in the reel stop control process is in the constant speed state is validated. Yes, after the internal winning flag is set in the internal lottery process, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is enabled after the timer interrupt process is performed once or more. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably start the status notification before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can control an AT that is advantageous to the player in the advantageous section, and when controlling the AT, the AT signal indicating that the AT is controlled is slotted. It is possible to output to the outside of the machine 1, and when the advantageous section is being controlled, by controlling the section display LED 19 to be in a lighting state, it is possible to perform a section display indicating that the advantageous section is controlled. It is a possible configuration, after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display is started when the AT control is started, and when the AT control is started, after the section display is started, The configuration is such that the AT signal is controlled to be output to the outside. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the external device, which has received the AT signal, from specifying that the advantageous section is controlled before the section display is started.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of outputting an operation information signal designating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the test apparatus, and when starting the control of the AT. In the payout control process, a predetermined value (1 indicating the ON state) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to be in a lighting state by the timer interrupt processing to indicate that the section is controlled to the advantageous section. After the section display is started, the operation information signal output process is performed in the main process to output the operation information signal to the test apparatus after the section display is started. According to this configuration, since the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started, it is possible to specify on the test device side that the operation mode is specified in the state where the section display is being performed. Becomes

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the AT to be advantageous to the player in the advantageous section, and is advantageous by controlling the section display LED 19 to be in a lighting state during the control to the advantageous section. It is possible to display a section indicating that the section is controlled and to output a signal during the advantageous section indicating that the section is controlled to the advantageous section to the test device. Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information about the advantageous section is performed, and when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section data initialization processing initializes the advantageous section related information including the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. Thus, after the signal during the advantageous section is controlled to the OFF state, the section display is ended. According to this configuration, the advantageous section related information is initialized, and the section display is ended after the signal during the advantageous section is turned off. It is possible to prevent it from ending, and the section display ends even though the signal during the advantageous section is being output to the test device because the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section is not initialized. It is possible to prevent it.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to perform an advantageous section data initialization process for initializing information about the advantageous section when the advantageous section is ended. In the processing at the end of the game in the main processing (Sb83 to Sb85), after the advantageous section related information is initialized, the OFF state is set to the advantageous section during signal output buffer. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the initial value (0) shown is set, and if it is determined that the OFF state is set, the signal during the advantageous section is controlled to the OFF state. According to this configuration, the advantageous period related information is initialized when the advantageous period ends, so that the advantageous period signal is turned OFF without individually setting the output buffer of the advantageous period signal to the OFF state. You can

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the predetermined period (1) indicating the ON state in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period, thereby testing the signal during the advantageous period indicating that the signal is controlled to the advantageous period. In the main processing, it is determined whether or not there is an advantage section at the end of the game based on the advantage section flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the main process. When the determination is made, a predetermined value (1) indicating the ON state is set to the output buffer for the advantageous period signal, and the signal during the advantageous period is output when the predetermined value is set in the output buffer for the advantageous period signal. It is a composition. According to this configuration, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section each time the game ends, and when it is determined that the advantageous section is in the active section, the ON state is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. However, it is possible to prevent the signal during the advantageous section from being turned off.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the section indicating that the section is controlled to the advantageous section by controlling the section display LED 19 to the lighting state while controlling the section to the advantageous section. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while displaying the section, the section display can be restarted when the power supply is started. If the section display is resumed on the main control unit 41 side when the power supply is started after the power supply to the section is stopped, it indicates that the section display is restored. The section display LED is lit while notifying that the liquid crystal display 51 can be used, and the sub-control unit 91 lights the section display LED for a certain period of time after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. The notification is made, and the notification during the lighting of the section display LED is ended after the lapse of the certain time. According to this configuration, when the section display returns to the state where the section display is being performed when the power supply is started, the section display LED lighting notification indicating that effect is given, so that when the amusement store is opened, etc. The clerk can be made aware that the section is being displayed. On the other hand, since the section display LED lighting notification is finished in a certain time, it is possible that the section display LED lighting notification is continued after the amusement store is opened, which gives a feeling of strangeness to the player or the like. It can be prevented.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the AT to be advantageous to the player in the advantageous section, and is advantageous by controlling the section display LED 19 to be in a lighting state during the control to the advantageous section. It is possible to display a section indicating that the section is controlled, and the sub control unit 91 stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 while the section display is being performed on the main control unit 41 side. After that, when the power supply is started over a specific time (in this embodiment, 4:00 am) outside the business hours of the amusement store and the section is displayed again, the section is displayed. While the section display LED lighting notification indicating that the section display has been restored is displayed using the liquid crystal display 51, power supply is started without crossing a specific time and the section is displayed again. In this case, the section display LED is not informed during lighting. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player or the like from feeling uncomfortable even if the power is interrupted temporarily during business hours.

In the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 includes an RTC and can specify the time when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the time when the power supply is started. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed on the 41st side, the power is supplied across a specific time (in this embodiment, 4:00 am) outside the business hours of the gaming shop. When starting and returning to the state where the section display is being performed on the side of the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to perform the notification while the section display LED is lit. When the section display is restored, the power to the slot machine 1 is calculated based on the time when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the time when the power supply is started. If the elapsed time from the time when the supply was stopped is within a certain time, the section display LED lighting is not notified, and if the elapsed time exceeds the certain time, the section display LED lighting is notified. It may be configured to perform. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player or the like from feeling uncomfortable even if the power is temporarily cut off during business hours.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment, after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed on the main control unit 41 side, a specific time outside the business hours of the amusement store (the present embodiment). In the example, when the power supply is started over 4 am and the section display is restored, the section display LED indicating that the section display is restored is lit. The notification is performed by using the liquid crystal display 51, and when the game is started in the state where the section display LED lighting notification is performed, the section display LED lighting notification is ended without waiting for a certain period of time. It is a composition. According to this configuration, it is possible to end the section display LED lighting notification by starting the game even when a certain time has not elapsed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment displays the section indicating that the section is controlled to the advantageous section by controlling the section display LED 19 to the lighting state only in the section after the AT starts in the advantageous section, and displays the section. After the power supply is stopped in the section before the start of the AT in which the power supply is not performed, it is possible to return to the state in which the power supply is started and the section display is not performed. After the power supply is stopped in the section before the start of the AT where the section is not displayed on the side, the section display LED is lit when the power supply starts and the section returns to the state where the section is not displayed. This is a configuration not performed. According to this configuration, only when the section is controlled to the advantageous section and the section is displayed again, the clerk of the gaming shop recognizes that the store will be opened in the section displayed. Can be made.

When the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the selected special combination does not win, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can carry over the winning of the special combination to the next game or later. It is possible to set any one of a plurality of kinds of setting values (1 to 6) having different advantages for the player when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. It is possible to perform the advantageous zone related information initialization process that initializes the information about the advantageous zone when the setting operation by the setting key switch or the initialization operation by the reset/setting switch is performed. The game is played in RT1 where the winning of the winning combination (BB1) has been carried over, so that the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate. Whether the setting key switch is operated in the ON state when the supply is started or the reset/setting switch is operated in the ON state While the related information is initialized and the advantageous section and the section display are ended, the information on the game state is not initialized and RT1 is maintained. According to this configuration, the advantageous section is ended and the section is displayed regardless of whether the power supply is started while the setting operation is performed or when the power supply is started while the initialization operation is performed. While the game state RT1 is maintained while it can be ended, it is not necessary to perform the work for setting the game state to RT1 every time the advantageous section and section display are ended.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control unit 41 that controls a game, a sub control unit 91 that controls an effect based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 41, a player reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated to stop, the main control unit 41, it is possible to send an internal winning command that can specify the winning result of the internal lottery, stop. It is a configuration capable of performing a navigation notification for instructing the operation mode of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the internal lottery target winning combination is set even when the bet number of three (first bet) is set. Even when the number of bets for two cards (the second number of bets) is set, the number of bets for three cards is set including a plurality of types of winning combinations including the multi-bell, the three-card combination, or the two bets are set. Regardless of whether or not the number of bets is set, either one of the multi-bells and the three-win role is won in the internal lottery, and the stop switches 8L, 8C in the stop order corresponding to the won multi-bell and the three-win role, When 8R is operated, the reel stop control is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in a stop order other than the corresponding stop order, and the internal lottery is performed. If any one of the multi-bell and the three-win role is won, it is possible to perform a navigation notification that notifies the stop order corresponding to the multi-bell and the three-win role that has been won, and the number of bets of three ( In the internal lottery regardless of whether the first bet number) is set or the two bet number (second bet number) is set In the internal lottery, it is possible to specify that a multi-bell or 3 winning combination has been won, but an internal winning command that can specify the group of winning combinations is sent so that the type of winning combination cannot be specified. This is the configuration. According to this configuration, even if the bet number of three (first bet) is set or the bet number of two (second bet) is set, a large number of bets in the internal lottery Both the bell and the three-card combination are subject to the lottery, and if any type of winning combination is won, the operation mode that is advantageous to the player will change depending on the type of winning combination. Whether 3 bets (1st bet) is set or 2 bets (2nd bet) is set, a multi-bell or 3 hand combination will be given in the internal lottery. Although it is possible to specify that the winning combination has been specified, an internal winning command that can specify the group of the winning combination is sent so that the type of the winning combination cannot be specified. It is possible to prevent the operation mode that is advantageous to the player from being specified from the internal winning command even when is set or when the bet number of two (the second bet number) is set.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the bet number of three (first bet number) when one of the multi-bell and the three-win role is won in the internal lottery in the advantageous section. If it is, the navigation mode can inform the operation mode (the correct answer stop order) corresponding to the winning multi-bell, the type of three-card combination, and the number of bets of two (the second number of bets) is set. When it is, the operation mode (stop order of correct answers) corresponding to the type of multi-bell and three-piece winning combination that has been won is not notified. According to this configuration, when the bet number of two (the second bet) is set, the navigation mode does not indicate the operation mode advantageous to the player. The number) can prompt you to play the game.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when the bet number of three (first bet) is set, or when the bet number of two (second bet) is set, It is possible to specify that the multi-bell or 3 winning combination was won in the internal lottery when either the multi-bell or 3 winning combination was won in the internal drawing, but the type of winning combination cannot be specified. It is a configuration that sends an internal winning command that can specify the group of the winning combination so that the internal winning command that cannot identify the type of the winning combination is created and sent by common group information setting processing Is. According to this configuration, both when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is set and when the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, the internal lottery is performed. When a multi-bell or triple win is won, an internal win command is created by the common group information setting process, so that the program capacity for creating the command can be reduced.

[Effect 4]
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a main process that is repeatedly executed for each game of one unit and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals to perform the process. It is possible to perform specific processing (processing by the game program) and special processing (processing by the non-gaming program) in, and set a timer value for one game time management for measuring the minimum time of one game in the timer interrupt processing. It is configured to perform a process of updating, a timer interrupt process may be executed during execution of a specific process (game program), and one game time management timer value is updated, while a special process (non During the execution of the game program), the timer interrupt process is not executed, and the one game time management timer value is not updated. According to this configuration, by updating the one-game-time management timer value as much as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, while the one-game-time period is the period during which special processing related to fraud detection is performed. By not updating the management timer value, the processing for updating the one-game-time management timer value and the special processing do not coexist.

In the main process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the one game time management timer value is a specific value (0) before the start of reel rotation in one game, and the one game time management is performed. If it is determined that the game timer value is not the specific value (0), the game is not allowed to proceed until the one game time management timer value is determined to be the specific value (0), and the one game time management is performed. When the game timer value is determined to be the specific value (0), the game proceeds. According to this configuration, the game is not allowed to proceed until it is determined that the minimum time has elapsed based on the one game time management timer value, and the game is allowed to proceed when the minimum time has elapsed. The minimum time can be secured.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the one game time management timer value is the specific value (0) in the main process, it prohibits execution of the timer interrupt process and manages one game time. This is a configuration in which an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) is set in the timer. According to this configuration, the timer interrupt process is prohibited when the initial value is set in the one game time management timer, so the one game time is set while the initial value is set in the one game time management timer. It is possible to prevent the management timer value from being updated.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is provided with a medal selector 29 having a medal receiving channel 29b for allowing medals inserted from the outside of the slot machine 1 to flow down and guiding the dropped medals to the inner hopper tank 34a. As a special process (non-gaming program), a medal sensor process for monitoring the passing state of medals flowing down the medal receiving channel 29b is executed. According to this configuration, during the period in which the medal sensor process for monitoring the passing status of the medals flowing down the medal receiving flow path 29b is being performed, the one game time management timer value is not updated, so that one game is played. The process of updating the timer value for time management and the medal sensor process related to fraud detection do not coexist.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets an error code when an abnormality is detected in the medal sensor process, determines whether or not the error code is set in the specific process (game program), and determines the error code. When it is determined that is set, the error processing is executed, and the timer interrupt processing can be executed during the execution of the error processing, and the one game time management timer value is updated. According to this configuration, the one game time management timer value is updated during the execution of the error processing, and thus the elapsed time of the minimum time is measured even during the error processing, and after the error processing is completed, it can be smoothly performed. You can play games.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to perform error processing when an error is detected. In the error processing, the reset operation is performed by the reset switch 23 while continuing the power supply to the slot machine 1. Thus, the power supply can be terminated without interruption. With this configuration, the game can be smoothly restarted even if error processing is performed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control to a special state (BB1, BB2) that is advantageous to the player, and is given in a special state for the total cumulative payout number of medals given to the player. Of the total cumulative payout number of medals given to the player, of the cumulative payout ratio of the medals given to the player, to the total cumulative payout number of medals given to the player The gaming machine information display device 50 for displaying the ratio of continuous character is displayed, and as a special process (non-gaming program), the character payout ratio, the total accumulated payout number which is data for calculating the continuous character ratio, This is a configuration capable of executing data processing for role ratio monitoring, which updates the total cumulative number of bonus payouts and the total cumulative number of consecutive bonus payouts. According to this configuration, the one game time management timer value is not updated during the period in which the ratio ratio monitor data processing for updating the data for calculating the character payout ratio and the continuous character ratio is performed. Thus, the processing for updating the timer value for one gaming time management and the data processing for role ratio monitoring related to the performance display of the gaming machine do not coexist.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not it is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2) in the data processing for role ratio monitor, and when it is determined that the special state is controlled, the game is played. It is determined whether the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to a player has reached the upper limit, and if it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the total cumulative combination If it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached without performing the processing for updating the number of paid-out articles and the total number of consecutively-acquired accessory payments, the total number of paid-out accessory pieces and the total-cumulative continuous accessory payout quantity are updated. This is a configuration for performing processing. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the total cumulative bonus payout number and the total cumulative continuous bonus payout number from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total number of medals given to the player cannot be updated.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of performing a navigation notification for instructing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and in the gaming machine information display 50, the accessory payout ratio, the continuous accessory payout. In addition to the ratio, the total cumulative payout number of coins to the total cumulative payout number, which is the total number of medals awarded to the player, the total cumulative continuous accessory payout number, and the navigation mode informs the operation mode that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to display the commanded accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of coins paid out when the navigation notification is given, which is the number of paid out medals given by In the data processing, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals given to the player has reached the upper limit value, and if it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached. If it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached without performing the processing for updating the cumulative instruction instructed accessory payout number, it determines whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) is controlled, and If it is determined that the state is controlled, a process for updating the cumulative instruction instructed accessory payout number is performed, and if it is determined that the state is not controlled to the special state, an operation advantageous for the player by the navigation notification It is configured to determine whether or not a mode has been instructed, and when it is determined by the navigation notification that an operation mode that is advantageous to the player has been instructed, a process for updating the cumulative instruction instructed accessory payout number is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the total designated payout number payout number from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number given to the player cannot be updated.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a configuration capable of executing an operation information signal output process for outputting a stop execution position signal to a test device that tests the slot machine 1 as a special process (non-gaming program). .. According to this configuration, during the period in which the operation information signal output process of outputting the test signal to the test device that tests the slot machine 1 is being performed, the one gaming time management timer value is not updated. Therefore, the processing for updating the timer value for one game time management and the operation information signal output processing related to the test of the slot machine 1 do not coexist.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of performing a navigation notification instructing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and in the operation information signal output processing, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. When it is determined that the navigation notification is performed, the process of outputting the stop execution position signal that specifies the operation mode instructed is performed, and the navigation notification is performed. When it is determined not to be performed, the winning number indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is referred to, and the process of outputting the stop execution position signal designating the operation mode corresponding to the winning number is performed. According to this configuration, when it is determined that the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is instructed, the process of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery can be omitted, and thus the stop execution position signal that specifies the operation mode can be omitted. The process for outputting can be simplified.

In the timer interrupt process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs a counter update process of updating a plurality of timer values used in a specific process (game program) including a game time management timer value, and a special process (non-operation). It is configured to separately perform the time monitoring update process of updating the timer value used in the game program). According to this configuration, the time monitoring update process for updating the timer value used by the special process does not coexist with the counter update process for updating the timer value used by the specific process.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can output a test signal capable of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery to the test device, and the one game time management timer value is determined to be the specific value (0). In this case, the minimum time is started by setting the initial value to the one game time management timer value, and a test signal is output when the one game time management timer value is set to the initial value. It is a configuration. According to this configuration, the test signal is output when the initial value is set in the one game time management timer value, so that by specifying the time interval at which the test signal is output, 1 It is possible to specify whether the minimum game time is secured.

[Function and effect 5]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can set any bet number from a plurality of bet numbers including three or two depending on the player's selection, and the bet number of three bets can be set. At RT2 (inside of BB2) where the winning of BB2 to be decided is carried over on the condition that it is set, the payout rate of medals is not appropriate and two bets are set. Under this condition, the payout rate of medals is set to be appropriate in RT1 (inside BB1) where the winning of BB1 to be determined has been carried over.

It should be noted that an appropriate payout rate of medals at RT1 means that at RT1 (inside of BB1), medals are paid out more than at RT0 (inside of BB2) or RT0 (inside of BB2) where the winning of BB1 has not been carried over. In the configuration in which the payout rate is high, benefits such as an advantageous section and transition to the AT state can be granted in RT1 (inside BB2), whereas RT0 (inside not inside) and RT2 (inside BB2) Then, a configuration in which the privilege is not granted, and a configuration in which the privilege is granted in RT1 (inside BB1) and RT2 (inside BB2) and RT2 (inside BB2) are included.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can perform a status display in which the status display LED 17 is turned on, and the sub control unit 91 displays a white navigation image on the liquid crystal display 51. Can be executed, and when BB1 is won at RT0 (non-internal), the main control unit 41 displays a state, the sub-control unit 91 executes a specific effect, and BB2 at RT0 (non-internal). When is elected, the main control unit 41 does not display the state and the sub control unit 92 does not execute the specific effect. With such a configuration, when BB1 is won at RT0 (non-inside), a state display is performed and a specific effect is executed, which suggests that BB1 is won. While it is possible to encourage the player to shift to RT1 (inside of BB1) where the payout rate is appropriate, when BB2 is elected at RT0 (inside of BB1), the state display is not performed and the specific effect is executed. Therefore, even if BB2 wins, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that BB1 wins.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect is an effect that can be executed even when the determination result of the internal lottery is lost in RT1 (inside the BB1). With such a configuration, the specific effect not only suggests that BB1 has won at RT0 (non-internal), but also causes the internal lottery decision result to be lost at RT1 (internal of BB1). Since it is also used as an effect that suggests that it is possible, waste of the effect can be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect is RT1 (inside of BB1), which is the effect that can be executed even when the result of the internal lottery is a loss, but the specific effect and RT1 (inside of BB1). The same effect can be obtained as long as it has a configuration that is common to the effects that can be executed in, for example, even if the specific effect is an effect in which the result of the internal lottery suggests a re-play role or a small role. good.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub control unit 91 wins BB1 at RT0 (non-internal), the specific effect is started at the timing when the game start operation is performed, and when the BB1 does not win. Continues the specific effect after the stop operation (final stop operation) of the reel to be stopped last, while ending the specific effect at the timing based on the final stop operation when BB1 is won. It is a configuration that allows it. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm whether or not RT1 (inside BB1) is reached depending on whether or not the specific effect continues even after the final stop operation is performed. The timing based on the final stop operation is the timing when the final stop operation is performed, the timing when the last stop operation is performed, the timing when the corresponding reel is stopped, the final stop operation is performed, and the operation is released. Including timing.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes a special effect different from the normal effect at RT0 (inside of BB1) by the liquid crystal display 51 in BB2 which is changed by the winning of BB2 and BB1 which is changed by the winning of BB1. The composition. With such a configuration, in the special state after winning BB1 or BB2, the special effect different from the normal effect at RT0 (non-inside) is performed by the liquid crystal display 51, so that RT1 (inside of BB1) Since it is suggested that it is not RT0 (non-inside) that is the premise for moving to RT), RT1 (inside BB1) is set to RT0 (non-inside), and the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate. Can be encouraged to move to (inside).

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 is configured to execute a special effect different from the normal effect at RT0 (non-inside), but an effect device other than the liquid crystal display 51, for example, a lighting mode of an LED. The configuration may be such that it is controlled in a special mode different from the normal effect, or the output mode of the sound effect is controlled in a special mode different from the normal effect. Even in such a structure, the process shifts to RT1 (inside BB1). It is suggested that it is not RT0 (non-internal inside) which is a prerequisite for making it, so it is shifted to RT0 (non-internal inside), and the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate RT1 (inside of BB1 inside) ) Can be encouraged.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment may be configured to execute a special effect different from the normal effect at RT0 (not inside) by the liquid crystal display 51 even at RT2 (inside BB2). With this configuration, the special effect different from the normal effect at RT0 (non-inside) is performed by the liquid crystal display 51 also at RT2, which is a premise for transition to RT1 (inside BB1). Since it is suggested that it is not (non-internal), it is recommended to shift to RT0 (non-internal), and further to RT1 (inside BB1) where the payout rate of medals is appropriate. it can.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is based on a reel stop operation (final stop operation) that is finally stopped in a game in which a winning of BB2 occurs when BB2 wins and shifts to BB2. This is a configuration for executing a special effect with. With such a configuration, the special effect is executed at the timing based on the final stop operation that triggers the winning of BB2. Therefore, BB2 wins and the game shifts to BB2. Can be clearly recognized. The timing based on the final stop operation is the timing when the final stop operation is performed, the timing when the last stop operation is performed, the timing when the corresponding reel is stopped, the final stop operation is performed, and the operation is released. Including timing.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is based on the operation of the stop operation (final stop operation) of the reel that is stopped last in the game in which BB1 wins when BB1 wins and shifts to BB1. It is a configuration for executing a special effect. With such a configuration, since the special effect is executed at the timing based on the final stop operation that triggers the winning of BB1, it is clear that BB1 has won and moved to BB1. Can be recognized. The timing based on the final stop operation is the timing when the final stop operation is performed, the timing when the last stop operation is performed, the timing when the corresponding reel is stopped, the final stop operation is performed, and the operation is released. Including timing.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment carries over the winning of BB1 or BB2 when the set value is set in RT2 (inside the inside of BB2), BB2 transferred by winning of BB2 and BB1 transferred by winning of BB1. When the set value is set in RT1 (inside of BB1), the RT1 (inside of BB1) is maintained. With such a configuration, even if the transition to RT2 (inside BB2), BB2, or BB1 occurs, the transition to RT1 (inside BB1) is performed by resetting the setting value. Since it is possible to shift to RT0 (non-inside) which is a prerequisite for this, the work to shift to RT1 (inside BB1) where the payout rate of medals is appropriate becomes easy. Further, in RT1 (inside BB1), RT1 (inside BB1) is maintained even if the set value is set. Therefore, after moving to RT1 (inside BB1), set the set value. Again, the work for shifting to RT1 (inside the inside of BB1) is unnecessary.

[Operation effect 6]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can control in an advantageous section advantageous for the player, the point value is updated in the advantageous section, and the sub control unit 91 updates points in the advantageous section. The configuration is such that the value is notified and the point value is started to be notified in the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section. With such a configuration, in the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, since the notification of the point value updated during the advantageous section is started, it is more advantageous to start the notification of the point value. It can be suggested to move to an interval.

In the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, in the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the initial value according to the determination result of the internal lottery that triggered the decision to shift to the advantageous section is the point value. The configuration is set as. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the point value at the time when the notification is started according to the determination result of the internal lottery that triggered the shift to the advantageous section.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in which the sub-control unit 91 has decided to shift to the advantageous section, the point value notification is not started at the timing when the game start operation is performed, and is stopped at the end. In this configuration, the point value notification is started at a timing based on the reel stop operation (final stop operation). With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the shift to the advantageous section until the final stop operation is performed. The timing based on the final stop operation is the timing when the final stop operation is performed, the timing when the last stop operation is performed, the timing when the corresponding reel is stopped, the final stop operation is performed, and the operation is released. Including timing.

[Operation effect 7]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls an advantageous section in which the player can control the AT state, which is advantageous for the player, and after controlling the AT state in the advantageous section, the ED transition condition is satisfied. The first ED transition condition and the AT state, which are satisfied when the net addition number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third specified number (2250 in this embodiment) as the ED transition condition. The second ED that can be established based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals (predicted net increase based on the number of navigation stocks) in the situation where the net increase in medals after being controlled by This is a configuration including transition conditions. With such a configuration, not only the net number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and then controlled to the AT state exceeds the third prescribed number, but also to the medals after being controlled to the AT state. Even if the net increase in the number of coins is less than or equal to the third prescribed number, the condition may be controlled to the ED state when the condition based on the predicted net increase is satisfied, so the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state Can be expected to be controlled to the ED state even in the situation where the number is less than the third specified number.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to execute the ED start effect that suggests the transition to the ED state, and even when the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled, the second ED transition condition is set. When ED is established and the ED state is controlled, the common ED start effect is executed. With such a configuration, the common ED start effect is obtained regardless of whether the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled, or when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled. Is executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the ED state is controlled.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an ED start effect that suggests a transition to the ED state, and the second ED transition condition is a condition based on the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and This is a condition that can be satisfied by satisfying both of the conditions based on the predicted net additional number (predicted net additional number based on the navigation stock number), and the sub-control unit 91 is a condition based on the net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state. Even if the second ED transition condition is satisfied by satisfying the condition based on the predicted net increase number after the above condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled, the AT state is controlled after satisfying the condition based on the predicted net increase number. Even when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled by satisfying the condition based on the net increase in the number of medals from, the common ED start effect is executed. With such a configuration, after the condition based on the net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is satisfied, the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is established by satisfying the condition based on the predicted net additional number. Even when controlled, the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled by satisfying the condition based on the net number increase of medals after being controlled to the AT state after satisfying the condition based on the predicted net number increase. In this case, since the common ED start effect is executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the ED state has been controlled.

In the present embodiment, the total value of the net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net additional number (predicted net additional number based on the number of navigation stocks) exceeds the third prescribed number (2250 in the present example). Thus, the second ED transition condition can be satisfied. With such a configuration, in a situation in which the number of medals added after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third prescribed number, the net number of medals added after being controlled to the AT state and the estimated net number of added medals are Since the ED state is controlled when the total value exceeds the third prescribed number, the AT is controlled by the ED state when the net number of medals added after the AT state is controlled is the third prescribed number or less. It is possible to recognize that the net number of medals added after the state is controlled exceeds the third specified number.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a second prescribed number (2394 in the present embodiment) in which the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is larger than the third prescribed number (2250 in the present embodiment). It is to end the advantageous section by exceeding, and the total value of the net additional number of medals after the AT state is controlled and the predicted net additional number (predicted net additional number based on the number of navigation stocks) is the second prescribed number. The configuration is such that the second ED transition condition can be satisfied when the condition is exceeded. With such a configuration, in a situation in which the number of medals added after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third prescribed number, the net number of medals added after being controlled to the AT state and the estimated net number of added medals are Since the ED state is controlled when the total value exceeds the second prescribed number, the AT is controlled by the ED state when the net number of medals added after the AT state is controlled is the third prescribed number or less. It is possible to recognize that the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the state exceeds the second specified number which is the condition for ending the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the total value of the net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net additional number (predicted net additional number based on the number of navigation stocks) exceeds the third prescribed number (2250 in the present example). The second ED transition condition can be established when the net number of medals added after the AT state is controlled exceeds the fourth prescribed number (1700 in this embodiment), which is smaller than the third prescribed number. .. With such a configuration, even when the total value of the net additional number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net additional number exceeds the third specified number, the medals after being controlled to the AT state are The ED state is not controlled until the number of net added sheets exceeds the fourth prescribed number, which is less than the third prescribed number, so it is prevented from being controlled to the ED state at an early stage after being controlled to the AT state. it can.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls to the ED state after the first ED transition condition (first specific condition) is satisfied after controlling to the AT state, whether or not the second ED transition condition is satisfied. If the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled after the control is performed in the AT state without performing the above determination, it is not configured to determine whether the first ED transition condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, whether one of the first ED transition condition and the second ED transition condition is satisfied after the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled. Since the determination is not performed, the control after being controlled to the ED state can be simplified.

After the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the AT state, the main control unit 41 controls the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the superimposition state. It is a configuration for determining whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game. With such a configuration, whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game regardless of which state is controlled after the AT state is controlled until the ED state is controlled. Therefore, the control for shifting to the ED state can be simplified.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to execute the ED start effect that suggests a transition to the ED state using the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51. With such a configuration, transition to the ED state is suggested using the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51, so that it is clearly recognized that the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled. be able to.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes an ED start effect suggesting a transition to the ED state when a start operation of the game is performed in a game subsequent to the game following the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied. Is. With such a configuration, since the ED start effect is executed at the time of starting the game, it is possible to focus on the effect at the time of starting the game, and the effect after the game is started is not affected. The number of patterns can be suppressed.

In the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment does not execute the effect suggesting that the ED transition condition is satisfied, but executes the effect corresponding to the game. With such a configuration, even in a game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied, not an effect that suggests that the ED transition condition is satisfied, but an effect corresponding to the game is executed. Unexpectedness can be enhanced by the start production.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment can execute the navigation effect that suggests the determination result of the internal lottery, the specific winning combination suggestion effect (A). In the game that executes the ED start effect, the sub control unit 91 navigates the ED start effect. This is a configuration that is executed with priority over the effect and the specific combination winning suggestion effect (A). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the unexpectedness due to the ED start effect from fading due to the navigation effect or the specific combination winning suggestion effect (A).

[Effect 8]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section that can be controlled in the AT state advantageous to the player, and after controlling the AT state in the advantageous section, the ED transition condition is satisfied. It is possible to control to the ED state by, and after controlling to the AT state, it is possible to control to plural kinds of states until the ED transition condition is satisfied, and after controlling to the AT state, the ED transition condition is satisfied. After that, the configuration is controlled only in the ED state. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, it is possible to control to a plurality of kinds of states until the ED transition condition is satisfied, so that the game property is changed before the ED transition condition is satisfied. On the other hand, after the ED transition condition is satisfied, only the ED state is controlled, so that stable game play can be achieved after the ED transition condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of states other than the ED state, 100% of navigation notifications inform the operation mode for winning the three-combination winning combination and the three-combination winning combination and the winning combination of the multiple-pressing winning combination. The AT1 state is performed at a rate of 1, and the AT2 state and the additional state at which navigation notification is performed at a rate of 50% are included. With such a configuration, after the AT state is controlled, until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the navigation notification is performed at a rate of 100% and the navigation notification is performed at a rate of 50%. By being controllable to a plurality of states including the AT2 state, the amount of medals to be awarded can be changed before the ED transition condition is established.

In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of states other than the ED state, navigation notification is performed to notify the operation mode for winning the three-combination winning combination and the multiple-combination winning combination when winning the three-combination winning combination and the multiple-pressing combination combination. The configuration may include a first state (notification state) and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed. With such a configuration, the ED transition condition is satisfied after being controlled to the AT state. Up to and including the first state in which the navigation notification is performed and the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, it is possible to control to a plurality of states. It is possible to change the amount of medals and to greatly change the amount of medals awarded in the first state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, after controlling to the AT state, it is possible to execute the navigation stock lottery for extending the period for controlling the AT state, and to execute the navigation stock lottery with a low probability as a plurality of types other than the ED state. This is a configuration including possible AT1 and AT2 states and an additional state in which navigation stock lottery can be executed with high probability. With such a configuration, after the AT state is controlled, until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the navigation stock lottery can be executed with a low probability at the AT1 state and the AT2 state, and the navigation stock lottery can be performed with a high probability. By being controllable to a plurality of states including the executable addition state, it is possible to change the period during which the AT state is controlled before the ED transition condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, after controlling to the AT state, it is possible to execute the navigation stock lottery for extending the period of controlling the AT state, and as the plural kinds of states other than the ED state, the navigation stock lottery can be executed. The configuration may include one state and a second state in which the navigation stock lottery cannot be executed. With such a configuration, the navigation state is controlled until the ED transition condition is satisfied after the AT state is controlled. By being able to control to a plurality of states including the first state in which stock lottery can be executed and the second state in which navigation stock lottery cannot be executed, the AT state is controlled before the ED transition condition is established. Can vary over a period of time.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls to the ED state after the ED transition condition is satisfied, regardless of which state of the plurality of types other than the ED state is controlled after controlling the AT state. Is. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, the ED state is controlled by satisfying the ED transition condition regardless of the control state other than the ED state. The process related to the transition to the state can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state is the highest in the AT1 state among the plurality of types other than the ED state. It is less than the average net increase. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state and being controlled to the ED state by satisfying the ED transition condition, the average net increase in the number of medals per game is the most among the states up to that point. Since the number is smaller than the average net increase in the number of medals in one game in the AT1 state, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling even if the ED transition condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the net increase in the number of medals that can be expected in the ED state is larger than the minimum net increase in the medals that can be expected in a plurality of types of states other than the ED state and in the state in which medals increase. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of being controlled to the ED state.

In this embodiment, the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state is different from the average net increase in the number of medals per game in any one of a plurality of types other than the ED state. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an appropriate increase amount of medals in the ED state.

In the present embodiment, the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state may be the same as the average net increase in the number of medals per game in any of a plurality of types other than the ED state. Of course, with such a configuration, control of the ED state and control of any of the states up to that point can be made common.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes an ED start effect that suggests a transition to the ED state, and after being controlled to the AT state, in any of a plurality of types of states other than the ED state. Even when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled, the common ED start effect is executed. With such a configuration, since the common ED start effect is executed regardless of the state when the ED transition condition is satisfied after being controlled to the AT state, the ED state is controlled. It is possible to make people recognize things in an easy-to-understand manner.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes a result notification effect of notifying the result of the AT state at the end of the ED state, and after being controlled to the AT state, among the plurality of types of states other than the ED state. In any of the states, the common result notification effect is executed when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled. With such a configuration, the common result notification effect is executed at the end of the ED state regardless of which state is when the ED transition condition is satisfied after being controlled to the AT state. , It is possible to easily recognize that the ED state has ended.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes the navigation effect that suggests the decision result of the internal lottery and the specific winning combination suggesting effects (A) and (B), while the ED state effect unique to the ED state in the ED state. In the ED state, the ratio of executing the navigation effect and the specific combination winning suggestion effects (A) and (B) is lower in the ED state than in a plurality of types of states other than the ED state. With such a configuration, in the ED state, the ratio of the navigation effect and the specific winning combination suggesting effects (A) and (B) being executed is lower than in the states other than the ED state, so attention is paid to the ED state effect. Can be made.

In the ED state, the sub-control unit 92 of the present embodiment is configured to limit the execution of the specific winning combination suggestion effect (B) that switches the display of the liquid crystal display 51 among the effects that suggest the result of the internal lottery. With such a configuration, in the ED state, the execution of the specific winning combination suggestion effect (B) for switching the display of the liquid crystal display 51 is restricted, so that the ED state effect can be focused.

In the ED state, the sub control unit 91 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of suggesting the set value currently set by the pattern of the ED effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of being controlled to the ED state.

[Operation effect 9]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of AT-related display units that are controlled to be turned on or off by turning on or off the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e by the sub-control unit 91, and the ED state. In the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state other than the above, all the AT related display parts are not turned on at the same time, and in the ED state, all the AT related display parts are turned on. With such a configuration, in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the addition state other than the ED state, not all of the AT related display parts are in the lighting mode at the same time, and in the ED state, all of the AT related display parts are Since it is in the lighting mode, it becomes easy to understand that the ED state is controlled.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes an AT1 status display section 63 corresponding to the AT1 status among the plurality of types of status other than the ED status, and an AT2 status display section 62 corresponding to the AT2 status. In the AT1 state, the AT1 state display unit 63 is in a lighting mode, the AT2 state display unit 62 is not in a lighting mode, and the AT1 state display unit 63 is not in a lighting mode in the AT2 state, and the AT2 state display unit 62 is in a lighting mode. Is. With such a configuration, the AT1 state display unit 63 can be used as a light emitting unit that notifies the AT1 state until the transition to the ED state, and the AT2 state display unit 62 can be used as a light emitting unit that notifies the AT2 state. It can be used, and after shifting to the ED state, the AT1 state display portion 63 and the AT2 state display portion 62 can be used as a light emitting portion for notifying the ED state. In particular, the ED state is a state in which the frequency of transition is lower than that of the AT1 state and the AT2 state, and it is notified that the ED state is controlled without providing a dedicated display section for such a state. It becomes possible.

When the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT1 state and the ED state is entered, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment sets the AT2 state display unit 62 to the lit state while keeping the AT1 state display unit 63 in the lit state. , When the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT2 state and the ED state is entered, the AT1 state display section 63 is turned on while the AT2 state display section 62 is kept on. With such a configuration, when the ED state is controlled, only the light emitting units (AT2 state display unit 62, CZ display unit 64, additional loading state display unit 65 in the AT1 state) that are not in the lighting mode are turned on. Since it suffices to do so, control becomes easy.

When the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT1 state and the ED state is entered, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment sets the AT1 state display unit 63 to the extinguished state, and then the AT1 state display unit 63 and the AT2 state display. When the section 62 is turned on and the AD transition condition is satisfied in the AT2 state to shift to the ED state, the AT2 state display section 62 is turned off and then the AT1 state display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 are turned on. The lighting mode may be changed to a lighting mode. With such a structure, when the ED state is controlled, the light emitting unit that has been in the lighting mode is temporarily turned off according to the state, and then the AT1 state display unit is displayed. Since the 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 are in the lighting mode, it is easy to understand that the ED state has been entered.

When the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT1 state and the ED state is entered, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment sets the AT1 state display unit 63 to the extinguished state, and then the AT1 state display unit 63 and the AT2 state display. When the section 62 is turned on and the ED shift condition is satisfied in the AT2 state to shift to the ED state, the AT2 state display section 62 is turned off and then the AT1 state display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 are turned on. In the lighting mode configuration, the AT1 status display unit 63 and the AT2 status display unit 62 may be configured to be in the lighting mode through the blinking mode before being set in the lighting mode. With such a configuration, the ED state is set. In the case of controlling, the light emitting unit which has been in the lighting state according to the state is once set to the extinguished state, and then the AT1 state display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 are set to the lighting state through the blinking mode when the lighting mode is set. Therefore, the transition to the ED state becomes easier to understand.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the AT-related display unit includes an AT display unit 61 that is in a lighting mode in both the AT1 state and the AT2 state. With such a configuration, in the ED state, regardless of whether it is in the AT1 state or the AT2 state, the AT display portion 61, which is in the lighting mode, is in the lighting mode, so that the ED state is controlled. It becomes easier to understand.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the AT display section 61, the AT2 status display section 62, and the AT1 status display section 63 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the CZ display section 64 and the addition status display section 65 are It is arranged on the right side of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. With such a configuration, the AT display portion 61, the AT2 state display portion 62, the AT1 state display portion 63, the CZ display portion 64, and the loading state display portion 65 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that are easily noticed during the game. Since it is arranged on the left and right sides, it becomes easy to understand that the ED state is controlled.

[Operation effect 10]
The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a continuous effect over a plurality of games in the AT state, and is configured to limit control according to the ED state during execution of the continuous effect. With such a configuration, the control related to the ED state is limited during the execution of the continuous production over a plurality of games, so that the interest of the continuous production can be prevented from being spoiled by the control related to the ED state.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to start the control of the ED state after the end of the continuous effect when the ED transition condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous effect. With such a configuration, when the ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous effect, the control of the ED state is started after the end of the continuous effect. It is possible to prevent the interest from being spoiled.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment may be configured not to determine whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied in the production execution state in which the continuous production is executed. With such a configuration, In the period in which the start of the ED state is limited, unnecessary judgment is not required.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment executes an ED start effect that suggests a transition to the ED state, and when the ED transition condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous effect and the ED state is controlled, The configuration may be such that the ED start effect is executed after the end of the continuous effect. With such a configuration, when the ED transition condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous effect and the ED state is controlled, Since the ED start effect is performed after the end of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is not interrupted even if the ED state starts, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous effect from being spoiled.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment may be configured to change the content of the continuous effect when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled during execution of the continuous effect, and such a configuration is adopted. Thus, the transition to the ED state can be suggested by the continuous effect being executed.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment may be configured not to execute the continuous effect if the ED transition condition can be satisfied during execution of the continuous effect when the continuous effect is executed. By doing so, when the ED transition condition can be satisfied during the execution of the continuous production, the continuous production is not executed, so that the interest of the continuous production is prevented from being spoiled by the start of the ED state. it can.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to perform a process of outputting a test signal in the timer interrupt process before updating the one game time management timer value. According to this configuration, since the one game time management timer value is started to be updated after the output of the test signal is started, the time interval at which the test signal is output is surely set to the minimum time of one game or more. be able to.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any modification or addition within the scope of the present invention is included in the present invention. Needless to say.

In the above embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine in which the bet number is set by using the medal and the credit as the game value is explained, but the slot in which the bet number is set by using the game ball as the game value It may be applied to a machine or a full credit type slot machine in which a bet amount is set by using only credit as a gaming value. When the game balls are used as the game value, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls, and when the bet number is set to 3 in the above-described embodiment, 15 game balls are used. It is equivalent to setting the bet number using.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of any one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of gaming value such as medals and gaming balls. May be That is, it is possible to set the bet number and play the game by using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls due to the occurrence of a prize. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out any of the value.

1 slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 start switch 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch 51 liquid crystal display 41 main control unit 91 sub control unit

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variably display multiple types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
In a slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Predetermination means for deciding whether or not to allow a winning,
Advantageous section control means for controlling an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player,
Specific information notifying means for notifying specific information updated in the advantageous section,
Equipped with
The specific information notification means starts notification of the specific information in a game in which it has been decided to shift to the advantageous section,
In the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone, initial information according to the determination result of the pre-determination means that has triggered the decision to shift to the advantageous zone is set as the specific information. , Slot machines.

Images